Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fin Forum due Tuesday Discuss the relationship between bond prices and interest rates. What impact do changing interest rates have on the price of long-term bonds versus short-term bonds? Quiz due Saturday Bus Forum due Tuesday Identify one global marketing strategy and using a specific organization as an example, identify how they successfully implemented the strategy to market globally. Bus assignment due Saturday Create a global human resource strategy to recruit, select, and train an expatriate for a position of your choice.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Find a company that has been in the news recently. Using the material that you read in Appendix B of “The business guide to legal literacy: what every manager should know about the law” write a 200 – 300 word essay where you identify at least two legal issues that affect the company. Clearly list each legal topic that you are discussing. Incorporate the required readings and support your statements. Citations for all material used should be in APA format. Post your essay in this discussions thread. You do not need a title page. Please do not use attachments in the discussions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
2013 2012 1000000 1200000 450000 600000 550000 600000 600000 450000 -50000 150000 2013 2012 380000 376000 -20000 -16000 360000 360000 480000 440000 3400000 3080000 1600000 1440000 780000 680000 Problem 1 Problem 2 Sales Cost of goods sold Gross margin Operating expenses Net income % Sales Comments (25 points) Accounts receivable Inventory Allowance for doubtful accounts Net accounts receivable Required: Compute (1) accounts receivable turnover for 2013, (2) the inventory turnover for 2013, and (3) the net margin for 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
120000 148000 124000 24000 310000 -46000 306000 0 0 0 0 0 Problem 1 Problem 2 (25 points) Beginning inventory, raw materials Purchases of raw materials Plus: Purchases of raw materials Raw materials available for use Less: Ending raw materials inventory Cost of direct raw materials used Manufacturing overhead Total manufacturing costs Total work in process Cost of goods manufactured Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured Break-even point in units Fixed Costs Break-even point in dollars Break-even point in units * selling price Required: JZ is a musician who is conside
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
100000 -50000 50000 25000 30000 5000 8000 11000 9000 4500 4 4 36000 18000 Problem 1 Problem 2 Direct or Indirect? (20 points) (30 points) Salary of manufacturing supervisor Wages of manufacturing worker Telephone costs Rent Material used in production Old Machine Original cost Accumulated depreciation Market value (now) Book value Salvage value (in 5 years) Annual depreciation expense Times number of years New machine Required: GH Company is trying to decide whether to replace a current piece of machinery with a new machine.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Unit 5 Assignment includes the following textbook problems:
Exercise 14-56 found on page 629 in your textbook
Problem 15-58 found on page 690 in your textbook
Submit your assignment using a single Excel workbook. Place each exercise/problem on a separate tab (sheet).
You must properly format Excel for the Journal Entries. And, for any discussion component (as in Part 2 of Problem 15-58), Insert a Textbox and use that to present your discussion on the Excel spreadsheet.
When you have completed the assignment, upload your completed Excel spreadsheet to the Unit 5 Assignment Dropbox before Tuesday, 11:59 PM (ET) of Unit 5. Name your assignment filename using this format:
LastName_FirstName_Unit#_AssignmentName. For example, the Unit 5 assignment would be named:
Smith_John_Unit05_Assignment
Assignments submitted late will be subject to the Late Policy described in your Syllabus.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The presentation should include 10 12 slides. The first slide must be a Title Slide, and
the Final Slide must be your Reference List. Properly attributed sources are essential.
To look at CASE STUDY 1 go to my school site and go to dropbox and you will see Unit 2 Assignment 2: Case Study. This assignment is part 2 of that case study.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Unit 6 Assignment includes the following textbook problems:
BRIEF Exercise 18-22 found on page 825 of your textbook
Problem 20-38 found on page 920-921 in the textbook
Submit your assignment using a single Excel workbook. Place each exercise/problem on a separate tab (sheet).
You must properly format Excel for the Journal Entries. And, for any discussion component (as in Part 2 of Problem 20-38), Insert a Textbox and use that to present your discussion on the Excel spreadsheet.
When you have completed the assignment, upload your completed Excel spreadsheet to the Unit 6 Assignment Dropbox before Tuesday, 11:59 PM (ET) of Unit 6. Name your assignment filename using this format:
LastName_FirstName_Unit#_AssignmentName. For example, the Unit 6 assignment would be named:
Smith_John_Unit06_Assignment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PUT MY NAME ON THE ASSIGNMENT at the top of the page.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have to put my name on it….and answer EVERY QUESTION!!!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PLEASE ANSWER ALL OF THESE QUESTIONS AND DEFINITRLY SET UP THE FORMAT CORRECTLY…
The Unit 1 Assignment includes the following textbook problems:
Problem 1-32 found on page 28 in your textbook
Problem 2-55 found on page 60 in your textbook
Problem 3-50 found on page 86 in your textbook
Problem 3-51 (Case A ONLY) found on page 86 in your textbook
Your assignment must be submitted in a single Word document. APA formatting is required, including a Title Page with properly formatted running head. Several documents to help you create the proper APA formatting for the title page, running head and the reference list are located in Extra Extra. In addition, the Kaplan Library has a series of great tutorials to help with formal writing.
The individual problem questions should be used as headings to organize your analysis. Sub-headings may certainly be used within each question for additional organization of your analysis. A properly formatted Reference List is required, and all references in the list must appear within the body of your Assignment in properly formatted citations.
When you have completed the assignment, upload your completed Word document to the Unit 1 Assignment Dropbox before Tuesday, 11:59 PM (ET) of Unit 1. Name your assignment filename using this format: LastName_FirstName_Unit#_AssignmentName. For example, the Unit 1 assignment would be named:
Smith_John_Unit01_Assignment
Assignments submitted late will be subject to the Late Policy described in your Syllabus.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nissan USA guarantees automobiles against defects for 4 years or 50,000 miles, whichever comes first. Suppose Nissan can expect warranty costs during the 4 year period to add up to 3% of sales.
Assume that Lakeland Nissan in Lakeland, florida, made sales of 500,000 during 2000. Lakeland Nissan received cash for 10% of the sales and took notes receivable for the remainder. Payments to satisfy customer warranty claims totaled 12,000 during 2000.
1) Record the sales, warranty expense, and warranty payments for Lakeland Nissan. Ignore any reimbursements that Lakeland Nissan may receive from Nissan USA.
2) Post to the Estimated Warranty Payable T-account. The Beginning balance was 10,000. At the end of 2000, how much in estimated warranty payable does Lakeland Nissan owe its customers?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial analysis project! check the uploaded documents.
Thanks.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Assume your company has $25,000 available to invest for 10 years. The investment may be broken down into $5,000 increments. 2. Make an assumption about the company’s risk-return trade-off tolerance. Write a statement about your assumption. 3. Choose investments from the following list that meet the company’s risk tolerance: • Cash-on-hand checking account, 0% interest • Savings account at 1½% interest, compounded annually • CD’s at 3%, compounded bi-annually • Bonds at 7% interest, compounded bi-annually • Mutual funds at 10%, compounded quarterly • Stocks at 15%, compounded quarterly For example: you may choose $5,000 in Cash-on-hand; $10,000 invested in CD’s; and $10,000 invested in Bonds. 4. Using Table 12.1 “Future Value of $1 at Compound Interest” inPractical Business Math Procedures (text), calculate the value of the investment in each account after the 10 year time period for each investment chosen. Compute the total for the investment. 5. After you have organized your thoughts, post your recommendation for how the company should invest the $25,000 to the course Forum. Provide an argument for each investment you made, supporting your choices using the risk-return trade-off assumption you made for the company. Copy this information to the financial plan final report template.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Three Assignment Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Overhead application: Working backward The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Four Assignment Please complete the following 3 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Comprehensive budgeting The balance sheet of Williams Company as of December 31, 20X8, follows. WILLIAMS COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 12X8 Assets Cash $4,595 Accounts receivable 10,000 Finished goods (575 units x $7.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Five Assignment Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Basic present value calculations Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar: A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at an 11% rate of return.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have to strictly follow the project template that I uploaded.Please acknowledge when you receive it .You can take some more time ,may be you can submit tomorrow.I want an excellent grade
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week 1 Assignment: Chapter One Problems Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The discussion question is due on the 17th but the assignment isn’t due until the 4th
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need hand with this test assignment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This is the first time use of this site. Please forgive my ignorance.
Need homework done for this Monday.
Please advise.
Thank you,
John
email address: import.quality.north@gmail.com
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Have a look and see if the timeframe suits your fancy.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hello need with these they are due by Aug 1st. Please let me know if you can help.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The quiz includes seven questions of which I only need assistance with questions 1 through 6.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Liquidity ratios
Current ratio
Acid-test, or quick, ratio
Receivables turnover
Inventory turnover
Profitability ratios
Asset turnover
Profit margin
Return on assets
Return on common stockholders equity
Solvency ratios
Debt to total assets
Times interest earned
Show your calculations for each ratio.
Create a horizontal and vertical analysis for the balance sheet and the income statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week 2 Assignment: Chapter Two and Three Problems Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Chapter 2 Exercise 3 1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X6.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Case #3 Final Project Managerial Accounting
See attached-Will pay for immediately for solution file
Regression Analysis
Contribution Margin Reporting
Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis
Differential Analysis
Capital Budgeting
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
6.1 1. Korman Company has the following securities in its portfolio of trading equity securities on December 31, 2010: Cost Fair Value 5,000 shares of Thomas Corp., Common $155,000 $139,000 10,000 shares of Gant, Common 182,000 190,000 $337,000 $329,000 All of the securities had been purchased in 2010. In 2011, Korman completed the following securities transactions: March 1 Sold 5,000 shares of Thomas Corp., Common @ $31 less fees of $1,500. April 1 Bought 600 shares of Werth Stores, Common @ $45 plus fees of $550.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 1: Benton County voted to establish an internal service fund to account for printing and copying for all its departments and agencies. The County engaged in the following activities related to the new fund. REQUIRED: Prepare transactions to record these events in the internal service fund. If no entry is required, write “No Entry Required.” The County Commission voted to transfer $200,000 from the General Fund to the internal service fund to establish the new fund. The fund entered into a capital lease for equipment to be used in printing activities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
To prevent fraudulent shipments of merchandise, organizations should: Match every receiving slip to an approved purchase order. Match every outgoing shipment to a sales order. Make sure that all increases to perpetual inventory records are supported by proper source documents. All of the above Of the following, which is the best method for detecting the theft of inventory? Have the warehouse manager personally oversee bi-monthly inventory counts. Have someone from purchasing conduct inventory counts every quarter.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Forum due tuesday Compare and contrast Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) and other forms of International Business. Assignment due Saturday Offer an article summary that discusses how to enter a foreign market; what are the steps needed and the essential elements for success. Compare/contrast two different entries. Minimum 500 words.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are a manager for Riordan Manufacturing. You recently administered a series of assessments to your three employees to give you a better understanding of their different traits. You have begun putting together an Employee Portfolio for each employee. Now you must use the information from the assessments to create a Motivational Plan.
Resources: University of Phoenix Material: Employee Portfolio: Motivation Action Plan, Self Assessments from Week One and Week Two Individual Assignment
Determine the motivational strategy or strategies that would likely be most appropriate for each of your three employees based on their individual characteristics, and complete the Motivational Action Plan for each employee. How will you leverage employee evaluations to motivate each of the three employees?
Describe how the strategy selected connects to one or more of the motivational theories described in the text.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
6. An example of a period cost is a(n):
Answer
A. selling cost
B. product cost
C. manufacturing cost
D. inventoriable cost
9. An example of a qualitative factor is:
Answer
A. an irrelevant cost
B. customer satisfaction
C. a relevant cost
D. increased income
13. Using ABC can help a firm:
A. reduce costs
B. increase the retail price of its products
C. decrease the wholesale prices of its products
D. reduce its workforce
14. The two methods for determining the cost of products are:
A. process and absorption costing
B. job order and consumer based costing
C. activity-based and process costing
D. job order and process costing
20. A typical example of a quantitative factor is:
Answer
A. the purchase price of a new machine
B. customer satisfaction
C. product quality
D. employee morale
21. Sunk costs:
A. can be changed by future actions only
B. can be changed by current actions only
C. can be changed by current or future actions depending on the situation
D. None of these answers is correct
22. Another term used for regression analysis is:
A. the least-squares method
B. the high-low metho
C. the engineering approach
D. scatter graphing
23. A method used to separate a mixed cost using experts or other professionals that are familiar with technical aspects of the activity and associated costs is the:
A. scatter graphing
B. high-low metho
C. engineering approach
D. regression analysis
24. Activity-based costing uses:
A. multiple cost pools to develop a single allocation rate
B. multiple cost pools to develop multiple allocation rates
C. a single cost pool to develop multiple allocation rates
D. a single cost pool to develop a single allocation rate
25. Manufacturing overhead allocated using ABC will:
A. be more accurate and representative of resources consumed than a traditional allocation method
B. always be lower than if a traditional allocation method is used
C. always be higher than if a traditional allocation method is used
D. generally be the same as when a traditional allocation method is used
27. Using another firm to make a product or part of a product, rather than making it internally, is an example of:
A. relevant costing
B. outsourcing
C. opportunity costing
D. special ordering
28. One benefit of using activity-based costing is that it:
A. views more costs as indirect costs and therefore they need to be allocated
B. is easier to use than more traditional methods
C. follows established GAAP guidelines and is therefore more accepted
D. reclassifies certain manufacturing overhead costs into direct components
29. There are several variations of the cost-volume-profit formula. One determines the required sales in dollars, while the other determines sales in units. The formula which determines required sales in dollars uses the:
Answer
A. break-even point in units
B. contribution margin ratio
C. contribution margin per unit
D. gross profit point
30. The break-even point is important to managers because it:
A. tells managers how far sales can decline before the company will incur a loss
B. determines the required sales in dollars to achieve a profit
C. is useful to owners and managers starting a business
D. Answers A and C are both correct
31. In a job order costing system the term “job” refers to a:
A. single unit
B. batch of units
C. process
D. Answers A and B are both correct
34. A product held for sale by a retailer is know as a(n):
A. common cost
B. liability
C. asset
D. indirect cost
35. The job order and process costing systems are:
A. not considered a part of management accounting
B. not interchangeable
C. based on GAAP
D. interchangeable
36. An appropriate cost allocation base should:
A. be correlated to the amount of administrative overhead incurred annually
B. be easy to identify, compute, and journalize
C. be correlated to the amount of overhead resources consumed
D. None of these answers is correct
38. Anita’s Art Gallery sells pictures for $50 each. She pays $20 for the print and frame, and pays the sales clerk 10% as a commission. She has $5,000 of monthly fixed costs as well. How many sales dollars in pictures does Anita need to sell to break even?
A. $12,500
B. $5,000
C. $20,000
D. $10,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Cody Macedo established an insurance agency on January 1 of the current year and completed the following transactions during January: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| (a) |
Opened a business bank account with a deposit of $75,000 in exchange for capital stock. |
| (b) |
Purchased supplies on account, $3,000. |
| (c) |
Paid creditors for account, $1,000. |
| (d) |
Received cash from fees earned on insurance commissions, $11,800. |
| (e) |
Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $4,000. |
| (f) |
Paid automobile expenses for month, $600, and miscellaneous expenses, $200. |
| (g) |
Paid office salaries, $2,500. |
| (h) |
Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $1,900; therefore, the cost of supplies used during the month was $1,100. |
| (i) |
Billed insurance companies for sales commissions earned, $12,500. |
| (j) |
Paid dividends, $5,000. |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| To Do: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 1 |
In tabular form, indicate the effect each transaction has on the accounts. Calculate the balance of each account after all the transactions have been entered. |
| 2 |
Using the account balances at the end of the month, prove the accounting equation is in balance. |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
have to figure out the quarterly numbers for direct materials purchases, cash purchases budget, and direct labor budget. I have members completed part to 3 parts before which need to be checked that numbers are acurate. Make sure to add onto excel sheet with completed part and do calculations on excell.
1-3 of project completed attached
template for project attached .. but do work by adding onto first attachment
attachment of example teacher gave yo understand what needed to be done
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 1: Client Letter
Due Week 2 and worth 150 points
Imagine that you are a Certified Public Accountant (CPA) with a new client who needs an opinion on the most advantageous capital structure of a new corporation. Your client formed the corporation in question to provide technology to the medical profession to facilitate compliance with the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA). Your client is very excited because of the ability to secure several significant contracts with sufficient capital.
Use the Internet and Strayer databases to research the advantages and disadvantages of debt for capital formation versus equity for capital formation of a corporation. Prepare a formal letter to the client using the six (6) step tax research process in Chapter 1 and demonstrated in Appendix A of your textbook as a guide.
Write a one to two (1-2) page letter in which you:
1. Compare the tax advantages of debt versus equity capital formation of the corporation for the client.
2. Recommend to the client whether he / she should use debt or equity for capital formation of the new corporation, based on your research. Provide a rationale for the response.
3. Use the six (6) step tax research process, located in Chapter 1 and demonstrated in Appendix A of the textbook, to record your research for communications to the client.
Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:
Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
mba-560 unit 1 problem 5-33 and 6-25
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 7-28 Crume Inc-Effective interest amortization for a bond premium
Please see the attachment for full problem description.
Effective interest amortization for a bond premium
On January 1, 2012, Crume Incorporated issued bonds with a face value of $100,000 a stated rate of interest of 9 percent, and a five year term to maturity. Interest is payable in cash on December 31 of each year. The effective rate of interest was 8 percent at the time the bonds were issued. The bonds sold for $103,993. Crume used the effective interest rate method to amortize bond discount.
Cash Payment Interest Expense Premium Amortization Carrying Value
January 1, 2012 103,993
December 31, 2012 9,000 8,319 681 103,312
December 31, 2013 ? ? ? ?
December 31, 2014 ? ? ? ?
December 31, 2015 ? ? ? ?
December 31, 2016 ? ? ? ?
Total 45,000 41,007 3,993
b. What time(s) in the table would appear on the 2014 balance sheet?
c. What time(s) in the table would appear on the 2014 income statement?
d. What time(s) in the table would appear on the 2014 statement of cash flows?
Problem 8-19
midwest corp completed the following tranactions in 2012 the first year or operation
1. issued 20,000 shares of 10$ par common stock at par.
2.issued 2,000 shares of 30$ stated value preferred stock at 32$ per share
3.purchased 500 shares of common stock as tresuary stock for 15$ per share.
4.declared a five percent dividend on preferrred stock.
5.sold 300 shares of tresuary stock for 18$ per share.
6.paid the cash dividend on preferred stock that was declared in event four
7. earned cash service revenue of 75,000 and incurred cash operating expenses of 42,000
8.appropriated 6,000 of retained earnings
required
a. organize the transaction in accounts under an accounting equation
b.prepare the stockholders equity section of the balance sheer as of december 31 2012
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hello! I need help with answering a discussion question. It needs at least two scholary citations in APA format. I can give you access to my school online library if you need it. It needs to be 250 words minimum. I attached the article the question is pertaining to.
Read the article by Chapas and Friga and address/answer the following questions: 1. What role do hypotheses play in making better business decisions? 2. How could you integrate this information within your organization? Your post should contain at least two scholarly citations (you can even use Chapas & Friga if you like). Be sure to list the references for the in text citations at the bottom of your post.
250 words minimum. APA style writting.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Given C08-29 C08-29 class name print_rep1 print_rep2 print_rep3 print_rep4 prob R_Names R_Nbr rep1 rep2 rep3 rep4 start_rep1 start_rep2 start_rep3 start_rep4 Student Name: Cash Budget Class: Budgeted Income Statement Budgeted Balance Sheet Assets Cash Accounts receivable Inventory Total assets Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity Accounts payable Capital stock Total liabilities and equity Cash balance, beginning Add receipts from customers Total cash available Less disbursements: Purchase of inventory Financing: Interest Cash balance, ending Sales
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
DEPARTMENT OF ACCOUNTING, FINANCE & ECONOMICS 7150AFE Business Information Systems MS ACCESS PROJECT (DATABASES) (TOTAL MARKS = 10) This project requires you to demonstrate knowledge of databases using MS Access.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I can send as a document. I have this test due before midnight tomorrow for ACCT 100. I have to plug these numbers in to the balance sheet, income statement, general journal, general ledger, work sheet, statement of owners equity, adjusting entries and post closing trial balance. I have a lot of assignments like these and if you can help with this one I would greatly appreciate and continue to send work your way! If you can send me an email I can forward the documents to you to explain better.
Miller Design Studio Post-Closing Trial Balance July 31, 2011 Cash $22,480 Accounts Receivable 5,000 Offi ce Supplies 3,660 Prepaid Rent 1,600 Offi ce Equipment 16,320 Accumulated Depreciation Offi ce Equipment $ 300 Accounts Payable 6,280 Unearned Design Revenue 600 Wages Payable 720 J. Miller, Capital 41,160 $49,060 $49,060 During August, the studio engaged in these transactions: Aug. 1 Received an additional investment of cash from J. Miller, $20,000. 2 Purchased additional office equipment with cash, $4,700. 7 Purchased additional office supplies for cash, $540. 8 Completed the series of designs that began on July 31 and billed for the total design services performed, including the accrued revenues of $800 that had been recognized in an adjusting entry in July, $1,400. 12 Paid the amount due for the office equipment purchased last month, $3,000. 13 Accepted an advance in cash for design work to be done, $2,400. 15 Performed design services and received a cash fee, $2,900. 16 Received payment on account for design services performed last month, $2,800. 19 Made a partial payment on the utilities bill that was received and recorded at the end of July, $140. 20 Performed design services for Rave Department Stores and agreed to accept payment next month, $3,200. 21 Performed design services for cash, $1,160. 22 Received and paid the utilities bill for August, $900. 23 Paid the assistant for four weeks wages, $4,800. 26 Paid the rent for September in advance, $1,600. 30 Paid cash to J. Miller as a withdrawal for personal expenses, $2,800. Required 1. Record entries in journal form and post to the ledger accounts the optional reversing entries on August 1 for Wages Payable and Accounts Receivable (see adjustment for unrecorded wages on page 116 and adjustment for design revenue on page 119). (Begin the general journal on page 5.) 2. Record the transactions for August in journal form. 3. Post the August transactions to the ledger accounts. 4. Prepare the Trial Balance columns of a work sheet. Miller Design Studio Post-Closing Trial Balance July 31, 2011 Cash $22,480 Accounts Receivable 5,000 Offi ce Supplies 3,660 Prepaid Rent 1,600 Offi ce Equipment 16,320 Accumulated Depreciation Offi ce Equipment $ 300 Accounts Payable 6,280 Unearned Design Revenue 600 Wages Payable 720 J. Miller, Capital 41,160 $49,060 $49,060 Copyright 2010 Cengage Learning, Inc. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. 5. Prepare adjusting entries and complete the work sheet using the information below. a. One month s prepaid rent has expired, $1,600. b. An inventory of supplies reveals $2,020 still on hand on August 31. c. Depreciation on equipment for August is calculated to be $300. d. Services performed for which payment had been received in advance totaled $1,300. e. Services performed that will not be billed until September totaled $580. f. Wages accrued by the end of August, $720. 6. From the work sheet, prepare an income statement, a statement of owner s equity, and a balance sheet for August 31, 2011. 7. Record the adjusting entries on August 31, 2011, in journal form, and post them to the ledger accounts. 8. Record the closing entries on August 31, 2011, in journal form, and post them to the ledger accounts. 9. Prepare a post-closing trial balance at August 31, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Excel questions need to be done in the accompanying Excel file. You will
email this exam copy and the Excel file by due date. If you are unable to write the formulas
in MS Word then you will write them by hand and scan the exam and email the exam and
excel file by due date.
1. Classify the following financial instruments as money market securities or capital market
securities in a table:
a. Bankers Acceptance
b. Commercial papers c. Common Stock
d. Corporate Bonds
e. Mortgages
f. Negotiable Certificate of Deposits g. Repurchase Agreements
h. U.S. Treasury Bills
i. U.S. Treasury Notes
j. Federal Funds
2. Calculate the present value for the following: (Excel)
a. $5,000 received at the end of 5 years if your investments pay 6% compounded annually.
b. $5,000 received each year for 5 years on the last day of each year if your investments pay 6%
compounded annually.
c. $5,000 received each quarter for 5 years on the last day of each quarter if your investments pay
6% compounded annually.
d. $5,000 received each year for 5 years on the first day of each year if your investments pay 6%
compounded annually.
3. Go to Wall Street Journal Market Data Center and find the most active investment grade
bonds. Choose one bond from the list. Also, find the treasury yield of the 30 year bond on
August 01, 2013 from U.S. Treasury. Then, calculate the Default Risk Premium for your bond.
(Be clear in the name of the company you have chosen.)
4. If we observe a one-year Treasury security rate higher than the two-year Treasury security
rate, what can we infer about the one-year rate expected one year from now?
5. Calculate the following values in Excel.
a. A 10-year, 12 percent semiannual coupon bond, with a par value of $1,000 sells for $1,100.
What is the bond s yield to maturity?
b. A 8 percent semiannual coupon bond, with a par value of $1,000 sells for $895. If the bond s
yield to maturity is 5% then what is maturity of the bond in years?
c. A 10 year, 8 percent semiannual coupon bond, with a par value of $1,000 and yield to maturity
is 5%. What is price of the bond?
6. Calculate the fair present value of a bond that pay interest semiannually, has a face value of
$1,000, has 14 years remaining to maturity, has a required rate of return of 10 percent and 8
coupon rate. (Write down the formula and solve it either by calculator or excel)
7. A stock just paid an annual dividend of $2.50. Dividends are expected to grow at 1.5 percent.
If the required rate of return on the stock is 12 percent, what is the fair present value? How is
your answer change if the required rate of return is 15 percent?
(Write down the formula and solve it either by calculator or excel)
8. Why Fed cannot choose both interest rate targeting and money supply targeting? Explain
using graphs.
9. What is the difference between a discount yield and bond equivalent yield? Which yield is
used for Treasury bill quotes?
10. Write the differences between the following in a tabular form:
a. T-Bills, T-Notes and T-Bonds
b. General Obligation Bonds and Revenue Bonds
c. Bearer bonds and Registered bonds
d. Term bonds and Serial bonds
11. What is the bid price of a $10,000 face value T-bill with a bid rate of 2.35 percent if there are
50, 100, and 250 days to maturity? (Write down the formula and solve it either by calculator or
excel)
12. You plan to purchase a $ 100,000 house using a 30- year mortgage obtained from your local
credit union. The mortgage rate offered to you is 8.25 percent. You will make a down payment
of 20 percent of the purchase price. (Excel)
a. Calculate your monthly payments on this mortgage.
b. Calculate the amount of interest and principal paid for all payments.
c. Calculate the amount of share of interest and share of principal of the monthly
payments for all payments.
d. Calculate the amount of interest paid over the life of this mortgage.
13. At the beginning of the year, you purchased a share of stock for $40. Over the year the
dividends paid on the stock were $5.00 per share. Calculate the return on a stock if the price of
the stock at the end of the year is $30 and $50. (Write down the formula and solve it either by
calculator or excel)
14. Assume there are 5 stocks: A, B, C, D, E of 5 different firms. You are to calculate an index
using their prices and values. Say the prices of these stocks today are 25, 30, 50, 20, and 60
respectively. The firms have 100m, 80m, 120m, 200m and 250m shares outstanding,
respectively.
a. what is the price-weighted index for today?
b. what is value-weighted index for today?
Assume that the price changes to 20, 25, 55, 18, and 50 respectively next day.
c. What is the new price-weighted index for next day? Calculate the percentage change in
the price-weighted index?
d. What is the new value-weighted index for next day? Calculate the percentage change
in the value-weighted index?
Assume that firm E divides the stock using a two-for-one split formula. What will be the new
divisor for the price-weighted index?
(Write down the formula and solve it either by calculator or excel)
15. You have taken a long position in a call option on IBM common stock. The option has an
exercise price of $136 and IBM s stock is currently trading at $140. The option premium is $5
per contract.
a. What is your net profit on the option if IBM s stock price increases to $150 at expiration of the
option and you exercise the option?
b. What is your net profit on the option if IBM s stock price decreases to $130 at expiration of
the option?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aquarius Libra Scorpio Taurus
Beginning of theyear:
Asset* $300,000 $500,000 $100,000 (d)
Liabilities 120,000 260,000 76,000 $120,000
End of the year:
Assets 420,000 700,000 90,000 248,000
Liabilities 110,000 220,000 30,000 136,000
During the year:
Additional issuance of capital stock (a) 100,000 10,000 40,000
Dividends 25,000 32,000 (c) 60,000
Revenue 190,000 (b) 115,000 112,000
Expenses 80,000 128,000 122,500 128,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Objectives – MS Project 2010 Change the working and non-working time on Standard Calendar Change the working and non-working time on a Resource Calendar Create new base calendars Assign different base calendars to resources With calendars, you can determine when resources on a project are working and when they are not working. If you do not indicate when resources are available, you may accidentally schedule tasks when resources are not actually available. Calendars are part of determining availability of resources.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Factor completely. 9×2 + 30xy + 25y2 a. (3x + 5y)2 b. (3x – 5y)(3x + 5y) c. (9x + 5y)(x + 5y) d. (3x + y)(3x + 25y) 2. During rush hour, Fernando can drive 25 miles using the side roads in the same time that it takes to travel 20 miles on the freeway. If Fernando’s rate on the side roads is 9 mi/h faster than his rate on the freeway, find his rate on the side roads. a. 36 b. 38 c. 45 d. 47 3. Factor the trinomial completely.. 6b4 – 18b3 – 60b2 a. 6b2(b + 2)(b – 5) b. 6b2(b – 2)(b + 5) c. 6(b2 + 2)(b2 – 5) d. b2(2b + 5)(3b + 10) 4. Solve for x. a. –2 b. 2 c. –4 d. No solution 5.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Take a look at the attachment and let me know, thanks.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Must be fully orginal.
There are several ways a company can allocate overhead costs to products produced or services provided. Two of these methods are absorption costing and variable costing. This assignment will allow you to explore the two methods of costing and compare/contrast the different uses of each costing system.
Using the module readings and the Argosy University online library resources, research absorption and variable costing. Use your research and/or your experiences as a working professional to complete this assignment.
Respond to the following:
- Explain the differences between absorption costing and variable costing.
- Explain, with the help of an example, how a company could use a variable costing system, as well as an absorption costing system. You have the option of using the company you work for as an example.
- Explain which method is better for the company being discussed.
Support your recommendation with references to your readings or scholarly articles.
Write your initial response in 4 5 paragraphs. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.
Do the following when responding to your peers:
- Read all posts from your peers.
- Explain how their experiences differ from yours.
- Provide substantive comments by contributing new, relevant information or quotes from course readings, Web sites, or other sources; building on the remarks or questions of others; or sharing practical examples of key concepts from your experiences, professional or personal.
| Assignment 1 Grading Criteria |
Maximum Points |
|
Initial response:
- Was insightful, original, accurate, and timely.
- Was substantive and demonstrated advanced understanding of concepts.
- Compiled/synthesized theories and concepts drawn from a variety of sources to support statements and conclusions.
|
16 |
|
Discussion response and participation:
- Responded to a minimum of two peers in a timely manner.
- Offered points of view supported by research.
- Asked challenging questions that promoted the discussion.
- Drew relationships between one or more points in the discussion.
|
16 |
|
Writing:
- Wrote in a clear, concise, formal, and organized manner.
- Responses were error free.
- Information from sources, where applicable, was paraphrased appropriately and accurately cited.
|
8 |
| Total: |
40 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attached assignment instructions and requirements.
DUE BY: Thursday, 9/19 by 10 PM PST
PAYMENT METHOD: Full payment upon completion of work as I do not want to put small amount on my card.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
See attached assignment instructions.and requirements
DUE DATE: Monday, 9/23 by 10 PM PST
PAYMENT METHOD: Full payment upon completion of assignment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Must be 100% origanial. It gets checked by TURN IT In system. Rubric is below.
As a manager, part of your role is to develop strategy, and share this strategy with various stakeholders within the organization. This assignment will allow you to take your findings as a manager and communicate these findings to those who are affected.
Your company has been presented with a decision on replacing a piece of equipment for a new computerized version that promotes efficiency for the upcoming year. As manager you will need to decide whether or not the purchase of the new equipment is a worthwhile investment and to communicate your recommendations to Executive Management for a final decision. To be convincing, sufficient support for your recommendations must be provided in order to be considered valid and accepted.
| Existing Equipment |
| Original Cost |
60,000 |
| Present Book Value |
30,000 |
| Annual Cash Operating Costs |
145,000 |
| Current Market Value |
15,000 |
| Market Value in Ten Years |
0 |
| Remaining useful Life |
10 years |
| Replacement Equipment |
| Cost |
600,000 |
| Annual Cash Operating Costs |
50,000 |
| Market Value in Ten Years |
0 |
| Useful Life |
10 years |
| Other Information |
| Cost of Capital |
10% |
| Payback requirement |
6 years |
In this assignment, use the information above to develop a comprehensive analysis using NPV, Payback Method, and IRR to develop a recommendation on replacing the existing equipment with a new computerized version. Develop an executive summary of your findings in a Microsoft PowerPoint presentation format to present to Executive Management.
Do the following in your presentation:
- Include a statement of the problem or topic, a concise analysis of the findings, and a recapitulation of any main conclusions or recommendations.
- Be sure to incorporate specific details to highlight or support the summary including calculations.
- Using your knowledge of capital budgeting techniques, explain how principles of capital budgeting, such as the payback method, IRR, and NPV, can be used to assess the potential projects and assist in the decision-making process.
Develop a 10-12 slide presentation in PowerPoint format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M4_A2.ppt.
| Assignment 2 Grading Criteria |
Maximum Points |
| Wrote a statement of the problem or topic, a concise analysis of the findings, and a recapitulation of any main conclusions or recommendations. |
28 |
| Explained the summary using specific details including calculations. |
28 |
| Explained how principles of capital budgeting, such as the payback method, IRR, and NPV, can be used to assess the potential projects and assist in the decision-making process displaying knowledge of capital budgeting techniques. |
36 |
| Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. |
8 |
| Total: |
100 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In many cases, managers end up in trouble as they direct their focus exclusively on cost savings. Cost cutting is always emphasized, but other impacts, such as decreased quality, can be overlooked. These overlooked impacts can have a significant effect on the revenue and profitability of an organization. The balanced scorecard is a measure to assure that management is not exclusively driven by cost, but balanced with other measures that also can significantly influence the performance of an organization.
Using the module readings and the Argosy University online library resources, research balanced scorecard and its application.
Select a service industry organization of your choice. Complete the following for the selected organization:
- Recommend at least two performance measures in each of the balanced scorecard categories.
- Explain each of your recommendations.
- Using these measures as examples, explain how use of the balanced scorecard can increase the economic value added within the organization.
Write your initial response in 4 5 paragraphs. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.
.
Do the following when responding to your peers:
- Read all posts from your peers.
- Explain how their experiences differ from yours.
- Provide substantive comments by contributing new, relevant information or quotes from course readings, Web sites, or other sources; building on the remarks or questions of others; or sharing practical examples of key concepts from your experiences, professional or personal.
| Assignment 1 Grading Criteria |
Maximum Points |
|
Initial response:
- Was insightful, original, accurate, and timely.
- Was substantive and demonstrated advanced understanding of concepts.
- Compiled/synthesized theories and concepts drawn from a variety of sources to support statements and conclusions.
|
16 |
|
Discussion response and participation:
- Responded to a minimum of two peers in a timely manner.
- Offered points of view supported by research.
- Asked challenging questions that promoted the discussion.
- Drew relationships between one or more points in the discussion.
|
16 |
|
Writing:
- Wrote in a clear, concise, formal, and organized manner.
- Responses were error free.
- Information from sources, where applicable, was paraphrased appropriately and accurately cited.
|
8 |
| Total: |
40 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
See attached for assignment instructions.
Due Date: Thursday, 9/26/2013
Payment Term: Full payment upon completion of assignmnet. This is because I do not want to put small amount on my card.
Thank you for your support.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Must be original. Giude lines below
|
Tom Emory and Jim Morris strolled back to their plant from the administrative offices of Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company. Tom is manager of the machine shop in the company’s factory; Jim is manager of the equipment maintenance department.
The men had just attended the monthly performance evaluation meeting for plant department heads. These meetings had been held on the third Tuesday of each month since Robert Ferguson, Jr., the president’s son, had become plant manager a year earlier.
As they were walking, Tom Emory spoke: Boy, I hate those meetings! I never know whether my department’s accounting reports will show good or bad performance. I’m beginning to expect the worst. If the accountants say I saved the company a dollar, I’m called Sir, but if I spend even a little too much boy, do I get in trouble. I don’t know if I can hold on until I retire.
Tom had just been given the worst evaluation he had ever received in his long career with Ferguson & Son. He was the most respected of the experienced machinists in the company. He had been with the company for many years and was promoted to supervisor of the machine shop when the company expanded and moved to its present location. The president (Robert Ferguson, Sr.) had often stated that the company’s success was due to the high-quality work of machinists like Tom. As supervisor, Tom stressed the importance of craftsmanship and told his workers that he wanted no sloppy work coming from his department.
When Robert Ferguson, Jr., became the plant manager, he directed that monthly performance comparisons be made between actual and budgeted costs for each department. The departmental budgets were intended to encourage the supervisors to reduce inefficiencies and to seek cost reduction opportunities. The company controller was instructed to have his staff tighten the budget slightly whenever a department attained its budget in a given month; this was done to reinforce the plant manager’s desire to reduce costs. The young plant manager often stressed the importance of continued progress toward attaining the budget; he also made it known that he kept a file of these performance reports for future reference when he succeeded his father.
Tom Emory’s conversation with Jim Morris continued as follows:
Emory: I really don’t understand. We’ve worked so hard to meet the budget, and the minute we do so they tighten it on us. We can’t work any faster and still maintain quality. I think my men are ready to quit trying. Besides, those reports don’t tell the whole story. We always seem to be interrupting the big jobs for all those small rush orders. All that setup and machine adjustment time is killing us. And quite frankly, Jim, you were no help. When our hydraulic press broke down last month, your people were nowhere to be found. We had to take it apart ourselves and got stuck with all that idle time.
Morris: I’m sorry about that, Tom, but you know my department has had trouble making budget, too. We were running well behind at the time of that problem, and if we had spent a day on that old machine, we would never have made it up. Instead, we made the scheduled inspections of the forklift trucks because we knew we could do those in less than the budgeted time.
Emory: Well, Jim, at least you have some options. I’m locked into what the scheduling department assigns to me and you know they’re being harassed by sales for those special orders. Incidentally, why didn’t your report show all the supplies you guys wasted last month when you were working in Bill’s department?
Morris: We’re not out of the woods on that deal yet. We charged the maximum we could to other work and haven’t even reported some of it yet.
Emory: Well, I’m glad you have a way of getting out of the pressure. The accountants seem to know everything that’s happening in my department, sometimes even before I do. I thought all that budget and accounting stuff was supposed to help, but it just gets me into trouble. It’s all a big pain. I’m trying to put out quality work; they’re trying to save pennies.
|
Review the case. Respond to the following:
- Identify the problems that appear to exist in Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company’s budgetary control system and explain how the problems are likely to reduce the effectiveness of the system. (approximately 1 page)
- Explain how Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company’s budgetary control system could be revised to improve its effectiveness. (approximately 1 2 pages)
- Explain how the use of an activity-based costing system could change the results of the budget, if utilized. (approximately 1 page)
- As stated in the case, many employees have quit trying and have altered behavior on the job. Provide specific ways for how you would use a budget to change employee behavior and align goals in the organization. Explain how goal alignment can improve profitability and overall return to the shareholders of the company. (approximately 1 page)
- Synthesize data to explain the concept of ROI and describe how the use of an activity-based costing system can improve the company s ROI and the potential impact on free cash flow. (approximately 1 page)
Write a 5 6-page report in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M5_A2.doc.
.
| Assignment 2 Grading Criteria |
Maximum Points |
| Identified the problems that appear to exist in the company s budgetary control system and explained how the problems are likely to reduce the effectiveness of the system. |
64 |
| Explained how the company’s budgetary control system could be revised to improve its effectiveness. |
64 |
| Explained how the use of an activity-based costing system could change the results of the budget if utilized. |
44 |
| Identified ways of how one can use a budget to change employee behavior and align goals in the organization and explained how goal alignment can improve profitability and overall return to shareholders of the company. |
44 |
| Synthesized data to explain the concept of ROI, how the use of an activity-based costing system can improve the company s ROI, and the potential impact on free cash flow. |
56 |
| Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. |
28 |
| Total: |
300 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
#1 Milano Pizza is a small neighborhood pizzeria that has a small area for in-store dining as well as offering take-out and free home delivery services. The pizzeria’s owner has determined that the shop has two major cost drivers—the number of pizzas sold and the number of deliveries made. Data concerning the pizzeria’s costs appear below: Fixed Cost Per Month Cost per Pizza Cost per Delivery Pizza ingredients $2.0 Kitchen staff $3,820 Utilities $540 $0.05 Delivery person $2.5 Delivery vehicle $340 $1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Notes from text One of the primary responsibilities of managers is to set goals for where the organization or department should go in the future and plan how to get it there. Walmart managers are facing a struggle that executives in every organization encounter as they try to decide what goals to pursue and how to achieve them. Lack of planning or poor planning can seriously hurt an organization. http://digitalbookshelf.southuniversity.edu/#/books/9781285696706/pages/68997339http://digitalbookshelf.southuniversity.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING Breakeven sales; sales to earn a target operating income, contribution margin income statement British Productions performs London shows. The average show sells 900 tickets at $65 per ticket. There are 155 shows a year. No additional shows can be held as the theater is also used by other production companies. The average show has a cast of 55, each earning a net average of $330 per show. The cast is paid after each show. The other variable cost is program-printing cost of $9 per guest. Annual fixed costs total $580,500.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Detailed answer to the questions please.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hello,
This final exam is 20 questions on managerial accouting for my business courses. It requires that all the math work be shown and entered into a microsoft word doc for each question. Please only serious tutors, I have recently been burned by another tutor and I’m very cautious. Please reveiw the exam first before taking on the assignment, thanks!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Activity Cost Rates
P 3.Noir Company produces four versions of its model J17-21 bicycle seat. The
four versions have different shapes, but their processing operations and production
costs are identical. During July, these costs were incurred:
Direct materials
Leather $25,430
Metal frame 39,180
Bolts 3,010
Materials handling
Labor 8,232
Equipment depreciation 4,410
Electrical power 2,460
Maintenance 5,184
Assembly
Direct labor 13,230
Engineering design
Labor 4,116
Electrical power 1,176
Engineering overhead 7,644
Overhead
Equipment depreciation 7,056
Indirect labor 30,870
Supervision 17,640
Operating supplies 4,410
Electrical power 10,584
Repairs and maintenance 21,168
Building occupancy overhead 52,920
July s output totaled 29,400 units. Each unit requires three machine hours of
effort. Materials handling costs are allocated to the products based on direct
materials cost, engineering design costs are allocated based on units produced,
and overhead is allocated based on machine hours. Assembly costs are allocated
based on direct labor hours, which are estimated at 882 for July.
During July, Noir Company completed 520 bicycle seats for Job 142. The
activity usage for Job 142 was as follows: direct materials, $1,150; direct labor
hours, 15.
Required
1. Compute the following activity cost rates: (a) materials handling cost rate;
(b) assembly cost rate, (c) engineering design cost rate, and (d) overhead rate.
2. Prepare a bill of activities for Job 142.
3. Use activity-based costing to compute the job s total cost and product unit cost.
Breakeven Analysis
E 8.Techno Designs produces head covers for golf clubs. The company expects to
generate a profit next year. It anticipates fixed manufacturing costs of $126,500
and fixed general and administrative expenses of $82,030 for the year. Variable
manufacturing and selling costs per set of head covers will be $4.65 and $2.75,
respectively. Each set will sell for $13.40.
1. Compute the breakeven point in sales units.
2. Compute the breakeven point in sales dollars.
3. If the selling price is increased to $14 per unit and fixed general and administrative
expenses are cut by $33,465, what will the new breakeven point be
in units?
4. Prepare a graph to illustrate the breakeven point computed in2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
“Liquidity Ratios” Please respond to the following:
-
- From the first e-Activity, evaluate the impact of not considering the current portion of long-term liabilities in the current ratio and working capital, and how this may impact day- to-day business decisions.
-
- Determine the implications of a significant positive change in the ratio. Provide a rationale with your response.
Comprehensive Income” Please respond to the following:
From the second e-Activity, elaborate on the potential consequences of eliminating the option to present other comprehensive income within the statement of changes in equity on financial statement users and companies.
Evaluate the effect of the increased prominence of other comprehensive income on financial statement users and companies.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Standard Costs and variances
Differential Analysis:Relevant Costs for decision making
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I’ve uploaded every thing you need in the attachment below.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 1. The following information applies to Barnhart Company:
Additional information:
- Net Credit Sales = $220,000
- Beginning Accounts Receivable = $10,000
Required:
1) Compute Barnhart’s:
a) Quick ratio
b) Current ratio
c) Working capital
d) Accounts receivable turnover
e) Average days to collect receivables
Problem 2. The Jiffy Manufacturing Company started operations in 2012 when it acquired $100,000 from its owners. During the year, the company incurred the following costs:
The company placed 12,000 units into production, completed 10,000 units, and sold 8,000 units. The average selling price was $17 per unit.
Required:
1) Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured and sold for the year ended December 31, 2012.
2) Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
mba-560 unit 2 problem 3-25 and 4-20
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| 1.During the month of March, Wang Company sold merchandise on account for $9,100. The merchandise had cost Wang $4,900. Which of the following represents the effects of this transaction on Wang s financial statements?
(Points : 2)
|
Row One Row Two Row Three Row Four
|
| 2.What is the relationship between gross margin and net income? (Points : 2) |
Gross Margin Merchandise Inventory at the end of the period = Net Income Gross Margin Selling and Administrative Expenses = Net Income Gross Margin + Selling and Administrative Expenses = Net income Sales Revenue x Gross Margin Percentage= Net Income
|
| 3.Which of the following is not a period cost? (Points : 2) |
Advertising Expense Sales Commissions Cost of Goods Sold Interest Expense
|
| 4.Cost of Goods Sold is reported as a(n): (Points : 2) |
asset on the balance sheet. direct reduction of equity on the statement of changes in stockholders equity. addition to Sales Revenue on the income statement. expense on the income statement.
|
| 5.Whitney Company s Cost of Goods Available for Sale for 2010 was $610,000. Which of the following statements is true? (Points : 2) |
If the merchandise inventory at the end of the year was $100,000, the Cost of Goods Sold was $510,000. If the merchandise inventory at the end of the year was $100,000, the Cost of Goods Sold was $710,000. If the beginning inventory was $95,000, the Cost of Goods Sold was $515,000. If the beginning inventory was $95,000, the Cost of Goods sold was $705,000.
|
| 6.Merchandising businesses: (Points : 2) |
manufacture the goods they sell. generate revenue primarily by providing services to customers. buy the merchandise they sell from suppliers. include dry cleaning companies and law firms.
|
| 7.Gruver Company maintains perpetual inventory records. The company’s inventory account had a $5,500 balance as of December 31, 2010. On that date, a physical count of inventory showed only $5,300 of merchandise in stock. The write-down to recognize the missing inventory will: (Points : 2) |
decrease assets. increase expense. decrease equity. all of the above.
|
| 8.Lemon Company sent goods to a customer FOB delivery. What effect will these freight costs have on Lemon company s financial statements?
(Points : 2)
|
Row One Row Two Row Three Row Four
|
| 9.Gross margin is equal to: (Points : 2) |
Sales Revenue divided by the balance in Merchandise Inventory at the end of the period. the balance in Merchandise Inventory at the beginning of the period plus the amount of inventory purchased during the year. Sales Revenue minus Cost of Goods Sold. Sales Revenue minus Cost of Goods Available for Sale.
|
| 10.Which of the following statements accurately describes a fidelity bond? (Points : 2) |
Insurance that the company buys to protect itself from loss due to employee dishonesty Proper procedures for processing accounting transactions Procedures to provide reasonable assurance that the objectives of a company are accomplished Guidelines that limit the actions and authority of different levels of management
|
| 11.Which of the following is not a reason why a business needs strong internal controls over cash? (Points : 2) |
A small volume of high-denomination currency represents a significant amount of value. Ownership of cash is difficult to prove. Cash has universal appeal. Money is the common unit of measurement in business.
|
| 12.What documentation issued by a bank increases a company’s checking account balance at the bank? (Points : 2) |
An account invoice A debit memo A credit memo A certified check
|
| 13.What documentation issued by a bank increases a company’s checking account balance at the bank? (Points : 2) |
An account invoice A debit memo A credit memo A certified check
|
| 14.In preparing a bank reconciliation, typical adjustments to the bank balance include: (Points : 2) |
NSF checks. interest earned on the account. accounts or notes receivable collected by the bank. deposits in transit.
|
15.Wren Company accepted a check from Jay Company as payment for services rendered. Wren’s bank statement revealed that the Jay check was an NSF check. Wren has not decided to write off the account. Exclusive of any bank charges what will the entry to record the NSF check have on the accounting equation of Wren Company?
| Row |
Total Assets |
Total Equity |
| One |
No effect |
No effect |
| Two |
Decrease |
Decrease |
| Three |
Decrease |
No effect |
| Four |
No effect |
Decrease |
(Points : 2)
|
Row One Row Two Row Three Row Four
|
| 16.Which of the following is not one of the purposes of an internal control system? (Points : 2) |
Safeguarding the company’s assets Ensuring that the company is using the most effective marketing plan The assessment of the degree of compliance with company policies and public laws The evaluation of performance
|
| 17.Unger Company uses the perpetual inventory method. Unger sold goods that cost $3,500 for $7,200. If the sale was made to a customer on account, the sale will: (Points : 2) |
increase total assets by $3,700. increase total liabilities by $7,200. increase total liabilities by $3,500. increase total assets by $7,200.
|
| 18.The most effective way to reduce opportunities for ethical or criminal misconduct is: (Points : 2) |
to obtain fidelity bonds for all employees. to perform random physical counts frequently. to implement an effective system of internal controls. to perform extensive background checks before hiring employees.
|
| 19.The following are strong control measures over cash receipts except for: (Points : 2) |
a record of all cash collections should be prepared immediately upon receipt. employees who receive cash should give customers a written receipt. there should be a significant amount of cash on hand in order to avoid writing checks. cash receipts should be deposited in a bank as soon as possible.
|
| 20.An entry to record the purchase of inventory on account under the perpetual inventory method: (Points : 2) |
increases total assets. decreases total liabilities. decreases total assets. increases total equity.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Inc Stmt Balance Sheet Ratio Answer Sheet Fiscal Year Ended $ ASSETS 1) What do the liquidity, profitability, and solvency ratios reveal about the financial position of the company? 2) Which users may be interested in each type of ratio? 3) What does the collected data reveal about the performance and position of the company? SOLVENCY: Asset turnover Numerator Denominator Answer Expression LIQUIDITY: Profit Margin Current Ratio Acid Quick Ratio Receivables turnover Inventory turnover Return on Assets Return on Equity Debt to Total Assets Times Interest Earned Ratio R
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eye Openers 1. Describe the stockholders’ liability to creditors of a corporation. 2. Why are most large businesses organized as corporations? 3. Of two corporations organized at approximately the same time and engaged in competing businesses, one issued $100 par common stock, and the other issued $0.01 par common stock. Do the par designations provide any indication as to which stock is preferable as an investment? Explain. 4. A stockbroker advises a client to “buy preferred stock. . . . With that type of stock, . . . [you] will never have to worry about losing the dividends.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eye Openers 1. What is the principal disadvantage of the direct method of reporting cash flows from operating activities? 2. What are the major advantages of the indirect method of reporting cash flows from operating activities? 3. A corporation issued $500,000 of common stock in exchange for $500,000 of fixed assets. Where would this transaction be reported on the statement of cash flows? 4. A retail business, using the accrual method of accounting, owed merchandise creditors (accounts payable) $300,000 at the beginning of the year and $340,000 at the end of the year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter 7 introduces accounting systems. As described at the beginning of the chapter, most companies, even small businesses use accounting software to record business information instead of using the manual systems described in the bulk of Ch. 7. Below, I have posted a link to Sage Peachtree Accounting Software’s website. I want you to watch two short segments. On the home page, click on Videos (scroll down a little, and look on the right-hand side). Under “Choosing Accounting Software for the First Time”, click on Getting Around Sage 50 Accounting, under See How Easy it is to get started.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In your own words please explain. NO word minimum. Please cite all sources using APA format. 1) A statement of cash flows prepared on the direct method is prepared by converting every number on the income statement to its cash amount.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attached. No word minimum. Original work only.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
please see attached. Original and quality work only.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attached. Original and quality work only. No word minimum.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I ATTACHED A PDF
I ONLY NEED PART B DONE ITS 3 QUESTIONS
SCROOL TO PART B
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
please see attached. No word minimum. Due within 24hrs. Origninal and quality work only.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attached for description. No word minimum. Please use APA format when citing sources. Original work only.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
! ! ! ! DrSharonLevinACCT221FinalExamF13Ver137481 ‘! Problem 1: 10 points Caballero Manufacturing incurs unit costs of $15 ($10 variable and $5 fixed) in making a sub-assembly part for its finished product. A supplier offers to make 20,000 of the assembly part at $13.75 per unit. If the offer is accepted, Caballero will save all variable costs but no fixed costs. Instructions: Part A) Prepare an analysis showing the total cost savings, if any, Caballero will realize by buying the part.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise 1
Intel Inc. is the pioneer in the manufacture of microprocessor for computers. The company s fiscal year runs from April1 to March 31. On 1/1/2013, Intel Issued $5,000,000 of 11% Bonds due in 5 years. The interest is payable annually on April 1. The market rate of interest on that date for bonds of similar risk is 10%
Required:
1.1. 1. Prepare the journal entry for the issuance of the bonds and on the first interest payment date.
2.2. 2. Use the attached spreadsheet to prepare an amortization schedule for the bonds.
Exercise 2
Presented below is the stockholders equity section of Delta Inc.
All amounts are in million except for number of shares and par value
Current Year Prior Year
Preferred Stock 20,000,000 shares authorized, $0 $0
none issued
Common Stock – $1 par value, 750,000,000 shares 182 182
authorized, 182,350,259 issued
Additional Paid-in-capital 2,521 2,605
Treasury stock at cost: current year 21,194,312; prior
Year 22,768, 027 (1,308) (1,405)
Accumulated other comprehensive loss (664) (785)
Accumulated other deficit (1,312) (551)
———- ———-
(581) 46
———- ———-
Required:
1.1. 1. Explain why the common stock is classified as part of the stockholder’s equity.
2.2. 2. Explain why treasury stock is not classified as an asset.
3.3. 3. Explain what is meant by “Accumulated other comprehensive loss.”
4.4. 4. Why is the accumulated deficit larger in the current year than in the prior year
5.5. 5. Compute book value per share for Delta for the current year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lyle and Kaye James are married, have two minor children, Jessica age 8 and Jerron age 4, and are filing a joint
tax return in the current year. They are both employed. Lyle and Kaye, ages 38 and 37, respectively, have
combined salaries of $240,000, from which $42,000 of federal income tax and $10,000 of state income tax are
withheld. Lyle and Kaye own two homes. Their primary residence is located at 11620 N. Mount Ave., New Haven,
Connecticut 22222, and their vacation home is on the beach in Fort Lauderdale, Florida. They often rent their
vacation home to supplement their income. The following items are related to the James ownership of the two
homes:
Item New Haven Fort Lauderdale
Rental income $ $15,000
Qualified residence interest 7,200 5,000
Property taxes 1,400 1,000
Utilities 1,000 1,300
Repairs 200 300
Depreciation 0 3,500
Advertising 0 200
Insurance 1,500 1,500
The James family used their Fort Lauderdale home 20 days during the year. They rented the vacation home
60 days during the year. Lyle and Kaye jointly purchase stock in various corporations and make the following
transactions in the current year. (None of the stock qualifies as small business stock.)
Price
Date Transaction Paid/Sold
2/15 Bought 50 shares of Lake common stock (they own no other Lake $1,000
stock)
5/14 Bought 100 shares of Bass common stock (they own no other Bass 3,000
stock)
5/24 Sold 25 shares of Lake common stock 250
5/27 Bought 50 shares of Lake common stock 900
Sold 50 shares of Bass common stock 1,750
7/12 Bought 100 shares of Bass common stock 2,800
The James have no other income or expense items. Lyle and Kaye s Social Security numbers are 111-22-
3333 and 444-55-6666, respectively. Jessica and Jerron s Social Security numbers are 123-45-6789 and 888-99-
1010. The James use the IRS method of allocating all expenses between personal and rental use.
File the James income tax return Form 1040, Schedules A, D, and E using the
currently available forms and rates. Disregard any tax credits for which they may be
eligible.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
When companies accumulate costs, they generally use either a job-order or a process costing system. The type of system used often varies based on the type of product or service provided.
Using the module readings, Argosy University online library resources, and the Internet, locate an article on how a company utilized a cost accumulation system.
Respond to the following:
- Identify and describe the type of cost accumulation system that was used.
- Explain how the system was used and, specifically, how overhead was allocated.
- Discuss how the use of cost accumulation enhanced the company s operations.
Support your responses with reasons and examples. Examples and reasoning must be included to demonstrate your understanding.
Write your initial response in 3 4 paragraphs. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.
review and comment on at least two peers responses.
Do the following when responding to your peers:
- Read all posts from your peers.
- Explain how their experiences differ from yours.
- Provide substantive comments by contributing new, relevant information or quotes from course readings, Web sites, or other sources; building on the remarks or questions of others; or sharing practical examples of key concepts from your experiences, professional or personal.
| Assignment 2 Grading Criteria |
Maximum Points |
|
Initial response:
- Was insightful, original, accurate, and timely.
- Was substantive and demonstrated advanced understanding of concepts.
- Compiled/synthesized theories and concepts drawn from a variety of sources to support statements and conclusions.
|
16 |
|
Discussion response and participation:
- Responded to a minimum of two peers in a timely manner.
- Offered points of view supported by research.
- Asked challenging questions that promoted the discussion.
- Drew relationships between one or more points in the discussion.
|
16 |
|
Writing:
- Wrote in a clear, concise, formal, and organized manner.
- Responses were error free.
- Information from sources, where applicable, was paraphrased appropriately and accurately cited.
|
8 |
| Total: |
40 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need for all articles to be used and critieria followed.
Finlon Upholstery Inc. uses a job-order costing system to accumulate manufacturing costs. The company’s work-in-process on December 31, 2001, consisted of one job (no. 2077), which was carried on the year-end balance sheet at $156,800. There was no finished-goods inventory on this date.
Finlon applies manufacturing overhead to production on the basis of direct-labor cost. (The budgeted direct-labor cost is the company’s practical capacity, in terms of direct-labor hours multiplied by the budgeted direct-labor rate.) Budgeted totals for 2002 for direct labor and manufacturing overhead are $4,200,000 and $5,460,000, respectively. Actual results for the year are as follows:
| Actual Results |
| Direct Materials Used |
$5,600,000.00 |
| Direct Labor |
$4,350,000.00 |
| Indirect Material Used |
$65,000.00 |
| Indirect Labor |
$2,860,000.00 |
| Factory Depreciation |
$1,740,000.00 |
| Factory Insurance |
$59,000.00 |
| Factory Utilities |
$830,000.00 |
| Selling and Administrative Expenses |
$2,160,000.00 |
| Total |
$17,664,000.00 |
Job no. 2077 was completed in January 2002, and there was no work in process at year-end. All jobs produced during 2002 were sold with the exception of Job no. 2143, which contained direct-material costs of $156,000 and direct-labor charges of $85,000. The company charges any under- or over-applied overhead to the cost of goods sold category.
Using the above information, do the following:
- Calculate the company s predetermined overhead application rate.
- Calculate the additions to the work-in-process inventory account for the direct material used, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.
- Calculate the finished-goods inventory for the 12/31/01 balance sheet.
- Calculate the over-applied or under-applied overhead at year-end.
- Explain if it is appropriate to include selling and administrative expenses in the cost of goods sold category.
Perform your calculations in an Excel spreadsheet and copy the calculations into a Word document.
Write a 1-page paper in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M1_A3.doc. For example, if your name is John Smith, your document will be named SmithJ_M1_A3.doc.
deliver your assignment to the M1: Assignment 3 Dropbox.
| Assignment 3 Grading Criteria |
Maximum Points |
| Calculated the company s predetermined overhead application rate. |
24 |
| Calculated the additions to the work-in-process inventory account for the direct material used, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead. |
16 |
| Calculated the finished-goods inventory for the balance sheet dated 12/31/02. |
20 |
| Calculated the over-applied or under-applied overhead at year-end. |
20 |
| Explained if it is appropriate to include the selling and administrative expenses in the cost of goods sold category. |
12 |
| Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. |
8 |
| Total: |
100 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Must use all attached document, 3 supported readings(referances) and other highlighted parts
Activity-based costing is one of the most accurate methods that can be used to allocate overhead. However, it is not often used in many smaller organizations due to the substantial cost involved with its implementation.
Using the module readings and the Argosy University online library resources, research the activity-based costing method. Use your research and/or your experiences as a working professional to complete this assignment.
Respond to the following:
- If you have utilized an activity-based costing system in your former or current employment, describe how this system had been used. In your response, be sure to include your experience and position on the effectiveness of the activity-based costing system. Support your ideas by drawing on your readings and scholarly articles.
- If you have not encountered this type of system in your work experience, assume a company needs to switch to an ABC system. Describe the common cost drivers that could be used.
- How would the organization identify the cost drivers?
- How would the organization use them in the implementation of this system? You may use your former or current company for the analysis.
Write your initial response in 3 4 paragraphs. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.
- Read all posts from your peers.
- Explain how their experiences differ from yours.
- Provide substantive comments by contributing new, relevant information or quotes from course readings, Web sites, or other sources; building on the remarks or questions of others; or sharing practical examples of key concepts from your experiences, professional or personal.
| Assignment 1 Grading Criteria |
Maximum Points |
|
Initial response:
- Was insightful, original, accurate, and timely.
- Was substantive and demonstrated advanced understanding of concepts.
- Compiled/synthesized theories and concepts drawn from a variety of sources to support statements and conclusions.
|
16 |
|
Discussion response and participation:
- Responded to a minimum of two peers in a timely manner.
- Offered points of view supported by research.
- Asked challenging questions that promoted the discussion.
- Drew relationships between one or more points in the discussion.
|
16 |
|
Writing:
- Wrote in a clear, concise, formal, and organized manner.
- Responses were error free.
- Information from sources, where applicable, was paraphrased appropriately and accurately cited.
|
8 |
| Total: |
40 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Must use all attached document, 3 supported readings(referances) and other highlighted parts
Borealis Manufacturing has just completed a major change in its quality control (QC) process. Previously, products had been reviewed by QC inspectors at the end of each major process, and the company’s 10 QC inspectors were charged to the operation or job as direct labor. In an effort to improve efficiency and quality, a computerized video QC system was purchased for $250,000. The system consists of a minicomputer, fifteen video cameras, and other peripheral hardware and software. The new system uses cameras stationed by QC engineers at key points in the production process. Each time an operation changes or there is a new operation, the cameras are moved, and a new master picture is loaded into the computer by a QC engineer. The camera takes pictures of the units in process, and the computer compares them to the picture of a good unit. Any differences are sent to a QC engineer, who removes the bad units and discusses the flaws with the production supervisors. The new system has replaced the 10 QC inspectors with two QC engineers.
The operating costs of the new QC system, including the salaries of the QC engineers, have been included as factory overhead in calculating the company’s plant-wide manufacturing-overhead rate, which is based on direct-labor dollars. The company’s president is confused. His vice president of production has told him how efficient the new system is. Yet there is a large increase in the overhead rate. The computation of the rate before and after automation is as follows:
|
Before |
After |
| Budgeted Manufacturing Overhead |
1,900,000 |
2,100,000 |
| Budgeted Direct Labor Cost |
1,000,000 |
700,000 |
| Budgeted Overhead Rate |
190% |
300% |
Three hundred percent, lamented the president. How can we compete with such a high overhead rate
Using the module readings and the Argosy University online library resources, research manufacturing overhead.
Review the situation. Complete the following:
- Define manufacturing overhead, and:
- Cite three examples of typical costs that would be included in manufacturing overhead.
- Explain why companies develop predetermined overhead rates.
- Explain why the increase in the overhead rate should not have a negative financial impact on Borealis Manufacturing.
- Explain how Borealis Manufacturing could change its overhead application system to eliminate confusion over product costs.
- Describe how an activity-based costing system might benefit Borealis Manufacturing.
Write a 3 4-pages paper in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M2_A2.doc.
| Assignment 2 Grading Criteria |
Maximum Points |
| Defined manufacturing overhead giving three examples of typical costs that would be included in manufacturing overhead. |
16 |
| Explained why companies develop predetermined overhead rates. |
16 |
| Explained why the increase in the overhead rate should not have a negative financial impact on Borealis Manufacturing. |
16 |
| Explained how Borealis Manufacturing could change its overhead application system to eliminate confusion over product costs. |
20 |
| Explained how an activity-based costing system might benefit Borealis Manufacturing. |
16 |
| Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. |
16 |
| Total: |
100 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attached instructions on assignment and due date. Work must be in accordance with instructions and all requirements.
Due Date: Thursday, 9/12/2013 by 1o PM PST, no exception.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Must be orignal due to it be sent through Turn It in system
Cheryl Montoya picked up the phone and called her boss, Wes Chan, Vice President of Marketing at Piedmont Fasteners Corporation.
|
Cheryl: Wes, I’m not sure how to go about answering the questions that came up at the meeting with the President yesterday.
Wes: What’s the problem .
Cheryl: The president wanted to know the break-even point for each of the company’s products, but I am having trouble figuring them out.
Wes: I’m sure you can handle it, Cheryl. And, by the way, I need your analysis on my desk tomorrow morning at 8:00 sharp in time for the follow-up meeting at 9:00.
|
Piedmont Fasteners Corporation makes three different clothing fasteners at its manufacturing facility in North Carolina. Data concerning these products appear below:
|
Velcro |
Metal |
Nylon |
| Normal annual sales volume |
100,000 units |
200,000 units |
400,000 units |
| Unit selling price |
$1.65 |
$1.50 |
$0.85 |
| Variable cost per unit |
$1.25 |
$0.70 |
$0.25 |
Total fixed expenses are $400,000 per year.
All three products are sold in highly competitive markets, so the company is unable to raise its prices without losing unacceptably large numbers of customers.
The company has a very effective lean production system, so there is no beginning or ending work in process or finished-goods inventories.
Using the module readings, the Argosy University online library resources, and the Internet, research break-even point and costing systems. Analyze the case based on your research and what you have learned so far in the course.
Respond to the following:
- Calculate the company’s overall break-even point in total sales dollars. Explain your methodology (approximately 2 pages).
- Of the total fixed costs of $400,000: $20,000 could be avoided if the Velcro product were dropped, $80,000 if the Metal product were dropped, and $60,000 if the Nylon product were dropped. The remaining fixed costs of $240,000 consist of common fixed costs such as administrative salaries and rent on the factory building that could be avoided only by going out of business entirely (approximately 2 pages):
- Calculate the break-even point in units for each product. Explain your methodology.
- Determine the overall profit of the company if the company sells exactly the break-even quantity of each product. Present your results.
- Evaluate costing systems for this company. Explain if this company should be using a job-order or process-costing system to accumulate costs (1 page).
Be sure to include your calculations in Microsoft Excel format.
Write a 5 6-page report in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M3_A2.doc.
| Assignment 2 Grading Criteria |
Maximum Points |
| Calculated the company’s overall break-even point in total sales dollars and explained your methodology. |
32 |
| Calculated the break-even point in units for each product in the scenario and explained your methodology. |
52 |
| Explained what the overall profit of the company will be if the company sells exactly the break-even quantity of each product and showed your results. |
16 |
| Compared and explained if this company should be using a job-order or process-costing system to accumulate costs. |
80 |
| Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. |
20 |
| Total: |
200 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I have uploaded two files. Please do not bid or respond without taking a look at it. ALSO, DO NOT PLAGIARISE.
I CAN EQUALLY COPY THE ANSWERS WORD-FOR WORD ON GOOGLE but I NEED ORIGINAL FROM THE SCRACTH WORK.
Once again, I am going to verify for plagiarism. I will use plagiarism software to check and if I found out the work is not original, I will dispute, request a refund, and … write a nasty review
Thanks
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I am a college student and I have a assignment (of almost 10 pages) in accounting.The assignment is in french.
Here is the excel file(all pages are in it) and the zipped file is the bills/checks papers scanned from the papers I have.And I’ll provide the identification # that comes with bills.
Deadline: 4th Dec 10 Am EST.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Set up an amortization schedule for a $25,000 loan to be repaid in equal installments at the end of the next 5 years. The interest rate is 10% compounded annually.
A. I need to set up an amortization schedule for a $25,000 loan to be repaid in equal installments at the end of the next 5 years. The interest rate is 10% compounded annually. b. How large must each annual payment be if the loan is for $50,000 Assume that the interst rate remains at 10%, compounded annually, and that the loan is paid off over 5 years. c. How large must each payment be if the loan is for $50,000, the interest rate is 10%, compounded annually, and the loan is paid off in equal installments at the end of each of the next 10 years This loan is for the same amount as the loan in part b, but the payments are spread out over twice as many periods. Why are these payments not half as large as the payments on the loan in part b?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.
Los Lobos Ledger Preparation
Review the following information:
|
|
|
|
|
|
12-31-2007
|
12-31-2006
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 35,000
|
$ 32,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
33,000
|
30,000
|
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
(1,300)
|
(1,100)
|
|
|
Inventory
|
31,000
|
47,000
|
|
|
Property, plant, & equipment
|
100,000
|
95,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
(16,500)
|
(15,000)
|
|
|
Trade accounts payable
|
(25,000)
|
(15,500)
|
|
|
Income taxes payable
|
(21,000)
|
(29,100)
|
|
|
Deferred income taxes
|
(5,300)
|
(4,600)
|
|
|
8% callable bonds payable
|
(45,000)
|
(20,000)
|
|
|
Unamortized bond discount
|
4,500
|
5,000
|
|
|
Common stock
|
(50,000)
|
(40,000)
|
|
|
Additional paid-in capital
|
(9,100)
|
(7,500)
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
(25,200)
|
(64,600)
|
|
|
Sales
|
(558,300)
|
(778,700)
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
250,000
|
380,000
|
|
|
Selling expenses
|
141,500
|
172,000
|
|
|
General and administrative expenses
|
137,000
|
151,300
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
4,300
|
2,600
|
|
|
Income tax expense
|
20,400
|
61,200
|
|
|
|
$ –
|
$ –
|
|
|
Additional information:
|
|
|
1.
Los Lobos purchased $5,000 in equipment during 2007.
|
|
2.
Los Lobos allocated one-third of its depreciation expense to selling expenses and the remainder to general and administrative expenses.
|
|
3.
Bad debt expense for 2007 was $5,000, and write-offs of uncollectible accounts totaled $4,800.
|
|
4.
$12,000 of the debt is current portion.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash Sales
|
$72,600
|
|
Collections on Receivables
|
477,900
|
|
Purchases
|
(219,500)
|
|
Purchase of Equipment
|
(5,000)
|
|
Wages
|
(150,700)
|
|
Payments to Suppliers
|
(126,300)
|
|
Tax Payments
|
(27,800)
|
|
Borrowing
|
30,000
|
|
Repayment of Debt
|
(5,000)
|
|
Interest Payments
|
(3,800)
|
|
Sale of Stock
|
11,600
|
|
Dividends
|
(51,000)
|
Prepare a statement of cash flows using the direct and indirect methods.
Prepare a classified balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please find assignemnt in attachment. I want detailed and explained step by step solution of each problem. I want all solutions absolutely correct. I want it in both excel and word.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
this is due in 2 1/2 hours it is 9pm here and i need this by 1130p, no later I know it is late but my tutor forgot about it so they cannot do in short time I need a acconting please help I do not want too loose grade for turning in late I cannot pay more then 30.00 so please do not ask
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Proble 3-25
3 25 Comprehensive cycle problem: perpetual system
At the beginning of 2012, the jeater company had that following balances in its accounts:
|
Cash $ 4,300
Inventory 9,000
Common stock 10,000
Retained earnings 3,300
|
- Purchased inventory that cost $2,200 on account from Blue Company under terms 1/10, n/30. The merchandise was delivered FOB shipping point. Freight costs of $110 were paid in cash.
- Returned $200 of the inventory that it had purchase because the inventory was damaged in transit. The freight company agreed to pay the return freight cost.
- Paid the amount due on its account payable to Blue Company within the cash discount period.
- Sold inventory that had cost $3,000 for $5,500 on account, under terms 2/10, n/45.
- Received merchandise returned from a customer. The merchandise originally cost $400 and was sold to the customer for $710 cash during the previous accounting period. The customer was paid $710 cash for the returned merchandise.
- Delivered goods FOB destination in Event 4. Freight costs of $60 were paid in cash.
- Collected the amount due on the account receivable within the discount period.
- Took a physical count indicating that $7,970 of inventory was on hand at the end of the accounting period.
Required
- Identify these events as asset source (AS), asset use (AU), asset exchange (AE), or claims exchange (CE).
- Record each event in a statement model
Problem 4-20 The following data apply to superior auto supply inc. for may 2012
1. Balance per the bank on may 31, $8000
2. Deposits in transit not recorded by the bank, $975
3. Bank error, check written by allen auto supply was charged to superior auto sales account, $650
4. The following checks written and recorded by superior auto supply were not included in the bank statement: 3013-$385, 3054-$735, 3056-$1900
5. Not collected by the bank, $500
6. Service charge for the collection of note $10
7. The book keeper recorded a check written for $188 to pay for the may utilities expense as $888 in the cash disbursements journal
8. bank service charge in addition to the note collection fee $25
9. customer checks returned to the bank as NSF $125
Required: determine the amount of unadjusted cash balance per superior auto supply s books.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting Problems and Solutions 3
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need help with parts 2 and 3 for this project.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brooklyn College of the City University of New York Accounting Department Intermediate Financial Accounting II Professor G.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
i have this Accounting Project it has 45 questions
due on Fri, 2013-11-15 15:00
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You need to research two corporations using the ITT Tech Virtual Library. Once you have
identified the two corporations, you will have to find the financial statements, income
statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows. You will then identify from the
statement of cash flows if the corporation uses the indirect or direct method. You will also
identify how much cash was generated from operations, financing, and investing. You should
also specify how much free cash flow each corporation has generated. You should then
calculate the current ratio, inventory turnover, gross profit percentage days’ sales in
receivables, and debt ratio. You must choose which corporation you would invest in and why
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
10-K report analysis project. Directions in the attached file for only part 2. Need by Saturday.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Helper ~ Pls correct my answer and some of question haven’t done yet.
Here attached lecture notes as Australia Accounting.
Pls kindly follow the instruction of my lecture notes
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attached. No word minimum. Original explanation only. Please use APA format when citing sources. Please complete this response as soon as possible. Thank you.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
See Attachments for instructions.
Word Count: 300 (+). Cite work. Use reference(s) (APA) Guidelines.
No plagiarism
Chapters included if needed
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
i need help with the third question, please.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HW 1 (Computation of Net Income) Presented below are changes in all the account balances of Jackson Furniture Co. during the current year, except for retained earnings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
intHW3 (Computation of Net Income) Presented below are changes in all the account balances of Jackson Furniture Co. during the current year, except for retained earnings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
USE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION TO ANSWER THE NEXT (3) QUESTIONS: On January 1, 2012, ABC borrowed $1,200,000 at 10% payable annually to finance the construction of a new building. In 2012, the company began construction on March 1 and made the following expenditures throughout the year: March 31 $260,000 June 1 $750,000 July 1 $1,300,000 Nov 1 $1,200,000 The building was completed on December 31, 2012. Additional information is provided below: 1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
8000000 320000 120000 0.05 1 12000 2400 2 9000 6000 3 60000 0 4 1200 640 Auditing Chapter 9 Account Balalnce Tolerable Misstatement Expected Misstatement Risk of Incorrect Acceptance Sample Size Sampling Interval Error Number Book Value Audit Value Statistical Problem Save this spreadsheet using the naming convention “yourfirst&lastname.xlsx” You will use the spreadsheet labled “Calculation” to complete the problem. All calculations must be done using the spreadsheet You will need the tables in chapter 8 of the text.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Lettman Corporation has provided the following partial listing of costs incurred during November: Marketing salaries $ 52,100 Property taxes, factory $ 12,400 Administrative travel $ 100,800 Sales commissions $ 52,800 Indirect labor $ 38,400 Direct materials $ 173,900 Advertising $ 139,900 Depreciation of production equipment $ 39,100 Direct labor $ 87,400 Required: a. What is the total amount of product cost listed above? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Total product cost $ b.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Balance Sheet Classifications) Presented below are a number of balance sheet accounts of Cunningham, Inc. For each of the accounts below, indicate the proper balance sheet classification.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HW 3 #1 Buttercup Corporation issued 310 shares of $9 par value common stock for $4,185. Prepare Buttercup’ journal entry. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.) Description/Account Debit Credit #2 Swarten Corporation issued 680 shares of no-par common stock for $8,580. Prepare Swarten’s journal entry if (a) the stock has no stated value, and (b) the stock has a stated value of $3 per share. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HW5 #1 Garfield Company purchased, as a held-to-maturity investment, $92,700 of the 9%, 12-year bonds of Chester Corporation for $75,474, which provides an 12% return. Prepare Garfield’s journal entries for (a) the purchase of the investment and (b) the receipt of annual interest and discount amortization. Assume effective interest amortization is used. (Round answers to zero decimal places, e.g. 25,000. List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HW 6 Petrenko Corporation has outstanding 2,010 $1,000 bonds, each convertible into 50 shares of $13 par value common stock. The bonds are converted on December 31, 2012, when the unamortized discount is $30,000 and the market price of the stock is $21 per share. Record the conversion using the book value approach. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.) Description/Account Debit Credit #2 Pechstein Corporation issued 2,160 shares of $11 par value common stock upon conversion of 1,130 shares of $50 par value preferred stock.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HW7 #1 In 2012, Amirante Corporation had pretax financial income of $177,200 and taxable income of $130,000. The difference is due to the use of different depreciation methods for tax and accounting purposes. The effective tax rate is 40%. Compute the amount to be reported as income taxes payable at December 31, 2012. $ #2 Oxford Corporation began operations in 2012 and reported pretax financial income of $227,500 for the year. Oxford’s tax depreciation exceeded its book depreciation by $41,400. Oxford’s tax rate for 2012 and years thereafter is 30%.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter 2
Problems-
I:2-29
I:2-30
I:2-31
I:2-32
I:2-33
I:2-35
I:2-37
I:2-38
I:2-42
I:2-43
I:2-46
I:2-55
I:2-63
Chapter 3
Problems-
I:3-34
I:3-35
I:3-39
I:3-41
I:3-42
I:3-43
I:3-44
I:3-61
Chapter 4
Problems-
I:4-33
I:4-34
I:4-35
I:4-39
I:4-40
I:4-41
I:4-42
I:4-43
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter 2
Problems-
I:2-29
I:2-30
I:2-31
I:2-32
I:2-33
I:2-35
I:2-37
I:2-38
I:2-42
I:2-43
I:2-46
I:2-55
I:2-63
Chapter 3
Problems-
I:3-34
I:3-35
I:3-39
I:3-41
I:3-42
I:3-43
I:3-44
I:3-61
Chapter 4
Problems-
I:4-33
I:4-34
I:4-35
I:4-39
I:4-40
I:4-41
I:4-42
I:4-43
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the written description of the DUB 5 process in the case, and the rough diagram at the bottom of the case, create your Level 0 DFD.
You can submit a DFD that is hand-drawn and scanned, use Excel or Visio, or another program.
3) Level 1 DFD for the Credit Review Process
Going down one level in the DFD, focus on the credit review process only and create a DFD for this process.
Again, you can submit a hand-drawn DFD or use an automated program. Your choice.
4) Observations About the Processes
Discuss your observations about the strengths and weaknesses of DUB 5’s order processing system.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HA2042 Accounting Information Systems (T1, 2012) Group Assignment (20% of Final Mark) The assignment has two parts namely Part 1 (10 marks) & 2 (10 marks). Part 1 will require you to evaluate the payroll system for the Skip-Rope Manufacturing Company. Part 2 will involve a company called Kowal Manufacturing Company in which you are required to identify the weaknesses in their current system among others. The two (2) cases are selected form you textbook, Accounting Information Systems 12th edition by M.B. Romney and P.J. Steinbart.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The case draws primarily from textbook material presented in Part II Control and Audit of AIS. However, please bring in external reference source(s) when responding to the questions or discussing the case.
I suggest that you structure your paper as follows:
1) Summary of the Case (1-2 paragraphs)
2) Responses to the 4 questions
3) Concluding Remarks (1-2 paragraphs) – for example, if Rachel had not been a whistleblower, would Sandy have been caught? Would an improved computerized accounting system help prevent or catch this type of theft?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
homework needed in a few hours. Parts 2&3
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting homework
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
#1 Marvel Parts, Inc., manufactures auto accessories. One of the company’s products is a set of seat covers that can be adjusted to fit nearly any small car. The company has a standard cost system in use for all of its products. According to the standards that have been set for the seat covers, the factory should work 780 hours each month to produce 2,600 sets of covers. The standard costs associated with this level of production are: Total Per Set of Covers Direct materials $59,280 $22.80 Direct labor $7,332 2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 1:
Horowitz Company is planning to produce 2,000 units of product in 2012. Each unit requires 3 pounds of materials at $6 per pound and a half-hour of labor at $14 per hour. The overhead rate is 70$ of direct labor.
- Compute the budgeted amounts for 2012 for direct materials to be used, direct labor, and applied overhead.
- Compute the standard cost of one unit of product.
- What are the potential advantages to a cooperation of using standard costs?
Problem 2
Armand Company is considering a capital investment of $150,000 in additional productive facilities. The new machinery is expected to have a useful life of 5 years with no salvage value. Depreciation is by the straight-line method. During the life of the investment, annual net income and cash inflows are expected to be $18,000 and $48,000, respectively. Armando has a 12% cost of capital rate, which is the minimum acceptable rate of return on the investment.
- Compute (1) the annual rate of return and (2) the cash payback period on the proposed capital expenditure.
- Using the discounted cash flow technique, compute the net present value.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Need it done in by 730pm eastern standard time
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
u03a1 Inflow Outflow Investing Financing & Operating 3. Payment to suppliers for merchandise purchased. 2. Sale of common stock. 1. Sale of a piece of company equipment. 4. Payment to lenders for interest on note payable. 5. Sale of investments in other companies. 6. Purchase of land to expand plant size. 7. Payment to stockholders as cash dividends. 8. Sale of goods or services. 9. Payment to employees for wages and salaries. 11. Payment to government for property and income taxes. 12. Collection of principal on loans to other entities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash Flow Statement u03a2 Info BUS3061 Fundamentals of Accounting Assignment u03a2 Template Cash Flow from Operating Activities: Cash Flow from Investing Activities: Cash Flow from Financing Activities: Assets Cash Accounts receivable Inventory Land Equipment Accum. Depreciation – Equipment Total Liabilities and Equities Accounts payable Bonds payable Common stock Retained earnings Difference Skylar Enterprises, Inc. Comparative Balance Sheets Additional Information: 1. Net income for 2012 was $103,000. 2. Cash dividends of $45,000 were paid. 3.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Must be done either in a word format or excel format one or the other not both. I can only submit one format
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please follow the same instructions mentioned inside homework file
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
There are three business ownership types: (1) proprietorship, (2) partnership, and (3) corporation. Many of their accounting transactions are similar. However, there are some business events that require special transaction handling in accounting entries. In this assignment, you will identify and prepare entries for the corporate ownership business type. Instructions For this assignment, use the BUS3061 Assignment u04a3 Template (listed in Resources). Imagine you are an accountant for J. Malone’s Law Firm, Inc. The accounts and transactions of the firm are listed below.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I ATTACHED ; THE QUESTIONS IN A FILE I NEED THE ANSWERS
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Resources: Ch. 11 & 12 of Financial Accounting
Complete Exercises E11-15, E12-1, & E12-2.
Complete Problem 11-6A.
Submit as a Microsoft Excel Document
needs an A
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need this assignment back as soon as possible!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CASE #1: Sophia Wise Computer Sales is a merchandiser and purchases its products directly from manufacturers. In turn, it sells those products to its various customers. One of its customers is Hillary Zabkar Electronics. The following transactions took place between Sophia Wise (seller) and its customer, Hillary Zabkar Electronics during the month of December:
|
Dec 1
|
Sold merchandise to Hillary Zabkar on credit for $5,000, terms 3/10, n/30. The items sold had a cost of $3,500
|
|
Dec 3
|
Purchased merchandise from a manufacturer for cash, $720.
|
|
Dec 4
|
Purchased merchandise from a manufacturer on credit for $2,600, terms 1/20, n/30.
|
|
Dec 5
|
Issued a credit memorandum for $300 to its customer Hillary Zabkar Electronics who returned merchandise purchased Nov 29th. The returned items had a cost of $210
|
|
Dec 11
|
Received payment for merchandise sold Dec 1
|
|
Dec 15
|
Received a credit memorandum from a manufacturer for the return of faulty merchandise purchased on Dec 4 for $600.
|
|
Dec 18
|
Paid freight charges of $200 for merchandise ordered last month (FOB shipping point)
|
|
Dec 23
|
Paid for the merchandise purchased Dec 4 less the portion that was returned
|
|
Dec 24
|
Sold merchandise to Hillary Zabkar on credit for $7,000, terms 2/10, n/30. The items had a cost of $4,900
|
|
Dec 31
|
Received payment for merchandise sold on Dec 24
|
Problem #1
Assuming a perpetual inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Sophia Wise Computer Sales must make to record these transactions:
Problem #2
Assuming a periodic inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Sophia Wise Computer Sales must make to record these transactions:
Problem #3
Assuming a perpetual inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Hillary Zabkar Electronics must make to record these transactions:
Problem #4
Assuming a periodic inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Hillary Zabkar Electronics must make to record these transactions:
CASE #2::
Sarah Perreault Corp. sold 6,400 units of its product at $45 per unit in year 2013 and incurred operating expenses of $6 per unit in selling them. It began the year with 600 units in inventory and the following transactions took place during the fiscal year:
|
DATE
|
ACTIVITY
|
UNITS
|
PRICE
|
|
Jan 1
|
Beginning inventory
|
600
|
$18 per unit
|
|
Feb 20
|
Purchase
|
1,500
|
$19 per unit
|
|
May 16
|
Purchase
|
700
|
$20 per unit
|
|
Oct 3
|
Purchase
|
400
|
$21 per unit
|
|
Dec 11
|
Purchase
|
3,300
|
$22 per unit
|
|
Feb 22
|
Sale
|
750
|
$45 per unit
|
|
May 15
|
Sale
|
890
|
$45 per unit
|
|
Sep 11
|
Sale
|
775
|
$45 per unit
|
|
Dec 28
|
Sale
|
3,985
|
$45 per unit
|
|
|
|
|
|
Problem #1
Prepare comparative income statements similar to the ones found in your text at Exhibit 6.8 for the three inventory cost flow methods of FIFO, LIFO and weighted average. The company uses a perpetual inventory system and its income tax rate is 30%.
In calculating cost of sales, be sure to demonstrate the flow of inventory during the year and prove your ending inventory amount by using the inventory cost formula (BI + Purchases = GA EI = CGS).
Problem #2
Discuss in 500 words or less how the financial results from using the three alternative methods would change if Sarah Perreault had been experiencing declining costs in its purchases of inventory?
Problem #3
What advantages and disadvantages are offered by using LIFO and FIFO? Assume the continuing trend of increasing costs.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter 7 Assignment
Must be in Microsoft Word.
Please see attached.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please answer all 3 questions fully!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Department of Business Administration and Accounting BU 216 Finance – Fall 2013 Shareholder Equity Problem (5 “Assigned Work” points) Due Date and Time Assignments are to be turned in at my office (JEM 169A) by 11:00 am on Tuesday Sept 10th. No late assignments will be accepted. Requirements This assignment is to be done individually. No two student deliverables should be the same or even highly similar. This assignment is to be written out neatly by hand (not using a computer software program, not even Word or Excel).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I will need this completed by 11/21/2013 please
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Part III ABC company has the opportunity to accept one of two jobs; it cannot accept both because they must be performed at the same time and ABC does not have the necessary labor force for both jobs. Indeed, it will be necessary to hire a new supervisor if either job is accepted. Furthermore, additional insurance will be required if either job is accepted. The revenue and costs associated with each job follow.
|
|
Cost Category
|
Job A
|
Job B
|
|
Contract price
|
$
|
808,000
|
|
$
|
691,000
|
|
|
Unit-level materials
|
|
244,800
|
|
|
225,150
|
|
|
Unit-level labor
|
|
250,450
|
|
|
306,600
|
|
|
Unit-level overhead
|
|
18,100
|
|
|
14,400
|
|
|
Supervisor s salary
|
|
115,670
|
|
|
115,670
|
|
|
Rental equipment costs
|
|
25,800
|
|
|
28,400
|
|
|
Depreciation on tools (zero market value)
|
|
20,900
|
|
|
20,900
|
|
|
Allocated portion of companywide facility-sustaining costs
|
|
11,000
|
|
|
8,900
|
|
|
Insurance cost for job
|
|
17,600
|
|
|
17,600
|
|
|
|
a-1.
|
Calculate the contribution to profit from Job A and Job B.
|
|
a-2.
|
Assume that ABC has decided to accept one of the two jobs. Recommend which job to accept?
|
|
b-1.
|
Assume that Job A is no longer available. ABC s choice is to accept or reject Job B alone. Calculate the contribution to profit from Job B.
|
|
|
b-2.
|
Based on your answer to requirement b-1, recommend whether to accept or reject Job B.
|
|
|
Part IV Seymour Chemical Company makes a variety of cosmetic products, one of which is a skin cream designed to reduce the signs of aging. Seymour produces a relatively small amount (14,000 units) of the cream and is considering the purchase of the product from an outside supplier for $5.70 each. If Seymour purchases from the outside supplier, it would continue to sell and distribute the cream under its own brand name. Seymour s accountant constructed the following profitability analysis.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Revenue (14,000 units $14.0)
|
$
|
196,000
|
|
|
Unit-level materials costs (14,000 units $1.70)
|
|
(23,800
|
)
|
|
Unit-level labor costs (14,000 units $.60)
|
|
(8,400
|
)
|
|
Unit-level overhead costs (14,000 $.40)
|
|
(5,600
|
)
|
|
Unit-level selling expenses (14,000 $.20)
|
|
(2,800
|
)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Contribution margin
|
|
155,400
|
|
|
Skin cream production supervisor s salary
|
|
(57,000
|
)
|
|
Allocated portion of facility-level costs
|
|
(13,900
|
)
|
|
Product-level advertising cost
|
|
(46,000
|
)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Contribution to companywide income
|
$
|
38,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
a.
|
Calculate the total avoidable costs.
|
|
b-1.
|
Calculate the total avoidable cost per unit.
|
|
b-2.
|
Should Seymour continue to make the product or buy it from the supplier?
|
|
|
|
|
|
c-1.
|
Suppose that Seymour is able to increase sales by 10,000 units (sales will increase to 24,000 units). Calculate the total avoidable costs.
|
|
c-2.
|
At this level of production, should Seymour make or buy the cream?
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
can someone do this same thing but in terms of another company. walmart as the company to be specific. Just look up the same things with this document but using walmart instead
24 hrs due time 🙂
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
question 2,3,4, 6 & 7. by Sunday 5pm 26th May 2013
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hi
I need help with accounting. I you are good please contact me.
Thanks
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
the assignment is attached I need it done in 24 hours, thank you.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Help with accounting, serious inquires, guarantee an A or money back and know Accounting very well. 24 hours to complete
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The first 60 questions are multiple choice. 1-20, 1-20 then again 1-20. Some scratch paper might be needed. A quick breeze likley for most with experience.
The last very 15 questions are more in depth questions to be awnsered.
Time Frame: around May 29th but can be extended to June 7th with out issue. I will be working on this as well. I just want to be sure I am right with my awnsers after I complete it. The last 15 will gurantee me that I am understanding what I am learning.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
-
Check Figures for Accounting Project:
Cash Receipts Journal; Cash Column: 90,411
Unadjusted Trial Balance Total:1,075,455
Net Income:254,829
Post Closing Trial Balance:355,756
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need help with a checkpoint for week 7 and discussion and final paper for week 9 .All required work is highlighted in the attached document.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
WRITTEN ETHICS CASE ASSIGNMENT- 50 POINTS TOTAL
INSTRUCTIONS:
Each of your answers should be a paragraph, so you will have a total of six paragraphs for the two cases.
Chapter 1
OBJECTIVE OF THE ASSIGNMENT:
The purpose of this written assignment is to enable students to utilize their writing skills as good oral and written communication ability is a requirement for success in the business world. Technology is powerful but has often resulted in a societal deficiency in properly communicating in a written form. Leaders in the corporate world have told educators to emphasize writing throughout the curriculum so that students will get an opportunity to use this skill in all of their courses including those that are science and numbers oriented. Since ethical issues are of such importance to accountants your writing assignment is based on this topic. All of us have our own set of ethical standards so your paper will only be evaluated on its completeness and use of language, not whether or not I agree with you.
DUE DATE OF ASSIGNMENT:
This assignment must be turned in no later than the last day of class, Thursday December 12th, 2013. If you wish to E-mail the assignment, you may have until Friday December 13th 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The cash budget is especially important to a firm when: ?A. there is not a lot of confidence in the sales forecast.?B. it has a relatively large amount of operating cash.?C. the P/E ratio has been trending downwards.?D. it may have to negotiate a short-term bank loan. 2. Which of the following costs are included in the cost classification that is based on the relationship between total cost and volume of activity? ?A. Variable cost and fixed cost.?B. Direct cost and indirect cost.?C. Product cost and period cost.?D. Committed cost and discretionary cost. 3.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Can’t pay more than the mentioned amount pls..
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting home work nswer need to be corrected ( i need it within 15 hours)
Q in red color only needs to be corrected
i will pay 50 $ USD
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need help completing the entire attached documents please
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This Bonus point project all you have to do is follow the steps in the Word Document.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Instructions to Students: Please complete the 3 problems below in Excel Each question is worth 50 points. 1. Roadmaster Tire Co. manufactures automobile tires. Standard costs and actual costs for direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead incurred for the manufacture of 5,500 tires were as follows: Standard Costs Actual Costs Direct Materials 82,000 lbs. at $5.10 82,600 lbs. at $5.25 Direct Labor 1,650 hrs. at $17.50 1,620 hrs. at $17.40 Factory Overhead Rates per direct labor hr., based on 100% of normal capacity of 1,500 direct labor hrs.: Variable cost, $3.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determine the following measures for 2012, rounding to one decimal placc: 1. ‘Working capital 2. Current ratio 3. Quick ratio 4. Accounts receivable turnover 5. Number of days’ sales in receivables 6. Inventory turnover 7. Number of days’ sales in inventory 8. Ratio of fixed assets to long-term liabilities 9. Ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity 10. Number of times interest charges earned 11. Number of times preferred dividends earned 12. Ratio of net sales to assets 13. Rate earned on total assets 14. Rate earned on stockholders’ equity 15. Rate earned on common stockholders’ equity 16. Earnings per share on common stock 17. Price-earnings ratio 18. Dividends per share of common stock
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting Basics for Managers Problem 1: Listed below are a number of financial statement captions. Indicate in the spaces to the right of each caption (1) the category of each item, and (2) the financial statement(s) on which the item can usually be found. Problem 2: At the beginning of the current fiscal year, the balance sheet of Arches Co. showed liabilities of $380,000. During the year liabilities increased by $10,000, assets increased by $55,000, and paid-in capital increased $20,000 to $165,000. Dividends declared and paid during the year were $60,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Case 2 – Financial Statement Analysis Case 20 points This case is designed to show you how the items we have discussed this semester would actually be reported in a company’s financial statements filed with the SEC. Use the 10-K Report for Hewlett Packard (you can locate the report at: http://h30261.www3.hp.com/phoenix.zhtml?c=71087&p=irol-irhome) to answer the questions below. You will need to use the entire report, including the Management Discussion and Analysis section as well as the footnotes and related disclosures. NOTE: DO NOT PRINT THE ENTIRE 10-K.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Take Test: Q9-CH10 https://myasucourses.asu.edu/webapps/assessment/take/launch.jsp?course_assessment_id=_511859_1&course_id=_262710_1&content_id=_8013066_1&step=nullSKIP TO COURSE MENU https://myasucourses.asu.edu/webapps/assessment/take/launch.jsp?course_assessment_id=_511859_1&course_id=_262710_1&content_id=_8013066_1&step=nullSKIP TO TOP FRAME TABS Content https://myasucourses.asu.edu/webapps/assessment/accessibility.jspAssistive Technology Tips [opens in new window] Instructions Description Non-Monetary Exchanges. This quiz will close at 11:00 PM on Friday, June 21st.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment, please do it on Microsoft word not excel.
Due tomorrow Thursday at 8a EST
Thank you.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attached. Show work that i may understand.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
i need a discussion on these please..
two short paragraphs each..
thanks!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attached. No word minimum. Original and quality work only.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In your own words please respond to the following. No word minimum. Please cite all sources using APA format. 1) To be successful, a company must anticipate its cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14)????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attached. No word minimum. Please cite any sources using apa format.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need attached spreadsheets done by Friday evening.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hello,
I need accounting help. Read my question throughly and then contact me.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
please see atached. One question only. Please provide original explanation. Cite any references using APA format. NO word minimum.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I also need help with this excersize
Cost-Volume-Profit Elements and Relationships
Your best friend just received a gift of $7,000 from his favorite aunt. He wants to save the money to use as “starter” money after college. He can invest it (1) risk-free at 6%, (2) taking on moderate risk at 8%, or (3) taking on high risk at 14%.
Help your friend project the investment’s worth at the end of four years under each investment strategy and explain the results to him.
Submission Requirements:
Complete your work in an MS Excel worksheet
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I havea sheet that I need you to fill. It’s not hard because I’ll give you two other sheets to take the answers from, it’s basically just getting the answers from the other sheets and putting them into the new sheet . I also think you’ll have to get some anwers from somewhere else, outside the sheets I have. The accuracy of the numbers and the due time are important.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week Two Assignment Angel Katrice Jackson ACC 206 Principles of Accounting II?Instructor: Jennifer Bolden 12/7/2013 ACC 206 Week Two Assignment Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Identify characteristics of a corporation, record issuance of stock, and illustrate retained
earnings transactions.
2. Prepare and analyze the income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week Three Assignment Please complete the following five exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Overhead application: Working backward The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculating Net Asset Value. Given the information below, calculate the net asset value for the Boston Equity mutual fund. Total assets $225,000,000 Total liabilities 5,000,000 Total number of shares 4,400,000 2. Calculating the Rate of Return of Investment Using Financial Leverage. Suppose Shaan invested just $10,000 of his own money and had a $90,000 mortgage with an interest rate of 8.5 percent. If after three years he sold the property for $120,000. a. What is his gross profit? b. What is his net profit/loss? c. What is the rate of return on investment? 3.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Part 1 100-200 words Please respond to this Discussion question using the information from the personal budget you calculate using the http://threadcontent.next.ecollege.com/CurrentCourse/expense_dq.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hi,
Please find the attached accounting assignment. I need total of 1600 words including answers of all the questions.
Deadline in 10 hours from now.
I will pay $10 for this.
Need proper references and in-text citations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need help with this accounting exam. The exam is given in attached word file. It is 48 questions multiple choice. I want all correct answers. I also want solution of all numerical type calculative questions along with correct answer and for theory type questions I want correct answers only.
Please let me know if you can meet my requirements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Slippery Rock University
Intermediate Acounting Exam 4
Problem 1
Problem 2 Cash Flow
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
UMUC – ACCT 220 EXAM 1 – Part 2 This is Part 2 of Exam 1. Part 1 is a multiple choice exam is located on WileyPlus. Part 1 is a timed exam. You should treat Part 2 (this part) like a Take-home Exam. You can open it, save the document with your filename, work through the problems, add your answers to your saved document and then submit it via the Webtycho Assignments location for Exam 1 Part 2. Part 2 of the Exam is worth 40 points. Each part is based on Chapters 2 and 3. Directions: Please complete the following 4 parts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I have an exam due in 1 1/12 hours!! I need help! It’s 20 questions long. I am willing to pay for the first few answers posted. I will post the exam in a little bit but I do need help! No handshakes on this one since I will purchase multiple answers. Thanks!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
800000 900000 100000 90000 80000 80000 100000 113000 20000 23000 20000 20500 520000 614500 700000 1100000 520000 614500 120000 120000 1100000 1594500 225000 648000 200000 284500 75000 92000 900000 900000 900000 820000 600000 600000 2900000 3344500 900000 850000 900000 900000 1100000 1594500 2900000 3344500 Cost of Goods Sold Depreciation Expense Investment Income Net Income Dividends Paid Land Total Assets Liabilities Common Stock Retained Earnings Foxx Corporation Financial Statements Income Statement Statement of Changes in Retained Earnings For Y
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The assignment is the attach file. Please, read the attachment for complete directions.
DeTazz
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Maga Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations: Selling price $ 173 Units in beginning inventory 0 Units produced 3,510 Units sold 3,240 Units in ending inventory 270 Variable cost per unit: Direct materials $ 47 Direct labor $ 56 Variable manufacturing overhead $ 12 Variable selling and administrative $ 14 Fixed costs: Fixed manufacturing overhead $ 108,810 Fixed selling and administrative $ 9,720 Requi
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Silmon Corporation makes a product with the following standard costs: Inputs Standard Quantity or Hours Standard Price or Rate Direct materials 6.0 grams $ 9.00 per gram Direct labor 0.5 hours $ 16.00 per hour Variable overhead 0.5 hours $ 3.00 per hour In June the company produced 5,300 units using 32,530 grams of the direct material and 2,690 direct labor-hours. During the month the company purchased 25,200 grams of the direct material at a price of $8.80 per gram. The actual direct labor rate was $16.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise 12-5 Evaluate risk ratios [LO3] The 2012 income statement of Adrian Express reports sales of $16 million, cost of goods sold of $9.6 million, and net income of $1.6 million. Balance sheet information is provided in the following table. All amounts are in thousands.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
2012 2011 431000 372350 200000 187550 99000 91050 8350 6850 307350 285450 123650 86900 2012 2011 1 1 0.46403712296983757 1 1 good student April Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 Expenses: Cost of goods sold Net income MARINER DESIGNS, INC. Comparative Income Statement Year Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 Net sales revenue Selling and general expenses Other expense Total expense 2. Selling and general expense Total expenses Req.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Due tomorrow.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
See attached
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Activity-based costing
|
|
accumulates overhead in one cost pool, then assigns the overhead to products and services by means of a cost driver.
|
|
|
allocates overhead to multiple activity cost pools, and it then assigns the activity cost pools to products and services by means of cost drivers.
|
|
|
assigns activity cost pools to products and services, then allocates overhead back to the activity cost pools.
|
|
|
allocates overhead directly to products and services based on activity levels.
|
The break-even point is where
|
|
total sales equal total variable costs.
|
|
|
contribution margin equals total fixed costs.
|
|
|
total sales equal total fixed costs.
|
|
|
total variable costs equal total fixed costs.
|
When a company assigns the costs of direct materials, direct labor, and both variable and fixed manufacturing overhead to products, that company is using
Seasons Manufacturing manufactures a product with a unit variable cost of $100 and a unit sales price of $176. Fixed manufacturing costs were $480,000 when 10,000 units were produced and sold. The company has a one-time opportunity to sell an additional 1,000 units at $140 each in a foreign market which would not affect its present sales. If the company has sufficient capacity to produce the additional units, acceptance of the special order would affect net income as follows:
|
|
Income would increase by $40,000.
|
|
|
Income would decrease by $8,000.
|
|
|
Income would increase by $8,000.
|
|
|
Income would increase by $140,000.
|
Carter, Inc. can make 100 units of a necessary component part with the following costs:
|
Direct Materials
|
$120,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
20,000
|
|
Variable Overhead
|
60,000
|
|
Fixed Overhead
|
40,000
|
If Carter can purchase the component externally for $220,000 and only $10,000 of the fixed costs can be avoided, what is the correct make-or-buy decision?
A company has a process that results in 15,000 pounds of Product A that can be sold for $16 per pound. An alternative would be to process Product A further at a cost of $200,000 and then sell it for $28 per pound. Should management sell Product A now or should Product A be processed further and then sold? What is the effect of the action?
|
|
Sell now, the company will be better off by $200,000.
|
|
|
Sell now, the company will be better off by $20,000.
|
|
|
Process further, the company will be better off by $180,000.
|
|
|
Process further, the company will be better off by $20,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Competency 319.1.3 Capital Budgeting Analysis – The graduate correctly applies time value of money techniques and techniques that ignore present value for capital investment decisions.
Competency 319.2.1 Technology Tools – The graduate uses information technology tools for specified business purposes.
Competency 319.2.5 Information Management – The graduate selects appropriate technology applications to manage information and make decisions in given situations.
Objectives:
319.1.3-01: Calculate net present value based on a given set of facts.
319.1.3-02: Apply the results of a net present value calculation to a given decision situation.
319.1.3-03: Calculate internal rate of return based on a given set of facts.
319.1.3-04: Apply the results of an internal rate of return calculation to a given decision situation.
319.1.3-05: Calculate the period of time required to recoup the money expended for new equipment in a given situation.
319.1.3-06: Calculate the accounting rate of return based on a given set of facts.
319.1.3-07: Explain the relationship of the accounting rate of return to the internal rate of return for the same capital investment alternative.
319.1.3-08: Calculate net cash flow in a given situation.
319.1.3-09: Explain the impact of depreciation on net cash flow.
319.1.3-10: Explain the role of the weighted average cost of capital in capital budgeting analysis.
319.2.1-04: Produce a computer-based presentation on a business topic.
319.2.5-05: Demonstrate the appropriate use of specified software application in a given situation.
It is imperative that you enter your first initial and last name in the fields designated on the template. Your work and results will be based on an individualized dataset that will auto load in the template when you enter your first initial and last name. Your work will not be correctly graded if you fail to complete these fields.
Introduction:
Entrepreneur D supplements income from a professional practice by investing in start-up and other business opportunities that meet specific investment criteria. Entrepreneur D operates all of these extra business activities as a single limited liability company and utilizes discounted cash flow analysis as a primary tool for evaluating each potential investment. There is an opportunity to purchase the patent for a newly invented gardening tool that Entrepreneur D would manufacture and sell on a wholesale basis. Entrepreneur D has asked you to prepare an analysis of this investment opportunity and make a recommendation regarding the course of action to take.
Given:
Entrepreneur D plans to retire from professional practice and cease all business activities nine years from now. The plan for the garden tool is to produce and sell it for eight years
and then sell the patent and production rights to a national company. Entrepreneur D has negotiated a tentative lease on a building that is well suited for this manufacturing process. The building must be remodeled to meet manufacturing needs, and then it must be restored to its original configuration at the end of the eight-year lease. At that time Entrepreneur D will be able to sell some of the non-specialized equipment (e.g., forklifts) for small salvage values.
Building remodeling and new equipment purchases will require a front-end investment. The remodeling and equipment costs will be capitalized and depreciated over the eight-year period as one depreciation calculation using straight line depreciation. Realizable salvage value from disposing of the equipment at the end of eight years is estimated at approximately $60,000. There is no salvage value for the remodeling improvements.
The remodeling cost is given on the template in your individualized dataset.
Additional working capital will be required for business operations. The working capital required is given on the template in your individualized dataset.
Estimated annual cash receipts from tool sales are forecasted for the eight years of expected operations. The expected cash receipts are given on the template in your individualized dataset.
Estimated cash expenses for materials, salaries, supplies, utilities, and other cash expenses are projected for each of the eight years of expected operations. The expected cash expenses are given on the template in your individualized dataset.
The lease on the building requires that it be restored to its original configuration at the end of the expected eight years of operation. The estimated restoration cost s number is given on the template in your individualized dataset.
The working capital tied up in this project will become available for other types of investments at the end of the eight-year period.
Entrepreneur D has asked you to assume a 12% applicable weighted average cost of capital.
Entrepreneur D has also asked you to assume a combined federal and state income tax rate. The tax rate is given on the template in your indvidualized dataset.
Task:
A. Complete the attached Capital Budgeting Template by doing the following:
1. Calculate the net cash flow that should be used for each year in the discounted cash
flow analysis.
2. Calculate the net present value (NPV) of this project using a discount rate equal to
the company s weighted average cost of capital. Round all dollar amounts to the
nearest whole dollar.
3. Calculate the expected yield on the project using the discounted cash flow internal
rate of return (IRR) method. Round all dollar amounts to the nearest whole dollar.
4. Calculate the accounting rate of return for this project.
5. Calculate the unadjusted payback period. State your answers in years and months.
B. Prepare a computer-based presentation in which you do the following:
1. Identify what the correct net cash flow for the second year would be if all cash
expenses were as described in the scenario but there were no depreciation expense.
a. Explain the impact of depreciation on net cash flow for the second year.
2. Based upon your NPV analysis in part A2, make a recommendation to Entrepreneur D
regarding what decision to make.
a. Explain why this is an appropriate action.
3. Based upon your IRR analysis in part A3, make a recommendation to Entrepreneur D
regarding what decision to make.
a. Explain why this is an appropriate action.
4. Explain why the accounting rate of return on this project is different from the internal
rate of return for the same capital investment.
5. Explain the relative significance of the unadjusted payback period in this decision
situation.
6. Explain how the weighted average cost of capital should be used in capital budgeting
analysis when utilizing the NPV method.
7. Explain how the weighted average cost of capital should be used in capital budgeting
analysis when utilizing the IRR method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need to complete income tax returns for Foreign Bank Accounts. Requirement is to complete the tax return with the necessary forms (1040, 1099, W-2 for example)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Everything that the formal report need is in the attached powerpoints and the assignment/letter of authorization is attached also.
Needed parts:
– Cover – Letter of Acceptance
– Title Fly – Operating Agreement
– Title Page – Table of Contents
– Letter of Authorization – Abstract
Introduction:
– Background and Problem
– Scope/Limitations of the Report
– Sources & Methods of Data Collection
– Organization of the Report
Overall:
– Body
– Conclusions
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Review the transactions and financial position of Outfitters Supply Co. in the Excel Template.
Requirements:
- Journalize the transactions, omitting explanations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need these question Solved.
Please check my price than contact me i will pay 5Bucks for each Question.total 15 Bucks .
No negotiation on Price
I need in 12 Hours No more time is allowed.
Solution must be correct and accurate.
I need reliable tutors only
Thank you
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need these question Solved.
Please check my price than contact me i will pay 5Bucks for each Question.total 15 Bucks .
No negotiation on Price
I need in 12 Hours No more time is allowed.
Solution must be correct and accurate.
I need reliable tutors only
Thank you
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The case study is the homework. Refer to attachment. Due on Wednesday, Absolute Latest
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
All instrcutions are included in the file please do all rquirements. I think “upstream/downstream sales are involved. You have to do a Carry forward schedule, consolidation worksheet, eliminating entries and the workpapers. Aside the main problem, please do the extra credit too. I have included a file (an example of the format; how we have done the carry forward schedule, consolidation worksheet and 7 eliminating entries in class). I only want an accounting expert for this please.
P.S. This is college work. Please do a good job.
Thanks!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
using this table when necessary for 5-6, 5-7 ang 5-8.
|
|
Total
|
Per Unit
|
%Sales
|
Total
|
|
Sales (quantity*price)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Less: Variable Cost
|
|
|
|
|
|
Contribution Margin
|
|
|
|
|
|
Less: Fixed Cost
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net Income
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
^Unit Contribution
Margin
|
^Contribution
Margin Ratio
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hi Pls help to correct my answer and teach me as attached question
Australia Accounting
*** here is the lecture note relevant to the topic.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need help my tutor has not responded back to me and this was due yesturday on Dec 8th. I have to have this assignment done and turned in today. please this leaves about 51/2 hours to do this please someone help.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need some help on this Accounting Test
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On March 1, of the current year the Johnson Company negotiated a, 12%, 1-year, $100,000 note with Low Mountain Savings and Loan. Show the effects on the accounting equation, by account title: 1. At the origination of the loan. Assets = Liabilities + Equity 2. To record year-end interest. Assets = Liabilities + Equity
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
week 8 assignments
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CPA Exam Comparison Instructions Compare and contrast the exam contents, requirements, and other aspects of the new CPA certication with TWO of the following other accounting certification exams: Certified Management Accountant (CMA), Certified Internal Auditor (CIA), Certified Governmental Financial Manager (CGFM).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PLeases see attached. Original work only. Please cite all sources using APA format. NO word minimum. Thank you.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Will you get Social Security Benefits? I am posting a link to the Director of the Congressional Budget Office’s blog. It has a short writeup on the rising costs of Social Security and healthcare costs the federal government is responsible for. Please post a comment. All I want you to do is say if you think you will get Social Security when you retire. Since I am a “Baby-boomer”, I’m pretty sure I will. How about you? www.cbo.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On pages 147-148, there is an All About You Activity. It is Broadening Your Perspectives (BYP 3-7). 1. After reading the scenario and the Instructions, post a response to either situation (a), (b) or (c). 2. In your response, say if you would disclose the information or not in your loan application. 3. Then explain your choice On pages 147-148, there is an All About You Activity. It is Broadening Your Perspectives (BYP 3-7). 1. After reading the scenario and the Instructions, post a response to either situation (a), (b) or (c). 2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Four — DQ 1 due Day 2 (Tuesday)
The Accounting Cycle
- Describe the required steps in the accounting cycle. Be sure to incorporate the accounting equation and how debits and credits work in your discussion.
Week Four — DQ 2 due Day 4 (Tuesday)
Year-End Closing Entries
- Describe the nature and purpose of the adjusted trial balance.
- Explain the purpose of closing entries. Is there any difference in how closing entries are recorded as compared with recording daily transactions and adjusting entries Why or why not?
GIVE ANSWER IN AT LIST 100 – 150 words to each
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nov. 1 Louis Ruiz invests $20,000 to start his own consulting agency.
Journal, post, trial balance, adjusting enteries, adjusted trial balance, financial statements, closing enteries.
There are xix questions..pl see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Each DQ 150- words +. Cite work with reference. Post answer an attachment
What do you think is the major purpose of financial statements? Why? Explain what type of information can be derived from financial statements. List references if you use a source other than the text.
Why is budgeting so important? What are the appropriate uses of a budget? How can budgets be mismanaged or misunderstood? What are some criteria you would use to choose between a fixed and a flexible budget? Explain your answers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Your Course Project
Financial Statement Analysis Project — A Comparative Analysis of Kohl s Corporation and J.C. Penney Corporation
Below is the link for the financial statements for Kohl s Corporation for the 2010 fiscal year ending January 29, 2011. Under the term Groupings Filter, change the term All Forms to Annual Filings using the drop-down arrow and press Search.
You should then scroll down and select the 10k dated 3/18/2011 and choose to download in Word or PDF format.
http://www.kohlscorporation.com/InvestorRelations/sec-filings.htm
Below is the link for the financial statements for J.C. Penney Corporation for the 2010 fiscal year ending January 29, 2011. Under the term Groupings Filter, change the term All Forms to Annual Filings using the drop-down arrow and press Search.
You should then scroll down and select the 10k dated 3/29/2011 and choose to download in Word format.
http://ir.jcpenney.com/phoenix.zhtml?c=70528&p=irol-sec
A sample project template is available for download in Doc Sharing. The sample project compares the ratio performance of Tootsie Roll and Hershey using the 2009 financial statements of Tootsie Roll and Hershey provided in Appendix A and Appendix B of your textbook.
This course contains a Course Project where you will be required to submit one draft of the project at the end of Week 5 and the final completed project at the end of Week 7. Using the financial statements for Kohl s Corporation and J.C. Penney Corporation, respectively, you will calculate and compare the financial ratios listed further down this documentfor the fiscal year ending 2010 and prepare your comments about the liquidity, solvency, and profitability of the two companies based on your ratio calculations.The entire project will be graded by the instructor at the end of the final submission in Week 7 and one grade will be assigned for the entire project.
For the Final Submission:
Your final Excel workbook submission should contain the following. You cannot use any other software but Excel to complete this project.
1. A completed worksheet title page tab, which is really a cover sheet with your name, the course, the date, your instructor s name, and the title for the project.
2. A completed worksheet profiles tab, which contains a-one paragraph description regarding each company with information about their history, what products they sell, where they are located, etc.
3. All 18 ratios for each company with the supporting calculations and commentary on your worksheet ratio tab. Supporting calculations must be shown either as a formula or as text typed into a different cell. The ratios are listed further down this document. Your comments for each ratio should include more than just a definition of the ratio. You should focus on interpreting each ratio number for each company and support your comments with the numbers found in the ratios.
4. The Summary and Conclusions worksheet tab, which is an overall comparison of how each company compares in terms of the major category of ratios (liquidity, profitability, and solvency). A nice way to conclude is to state which company you think is the better investment and why.
5. The Bibliography worksheet tab must contain at least your textbook as a reference. Any other information you use to profile the companies should also be cited as a reference.
Required Ratios for Final Project Submission
1. Earnings per share
- Current ratio
- Gross profit rate
- Profit margin ratio
- Inventory turnover ratio
- Days in inventory
7. Receivables turnover ratio
8. Average collection period
- Asset turnover ratio
- Return on assets ratio
- Debt to total assets ratio
- Times interest earned ratio
- Payout ratio
- Return on common stockholders equity ratio
- Free cash flow
- Current cash debt coverage ratio
- Cash debt coverage ratio
- Price/earnings ratio [For the purpose of this ratio, for both Kohl s and J.C. Penney, use the market price per share on January 31, 2011.]
The Excel files uploaded in the Dropboxes should not include any unnecessary numbers or information (such as previous years’ ratios, ratios that were not specifically asked for in the project, etc.).
Please upload your final submission to the Week 7 Dropbox by Sunday at the end of Week 7.
For the Draft:
Create an Excel spreadsheet or use the project template to show your computations for the first 12 ratios listed above. The more you can complete regarding the other requirements, the closer you will be to completion when Week 7 arrives. Supporting calculations must be shown either as a formula or as text typed into a different cell. If you plan on creating your own spreadsheet, please follow the format provided in the Tootsie Roll and Hershey template file.
Please upload your draft submission to the Week 5 Dropbox by Sunday at the end of Week 5.
Other Helpful information:
If you feel uncomfortable with Excel, you can find many helpful references on Excel by performing a Google search.
The Appendix to Chapter 13 contains ratio calculations and comparison comments related to Kellogg and General Mills, so you will likely find this information helpful.
BigCharts.com provides historical stock quotes.
Either APA or MLA style can be used to complete the references on your Bibliography tab. There is a tutorial for APA and MLA style within the Syllabus.
The entire project will be graded by the instructor at the end of the final submission in Week 7, and one grade will be assigned for the entire project. The project will count for 18% of your overall course grade.
|
Category
|
Points
|
%
|
Description
|
|
Documentation and Formatting
|
9
|
5%
|
The report will be submitted in the form of an Excel Workbook, with each page (worksheet) of the workbook named appropriately.Please do not use any other software (such as MS Works or Lotus) to complete the project. A quality report will include a title worksheet tab, a worksheet tab for the profile of the two companies, a worksheet tab for the ratio calculations and comments, a worksheet tab for the summary and conclusion, proper citations if applicable, and a Bibliography worksheet tab for the references.
|
|
Organization and Cohesiveness
|
9
|
5%
|
A quality report will include the content described above in the documentation and formatting section. The ratios should be listed in the same order in which they appear in the project information above.
|
|
Editing
|
18
|
10%
|
A quality report will be free of any spelling, punctuation, or grammatical errors. Sentences and paragraphs will be clear, concise, and factually correct.Ratios will be expressed as numbers or percentages, depending on what is appropriate, as is shown in the textbook.Note that not all ratios are shown as percentages. Two decimal places is sufficient for each of the ratios.
|
|
Content
|
144
|
80%
|
A quality report will have correct ratio calculations and accurate supporting commentary. Any assumptions, if made, should be spelled out clearly. Supporting calculations must be shown either as a formula or as text typed into a different cell.
|
|
Total
|
180
|
100%
|
A quality report will meet or exceed all of the above requirements.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Week Two: Basic Accounting Principles and Concepts Cont.
|
|
|
Details
|
|
Objectives
|
1
1.1 Journalize basic transactions.
1.2 Post transactions from journals to ledgers.
|
|
Participation
|
Respond to weekly discussion questions and participate in class discussion
|
|
Individual
Exercise 1
|
Resource:Ch. 3 of Financial Accounting
Complete Exercises E3-4 & E3-9.
Complete Problems 3-5A & 3-6A.
Submit as either a Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Word document.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting 440 MCQ Bank 1. Stuart is the sole owner and a material participant in a business in which he has $50,000 at risk. If the business incurs a loss of $80,000 from operations, Stuart can deduct the full amount. a. True b. False 2. Stan owns a 20% interest in a partnership (not real estate) in which his at-risk amount was $38,000 at the beginning of the year. During the year, the partnership borrows $80,000 on a nonrecourse note and incurs a loss of $50,000 from operations. Stan’s at-risk amount at the end of the year is $44,000. a. True b. False 3.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need help with my accounting course project. It is a comparison between Oracle and Microsoft. I have attached two attachments. One is a template and the other is the actual project.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week 3 Assignment 1 David Bradley ACC 201 Principles of Financial Accounting Instructor: Phillip Sarakatsannis April 3, 2013 Week 3, Assignment 1 References RUNNING HEAD: 3.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
20-1B During the first month of operations ended September 30, 2012, Sungsam Inc. manufactured 3,200 flat panel televisions, of which 3,000 were sold. Operating data for the month are summarized as follows. Sales………………………………………………………………………………………………..$4,275,000 Manufacturing costs: Direct Materials…………………………………………$1,680,000 Direct Labor………………………………………………….720,000 Variable manufacturing cost……………………… 272,000 Fixed manufacturing cost…………..
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HOLMES INSTITUTE FACULTY OF HIGHER EDUCATION HA3032 Auditing Trimester 1 / 2013 ASSIGNMENT 1 You are required to read the following statement issued by ICAA (Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia and provide an essay of between 1,000-1,500 words (being the minimum and maximum). It should be properly referenced and must be primarily of your own work.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
hey neel,
this is something that my lecturer has given to us as a base to complete the assignment.
the heading pacific acceptance need to be put on the assignment as well…..
thanks
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACCT 201 Spring 2013 Name: Practice Exercise 3 Chapter 10 1. On October 31, 2011 Ronald signed a 2-year installment note in the amount of $50,000 in conjunction with the purchase of equipment. This note is payable in equal monthly installments of $2,354, which include interest computed at an annual rate of 12%. The first monthly payment is made on November 30, 2011. This note is fully amortizing over 24 months. Complete the amortization table for the first two payments by entering the correct dollar amounts in the blank spaces provided. In addition, answer the questions that follow.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
i have provided what i have started and the corrections that the teacher made. also the attachments to be used as anwser sheets for the work… the work is to be done on years 2009 and 2010. i will provide as much info as i can the rest can be looked up online. this is for the company research in motion…..
it is income statement and consolidated balance sheet for Research in motion, that is the companies name. info can be found online for years 2009 2010. there is also a ratio analysis and analysis for income statement and balance sheet with analysis as well as acid test liquid test and analysis like it shows on anwser sheet it has to be for 2009 and 2010 can find all info online but make sure to include a link of website in which info for these years was collected. please use the official RIM or research in motion website
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
When hospitals are paid for services, it is through payment structures. Payment structures include health maintenance organizations (HMOs), preferred provider organizations (PPOs), and capitation rates.
In this assignment, you will use the information from M2: Assignment 3 and
M3: Assignment 1 to develop a strategic plan for the hospital to begin managed care contract negotiations. You can use the SMH data file, which you had downloaded from the Doc Sharing area, to create your plan.
Based on your understanding of the costs, you will develop a plan for contract negotiations with a managed care provider. Include in the plan:
-
- A strategy for contract negotiation
-
- Details on each facility s costs and expected margins
- Comparisons between the three organizations, indicating which is in a stronger or weaker financial position
Using the SMH data file, you will do the following:
-
- Calculate inpatient gross profit for the major payers at the hospital.
-
- Calculate GP and GP percentage by payer.
-
- Comment on the results of your GP calculations.
-
- In this example, we assumed that patients from each payer incurred costs at the same rate. Is this assumption correct? What level of detail in cost identification should the hospital attempt to obtain? Provide your comments.
-
- Based on your understanding of your costs, you will develop a plan for contract negotiations with a managed care provider. In your plan, outline a strategy for contract negotiation.
-
- Based on your comparative analysis of the SMH, FP, and NFP facilities, is SMH in a better or worse position when it comes to contract negotiations? Provide your comments.
- Payers always want to move procedures from an inpatient setting to an outpatient setting. Why might this not be the best strategy for your financial situation? Provide your comments.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting practices and principles are at the heart of a manager s role. To understand the needs of operating a department, it is necessary to understand the importance of accounting in identifying operational needs.
Review Materia (WEEK 4)l: Annualizing Staffing worksheet (SEE ATTACHMENT) and Chapter 9 (IF NEEDED)
Write a 800- to 950-word paper, identifying the role of the health care manager, comparing productive and nonproductive time. Consider the following:
How are costs tied to staffing?
What is the difference between the annualized method and the scheduled-position method?
Why annualize staffing?
What is the benefit of recording productive and nonproductive time, if at all?
Cite at least two sources other than your text with reference page.
Format your paper consistent with APA guidelines.
NO PLAGIARISM
Post paper as an attachment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PLEASE read entire instructions that are provided
Instructions posted in attachments
Please cite work on worksheet. No plagiarism. Use reference for work cited (APA guidelines)
Chapter 11 provided, if needed
Dr. Smith and Brown supplemental included.
Any questions, ask before submitting please..
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
See Attachments
Complete Parts I, II, III.
Part III: Response should be between 100-150 word count for full credit per professor.
Chapters and Reserve Readings are Attached as resources (if needed)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Discussion Questions
Word Count: 150 minimum each question
Cited with Reference
DQ 1) Provide an example of a direct cost and indirect cost from your workplace or an organization with which you are familiar. What is the difference? Explain your answer. List references if you use a source other than the text.
DQ 2) Understanding the difference between fixed and variable costs, what area of a health care facility or physician practice do you think would have a greater amount of variable costs than fixed? What would you suggest to lower the fixed costs for the same area?
Chapter attached (If Needed)
No Plagiarism
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Help me with this one in 3-4 hours maximum. I want all correct answers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
see attachment4
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
-
- Identify, print, and read theStatement of Ethical Professional Practice posted atwww.IMAnet.org. (Search using “ethical professional practice.”)
- In a one page memo to me, describe, in your own words, the four overarching ethical principles underlie the IMA’s statement.
- Describe the courses of action the IMA recommends in resolving ethical conflicts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need help with accounting questions. I will need to show all calculation, can someoe help me?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P12-30A PrintTYK Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 DEBIT CREDIT Journal DATE ACCOUNTS AND EXPLANATIONS 2. Req. 2 Issuing stock and preparing the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet LO 3 [15-20 minutes] Paid-in capital in excess of par – common Stockholders’ Equity Paid-in capital: Retained earnings Total stockholder’s equity Total paid-in capital P12-30A Lincoln-Priest, Inc., was organized in 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journal entries and transaction accounting
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
5-14A 5-4A 5-2A Excel Instructions OASDI HI Tax FICA FUTA SUTA Earnings Name: 5-2A Total payroll Earnings subject to FUTA and SUTA Net FUTA tax Taxable x Rate = Net SUTA tax Total unemployment taxes Less: Wages paid in excess of $7,000 An asterisk (*) will appear to the right of an incorrect answer. Enter the appropriate numbers/formulas in the shaded (gray) cells. 5-4A 5-14A (6.2%) (1.45%) V. Hoffman A. Drugan G. Beiter S. Egan B. Lin M. Grady P.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw-hill.com/accountant has debited an account for $4,000 and credited a liability account for $2,100. Which of the following would be an incorrect way to complete the recording of this transaction? Credit another asset account for $1,900. Credit another liability account for $1,900. Credit an http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw-hill.com/expense account for $1,900. Debit another asset account for $1,900. Credit the owner’s capital account for $1,900. Alex Company has 10 http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw-hill.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Check the attachement and confirm if your 100% sure
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
425 3 126 554 270 154 52 476 78 3.9 Belinda Santos P 4 – 4 Revenues and gains: Net sales Interest Other income Total revenues and gains Expenses: Cost of goods sold Selling and administrative Income Taxes Total expenses Net Income Earnings per Share Alexian Systems, Incl Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31,2013 ($ in millions, except earnings per share) 2. Included in other income is an extraordinary loss of $90 million. The remaining amount is a gain on the sale of operating assets. 1. Administrative expenses include $40,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
i need this done in 3-4 hours from posting this question.
it is 10 simple multiple choice questions in accounting. i want all questions 100% correct. not a single question should be wrong.
respond only if you are confident.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 13-3A The stockholders’ equity accounts of Ashley Corporation on January 1, 2012, were as follows. Preferred Stock (8%, $49 par, cumulative, 10,200 shares authorized) $ 387,100 Common Stock ($1 stated value, 1,937,100 shares authorized) 1,408,700 Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par—Preferred Stock 123,200 Paid-in Capital in Excess of Stated Value—Common Stock 1,496,800 Retained Earnings 1,814,400 Treasury Stock (10,300 common shares) 51,500 During 2012, the corporation had the following transactions and events pertaining to its stockholders’ equity. Feb.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
American Guitar Company manufactures two different high quality acoustic guitars for retailers: beginner model and professional model. The company has two service departments: the maintenance department and the power department, and two manufacturing departments: the construction department and the finishing department. American Guitar chooses the reciprocal method to allocate service department costs. It uses operation costing to assign direct materials and conversion costs to its products, and absorption costing with normal costs for external reporting purposes.
In the Construction Department, the wooden guitars are built by highly skilled craftsmen and coated with several layers of lacquer. Then the units are transferred to the Finishing Department, where the bridge of the guitar is attached and the strings are installed. The guitars also are tuned and inspected in the Finishing Department[1]. American Guitar estimates to have an annual practical capacity of 6000 guitars (1500 units of professional model and 4500 units of beginner model). The budgeted sales for 2013 are 1300 units professional model and 4300 units of beginner model. The diagram below depicts the manufacturing process.
The following historical information has been collected from American Guitar’s accounting information systems:
|
2009
|
2010
|
2011
|
2012
|
|
Annual sales
|
4146(B) & 1611(P)
|
4456(B) & 1256(P)
|
4668(B) & 1322(P)
|
4075(B) & 1300(P)
|
|
July sales
|
393(B) & 183(P)
|
398(B) & 163(P)
|
405(B) & 168(P)
|
372(B) & 155(P)
|
|
2012
|
Total Overhead ($)
|
Total DLH of the two manufacturing departments[2]
|
|
January
|
134,000
|
2,210
|
|
February
|
137,000
|
2,280
|
|
March
|
148,000
|
2,510
|
|
April
|
155,000
|
2,790
|
|
May
|
157,000
|
2,980
|
|
June
|
165,000
|
3,590
|
|
July
|
169,000
|
3,490
|
|
August
|
168,000
|
3,030
|
|
September
|
163,000
|
3,040
|
|
October
|
157,000
|
3,380
|
|
November
|
139,000
|
2,420
|
|
December
|
133,000
|
2,100
|
|
Total
|
1,825,000
|
33,820
|
American Guitar s direct[3] and indirect MOH costs for the two service and two manufacturing departments in 2012:
|
Power Department[4]
|
Maintenance Department[5]
|
Construction Department
|
Finishing
Department
|
Total Amount
|
|
Labor-hours
|
2022
|
2032
|
18950
|
14870
|
37,874
|
|
Kilowatt-hours
|
2,000
|
7,000
|
40,800
|
30,200
|
80,000
|
|
Maintenance hours
|
140
|
60
|
800
|
1,000
|
2,000
|
|
Direct fixed costs
|
$60,000
|
$36,000
|
$480,000
|
$432,000
|
$1,008,000
|
|
Direct variable costs
|
$58,000
|
$40,000
|
$346,800
|
$358,200
|
$803,000
|
|
Indirect fixed costs
|
$9,600
|
|
Indirect variable costs
|
$4,400
|
American Guitar does not expect significant changes in its manufacturing costs in 2013.
At the end of June 2013, the balance in American Guitar s Materials Inventory account, which included 150 pounds of grade A veneered wood, was $2,640; the balance in the finished-goods inventory, which was valuated using the last-in, first-out (LIFO) method, consisted of 2 models, was $16,600.
|
Quantity and Unit Cost
|
|
Beginner model
|
20 units @ $430 each
|
|
Professional model
|
10 units @ $800 each
|
The following pertains to the month of July.
- There were no beginning inventories in both manufacturing departments.
- American Guitar’s work-in-process inventory on July 31 consisted of two jobs: B0642 and P0642. The ending WIP inventories at the finishing department for B0642 and P0642 have 10 EU and 6 EU respectively.
- Additions to and requisitions from the materials inventory during the month of July included the following.
|
Raw Materials
|
Purchased Parts
|
|
Additions
|
550 pounds of grade A veneered wood for $9,680
3300 pounds of grade B veneered wood for $41,580
|
100 set of premium bridges and strings for $1,840
400 set of regular bridges and strings for $6,560
|
|
Requisitions
|
|
Job B0639 (120 beginner units)
|
936 pounds of grade B wood
|
125 regular sets
|
|
Job B0640 (100 beginner units)
|
790 pounds of grade B wood
|
103 regular sets
|
|
Job B0641 (150 beginner units)
|
1170 pounds of grade B wood
|
153 regular sets
|
|
Job B0642 (15 beginner units)
|
118 pounds of grade B wood
|
10 regular sets
|
|
Job P0640 (30 professional units)
|
240 pounds of grade A wood
|
31 premium sets
|
|
Job P0641 (35 professional units)
|
273 pounds of grade A wood
|
32 premium sets
|
|
Job P0642 (10 professional units)
|
82 pounds of grade A wood
|
6 premium sets
|
- The average hourly rate for the construction and finishing departments in July was $15 and $14 respectively. The total payroll taxes and fringe benefits rate for American Guitar was 40% of wages paid. The July labor hours consisted of the following:
|
Account
|
Construction Department
|
Finishing Department
|
|
Job B0639 (120 beginner units)
|
350
|
264
|
|
Job B0640 (100 beginner units)
|
302
|
200
|
|
Job B0641 (150 beginner units)
|
448
|
285
|
|
Job B0642 (15 beginner units)
|
40
|
17
|
|
Job P0640 (30 professional units)
|
150
|
144
|
|
Job P0641 (35 professional units)
|
173
|
176
|
|
Job P0642 (10 professional units)
|
52
|
22
|
- 372 beginner models & 70 professional models were sold on account for $600 (beginner model) & $960 (professional model) each. The finished-goods inventory is valuated using LIFO method.
- The actual direct fixed costs for power department and maintenance department were $4,050 and $4,000 respectively. The actual direct variable costs for power department and maintenance department were $17,084 and $9,280 respectively.
- The actual direct fixed costs for construction department and finishing department were $40,100 and $35,800 respectively. The actual direct variable for construction department and finishing department were $33,084.60 and $34,038.40 respectively.
- Depreciation of the general facility and equipment shared by both manufacturing departments during July amounted to $12,000.
- Rent paid in cash for warehouse space used by the manufacturing departments during July was $1,200. Utility costs incurred for the warehouse during July amounted to $600. The invoices for these costs were received, but the bills were not paid in July.
- July property taxes on the general facility were paid in cash, $2,400.
- The insurance cost covering factory operations for the month of July was $3,100. The insurance policy had been prepaid.
- The costs of salaries and fringe benefits for sales and administrative personnel paid in cash during July amounted to $8,000.
- Depreciation on administrative office equipment and space amounted to $4,000.
- Other selling and administrative expenses paid in cash during July amounted to $35,000.
- The July 1 balances in selected accounts are as follows:
|
Cash
|
$138,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
21,000
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
5,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation: Facility & Equipment
|
102,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
13,000
|
Required:
Part 1
Submit a hard copy of your work and email an Excel workbook to support your calculations on or before the due date for questions 1 7.
- What is the predetermined manufacturing overhead rate for external reporting purpose? Is it the most appropriate rate for managerial accounting? Why?
- Prepare the journal entries to record the transactions in July using normal costing.
- Calculate the overapplied or underapplied overhead for July. Use the proration method to prepare a journal entry to close this balance.
- Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured for July.
- Prepare a schedule of cost of goods sold for July.
- Prepare an income statement for July.
- From the perspective of long-run product pricing, do you recommend American Guitar to keep its absorption costing with normal costs for pricing decision and performance evaluation? Why?
Part 2
Submit a hard copy of your work and email an Excel workbook to support your calculations on or before the due date for questions 1 11.
Recently, American Guitar has faced intense competition from oversea guitars manufacturers. Her competitors sell similar quality guitars averaged 25% less. American Guitar considers implementing the standard costing to improve cost control. After conducting task analysis in the manufacturing departments, American Guitar establishes the following standards:
1) Each finished guitar contains seven pounds of veneered wood. In addition, one pound of wood is typically wasted in the manufacturing process.
2) The veneered wood used in the beginner model has a standard price of $12 per pound and the professional model has a standard price of $18. The other parts needed to complete each beginner guitar (professional guitar), such as the bridge and strings, cost $15 ($18) per guitar.
3) The labor standards[6] for American Guitar’s two manufacturing departments are as follows:
|
Construction Department
|
Finishing Department
|
|
Beginner model (B)
|
3 hours of direct labor at $18 per hour
|
2 hours of direct labor at $20 per hour
|
|
Professional model (P)
|
4 hours of direct labor at $18 per hour
|
6 hours of direct labor at $20 per hour
|
- Assuming American Guitar implements the standard costing, and calculate the followings:
– Direct material and direct labor variances
– variable manufacturing overhead variances for both manufacturing departments in July.
– fixed manufacturing overhead variances for both manufacturing departments in July.
– standard cost for the beginner model and the professional model.
- Prepare the journal entries to record the transactions in July using the standard costing.
- Prepare entries to close all the variances using the proration method.
- Do you recommend American Guitar to price its products based on its standard costs? Why?
Prepare a presentation to answer the following questions:
- Do you recommend American Guitar to keep its current cost-accounting system or to implement the standard costing system? Why?
- Explain the interpretation and possible interactions between the variances calculated by the standard costing.
- Write a memo to the company evaluating American Guitar s July performance and indicate any appropriate action for management to fine-tune its strategy.
[1]Direct-material is added at the beginning of manufacturing process in construction department. The direct-material and conversion costs are incurred uniformly throughout the process in finishing department.
[2]American Guitar believes that overhead is affected by total monthly DLH of the two manufacturing departments.
[3] For a manufacturing department, direct costs refer only to overhead costs that are directly traceable to the department.
[4]Power department is to provide electricity to maintenance, construction and finishing department. Its service is measured by the kilowatt-hours. The kilowatt-hours provided by the department for 2010 & 2011 were 84,200 & 88,000 respectively.
[5]Maintenance department is to maintain all the equipment in power, construction and finishing department. Its service is measured by the maintenance hours. The maintenance hours provided by the department for 2010 & 2011 were 2,150 and 2,240 respectively.
[6] Direct-labor rates include employee benefits.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Discussion: 1- “Ethics in Management Accounting versus Financial Accounting” Respond to the following: – From the e-Activity, assess the effectiveness of the current Institute of Management Accountants (IMA) code of professional conduct in promoting ethical behavior and providing guidance for the dilemmas managerial accountants are confronted with today. In your assessment, compare the IMA code of conduct to the AICPA code of professional conduct and its effectiveness.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Discussion: 1″Labor and Materials Costs”:[250 words] Respond to the following: • From the first e-Activity, recommend how the American labor market can lower the direct labor costs of technology products while remaining competitive with the Asian market. • Evaluate and analyze how the U.S. can manufacture direct materials for technology products in the global marketplace at competitive costs. • As a Chief Financial Officer (CFO), recommend actions you could take regarding the company’s supply chain to reduce manufacturing costs of direct materials.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Attached is all the information i have 38 dollars to put down now.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hello,
This is for my accoutning class. I need help figuring out the Solvency Ratios for debt to total assets and times interest earned. I ned to know if this is a good or bad debt to assets ratio. I also need a horizontal and vertcal analysis for the balance sheet and income statement.
I do know that in order to find the debt to total assets you need to divide the debt by the total assets. I also know that interest earned in calculated by taking net income plus interest expence plus tax exspense. After that I am lost.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1 Which of the following statements about users of accounting information is incorrect? Answer a. Management is an internal user. b. Taxing authorities are external users. c. Present creditors are external users. d. Regulatory authorities are internal users.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need this assignment to be done perfectly in excel and it should be professional excel work with links in cells so that teacher could understand how the answer has come.
If confident to give me all correct solutions with professional excel work then contact me.
I need it done by night 9th Oct, 2013. It is about 35 hours fron posting this question.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Charlotte Motorcycle Repair Corporation purchased a machine on January 1, 2010, for $8,000 cash. The firm expects to use the machine for four years and thinks it will be worthless at the end of the four-year period. The company will depreciate the machine in equal annual amounts.
Requirements
1. Show the purchase of the machine and the first years depreciation in the accounting equation.
2. Show how the machine will be presented in the asset section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2010, and December 31, 2011, after appropriate adjustments
3. What amount of depreciation expense will be shown on the income statement for the year ended December 31, 2010? What amount will be shown for the year ended December 31, 2011?
4. Calculate the total depreciation expense for all four years of the assets life. What do you notice about the book value of the asset at the end of its useful life?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ultra Power, Inc. engaged in the following transactions related to long term liabilities during 2011:
a. On March 1, the company borrowed $50,000 for a machine. The loan is to be repaid in equal annual payments of $6,793 at the end of each of the next 10 years (beginning February 28, 2012); the interest rate is 6%
b. On October 1, the company borrowed $100,000 from the local credit union at an interst rate of 8%. The loan is for seven yhears, and Ultra power will make annual payments of $19,207 on September 30 of each year.
Requirements
1. For each loan, prepare an amortization schedule for the first four payments. Show the reduction in principal and the interest expense for each payment.
2. What total interest explense related to these two loans would Ultra Power, Inc. Show on its income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011
3. How much interst payable would Ultra Power Inc, show on its balance sheet at December 31, 2011?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Attached is the syllabus in word per your instructions…..
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Year Ending December 2012
|
Year Ending December 2011
|
Year Ending December 2010
|
|
Revenues
|
40,000 (.05%)
|
35,000
|
33,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
|
|
|
|
Salaries
|
15,000
|
10,000
|
9,000
|
|
Maintenance and Repairs
|
6,000
|
9,000
|
10,000
|
|
Rental Expense
|
2,500
|
2,500
|
2,500
|
|
Depreciation
|
2,000
|
2,000
|
2,000
|
|
Fuel
|
4,000
|
3,500
|
2,500
|
|
Total Operating Expenses
|
29,500
|
27,000
|
26,000
|
|
Operating Income
|
10,500
|
8,000
|
7,000
|
|
Sales and Administrative Expenses
|
6,000
|
4,000
|
3,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
2,500
|
2,000
|
1,000
|
|
Net Income
|
2,000
|
2,000
|
3,000
|
Above is a comparative income statement for Cecil, Inc. for the years 2010, 2011, and 2012. Calculate the profit margin for each of these years. Comment on the profit margin trend.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Afternoon, I have a very short deadline for this project.can anyone help? Deadline today 5:30.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I have 2 assignments I would like completed. One is a case study, The other is an extra credit assignment due by the 1st. Attached are the assigment guidelines.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Need the following assignment to be done today
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
due today. i uploaded the answers which another expert found for me. Unfortunately they are wrong. Please help
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
acct 1 h.w. due today. please help. can negotiate price
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I HAVE DONE MOST OF THE WORK PLEASE READ EVERYTHING CAREFULLY ATTACHMENTS BELOW
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
If it’s possible, show work so I can redo the problems step by step. Thanks
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The following information was made available from the
income statement and balance sheet of Lauren Company.
Item 12/31/10 12/31/09
Accounts Receivable $53,400 58,600
Accounts Payable 35,600 32,700
Merchandise Inventory 85,000 79,000
Sales (2010) 243,000
Interest Revenue (2010) 5,600
Dividend Revenue (2010) 1,200
Tax Expense (2010) 12,300
Salaries Expense (2010) 28,000
COGS (2010) 65,000
Interest Expense (2010) 3,600
Operating Expenses 28,500
Complete the cash flow from operating activities section for
Lauren Company using the direct method for the year ended
December 31, 2010.
2. Given the following balance sheet, complete a horizontal
analysis. Compute the percentage to the nearest tenth of a
percent.
2
Jill s Bikes
Comparative Balance Sheet
For Years Ended December 31, 2011 and 2010
(in thousands) 2011 2010 Difference Percentage
Assets
Current Assets
Cash and Equivalents $72 $94
Accounts Receivable, net 122 104
Inventory 288 232
Total Current Assets 482 430
Property, Plant and Equipment 638 358
Total Assets $1,120 $788
Liabilities
Current Liabilities
Accounts Payable $242 $148
Accrued Liabilities 48 66
Total Current Liabilities 290 214
Long-Term Liabilities 346 208
Total Liabilities 636 422
Stockholders Equity
Common Stock 70 60
Retained Earnings 414 306
Total Stockholders Equity 484 366
Total Liabilities and
Stockholders Equity $1,120 $788
Part B: Answer each of the following questions. Each answer is
worth 4 points.
1. Record the following transactions using the accounting
equation.
Example:
Assets = Liabilities + Equity
XXXX(cash) XXXX(accounts payable)
A. Amanda invests $17,000 cash into her merchandising
business.
B. She buys $6,500 of office equipment and $3,000 of office
supplies with cash from Office Depot.
C. Additional purchases were supplies for $35,000 on
account from various suppliers.
2. Journalize the following transactions and omit the explanations.
A. ABC Corporation purchased $15,000 of office furniture by
putting $7,000 down in cash and the rest on account on
April 8.
B. The corporation paid $60,000 for a two-year lease on
April 19.
C. The corporation had sales of $45,000, of which $35,000
were on account on April 20.
D. The corporation borrowed $25,000 by signing a note
payable on April 22.
E. The corporation paid $1,250 on one of its accounts
payable on April 26.
3. Prepare a trial balance from the following information for
Learn a New Language, Inc. for December 31, 2012.
Accounts payable $5,012
Common stock $9,692
Cash $3,928
Notes payable $1,439
Wages expense $777
Marketing expense $493
Equipment $8,345
Accounts receivable $1,142
Inventory $8,074
Sales $6,616
4. Compute the missing information from this post-closing trial
balance.
Cash $34,689
Accounts Receivable 9,467
Prepaid Rent 5,000
Prepaid Insurance (A)
Supplies 944
Accounts Payable $5,389
Wages Payable (B)
Common Stock 37,049
Retained Earnings 8,234
_______ _______
Total $52,356 $52,356
5. Journalize the following transactions using the perpetual
inventory method.
Aug. 6 Purchased $830 of inventory on account from
Johnston with terms of 2/10, n/30.
Aug. 8 Purchased $2,611 of inventory for cash from
Pillner Company.
Aug.15 Paid for August 6 purchase from Johnston.
Aug. 17 Purchased $1,743 of merchandise on account
from Luis Company with Terms of 3/15, n/45.
6. Given the following information, prepare a balance sheet for
Isaiah s Tool Shed for the year ending December 31, 2012.
Cash $65,750 Retained Earnings $179,319
Common Stock $35,000 Equipment $27,500
Accounts Receivable $11,478 Accounts Payable $29,450
Land $30,000 Inventory $78,311
Prepaid Supplies $7,357 Income Taxes Payable $4,209
Office Computers $11,345 Other PPE $31,446
Accum. Depr. (all) $23,459 Prepaid Insurance $8,250
7. Rick Company s beginning inventory and purchases during
the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012, were as follows:
(Note: The company uses a perpetual system of inventory.)
Units Unit Price Total Cost
January 1 Beginning inventory 18 $24 $432
March 12 Sold 13
April 11 Purchase 45 $29 $1,305
June 20 Sold 33
Aug 16 Purchase 35 $27 $945
Sept 11 Sold 29
Total Cost of Inventory
Ending inventory is 23 units. $2,682
What is the cost of goods sold for Rick Company for 2012
using LIFO?
8. Assume that in Year 1, the ending merchandise inventory is
overstated by $30,000. If this is the only error in Years 1
and 2, fill in the items below, indicating which items will be
understated, overstated, or correctly stated for Years 1 and
2.
Item Year 1 Year 2
Ending inventory ___________ _____________
Beginning inventory ___________ _____________
Cost of goods sold ___________ _____________
9. Below is a list of treatments of accounting topics. Place GAAP
on the line if the treatment is GAAP-based and place IFRS on
the line if the treatment is IFRS-based.
A. Interest and dividend income are reported in the
investing section of the cash flow statement.__________
B. Interest expense is reported in the financing section of
the cash flow statement. ___________
C. The use of LIFO is prohibited. ___________
Units Unit Price Total Cost
January 1 Beginning inventory 18 $24 $432
March 12 Sold 13
April 11 Purchase 45 $29 $1,305
June 20 Sold 33
Aug 16 Purchase 35 $27 $945
Sept 11 Sold 29
Total Cost of Inventory
Ending inventory is 23 units. $2,682
10. Record the necessary journal entries from the following bank
reconciliation information for July 31, 2011:
Bank Balance, July 31, 2011 $36,739
Checkbook Balance, July 31, 2011 36,444
Bank collection of note receivable 1,200 + 165
interest
Bank service charge 35
Deposits in transit 2,400
Outstanding checks 1,245
NSF check from customer 330
Correction of book error (check #456 written for $160,
recorded at $610) gas expense
11. Journalize the following transactions for Tammy Company:
Sept. 1 Sold $3,500 of merchandise to Jim on account
Oct. 1 Exchanged Jim s account receivable for a fourmonth,
8% note for $3,500
Dec. 31 Recorded accrued interest on Jim s note
Feb. 1 Jim paid off his note with interest (round to
nearest dollar)
12. A truck was purchased on January 2 at a cost of $60,000.
It s expected to be used for five years and to have a residual
value of $5,000 after 120,000 miles of service. The truck
was driven for 23,000 miles the first year and 25,000 miles
the second year. Calculate the depreciation expense to the
nearest dollar for the first and second years.
Method Year 1 Year 2
Straight-line ________ ________
Double-declining-balance ________ ________
Units-of-production ________ ________
13. Prepare the general journal entries for the following
transactions:
Jan. 2, 2011 Purchased land with a building on it for
$750,000. The land is worth $300,000.
Paid $150,000 cash down and signed a
mortgage payable for the balance.
Dec. 31, 2011 Depreciation is computed using the
straight-line method. The estimated
salvage value of the building is $75,000
and has an estimated life of 20 years.
July 1, 2012 The building and land are sold for $825,000
cash.
14. Journalize the following treasury stock transactions:
June 3 Reacquired 350 shares of $12 par common stock
at $10 per share.
June 7 Sold 180 shares of treasury stock for $16 per
share.
June 8 Sold 150 shares of treasury stock for $9 per
share.
15. Lowry Landscapes had net income of $50,000 for 2010.
Land was sold for $40,000, of which $3,000 was a gain.
The beginning cash balance was $53,000, and the ending
cash balance was $151,000. Depreciation expenses were
$11,000. Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year
ended December 31, 2010, for Lowry Landscapes using the
indirect method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1 5 2 5000 28000 285000 12000 90000 24000 195000 41000 28000 80000 60000 120000 80000 55000 81000 8000 161000 161000 6400 12180 50000 26580 1.18 5 5 3 5 5 4 10 0.06 500 20000 5000 0.08 0 1000 47000 20 1000 100000 46800 12 0.06 80000 24000 10 0.09 100 5 1000 12 0.1 5 6 32 2.5 1.18 5 5 7 0 -125000 0 -300000 1 58000 1 150000 2 75000 2 160000 3 67000 3 120000 4 50000 4 95000 5 5 8 245000 326000 0.08 0.18 0.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
There are 2 parts to this discussion, please answer each with at least 150 words and any references used. Part 1. Centralized or Decentralized? In a centralized company, top management, versus a decentralized company, makes all major planning and operating decisions where managers of separate divisions or units are delegated operating responsibility. Characterize businesses that you have previously worked for or currently work for as either centralized or decentralized.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Homework and discussion is attached.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E10-6 According to the accountant of Ulner Inc., its payroll taxes for the week were as follows: $198.40 for FICA taxes, $19.84 for federal unemployment taxes, and $133.92 for state unemployment taxes. Instructions: Journalize the entry to record the accrual of the payroll taxes. In a microsft word, or excel and in apa standards E10-8 Jim Thome has prepared the following list of statements about bonds. 1. Bonds are a form of interest-bearing notes payable. 2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This is paper instructions per teacher: You have been given the personal financial information for a client and are expected to render advice using the information they have provided. All of the information you will need can be found on the client data sheet. This is a real-life scenario, and therefore you will be dealing with real-life issues that a financial advisor would face. The client is likely to provide information you will not need to answer the questions, so review the information closely. Also, the client is not very organized with their records, so you must organize the data. You will have 2 files to upload a word document answering all of the questions below, and an excel spread sheet showing how you arrived at your answers (questions requiring an excel sheet are indicated with *). Each answer should be detailed and thorough, with calculations and references supporting your answer. I will count off for grammatical errors, and any answer that is not complete. As the project is a large component of your grade for this course, I recommend spending some time on this and using the book to justify your answer where necessary. I will give as much partial credit on missed answers as I can. However, if you show no work on how you arrived at your answer, it is not possible for me to give partial credit. Make sure to upload your word and excel documents in a format that is easily printable and put your name on each of them. There is to be no group work and I will not accept any late assignments.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Need help with chapters 22-25, see attachment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hi Need help with 4 WileyPlus problems.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hi I need help writing a reply to a classmate response in accounting class. it is due TODAY NOV 18, BY 10PM EASTERN TIME no less than 200 words with references and citations please. Plagarism free work please this will be sent through turnitin. Thank you
T wrote to dq 1
There appears to be some disagreement about the relevancy and usefulness of Activity Based Costing (ABC) among business leaders and accounting types. In fact, research conducted by Stratton, Desroches, Lawson & Hatch (2009) found that among both ABC users and non-users there were several major common concerns regarding the use and applicability of ABC. Specifically, their research revealed that concerns about how costs are allocated, ensuring that the allocations reflect the actual use of resources, a lack of timely information and difficultly with revising or updating the ABC system were commonly reported (p.35). However, the same researchers also found that these two groups (i.e. ABC users and non-users) most commonly reported that they perceived the benefits of ABC to include; better information upon which to base product decisions, an enhanced ability to conduct profitability analysis for individual products or services, and better information for assessing and making operational improvements and performance evaluations (p.33).
These results seem to imply a couple of key things. First, that it takes real work and commitment to implement and continue to administer an ABC program within an organization. Second, that if one successfully accomplishes the first challenge, the information gained can be very useful and worth the effort for the company.
In order to achieve success on the first item above, it appears that there are at least a couple of critical considerations. The initial implementation of an ABC program within a company needs to have the full support of management and the project team must include those key individuals necessary to correctly design and carryout the program (Agbejule, 2006, p. 68). Ensuring that project leaders and all staff involved in this phase have a good understanding and basic education about ABC is also important to ensuring the necessary organization commitment over time (Agbejule, 2006, p. 68).
Another consideration appears to be important to the overall long-term success of any ABC implementation. Specifically, companies need to understand that the program will likely need to be periodically revised and updated. Adopting an ABC program and then just leaving it alone may not result in the desirable outcomes and benefits suggested above. It appears that the project team will need to consistently evaluate the program to identify those things that are working well, and those that are not. In fact, Ray and Gupta (1992) point out that if ABC is to achieve its maximum effectiveness, it should be closely monitored (p. 46). They go on to opine that internal auditing of the ABC program should include specifically looking at the identified cost drivers, how common costs are being assigned and how new products or lines will be incorporated into the ABC program (p.46). Finally, the overall usefulness of the ABC program in comparison to the cost and effort of implementation should be frequently evaluated (Ray & Gupta, 1992, p.46).
Resources
Agbejule, A. (2006). Motivation for activity-based costing implementation. Journal of Accounting & Organizational Change,2(1), 42-73. doi:http://dx.doi.org/10.1108/18325910610654126
Ray, M. R., & Gupta, P. P. (1992). Activity-based costing. The Internal Auditor, 49(6), 45. Retrieved from http://search.proquest.com.proxy.davenport.edu/docview/202731031?accountid=40195
Stratton, W. O., Desroches, D., Lawson, R. A., & Hatch, T. (2009). Activity-based costing: Is it still relevant? Management Accounting Quarterly, 10(3), 31-40. Retrieved fromhttp://search.proquest.com.proxy.davenport.edu/docview/222805126?accountid=40195
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I am looking for tutorials on the ACC205 complete course. This is all 5 weeks; discssion questions and assignments. Please specify if you are including the final assignment or not.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week 3 Assignment: Chapter 4 and 5 Problems Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Chapter 4 Exercise 7 7. Overhead application: Working backward The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC225 Week 9 Final Project Comprehensive Problem-Perpetual
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment: CHAPTER 3 HW 1. Multiple Choice 3-1 A factor that causes or leads to a change in a cost or activity is a(n) a. slope. b. intercept. c. driver. d. variable term. e. cost object. 2. Multiple Choice 3-4 The following cost formula was developed by using monthly data for a hospital. Total Cost = $128,000,000 + ($12,000 x Number of Patient Days) In the cost formula, the term $128,000,000 a. is the total variable cost. b. is the dependent variable. c. is the variable rate. d. is the total fixed cost. e. cannot be determined from the above formula. 3.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week 6 – Chapter 7 Pre- Quiz Study 15 QUESTIONS Question 1 Which of the following stages of the management decision-making process is improperly sequenced? Evaluate possible courses of action ? Make decision. Assign responsibility for the decision ? Identify the problem. Identify the problem ? Determine possible courses of action. Assign responsibility for decision ? Determine possible courses of action.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
University of Phoenix, Northern Virginia Campus ACC 561 Accounting Course Quiz 1 (Chapters 1, 5, 6) Facilitator: Randolph A. Stanley Student Name:___________________________ Grade:__________________________________ Instructions: Please answer all questions. Each question worth 1point for a total of 25points. You must only select one answer for each question. 1. _____ refers to accounting information developed for managers within an organization. a. Internal auditing b. Managerial accounting c. Financial accounting Tax accounting 2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise 20-3
Exercise 22-1
Brief Exercise 23-3
Brief Exercise 23-4
Brief Exercise 23-6
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC/561
WileyPlus, Week 4 Assignment
Exercise 15-5
Exercise 16-3
Exercise 17-1
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC/561 WileyPlus, Week 4 Assignment Exercise 15-5 Exercise
Duggan Company applies manufacturing overhead to jobs on the basis of machine hours used. Overhead costs are expected to total $353,920 for the year, and machine usage is estimated at 126,400 hours.
For the year, $368,283 of overhead costs are incurred and 130,100 hours are used.
Compute the manufacturing overhead rate for the year.(Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25.)
|
Manufacturing overhead rate
|
$
|
_________per machine hour
|
(b) What is the amount of under or over-applied overhead at December 31?
(c) Prepare the adjusting entry to assign the under or over-applied overhead for the year to cost of goods sold.
Exercise 16-3
The ledger of Custer Company has the following work in process account.
Work in Process Painting
|
5/1 Balance 4,170
5/31 Materials 7,190
5/31 Labor 3,510
5/31 Overhead 2,210
|
5/31 Transferred out
|
|
5/31 Balance
|
|
Production records show that there were 500 units in the beginning inventory, 30% complete, 1,460 units started, and 1,450 units transferred out. The beginning work in process had materials cost of $2,480 and conversion costs of $1,690. The units in ending inventory were 40% complete. Materials are entered at the beginning of the painting process.
Instructions
(a) How many units are in process at May 31?
(a)
(b) What is the unit materials cost for May?
(c) What is the unit conversion cost for May?
(b) & (c)
(d) What is the total cost of units transferred out in May?
(e) What is the cost of the May 31 inventory?
Exercise 17-1
Wilkins Inc. has two types of handbags: standard and custom. The controller has decided to use a plantwide overhead rate based on direct labor costs. The president has heard of activity-based costing and wants to see how the results would differ if this system were used. Two activity cost pools were developed: machining and machine setup. Presented below is information related to the company s operations.
Standard Custom
Direct labor costs $43,700 $102,000
Machine hours 1,500 1,380
Setup hours 96 440
Total estimated overhead costs are $298,400. Overhead cost allocated to the machining activity cost pool is $195,100, and $103,300 is allocated to the machine setup activity cost pool.
Instructions
(a) Compute the overhead rate using the traditional (plant-wide) approach.
(b) Compute the overhead rates using the activity-based costing approach.
(c) Determine the difference in allocation between the two approaches.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Activity Based Costing:
CHALLENGES AND BENEFITS OF ACTIVITY BASED COSTING
APPLICATION OF ACTIVITY BASED COSTING IN AMERICA (TEXAS GENERAL SERVICES COMMISSION)
THE UTILIZATION OF ACTIVITY BASED COSTING MODEL IN CZECH REPUBLIC
ACTIVITY BASED COSTING IN CHINA: A CASE STUDY OF XU JI ELECTRIC CO. LTD
APPLICATION OF ACTIVITY-BASED COSTING SYSTEM ON THE AIR LINE COMPANIES
Essay:
You are required to write an extended essay of no longer than 2,000 words on the following:
1) ABC is still relevant for companies in all geographical locations critically discuss
Hints: Students should analyse the academic journals, professional (CIMA & ACCA) literature and other sources such as the economist and good quality newspapers to support your discussion.
Students should NOT: simply as assume the title of this essay is a fact, it is NOT, this is a statement. The critical analysis is KEY to this essay.
You must use the following article within your work as well as others which you have found throughout your own research, failure to do so will severely reduce your grade. We expect a minimum of five academic journal( CIMA & ACCA literature do not count as academic journals) articles to be used plus other sources mentioned above, the other articles should not be simply ones you have taken from this article:
Stratton, W., Desroches, D., Lawson, R. & Hatch, T. (2009) Activity-Based Costing: Is it still relevant? Management Accounting Quarterly. Spring, pp31-40
Note you are required to find four research studies which have examined companies within four different countries, use should try and find countries which are different in terms of culture. China, America, Tunisia and Portugal would be considered as having very different cultures, please note this is just an example.
This article must be cited in your essay and referenced in your bibliography.
ACCO 1095, Management Accounting 2012-13 14
You should use the library search tool to find this journal. This is located on the students portal under IT and library . The university has full access to this article you do NOT have to pay for it.
IMPORTANT POINTS
The essay should be properly referenced throughout using the Harvard style and have the list of references cited in the essay presented at the end of the assignment in the form of a bibliography. Students MUST use academic sources for their research. Failing to reference your work will result in a plagiarism enquiry.
1. This is an individual coursework – any collaboration beyond, perhaps, sharing information on relevant material is entirely unacceptable. This will also result in a plagiarism enquiry.
2. Sources such as Wikipedia are not acceptable as valid research sites.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
need to read all the attachments carefully, the information used needs to be from 2008, 2009, 2010. the actuall report is not to be written in essay form instead please use bulletins as much as possible for the information. All of the required info for the company is listed in the attachments…. Please use anwser sheets provided for the correct parts
PLEASE let me know if you need any other info…
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
accounting assingment on SAP (ERP)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
just question and answer, to ans question 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, and its sub units and exclude question 1, 3, 4, and 9 , but if you can help out with some sub units of the excluded questions please do. no word count, just a brief and straight to the point ans and easy to understand
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HMWK problem Rich Company’s experience shows that 20% of its sales are for cash and 80% are on credit. An analysis of credit sales shows that 50% are collected in the month following the sale, 45% are collected in the second month, and 5% prove to be uncollectible.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ch11 Student: 1.If 1 British pound can be exchanged for 180 cents of U.S. currency, what fraction should be used to compute the indirect quotation of the exchange rate expressed in British pounds? A. 1/180 B. 1/.56 C. 1.8/1 D. 1/1.8 2.Suppose the direct foreign exchange rates in U.S. dollars are: 1 Singapore dollar = $.7025 1 Cyprus pound = $2.5132 Based on the information given above, the indirect exchange rates for the Singapore dollar and the Cyprus Pound (from a U.S. perspective) are: A. 1.7655 Singapore dollars and 1.4235 Cyprus pounds respectively. B. 0.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Retained earning is Always equal to the amount of cash that the corporation has generated from operations. A part of the paid-in capital of the corporation. A part of the stockholders’ claim on the total assets of the corporation. Closed at the end of each accounting period. When stock is issued for legal services, the transaction is recorded by debiting Organization Expense for the stated value of the stock. par value of the stock. market value of the stock. book value of the stock. If Vickers Company issues 4,000 shares of $5 par value common stock for $140,000, a.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
See attachment plz
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. On April 1 of the current year, a company paid $150,000 cash to purchase 7%, 10-year bonds that had a par value of $150,000 and paid interest semiannually each April 1 and October 1. The company intends to hold these bonds until they mature. Prepare the journal entry to record the bond purchase, the receipt of the first semiannual interest payment on October 1 of the current year, and the accrual of interest for the year-end December 31. 2. BC Company uses a job order cost accounting system.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AC202 Homework Problem #1 Comparative statements for Kool Corporation are shown below: Calculate trend percentages for all income statement amounts shown. Use 2010 as the base year. Problem #2 . Express the following income statement information in common-size percents (round to nearest whole percent).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Homework Problem Prepare journal entries to record the following production activities for Sherman Manufacturing. a. Dec. 28 Incurred overhead costs of $79,000 (paid in cash). b. Dec 29 Applied overhead at 110% of direct labor costs which are $93,900. c. Dec 30 Transferred completed products with a cost of $258,200 to finished goods inventory. d. Dec 31 Sold $602,000 of product on credit. Cost is $271,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 1:
The 2012 accounting records of Liz Ten Transport reveal the following transactions and events. Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section using the direct method. (Not all of the items will be used.)
|
Payment of interest
|
$10,000
|
Collection of accounts receivable
|
$182,000
|
|
Cash sales
|
48,000
|
Payment of salaries and wages
|
53,000
|
|
Receipt of dividend revenue
|
18,000
|
Depreciation expense
|
16,000
|
|
Payment of income taxes
|
12,000
|
Proceeds from sale of vehicles
|
12,000
|
|
Net income
|
38,000
|
Purchase of equipment for cash
|
22,000
|
|
Payment of accounts payable for merchandising
|
115,000
|
Payment of dividends
|
14,000
|
|
Payment for land
|
74,000
|
Payment of operating expenses
|
28,000
|
Problem 2:
An inexperienced accountant for Nerys Corporation showed the following in the income statement: income before income taxes and extraordinary item $400,000, and extraordinary loss from flood (before taxes) $70,000. The extraordinary loss and taxable income are both subject to a 30% tax rate. Prepare a correct income statement.
***USE ATTACHED WORKSHEET FOR SOLUTION***
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acc Homework Problem # 1 processing costing (10 Points) Cromer Manufacturing Company produces a product in two departments: (1) Production and (2) Assembly. The company uses a process cost accounting system. a. Aug 3 Purchased raw materials for $51,000 on account. b. Aug 5 Raw materials requisitioned for production were: Direct materials Production department $30,000 Assembly department 14,000 c. Aug 8 Incurred labor costs of $57,000. d. Aug 12 Factory labor used: Production department $32,000 Assembly department 25,000 e.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
It appears you answered 100 questions for someone a few months ago and I must have the same class because they are the same as what I am working on. The link/address below is where I found it – not the first 15 ques, but lower down – the 100 further down. I feel pretty good on about 80% of them, but double-checking my answers v yours would be great. I’ll be done with all the questions this weekend and would then send to you. Can you assist with these 100 questions
1) Which of the following legal forms of organization is characterized by limitedliability?
a. Professional partnership
b. Sole proprietorship
c. Corporation
d. Partnership
2) The financial manager may be responsible for any of the following EXCEPT
a. keeping track of quarterly tax payments.
b. analyzing quarterly budget and performance reports.
c. analyzing the effects of more debt on the firm s capital structure.
d. determining whether to accept or reject a capital asset acquisition.
3) The financial manager s financing decisions determine
a. both the mix and the type of assets found on the firm s balance sheet.
b. both the mix and the type of assets and liabilities found on the firm s balance
sheet.
c. the most appropriate mix of short-term and long-term financing.
d. the proportion of the firm s earnings to be paid as dividend.
4) Wealth maximization as the goal of the firm implies enhancing the wealth of
a. the firm s stockholders.
b. the Board of Directors.
c. the firm s employees.
d. the federal government.
5) The amount earned during the accounting period on each outstanding shareof common stock is called
a. common stock dividend.
b. net profits after taxes.
c. earnings per share.
d. net income.
6) Cash flow and risk are the key determinants in share price. Increased cashflow results in ________, other things remaining the same.
a. an unchanged share price
b. a lower share price
c. an undetermined share price
d. a higher share price
7) A more recent issue that is causing major problems in the business communityis
a. short-term versus long-term financial goals of management.
b. the privatization of ownership.
c. ethical problems.
d. environmental concerns.
8) The implementation of a pro-active ethics program is expected to result in
a. a positive corporate image and increased respect, but is not expected to affect
cash flows.
b. a positive corporate image and increased respect, but is not expected to affect
share price.
c. an increased share price resulting from a decrease in risk, but is not expectedto affect cash flows.
d. a positive corporate image and increased respect, a reduction in risk, and enhancedcash flow resulting in an increase in share price.
9) The Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 was passed in response to
a. the decline in technology stocks.
b. insider trading activities.
c. false disclosures in financial reporting.
d. all of the above
10) The key participants in financial transactions are individuals, businesses,and governments. Individuals are net ________ of funds, and businesses arenet ________ of funds.
a. demanders; suppliers
b. purchasers; sellers
c. suppliers; demanders
d. users; providers
11) The over-the-counter (OTC) market is
Obviously, the amount the system lets me enter is not enough. I would pay what is fair for the 100 ques
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 21) 22) 23) 24) 25)26) 27) 28)????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC205: Principles of Accounting
Week 1
Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.
- Accounting Equation
As you have learned in this week s readings the Accounting Equation is Assets = Liabilities + Owners Equity. Is the accounting equation true in all instances Provide sample transactions from your own experiences to demonstrate the validity of the Accounting Equation.
Guided Response:
Review several of your peers posts and identify some core components that you feel should be included in every transaction. Respond to at least two of your peers and provide recommendations to extend their thinking. Challenge your peers by asking a question that may cause them to reevaluate or add components to their transactions.
- Accounts
What does the term account mean What are the different classifications of accounts How do the rules for debits and credits impact accounts Please provide an example of how debits and credits impact accounts.
Guided Response:
Analyze several of your peers posts. Let at least two of your peers know if this knowledge could be used in their everyday lives. Is so, how If not, why not?
Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.
Basic Accounting Equations
Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.
Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.
- Accounting Cycle
Financial statements are a product of the accounting cycle. Think about two different companies: a manufacturing company, and a retail company. Why would different companies have different accounting cycles Would you expect the steps of the accounting cycle to be the same for each company Why or why not?
Guided Response:
Review several of your peers posts and identify what steps of the accounting cycle that you feel are the most critical. Respond to at least two of your peers and provide recommendations to extend their thinking. Challenge your peers by asking a question that may cause them to reevaluate their position on the accounting cycle.
- Bank Reconciliation
What is the purpose of a bank reconciliation What are the reasons for differences between the cash reported in the accounting records and the cash balance in the bank statements?
Analyze several of your peers posts. Let at least two of your peers know what happens to the discrepancies between the book balance and the bank balance. Could these differences just be written off?
Guided Response:
A bank reconciliation reconciles the bank account balance per the books to the actual bank balance. Outstanding checks, deposits in transit, and bank errors are reasons there are differences between the cash reported in the accounting records and the cash balance in the bank statements.
Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.
Revenue and Expenses
Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.
Week 3
Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.
- LIFO vs. FIFO
The controller of Sagehen Enterprises believes that the company should switch from the LIFO method to the FIFO method. The controller s bonus is based on the next income. It is the controller s belief that the switch in inventory methods would increase the net income of the company. What are the differences between the LIFO and FIFO methods
Guided Response:
Analyze several of your peers posts. Let at least two of your peers know if a company is better off it switches from a LIFO method to a FIFO method Explain your reasoning.
- Depreciation
A variety of depreciation methods are used to allocate the cost of an asset to all of the accounting periods benefited by the use of the asset. Your client has just purchased a piece of equipment for $100,000. Explain the concept of depreciation. Which of the following depreciation methods would you recommend: straight-line depreciation, double declining balance method, or an alternative method?
Guided Response:
Let at least two of your peers know if a company would use an accelerated depreciation method for their financial statements or their tax returns. Why do you believe this would be the case?
Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.
Inventory
Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.
Ashford 5: – Week 4
Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.
- Current Liability
What is a current liability From the perspective of a user of financial statements, why do you believe current liabilities are separated from long-term liabilities Based on your current experience as well as and any additional research you may have done provide two examples of situations where businesses collect monies from customers and employees and report these amounts as a current liability.
Guided Response:
Review several of your peers posts and identify the core components of a current liability. Respond to at least two of your peers and provide recommendations to extend their thinking. Challenge your peers by asking a question that may cause them to reevaluate if their example is a current liability.
- Client Recommendations
A client comes to you thinking about starting a consulting business. Your client is specifically interested in what type of entity should be created for this new business. Based on your readings or any additional research you may have done, discuss the advantages and disadvantages of the following: sole proprietorship, partnership, and corporation. Based on these advantages and disadvantages provide a clear recommendation to your client.
Let at least two of your peers posts know if an alternative choice of entity would be possible. What would be the benefits of this new entity choice Would there be any disadvantages associated with this new entity selection.
Guided Response:
Let at least two of your peers know if an alternative choice of entity would be possible What would be the benefits of this new entity choice Would there be any disadvantages associated with this new entity selection?
Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.
Liability
Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.
Ashford 6: – Week 5
Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.
- Ratios
Ratios provide the users of financial statements with a great deal of information about the entity. Do ratios tell the whole story How could liquidity ratios be used by investors to determine whether or not to invest in a company
Guided Response:
Let at least two of your peers know how debt service ratios can be used by a lender in determining whether or not to lend money to a company.
- Profit Margin
|
|
Year Ending December 2012
|
Year Ending December 2011
|
Year Ending December 2010
|
|
Revenues
|
40,000
|
35,000
|
33,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
|
|
|
|
Salaries
|
15,000
|
10,000
|
9,000
|
|
Maintenance and Repairs
|
6,000
|
9,000
|
10,000
|
|
Rental Expense
|
2,500
|
2,500
|
2,500
|
|
Depreciation
|
2,000
|
2,000
|
2,000
|
|
Fuel
|
4,000
|
3,500
|
2,500
|
|
Total Operating Expenses
|
29,500
|
27,000
|
26,000
|
|
Operating Income
|
10,500
|
8,000
|
7,000
|
|
Sales and Administrative Expenses
|
6,000
|
4,000
|
3,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
2,500
|
2,000
|
1,000
|
|
Net Income
|
2,000
|
2,000
|
3,000
|
Above is a comparative income statement for Cecil, Inc. for the years 2010, 2011, and 2012. Calculate the profit margin for each of these years. Comment on the profit margin trend.
Guided Response:
Let at least two of your peers posts know what you changes you would recommend to improve the net margin of the company.
Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.
Financial Ratios
Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.
Week Five Exercise Assignment
Carefully review the Grading Rubric for the criteria that will be used to evaluate your assignment.
Final Paper
To complete the following final paper, go to this week’s Final Paper link in the left navigation.
Final Paper
Focus of the Final Paper
Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.
Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:
Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?
Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet
Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.
Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.
Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.
Writing the Final Paper
1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:
a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted
3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC205: Principles of Accounting
Week 1
Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.
- Accounting Equation
As you have learned in this week s readings the Accounting Equation is Assets = Liabilities + Owners Equity. Is the accounting equation true in all instances Provide sample transactions from your own experiences to demonstrate the validity of the Accounting Equation.
Guided Response:
Review several of your peers posts and identify some core components that you feel should be included in every transaction. Respond to at least two of your peers and provide recommendations to extend their thinking. Challenge your peers by asking a question that may cause them to reevaluate or add components to their transactions.
- Accounts
What does the term account mean What are the different classifications of accounts How do the rules for debits and credits impact accounts Please provide an example of how debits and credits impact accounts.
Guided Response:
Analyze several of your peers posts. Let at least two of your peers know if this knowledge could be used in their everyday lives. Is so, how If not, why not?
Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.
Basic Accounting Equations
Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.
- Accounting Cycle
Financial statements are a product of the accounting cycle. Think about two different companies: a manufacturing company, and a retail company. Why would different companies have different accounting cycles Would you expect the steps of the accounting cycle to be the same for each company Why or why not?
Guided Response:
Review several of your peers posts and identify what steps of the accounting cycle that you feel are the most critical. Respond to at least two of your peers and provide recommendations to extend their thinking. Challenge your peers by asking a question that may cause them to reevaluate their position on the accounting cycle.
- Bank Reconciliation
What is the purpose of a bank reconciliation What are the reasons for differences between the cash reported in the accounting records and the cash balance in the bank statements?
Analyze several of your peers posts. Let at least two of your peers know what happens to the discrepancies between the book balance and the bank balance. Could these differences just be written off?
Guided Response:
A bank reconciliation reconciles the bank account balance per the books to the actual bank balance. Outstanding checks, deposits in transit, and bank errors are reasons there are differences between the cash reported in the accounting records and the cash balance in the bank statements.
Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.
Revenue and Expenses
Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week 3
Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.
- LIFO vs. FIFO
The controller of Sagehen Enterprises believes that the company should switch from the LIFO method to the FIFO method. The controller s bonus is based on the next income. It is the controller s belief that the switch in inventory methods would increase the net income of the company. What are the differences between the LIFO and FIFO methods
Guided Response:
Analyze several of your peers posts. Let at least two of your peers know if a company is better off it switches from a LIFO method to a FIFO method Explain your reasoning.
- Depreciation
A variety of depreciation methods are used to allocate the cost of an asset to all of the accounting periods benefited by the use of the asset. Your client has just purchased a piece of equipment for $100,000. Explain the concept of depreciation. Which of the following depreciation methods would you recommend: straight-line depreciation, double declining balance method, or an alternative method?
Guided Response:
Let at least two of your peers know if a company would use an accelerated depreciation method for their financial statements or their tax returns. Why do you believe this would be the case?
Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.
Inventory
Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ashford 5: – Week 4
Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.
- Current Liability
What is a current liability From the perspective of a user of financial statements, why do you believe current liabilities are separated from long-term liabilities Based on your current experience as well as and any additional research you may have done provide two examples of situations where businesses collect monies from customers and employees and report these amounts as a current liability.
Guided Response:
Review several of your peers posts and identify the core components of a current liability. Respond to at least two of your peers and provide recommendations to extend their thinking. Challenge your peers by asking a question that may cause them to reevaluate if their example is a current liability.
- Client Recommendations
A client comes to you thinking about starting a consulting business. Your client is specifically interested in what type of entity should be created for this new business. Based on your readings or any additional research you may have done, discuss the advantages and disadvantages of the following: sole proprietorship, partnership, and corporation. Based on these advantages and disadvantages provide a clear recommendation to your client.
Let at least two of your peers posts know if an alternative choice of entity would be possible. What would be the benefits of this new entity choice Would there be any disadvantages associated with this new entity selection.
Guided Response:
Let at least two of your peers know if an alternative choice of entity would be possible What would be the benefits of this new entity choice Would there be any disadvantages associated with this new entity selection?
Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.
Liability
Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ashford 6: – Week 5
Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.
- Ratios
Ratios provide the users of financial statements with a great deal of information about the entity. Do ratios tell the whole story How could liquidity ratios be used by investors to determine whether or not to invest in a company
Guided Response:
Let at least two of your peers know how debt service ratios can be used by a lender in determining whether or not to lend money to a company.
- Profit Margin
|
|
Year Ending December 2012
|
Year Ending December 2011
|
Year Ending December 2010
|
|
Revenues
|
40,000
|
35,000
|
33,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
|
|
|
|
Salaries
|
15,000
|
10,000
|
9,000
|
|
Maintenance and Repairs
|
6,000
|
9,000
|
10,000
|
|
Rental Expense
|
2,500
|
2,500
|
2,500
|
|
Depreciation
|
2,000
|
2,000
|
2,000
|
|
Fuel
|
4,000
|
3,500
|
2,500
|
|
Total Operating Expenses
|
29,500
|
27,000
|
26,000
|
|
Operating Income
|
10,500
|
8,000
|
7,000
|
|
Sales and Administrative Expenses
|
6,000
|
4,000
|
3,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
2,500
|
2,000
|
1,000
|
|
Net Income
|
2,000
|
2,000
|
3,000
|
Above is a comparative income statement for Cecil, Inc. for the years 2010, 2011, and 2012. Calculate the profit margin for each of these years. Comment on the profit margin trend.
Guided Response:
Let at least two of your peers posts know what you changes you would recommend to improve the net margin of the company.
Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.
Financial Ratios
Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.
Week Five Exercise Assignment
Carefully review the Grading Rubric for the criteria that will be used to evaluate your assignment.
Final Paper
To complete the following final paper, go to this week’s Final Paper link in the left navigation.
Final Paper
Focus of the Final Paper
Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.
Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:
Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?
Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet
Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.
Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.
Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.
Writing the Final Paper
1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:
a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted
3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week 3 assignments
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week Three Assignment Please complete the following five exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Overhead application: Working backward The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week 4 Assignment: Chapter 6 and 7 Problems Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Chapter 6 Problem 3 1. Comprehensive budgeting The balance sheet of Watson Company as of December 31, 20X1, follows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week 4 Assignment Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Comprehensive budgeting The balance sheet of Watson Company as of December 31, 20X1, follows. WATSON COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 12X1 Assets Cash $4,595 Accounts receivable 10,000 Finished goods (575 units x $7.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 week 4 assignments
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Final Paper Focus of the Final Paper You’ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3 million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1 Samson Company had the following transactions. 1. Issued 5,000 shares of $100 par preferred stock at $107 for cash. 2. Issued 8,000 share of common stock with a par value of $10 for $120,000. 3. Purchased 500 shares of treasury common stock for $12,000. Prepare the journal entries to record the above stock transactions. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when the amount is entered. Do not indent manually. If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts.) No. Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit 1. 2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Discussion Question One – Basic Accounting Equation What are the implications of the basic accounting equation? Discussion Question Two – Why is accounting needed? — How would healthcare companies operate without accounting? Why do we need financial and managerial accounting and what are the fundamental differences between the two? Discussion Question Three – Health Care Spending Review the information provided at the following website: http://www.govspot.com/features/healthcare.htmhttp://www.govspot.com/features/healthcare.htm.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Needing assistance with two dq’s please
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 290 Week 3 Individual Assignment Week Three Problems and Exercises
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 302 Final Project
Project Orientation and Overview
Every year at the state fair your parents have run a pretzel booth. Over the years you have experimented with new pretzel
recipes, and many have been successfully incorporated into the selection of pretzels now offered each year at the state
fair.
Your parents are ready to retire and turn the business over in your name. You want to capitalize on your parents success
and expand by offering pretzels at a store location. In order to expand, you will need to secure a bank loan to cover
expansion costs and overhead. To consider your proposal, the banker will want to see a business plan, specifically a
master budget.
Your task for this final project is to prepare and present all the necessary documents so that you can ask for that loan.
This task is broken down into four parts:
Part 1: Mission Statement and Partial Business Plan, due at the end of Week Five
Part 2: Budgets, Financial Statements, and Analysis, due at the end of Week Six
Part 3: Complete Business Plan and Cover Letter, due at the end of Week Seven
Part 3: Business Plan Presentation, due on Day 1 of Week Eight
Part 1 Mission Statement and Partial Business Plan, due Week Five
Review the following chapters:
o Chapter 18: The Changing Business Environment: A Manager s Perspective
o Chapter 19: Cost Concepts and Cost Allocation
o Chapter 23: Cost Behavior Analysis
Complete the Mission Statement Template Handout to record information about your pretzel company, its mission,
and its featured product.
Use the tables and information in Exhibit 1 on the next page to calculate the costs of running your business and to
complete the short answer section of the Mission Statement Template Handout.
o Calculate total variable costs per dozen pretzels.
o Calculate sales price per dozen pretzels using 120% markup on variable costs.
o Calculate contribution margin per dozen pretzels.
o Calculate breakeven point for the quarter (three months) in dollars and units.
Submit the completed Mission Statement Template Handout to My Assignments in My West.
Exhibit 1:
Cost of Goods
If your pretzel recipe has ingredients that are not included here, simply consider them part of your overhead expenses.
Direct Materials Unit Unit Cost
Flour (any kind) per cup $ 0.15
Sugar (any kind) per cup $ 0.15
Dry Yeast per cup $ 0.50
1 Stick of Butter, Shortening, Oil per 1/2 cup $ 1.00
Egg per cup $ 0.10
Salt per 1/2 cup $ 0.75
Specialty Ingredients (any kind, e.g., chocolate chips, cinnamon,
cheese, pepperoni, etc.)
per cup $ 2.00
Direct Labor
Information regarding direct labor cost is not maintained because your facility is highly automated. Direct labor is included
as part of manufacturing overhead.
Manufacturing Overhead and Operating Expenses
Manufacturing Overhead Variable
(per dozen)
Fixed
(per month)
Utilities $ 0.50
Other Indirect Materials and Labor $ 0.75
Maintenance $ 500.00
Depreciation $ 2,000.00
Supervision $ 2,500.00
Totals $ 1.25 $ 5,000.00
Operating Expenses Variable
(per dozen)
Fixed
(per month)
Sales Commission $ 0.50
Shipping Costs $ 1.00
Salaries $ 5,000.00
Depreciation $ 200.00
Other $ 1,800.00
Totals $ 1.50 $ 7,000.00 ACC 302 Final Project 3 01/30/12
Part 2 Budgets, Financial Statements, and Analysis, due Week Six
Review Chapter 24: The Budgeting Process.
Use the tables and information presented in Exhibit 2 on the next page to determine production and financial budget
data.
Create a spreadsheet that provides the following budgets:
o Sales budget/cash collections budget
o Direct materials purchases budget/cash disbursements budget
o Manufacturing overhead budget
o Operating expenses budget
Create documents that show your projected income and your cash needs. More specifically, use the budgets and
other documentation that you have created for this project to create the following documents:
o Proforma (projected) variable income statement
o Proforma absorption income statement
o Proforma balance sheet
o Cash budget
Respond to the following short answer questions using a word processing program:
Discuss the importance of beginning the master budget process with an accurate sales budget.
o What are some important factors that a manager should consider when developing a sales budget? State why
each is important.
o Distinguish between operating expenses and disbursements for operating expenses.
o What is the main difference between the variable and absorption income statements?
o What are the major benefits of budgeting?
Submit the budgets, financial documents, and short answer questions to My Assignments in My West. ACC 302 Final Project 4 01/30/12
Exhibit 2:
Production Budget Information
It is a few months before your store is opening. You expect to open the doors of your pretzel company as of January 1.
You are starting fresh with no raw materials, no accounts receivable, and no accounts payable. You were able to secure
several contracts with local businesses (i.e., sales associates that are paid on commission); based off these contracts,
you were able to make projects for the first four months of the year.
Because your pretzels are made fresh daily, there is no work-in-process or finished goods inventory.
You plan to maintain a raw direct material inventory of 10% of the next month production.
Payment for raw direct materials is 25% in the month of purchase and 75% in the following months.
Your monthly sales projections are based off your last name, and sales are sold per dozen.
Collections on Sales
Cash sales collected in the current month: 40%
Credit sales are collected in the following month: 60%
Financial Budget Information
Your initial investment in your business is $50,000, and you are looking to secure a bank loan for $50,000 with
additional line of credit. However, you must always have a minimum cash end-of-month balance of $10,000.
If there is any cash over $10,000 available at the end of the month, you must repay your outstanding balance in
$1,000 increments.
If the end-of-month cash balance falls below $10,000, you must make additional borrowing from the line of credit.
These borrowings are also in increments of $1,000.
Your bank loan and line of credit has an annual interest rate of 12% which is paid monthly on the total outstanding
borrowings at the end of the prior month.
Additional Information:
Fixed asset acquisition in January is $90,000.
Your income taxes are paid each quarter on net income at a rate of 25%.
A-F G-L M-S T-Z
January 3750 2750 2000 1750
February 3750 3250 3500 3750
March 3750 4000 4500 3500
April 3750 5000 5000 6000ACC 302 Final Project 5 01/30/12
Part 3 Complete Business Plan and Cover Letter, due Week Seven
Write a cover letter to a banker explaining why the banker should approve your loan.
Compile and complete your business plan, including all supporting documentation created for this project.
Submit your complete business plan as one document to My Assignments via My West.
Part 4 Business Plan Presentation, due in-class, Week Eight
Create a 5 15 slide Microsoft PowerPoint presentation of your business plan. The slides will be evaluated for:
o Content
o Relevance
o Layout
o Readability
Present your business plan in person (on campus) or via Adobe
Acrobat
ConnectTM during the online class
meeting. Your presentation must be 10 15 minutes long (including Q & A) and will be evaluated on:
o Delivery of the content
o Answers to follow-up questions from the class and instructor
For online students: If you are to be absent from class, your slides must include detailed speaker notes containing the
content that would have been delivered in the live session.
Note to instructor: Time devoted to final presentations may need to be adjusted to account for large class sizes. These
adjustments are at the discretion of the instructor.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 421 FINAL EXAM 23 QUESTIONS ANSWERED
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I have attached a copy of all of the questions that I need answered. I think i have the correct answer for the first one and I have partially completed another one. Thank you in advance!!!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
WEEK 4 DQS
ACC/422 Week 4 DQ 1
What are the criteria for classifying an item as a current liability?
What are some examples of current liabilities?
.
Why is it important to classify a portion of long-term debt on a yearly basis as a current liability?
What is the implication of misclassification a liability as current or long-term?
ACC/422 Week 4 DQ 2
What is a contingency?
Why are contingencies important to users of financial statements?
What are the criteria for recording contingencies?
Should companies record a liability for threatened litigation? Explain why or why not.
ACC/422 Week 4 DQ 3
ACC/422 Week 4 DQ 4
GAAP need loss contingencies to be accrued in the period the contingency becomes known. However, GAAP specifically disallows booking gain contingencies until the gain is realized. Do you agree or disagree? Why?
ACC/422 Week 4 DQ 5
What is a bond?
What are some features of a bond?
How do you value bonds?
What factors can affect that value?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
WEEK 5 DQS
ACC/422 Week 5 DQ 1
Leases can be entered into by companies or individuals. Are there reasons other than financial reasons that companies or individuals choose to lease versus buying an asset?
ACC/422 Week 5 DQ 2
What are the advantages and disadvantages of leasing versus buying or leasing versus selling?
ACC/422 Week 5 DQ 3
Does the lessor have to make the same decisions as a lessee when classifying a lease as operating or capital? Why or why not?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Foundations of Accounting I Accounting Project Karen Pitsch Alli Co. is a merchandising business. The account balances for Alli Co.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 557 Financial Accounting Assignment # 2
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Homework Chapter 01 Exercise 1-5 Ikerd Company is a manufacturer of personal computers. Various costs and expenses associated with its operations are as follows. The company intends to classify these costs and expenses into the following categories: (a) direct materials, (b) direct labor, (c) manufacturing overhead, and (d) period costs. For each item, indicate the cost category to which it belongs. Item Category 1-Property taxes on the factory building.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This is Task 4
SUBDOMAIN 309.3 – QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS
Competency 309.3.2: PERT/CPM Techniques – The graduate correctly applies
PERT/CPM techniques to project management tasks.
Objectives:
309.3.2-01: Determine the critical path identified by a given PERT/CPM analysis.
309.3.2-02: Utilize PERT analysis to determine the probability that a given project will
meet a specified deadline for completion.
309.3.2-03: Determine slack time for a given project activity.
309.3.2-04: Determine scheduled start time for a given project activity.
309.3.2-05: Determine scheduled completion time for a given project activity.
309.3.2-06: Use time-cost trade-offs to appropriately crash a project network.
Introduction:
This task requires candidates to prepare a program evaluation and review technique (PERT)
chart and apply critical path method (CPM) techniques.
Given:
Company A is installing a Web-based customer-feedback system to meet customer needs
for quick response when rolling out new products. A new product line is rolling out in 34
weeks and the customer-feedback system must be installed and running in time for the new
product launch.
Table 1.1 in the attached worksheet PERT/CPM Tables shows three estimates of the time it
will take Company A to complete each of the activities and project tasks in the customerfeedback
system project (optimistic, probable, pessimistic).
Company B is installing a similar feedback system to accompany a new product line and
originally had the same time line as Company A. Company B just announced that its new
product line is ahead of schedule and will be launched in 30 weeks instead of the initially
projected 34 weeks. Because the Web-based customer feedback system must be installed
and running in time for the revised date of the product launch, something must be done to
shorten implementation time required for the customer-feedback system project. Refer to
Table 1.2 in the attached worksheet PERT/CPM Tables that lists the expected time it will
take to complete the activities if shortened as much as possible (crash time), the cost to
complete the activity using normal resources (normal cost), and the cost of completing the
activity on an accelerated basis (crash cost).
Task:
A. Use the estimates for Company A in Table 1.1 to do each of the following:
1. Determine the expected completion time for each of the ten project activities,
showing all your work.
a. Determine the variance for each project activity, showing all your work.
2. Prepare a PERT chart (network diagram) to identify the critical path for project
completion.
Note: If you don t have software to build a PERT chart, use text boxes with lines or
arrows in a word processing program.
3. Determine each of the following, showing all of your work or reasoning:
a. Expected duration of the entire project
b. Slack for project task A
c. Slack for project task H
d. The week project task F is scheduled to start
e. The week project task I is scheduled to finish
4. Determine the probability of completing this project in time for the product launch in
34 weeks, showing all your work.
B. Assume that Company B has the same expected completion times for project activities
as Company A. Use your results from part A1 and the data in Table 1.2 to determine the
following, showing all your work:
1. Maximum reduction in time
2. Crash cost per week
C. Identify the following by using your results from part B:
1. Activities to be crashed in order to complete the project within 30 weeks
2. Number of weeks each of these activities should be crashed to meet the deadline
with the lowest possible increase in cost
3. Additional crashing cost of the activities identified in part C1.
D. When you use sources, include all in-text citations and references in APA format.
Note: Please save word-processing documents as *.rtf (Rich Text Format) files.
Note: For definitions of terms commonly used in the rubric, see the attached Rubric Terms.
Note: When using sources to support ideas and elements in a paper or project, the
submission MUST include APA formatted in-text citations with a corresponding reference list
for any direct quotes or paraphrasing. It is not necessary to list sources that were consulted
if they have not been quoted or paraphrased in the text of the paper or project.
Note: No more than a combined total of 30% of a submission can be directly quoted or
closely paraphrased from sources, even if cited correctly. For tips on using APA style, please
refer to the APA Handout web link included in the General Instructions section.
See attached
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
David, Matt, and Chris are forming The Doctor Partnership. David is transferring $30,000 of personal cash and equipment worth $25,000 to the partnership. Matt owns land worth $18,000 and a small building worth $75,000, which he transfers to the partnership. There is a long-term mortgage of $20,000 on the land and building, which the partnership assumes. Chris transfers cash of $7,000, accounts receivable of $36,000, supplies worth $3,000, and equipment worth $22,000 to the partnership. The partnership expects to collect $32,000 of the accounts receivable. Prepare a classified balance sheet for the partnership after the partners investments on December 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 1:
Blue Lagoon Corporation is projecting a cash balance of $31,000 in its December 31, 2012, balance sheet. Blue Lagoon s schedule of expected collections from customers for the first quarter of 2012 show total collections of $180,000. The schedule of expected payments for direct materials for the first quarter of 2012 shows total payments of $41,000. Other information gathered for the first quarter of 2012 is: sale equipment $3,500, direct labor $70,000, manufacturing overhead $35,000, selling and administrative expenses $45,000, and purchase of securities $12,000. Blue Lagoon wants to maintain a balance of at least $25,000 cash at the end of each quarter.
Prepare a cash budget for the first quarter.
Problem 2:
Russell Company uses flexible budgets to control its selling expenses. Monthly sales are expected to range from $170,000 to $200,000. Variable costs and their percentage relationship to sales are: Sales Commissions 5%, Advertising 4%, Traveling 3%, and Delivery 2%. Fixed selling expenses will consist of Sales Salaries $34,000, Depreciation on Delivery Equipment $7,000, and Insurance on Delivery Equipment $1,000.
Prepare a monthly flexible budget for each $10,000, increment of sales within the relevant range for the year ending December 31, 2012.
***PLEASE USE ATTACHED WORKSHEET FOR ANSWERS
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 1:
Mathias Company manufactures a number of specialized machine parts. Part Bunkka-22 uses $35 of direct materials and $15 of direct labor per unit.
Mathias estimates manufacturing overhead is as follows:
|
Materials handling
|
$100,000
|
|
Machining
|
200,000
|
|
Factory supervision
|
150,000
|
|
Total
|
$450,000
|
Overhead is applied based on direct labor costs, which were estimated at $200,000.
Mathias is considering adopting activity-based costing. The cost drivers are estimated at:
|
Activity
|
Cost Driver
|
Expected Use
|
|
Materials Handling
|
Weight of materials
|
50,000 pounds
|
|
Machining
|
Machine hours
|
20,000 hours
|
|
Factory supervision
|
Direct labor hours
|
12,000 hours
|
- Compute the cost of 1,000 units of Bunkka-22 using the current traditional costing system.
- Compute the cost of 1,000 units of Bunkka-22 using the proposed activity-based costing system. Assume the 1,000 units use 2,500 pounds of materials, 500 machine hours, and 1,000 direct labor hours.
Problem 2:
In the month of March, New Day Spa services 570 clients at an average price of $120. During the month, fixed costs were $21,000 and variable costs were 65% of sales.
- Determine the contribution margin in dollars, per unit, and as a ratio.
- Using the contribution margin technique, compute the break-even point in dollars and in units.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 5:
Vivi Corporation has the following accounts at December 31: Common Stock, $10 par, 5,000 shares issued, $50,000; Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Common Stock $20,000; Retained Earnings $45,000; and Treasury Stock, 500 shares, $11,000. Prepare the stockholders equity section of the balance sheet.
I need my worked checked and the problem completed. I thought I was on the right track but I am lost at the end. Please help!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
14 28 Q30????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 2: 10 points Nemani Corporation Cash Budget For the Quarter Ending March 31, 2013 Problem 3: 10 points Elias Corporation Cost of Goods Manufactured Schedule For the Month Ended June 30, 2013 Manufacturing overhead: Problem 6: 5 points Date Account Description Debit Credit??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Three Assignment
Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
1. Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
|
Division A
|
Division B
|
|
Actual machine hours
|
26,500
|
?
|
|
Estimated machine hours
|
20,000
|
?
|
|
Overhead application rate
|
$5.00
|
$6.00
|
|
Actual overhead
|
$120,000
|
?
|
|
Estimated overhead
|
?
|
$90,000
|
|
Applied overhead
|
?
|
$87,000
|
|
Over- (under-) applied overhead
|
?
|
$8,500
|
Find the unknowns for each of the divisions.
2. Computationsusing a job order system
Spencer Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
Work in process $ 36,200
Finished goods 86,900
Cost of goods sold 130,700
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($22,400) and no. 103 ($13,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $116,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
|
Direct Materials
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
|
$6,000
|
|
101
|
|
$7,800
|
|
117
|
|
18,500
|
|
103
|
|
20,800
|
|
116
|
|
34,200
|
|
117
|
|
44,000
|
|
Other
|
|
36,800
|
|
116
|
|
18,000
|
|
|
$95,500
|
|
Other
|
|
25,900
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$116,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Job no. 117 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $23,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
3. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 20X8 operations of Houston Products:
|
Quarter 1
|
Quarter 2
|
Quarter 3
|
Quarter 4
|
|
Shipping costs
|
$56,200
|
$58,620
|
$61,000
|
$59,400
|
|
Orders shipped
|
120
|
135
|
170
|
145
|
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.
b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.
c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X9 if activity amounts to 570 orders.
4. Break-even and other CVP relationships
Pine Hospital has average revenue of $190 per patient day. Variable costs are $50 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,620,000 per year.
a. How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?
b. What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $560,000?
c. If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?
5. Direct and absorption costing
The information that follows pertains to XYZ Products for the year ended December 31, 20X8.
|
Inventory, 1/1/X8
|
26,000 units
|
|
Units manufactured
|
80,000
|
|
Units sold
|
83,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/X8
|
? units
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
|
Direct materials
|
$4 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
$5 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
$9 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
$300,000
|
|
Selling & administrative expenses:
|
|
Variable
|
$2 per unit
|
|
Fixed
|
$136,000
|
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.
b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:
1. Direct costing.
2. Absorption costing.
c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X8, by using direct costing.
d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X8, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Four Assignment Please complete the following 3 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Comprehensive budgeting The balance sheet of Williams Company as of December 31, 20X8, follows. WILLIAMS COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 12X8 Assets Cash $4,595 Accounts receivable 10,000 Finished goods (575 units x $7.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting 131 – Homework Handout – Corporations Name ________________________ Stockholder Equity Transactions Record the following transactions in general journal form. Feb. 1 Issued for cash 2,000 shares of Preferred Stock at $50 per share, par value. ? Date?Account Titles?Debit?Credit?? ? Feb. 1????? ? ????? Feb. 6 Issued for cash 50,000 shares of $10 par value Common Stock at $12 per share. ? Date?Account Titles?Debit?Credit?? ? Feb. 6????? ? ????? ? ????? Feb. 15 Issued 2,000 shares of $10 par value Common Stock in exchange for $28,000 cash.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I am new here, searching to see if there is already a completed report for the “Financial Analysis of GE”
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week 2 Exercise
Revenue and Expense Exercises
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Five Exercise Assignment
Financial Ratios
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years:
Year 1, $15,000
Year 2, $13,000
Year 3, $10,000
Year 4, $10,000
Year 5, $6,000
ABC Company uses the net-present-value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment.
a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment ignore income taxes and depreciation?
b. Assuming a 5-year straight-line depreciation, how will this impact the factory s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow?
Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time-value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 206 Week 1 Assignment: Chapter One Problems Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Institute of Management Accounting
While there are many instances of overlap between financial accounting and management accounting, each group s primary focus is different. Review the Institute of Management Accounting s (IMA) website, specifically the About IMA and the Resources and Publications sections of the website. Are you surprised by the topics that management accountants are focusing on? Why or why not? What interests you more, financial accounting or management accounting?
Carefully review the Grading Rubric for the criteria that will be used to evaluate your journal entry.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Need Help With Acc 206 Ashford University Week 1 Assignment. Please see Attachment for work
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Five Assignment Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Basic present value calculations Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar: A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at an 11% rate of return.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
12-16, 12-17, 13-23.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. (TCO 7) Elliot’s Escargots sells commercial and home snail extraction tools and serving pieces. Currently, the snail extraction line of products takes up approximately 50 percent of the company’s retail floor space. The CEO of Elliot’s wants to decide if the company should continue offering snail extraction tools or focus only on serving pieces. If the snail extraction tools are dropped, salaries and other direct fixed costs can be avoided and serving piece sales would increase by 13 percent. Allocated fixed costs are assigned based on relative sales.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Intro to Macroeconomics
Financial Accounting 1
Intro to Psych: Mind and Body
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter 4 homework ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attached for the three discussion questions. No word minimum. Please cite all sources using APA format. Original work only.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Welch Company, which expects to start operations on January I, 2011, will sell digital cameras in shopping malls. Welch has budgeted sales as indicated in the following table. The company ex-pects a 10 percent increase in sales per month for February and March. The ratio of cash sales to sales on account will remain stable from January through March.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The measurement focus and basis of accounting that are most unlike those used by business entities are those used by (Points : 2) Governmental funds. Fiduciary funds. Proprietary funds. Contribution funds. 2. Under the dual-track accounting approach used in the text, which of the following transactions or events would be recorded in the general journal for governmental activities at the government-wide level? (Points : 2) Recording the annual budget, property tax levy, and payroll.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. 12-2 Jeelani Construction Company is composed of two divisions: (1) Home Construction and (2) Commercial Construction. The Home Construction Division is in the process of building 12 houses and the Commercial Construction Division is working on 3 projects. Cost items of the company follow.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
6 questions
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
http://bcs.wiley.com/he-bcs/Books?action=resource&bcsId=7509&itemId=1118162285&resourceId=29248
I need chapters 7-12 done Asap
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Number of Pages: 1 (Double Spaced) Writing Style: APA Number of sources: 1 Answer the following questions: ? What is the difference between accrual and cash accounting? ? When might an accountant use cash basis accounting without violating generally accepted accounting principles? Format your paragraph consistent with APA guidelines. Reference: Kimmel, P. D., Weygandt, J. J., & Kieso, D. E. (2011). Financial accounting: Tools for business decision making (6th ed.). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Number of Pages: 1 (Double Spaced) Writing Style: APA Number of sources: 2 Search the Internet and locate an annual financial report for a public U.S. company. Read the Notes to the Financial Statements to determine the criteria for cash equivalents and how cash and cash equivalents are handled. Discuss your findings. Find information about the internal control policy of the company and summarize this policy in your post.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. What are the missing numbers for the below income statement? Revenues 100 Cost of Goods Sold ? Gross Margin 60 SG&A Expense ? Pre-tax Income 20 Tax Expense (40% of Pre-tax Income) ? Net Income ? 2. What is the missing number from the below cash flow statement? Beginning Balance Operating Cash Flow Investing Cash Flow Financing Cash Flow Ending Balance 60 – 20 ? 100 80 3. What are the missing numbers for the below balance sheet? Assets Cash 15 Accounts Receivable ? Inventory 60 Total Current Assets 97 Property, Plant, and Equipment, net ? Intangible Assets 20 Total Assets 257 Liabilities Accounts Payable 40 Accrued Operating Expenses 50 Total Current Liabilities ? Notes Payable ? Total Liabilities 190 Owners Equity Stock 20 Retained Earnings ? Total Liabilities and Owners Equity ? 1 4. Given the following data, what is net income? (Note: Not all items shown below will be included in income.) Cost of Goods Sold 8 Accounts Payable 22 Taxes Payable 6 Tax Expense 8 Revenues 40 SG&A Expense 2 Interest Payable 14 Accumulated Depreciation 11 Depreciation Expense 6 Interest Expense 4 Dividends 3 5. What is the missing number in the below Retained Earnings account. (Provide both the amount and the name.) Beginning Balance Net Income (Loss) ? Ending Balance 100 21 ? 98 6. What is the correct journal entry for the purchase of office supplies for $10 cash, if the supplies are capitalized? Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 7. What are the effects on current income and on future income, if a firm incorrectly capitalizes an expenditure that it should have expensed? State your answer for both current income and future income as overstated or understated . Overstated or Understated? Current Income Future Income 8. What is the correct journal entry for the following transaction. A firm sells a car for $40 cash. The cost of the car is $30. The firm is a car dealer, and the car is therefore classified as inventory. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 2 9. Refer to the above. If the firm had not been a car dealer and had classified the car as property, plant, and equipment (PP&E), rather than inventory, which of the below would be correct?. (Circle your answer.) a. Net Income would be unaffected. b. A gain would be reported instead of revenues and COGS. c. PP&E would be reduced, instead of Inventory. d. All of the above. e. None of the above. 10. Provide the closing entry, given the following temporary accounts, with amounts in parentheses: Revenues (80), COGS (25), SG&A Expense (15), Interest Expense (10), and Tax Expense (8). Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 11. Indicate by check mark ( 9 ) or X which accounts are found on the income statement and which accounts are found on the balance sheet. Account Name Income Statement Balance Sheet Allowance for Bad Debt Bad Debt Expense Prepaid Expense Unearned Revenue Revenue 12. What is insurance expense for the year 2012, given the following set of facts? The firm prepays two years of insurance premiums on 7/1/12. The amount paid is $24. The firm’s fiscal yearend (FYE) is 12/31. 13. What are the journal entries to recognize the following two, related transactions? a. On January 1, 2010, the firm sells a gift card for $100. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 3 b. On March 15, 2010, the gift card is used by a customer to buy merchandise for $80. The cost of the merchandise sold was $60. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 14. What are the journal entries to recognize the following two, related transactions? a. A firm prepays $7 in insurance premiums. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ b. A firm expenses $6 of previously prepaid insurance premiums. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 15. What, if any, is the journal entry to recognize a possible contingent liability (for example, resulting from a lawsuit) of $20. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 16. What, if any, is the proper journal entry for a firm to recognize the increase in the value of its own stock from $40 to $50? Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 17. What is the formula for the ratio that would answer the following questions: Question Formula for Ratio to Answer Question How long does it take a firm to pay its bills (on average)? How long does it take a firm to sell its inventory (on average)? 4 18. What was the amount of cash a firm collected from its customers, given the following fact set? The firm’s balance sheets at the beginning and end of the year show gross accounts receivable of $32 and $28, respectively. Also, the firm’s beginning and ending allowance for uncollectible accounts are -$4 and -$5, respectively. Bad debt expense was $4, which was 2% of credit sales. The firm makes all sales on account. 19. What is bad debt expense, using the aging method (also called the percentage of receivables method), given the following set of facts? x A firm has $80 of gross accounts receivable. x The firm estimates that for $20 of the receivables, 10% are expected to be uncollectible. x The firm estimates that for the remaining $60 of the receivables, 50% are expected to be uncollectible. x The opening balance in the allowance account was $45 and write-offs for the period were $20. Thus, the amount in the allowance account, after write-offs, but before bad debt expense was $25. 20. Given the below information, what are the values for COGS and ending inventory for each costing method below? Number of Units Price per Unit Beginning inventory 10 2 Purchases 20 3 Sales 15 Ending inventory 15 Goods Available for Sale COGS Ending Inventory FIFO 20 + 60 = 80 LIFO 20 + 60 = 80 21. Given the below information, what is the dollar amount that the LIFO liquidation added to gross margin? Number of Units Price per Unit Beginning inventory 10 1 Purchases 12 3 Sales 15 Ending inventory 7 5 22. What inventory costing method gives the lowest inventory valuation in inflationary periods? a. FIFO b. LIFO c. Average d. LILO e. FILO 23. What inventory costing method gives the lowest net income in inflationary periods? a. FIFO b. LIFO c. Average d. LILO e. FILO 24. What is the effect on net income if inventory is overstated? a. Net income will also be overstated. b. Net income will be understated. c. Net income will be unaffected. d. It depends on whether the firm is using LIFO for FIFO. e. None of the above. 25. What are the journal entries to recognize each of the below events. a. The firm records bad debt expense of 5% of credit sales, which were $300. The firm uses the Percentage of Credit Sales Method. Journalize bad debt expense. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ b. The firm subsequently writes-off $10 of receivables. Record the write-off. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 26. Given the following set of facts, what is the net amount of cash received by the seller? The seller records a credit sale for $1,000. Shortly after the sale, the buyer returns $250 and the seller credits the receivable by this amount. The seller also grants a further allowance to the buyer for $100. Finally, the buyer pays within the discount period to take advantage of a 2% discount. 6 27. Refer to the data in the above problem. With respect to the above purchase, what is the amount that the buyer will show as inventory on its balance sheet after all returns, discounts, and allowances? 28. What is the proper journal entry for a firm that factors a $100 receivable at a bank, which charges a 1% fee. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 29. With respect to factoring, what is the difference between with recourse and without recourse a. With recourse means that the bank ultimately bears the credit risk. b. Without recourse means that the bank ultimately bears the credit risk. c. With recourse means that the firm that factored the receivable ultimately bears the credit risk. d. Without recourse means that the firm that factored the receivable ultimately bears the credit risk. e. Both b and c. 30. What is the name of the accounting method that is used when the level of ownership in an equity investment rises to the level of significant influence? a. fair value method b. mark-to-market method c. control method d. equity method e. cost method 31. What is the main attribute of an intangible asset that is used to determine whether or not it will be amortized? 32. What is the main attribute of a repair or maintenance expenditure that determines whether or not it will be capitalized? 33. Given the below facts, what is the total income effect for the year for an investor for its passive-level, trading investment? (Note: the investment is not sold during the year.) Type of Investment: Passive Ownership, Trading Cost of Investment $80 Fair value of investment at end of the year $60 Dividends received from investment over the year $10 Total income effect for the year 7 34. Given the below facts, what is the total income effect for the year for an investor for its passive-level, available-for- sale security? (Note: the investment is not sold during the year.) Type of Investment: Passive Ownership, Available for Sale Cost of Investment $80 Fair value of investment at end of the year $60 Dividends received from investment over the year $10 Total income effect for the year 35. Given the below facts, what is the total income effect for the year for an investor for its equity-method investment? Type of Investment: Equity Method Cost of Investment $80 Fair value of investment at end of the year $90 Total dividends received from investment over the year $10 Total Net income of investee over the year $200 Percentage of voting shares of investee owned by investor 20% Income for the year 36. What is depreciation expense for an asset s first year, using the double declining balance method, given the following information? The cost of the asset is $800, the expected useful life is 5 years, and the salvage value is estimated to be $160. 37. What is the journal entry to record the sale of a depreciable asset (PP&E) that costs $100 and has accumulated depreciation of $40, assuming a selling price of $40. Assume that the PP&E is sold for cash. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 38. What is the journal entry to record a $1,000 (cash) expenditure on ordinary repairs and maintenance? Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 8 39. What is the amount of a) interest capitalized and b) interest expensed, given the following information? The firm spends $100 to self-construct a building for its own use. The firm has debt of $500 that has an interest rate of 6%. 40. What is the journal entry, if any, given the following set of facts? A firm has equipment with a book value (cost minus accumulated depreciation) of $380. However, the fair value of the equipment is only $200 and is not likely to recover. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 41. What is the amount of goodwill recognized where an acquirer buys 100% of the below target firm by paying $50 of cash to the target firm s shareholders. Note: all items below are at market value. Balance Sheet Items of Target Firm Cash $10 Inventory 20 Property, Plant, and Equipment 30 Total Assets $60 Liabilities 20 42. What is the main purpose of the closing entry? 43. What is one perceived deficiency of the fundamental equation of accounting (Assets = Liabilities + Owners Equity)? 44. Which of the below cash flows is classified as an operating cash flow? a. Cash paid to investors as a dividend. b. Cash received in a loan from a bank c. Cash paid to suppliers for inventory d. Cash paid to suppliers for property, plant, and equipment e. None of the above 9 45. Which of the below is a temporary account? a. Selling, General, and Administrative Expenses b. Prepaid Expenses c. Retained Earnings d. Unearned Revenues e. Stock 46. What is the main distinction between a revenue and a gain? a. Gains are from a firm s central and ongoing operations b. Revenues are from a firm s peripheral activities c. Gains are always realized, but revenues are not d. Gains result from a sale of inventory e. None of the above. 47. What does NCI stand for and when is this account used in a firm s financial statements? 48. How much cash did the following firm pay its vendors, given the below information about its accounts payable account (amounts are in parentheses): Beginning balance of accounts payable ($16); credit purchases of inventory ($20); ending balance of accounts payable ($6). 49. What is the amount of compensation expense recognized for stock options for each year of the vesting period, given the following information? x A firm awards stock options at-the-money when the stock is trading at $18 per share. x The Black-Scholes value of the options is $6. x The vesting period is two years. x Upon vesting, the stock is trading at $20 per share. 10 50. What are the missing amounts for the below amortization table, given the following information? x A firm borrows $100,000 from a bank. x The terms of the loan require the firm to make equal, yearly payments, at the end of each year, over the next five years. x The bank charges 4% interest. Cash Interest Principal Adjustment Principal Balance 4% 100,000 4,000 18,463 81,537 2,493 19,969 42,367 1,695 20,768 21,599 864 21,599 0 51. Refer to the previous question. What is the journal entry, from the borrower s perspective, to recognize the second payment to the bank. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 52. Refer to the previous question. Under U.S. GAAP, how much of the cash payment is classified as operating cash flow? 53. Given the below, partial bond accretion table, what was the market rate of interest when the bond was issued? Cash Interest Principal Adjustment Principal Balance 803.637 60.000 807.928 54. Refer to the above problem. What is the proper journal entry to recognize the first coupon payment? Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 11 55. A firm (a lessee) leases equipment from a lessor. The lease is an operating lease. The yearly lease payment is $1,000. Journalize the first lease payment. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 56. A firm (a lessee) leases equipment from a lessor. The lease is a capital lease. The yearly (end of year) lease payment is $1,000 and the appropriate interest rate is 10%. The lease’s duration is 2 years. Journalize the first lease payment. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 57. How many shares of stock would be classified as issued and outstanding, given the following fact set? x The board authorized 1,000 shares. x The firm sold 400 shares in its IPO x The firm subsequently repurchased 100 shares. 58. How much of a dividend would be allocated to a firm s preferred shareholders and to its common shareholders, given the following set of facts? x The firm declares a $10,000 dividend. x The firm has 100,000 shares of 6%, $1 par value preferred stock issued and outstanding. x The firm also has 200,000 shares of $1 par value common stock issued and outstanding. x The firm has 2,000 shares of common stock in treasury. Class of Stock Total Amount of Dividend Preferred Common 59. What is the cash flow category for a firm s initial sale of its own stock (Operating, Investing, Financing)? a. Operating b. Investing c. Financing d. Both b and c. 60. What is the cash flow category for a firm s repurchase of its own stock (Operating, Investing, Financing)? a. Operating b. Investing c. Financing d. Both a and b. 12 61. What is the cash flow category for a firm s payment of a dividend to its investors (Operating, Investing, Financing)? a. Operating b. Investing c. Financing d. Both a and c. 62. What are the journal entries for the following two transactions? a. A firm buys back two shares of its own stock for $40 per share. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ b. The firm sells one of the above treasury shares for $50 per share. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 63. What is the formula for calculating operating cash flows using the indirect method? a. Net Income + Gains Losses + Changes in Operating Assets Changes in Operating Liabilities b. Net Income Gains + Losses + Changes in Operating Assets Changes in Operating Liabilities c. Net Income + Gains Losses Changes in Operating Assets + Changes in Operating Liabilities d. Net Income Gains + Losses Changes in Operating Assets + Changes in Operating Liabilities 64. True / False: Cash paid for equipment that is purchased by a firm would be classified as an investing cash flow if the equipment is classified as PP&E, but operating cash flow if the equipment is classified as inventory. 65. True / False: Under U.S. GAAP, the payment of interest is classified as a financing cash flow, but the receipt of interest is classified as an investing cash flow. 66. True / False: Under U.S. GAAP, the receipt of a cash dividend is classified as an investing cash flows, but the payment of a dividend is classified as a financing cash flow. 67. True / False: Under U.S. GAAP, both the cash paid to purchase PP&E and cash received from the sale of PP&E are classified as investing cash flows. 68. How much cash did a firm pay for purchases of PP&E given the following fact set (and assuming that the firm pays cash for all capex )? x The beginning and ending balances in the PP&E account are $100 and $80, respectively. x The beginning and ending balances in accumulated depreciation are 50 and 20, respectively. x Depreciation expense for the period is $10. x The firm also sold PP&E with a cost of $60 and a book value of $20. x Finally, the firm also recognized an impairment of PP&E of $40. 13 69. How much cash did a firm collect from its customers, given the following fact set? Beginning and ending accounts receivable were $50 and $60, respectively. Beginning and ending allowance for doubtful accounts were $8 and $10, respectively. The firm had credit sales of $100. The firm also estimated bad debt expense to be $5. Finally, the firm wrote-off $3 of receivables as uncollectible. 70. Assume a lessee signs a lease agreement to lease property for 15 years. The lease is a capital lease. Assume the appropriate interest rate is 10% and the yearly lease payment is $1,000. The lessee has no other debt on its balance sheet and it has total Owners’ Equity of $10,000. What is the lessee s debt to capital ratio? a. 0% b. 10% c. 25% d. 43% e. 62% 71. A firm has $1,000,000 in its bank account. The interest earned on the account is 5% per year. The firm needs to withdraw $100,000 per year over the next five years, at the end of each year. At the end of the fifth year, how much will the firm have in its bank account? a. 750,000 b. 723,718 c. 500,689 d. 489,268 72. What is the issue price of a bond with the following terms: x The bond matures in 10 years. x The stated rate of interest on the bond is 6%. x The market rate of interest is 4%. x The bond pays interest every year (on a yearly basis). x The par value of the bond is $1,000. 14 Consider the following consecutive balance sheets and income statement for a firm. In the space provided, derive the statement of cash flows, using the indirect method for operating cash flows. Note: The loss refers to the sale of the long term investment. Note: You must calculate the dividends (which are assumed to be paid). 2012 Sales 250 COGS -100 Depreciation Expense -10 Interest Expense -10 Loss -5 Pre-tax Income 125 Income Tax Expense -50 Net Income 75 Dividends Paid ? 2012 2011 Change Cash 105 86 19 Accounts Receivable 28 32 -4 Inventory 34 35 -1 Long term Investment 8 20 -12 PP&E 140 130 10 A/D -60 -50 -10 Total Assets 255 253 2 Accounts Payable 32 30 2 Interest Payable 2 4 -2 Income Tax Payable 1 4 -3 Notes Payable 110 140 -30 Stock 40 40 0 Treasury Stock -5 -5 0 Retained Earnings 75 40 35 Total Liabilities & O.E. 255 253 2 15 76. Given the below information, provide the journal entry to recognize tax expense. Assume taxes are paid immediately (with cash). Note: the statutory rate is assumed to be 40%. Assume the interest income is permanently non-taxable. You will have to decide whether there is any deferred tax position, given these facts. Income Statement Tax Return Difference: Permanent Revenues 400 400 Cost of Goods Sold – 150 – 150 SG&A Expense – 50 – 50 Depreciation Expense – 20 – 20 Interest Income 20 0 20 Pre-Tax Income 200 Taxable Income 180 Statutory Rate 40% 40% Tax Expense ? Taxes Paid (Cash) ? Deferred Tax? ? Tax Expense: Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 77. Refer to the previous problem. Calculate the effective tax rate: 78. Given the below information, calculate the amount of tax expense. Assume taxes are paid immediately (with cash). Note: the statutory rate is assumed to be 35%. You will have to decide whether there is any deferred tax position, given these facts. Income Statement Tax Return Difference: Temporary Revenues 500 500 Expenses – 100 – 100 Depreciation Expense – 40 – 100 60 Pre-tax Income 360 Taxable Income 300 Statutory Tax Rate 35% 35% Tax Expense ? Taxes Paid (Cash) ? Deferred Tax ? 16 79. What is the amount of tax expense? 80. Describe the controversy with respect to the recognition of deferred tax liabilities. 17
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment is in Microft Excel Format & is attached. $10 for both charts completed. Thank You!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
It is a financial reporting homework and i am disprite i can’t do it any more. please i need help.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
These are multiple choice questions but you NEED to show work on formula questions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tutorial 8, Case Problem 4, pgs 482 485
You will submit the following documents from the Alia s Senior Living workbook: Documentation sheet, Invoice and Product Pricing and Shipping sheet.
In step 4o, the best solution for the shipping cost is an IF Function with a nested vlookup (the IF checks if the subtotal is >=200 and thevlookup references the shipping cost table).
Below is a link to the book…
https://www.dropbox.com/s/2eyf12hgbv3jmx5/New%20Perspectives%20on%20Microsoft%20Excel%202010%20Comprehensive.pdf
2. Complete Tutorial 10, Case Problem 4 (through Step 4 only) on pages 611 612. There are no data files for this assignment – you will complete this worksheet from scratch. The following instructions will help you complete this assignment.
3. Save the workbook as: xx NewGen Robotics (replace xx with your first and last initials).
4. When creating the income statement for Step 2 in the textbook, use the categories (row labels) listed in Figure 10-5 on page 558, but not the data. Use the data (numbers) shown in step 2 on page 611. Create formulas for: Total Revenue, Total Material Cost, Total Manufacturing Cost, Total Variable Expenses, Total Fixed Expenses, Total Revenue, Total Expenses and Net Income.
5. Create a formula in the Income Statement for Units Produced that assumes that the company produces enough cleaning robots to have a 1 percent surplus over Units Sold.
6. Format the income statement professionally and name the sheet tab Income Statement. Create a copy of the Income Statement sheet and name the copied sheet tab Goal Seek.
7. In the Goal Seek sheet you created above, use the Goal Seek feature to complete Step 3 in the text.
8. To complete Step 4 in the text, create the one-variable data table on the Income Statement sheet. Name the data table Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis. Do not complete the CVP chart.
9. Make sure each sheet in the workbook will print on one page. Save and print the finished workbook. You will submit the xx NewGen Robotics workbook to the Week 10
This assignment is not in your textbook. Complete the steps listed below:
Problem: Ellen Felton is events coordinator at Kirk Harbor Inn, which is located on Cape Cod. She schedules weddings, conferences, engagements, and so forth at this water-front Victorian inn. She constantly is sending quotes to potential clients and asks you to assist her in linking the workbook she developed to the letter she sends to potential clients.
Complete the following:
1. Open the NewQuote_2010 workbook located in the Appendix C misc folder and then save it as xx Harbor Quote (replace xx with your first and last initials).
2. In the Documentation sheet, enter the date and your name, and then switch to the Quote worksheet.
3. Open the Event document located in the Appendix C misc folder and then save the document as xx Event Planner.
4. Return to the Harbor Quote workbook, and then copy the range C2:G19 in the Quote worksheet.
5. Return to the Event Planner document, and then paste the selected range as a link below the sentence Here are the details.
6. Ellen s client requests two changes: move the wedding to the Salon room and change the number of guests to 160. Make these changes in the Harbor Quote workbook, and then verify that the Event Planner document is updated.
7. Create a pie chart of expenses in the Harbor Quote document: select the ranges F13:G14 and F16:G18 (do not
select the Subtotal or Grand Total) and insert a 3-D Pie chart.
8. Add a Chart Title above the chart that reads: Wedding Expenses.
9. Copy the chart and embed it in the Event Planner Word document. Place it directly after the Excel worksheet (before the sentence that reads: We look forward to working with you in helping to make this special event a memorable one for you. )
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
**********PLEASE READ ALL THE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY!
NO PLAGIARISM. I WILL USE A PLAGIARISM CHECK SOFTWARE TO CHECK THE COMPLETED WORK
This is a 12-a page (or more) RESEARCH (NOT ESSAY) paper and MUST BE formatted according to APA style .
1.) Research Paper- INSTRCUTIONS
The objectives/purpose of the research paper project are to enable you to do a comprehensive financial analysis of a publicly traded corporation; and provide you with substantial information for you to make recommendations regarding investing in this corporation.
Your financial analysis report will be driven by a rigorous ratio analysis, and aggressively supplemented with your written analysis, interpretation, and evaluation of the data.
Your research should be strategically driven by two probing questions:
-Would you invest your financial capital in the selected firm as a shareholder?
-Would you invest your human and intellectual capital in the firm as an employee?
Steps in preparation of financial analysis report:
1.) Select a publicly held company
2.) Select a benchmark firm to compare your company against. The benchmark firm is typically the largest competitor.
3.) Obtain the firm s balance sheet, income statement, and statement of cash flows for
the past 5 years. Download or read the firm s annual report.
4.) Go to: http://www.sec.gov/edgar/searchedgar/webusers.htm
Research EDGAR s database for additional SEC report filings: 8-k, 10-Q.
4.) The following table is the type of Excel or Word table that should be used to gather and report your ratio and financial performance data. Note the 5 financial diagnostic categories that should be used in your analysis.
|
Financial diagnostic categories
|
Chosen company vs.
|
Benchmark competitor
|
|
|
|
|
|
1.) Liquidity of short-term assets
|
-Current ratio
-Cash ratio
-Quick ratio
|
-Current ratio
-Cash ratio
-Quick ratio
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.) Long-term debt-paying ability
|
-Debt ratio
-Debt-equity ratio
-Times interest earned
|
-Debt ratio
-Debt-equity ratio
-Times interest earned
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.) Profitability
|
|
|
|
|
-Net income/sales (profit margin)
-Net income/assets (ROA)
-Net income/shareholder equity (ROE)
|
-Net income/sales (profit margin)
-Net income/assets (ROA)
-Net income/shareholder equity (ROE)
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.) Asset utilization/ management efficiency
|
-Total asset turnover
-Inventory turnover measures
-Accounts receivable turnover
|
-Total asset turnover
-Inventory turnover measures
-Accounts receivable turnover
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.) Market measures
|
-Price/earnings ratio
-Earnings per common share
-Dividend payout
|
-Price/earnings ratio
-Earnings per common share
-Dividend payout
|
|
|
|
|
Use 2-3 ratios per diagnostic category. Place your ratio calculations in the table for your selected companies primary company and benchmark competitor. Using 5 diagnostic categories, and 3 ratios to assess each category, results in 15 ratio measures per company that will be compared side by side.
6.) To validate your research, 5 years of data should be analyzed.
7.) The financial analysis report must be written properly. They must include a title page, a table of contents, and a reference page. For both midterm and final report, information sources from the web, etc. must be cited properly, using APA style.
This means that every table that you cut and pasted or typed from the web must have a source at the bottom of the table AND that citing must also be included in a reference page at the end of the report.
Your project should include:
a. An overview of the corporation.
i. Provide general information regarding the type of business, products and/or services, location of headquarters, name of CEO, number of employees, and countries of operation, etc.
b. The latest financial statements
i. Get the income statement, balance sheet, cash flow statement, and the statement of owners equity for the past fiscal year. Create Turnitin-friendly versions of the financial statements; do not just cut and paste them in your report. Do not forget to cite the source under each statement.
ii. If you cannot cut and paste them, you may have to type in the information in a table in your report.
c. A summary of each financial statement
i. Take each statement and state the key parts in words. Tell a story from each of the financial statements. For example, for the income statement, the story starts like, Total Revenues in 2010 were $10 billion, while Cost of Goods Sold were $8 billion, leaving a gross profit margin of $2 billion, or 20 percent of total revenues .After taking out interest and taxes from EBIT, the net income was $0.5 billion, or 5 percent of total revenues.
d. Ratio calculation (include 5 major types of ratios. Refer to chapter 3, Analysis of Financial Statements)
i. Organization of this section is based on the FIVE types of ratios listed in the text book. Calculate the ratios from the financial statements in part c above using Excel or your calculator and present them in a table.
ii. Find industry financial ratios online (eg. Yahoo.com) and compare your corporation s ratios to these industry ratios.
iii. Present your results following the five types of ratios discussed in part d.
iv. A table with both corporation and industry ratios is required;
v.
e. Discussion of key statistics provided by sources like Yahoo finance.
i. There are many different other statistics available for your corporation. These include market value, beta, and diluted EPS, etc. Discuss some of the key statistics that you think can assist you to determine if this corporation is a good buy or sell.
f. For you to decide if a corporation s stock is a good buy or sell, you must forecast several key variables, including the stock price.
i. Use historical prices (5 years of monthly data recommended) and forecast the stock price for the next year. Use regression analysis, and/or moving average, etc. to create your forecast.
ii. Create a graph from the historical data and show your forecast on the same graph. You can add a trend line to the graph to help you with a forecast. Include the graph in your report.
iii. You need to say specifically what the forecasted value of the stock price is.
iv. You must address the question, Is this forecast reasonable Must you amend your analysis to get a more reasonable forecast
g. Other information pertinent to the corporation that could affect its future performance and stock price.
i. This could include dividend policy, capital structure, bond ratings, expert opinions on TV, new projects, litigation, regulation, etc. Search for information on the web regarding this corporation. Look at company complaint blogs, etc.
h. Recommendation regarding the future of this corporation.
i. Is the stock a good buy, average buy, or a poor buy (implying a good sell)
ii. Include a justification of your recommendation based on your analysis and research.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Four Exercise Assignment 1. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing: Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned per employee Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned per employee Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500 State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned per employee Federal unemployment taxes: 0.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hi
I need help with financial statment analysis project. For more details check the aatached files.
(The company to analyise is Autozone)
Thanks.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
hello i have the qustions on the file ,, please attach the file
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Answer1????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Number of Pages: 2(Double Spaced) Writing Style: APA Number of sources: 3 Choose a public company in the food industry. Analyze the financial statements and assess whether the financial performance has improved or declined year-over-year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attached before attempting to handshake. This is for 2 separate papers with regards to accounting – 8-9 pages each paper. Attached are the instructions and the topics that need to be written about. Topics are in bold.
Original work only as this is going to go through plagiarism checks! This must be done on 10/3, no later.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(2) Prepare the December 31, 2011, post-closing trial balance for Showers Company. (The items in the Trial Balance should be grouped as follows: Assets, Liabilities and Equity. Be sure to list the asset in order of liquidity. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) SHOWERS COMPANY Post-Closing Trial Balance December 31, 2011 Debit Credit $ $ Totals $ $
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
2 SEPARATE ASSIGNMENTS Write a 350- to 500-word summary explaining the differences between revenue expenditures and capital expenditures during a useful life and identifying any similarities. Briefly explain the entries of revenue expenditures and capital expenditures. Format your summary consistent with APA guidelines.DUE Wednesday __________________________________________________ Exercises and Problems – Week Two Resource: Ch. 9 of Financial Accounting Complete Exercises E9-1, E9-7, & E9-12. Complete Problem P9-7B.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Here is the 2nd task.
Another teacher worked on this assignments, but can’t understand how to do it correctly. You do not have to do the entire tasks, as some of the areas of both tasks have been passed off already. I am attaching the original assignment instructions, the rubrics, the jobs that were done by the previous teacher & the evaluation summaries. Please help!!! I needed this last week, and I am stressing out. I will send the tasks separate, because there are a lot of attachments.
Thanks!
Attachments:
1- the actual assignment instructions
2- the grading rubric (must be followed)
3- the written part of the assignment submitted by the previous teacher (PDF)
4- the same submission by previous teacher (ODS-for your convenience)
5- the most recent task evaluation
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
To find the answers for these questions it has to be logged in to this web site
http://aaahq.org/ascLogin.cfm
User ID: AAA51460
Password: ub5PAik
Then click FASB
then Assets-Inventory
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In drafting the memo:
(a) You should explain the circumstances the company finds itself in.
(b) Address the requirements under GAAP for the discount rate and expected rate of return on plan assets based on the FASB’s Accounting Standards Codification. When discussing the GAAP requirements, you should cite the relevant subsections of the FASB Accounting Standards Codification by section/paragraph number. Make sure you locate the paragraphs of the codification (not just the definitions) that address the discount rate and the expected long-term rate of return on plan assets. Your primary guidance should be from the recognition and measurement sections (25-35) although you can cite the implementation guidance (section 55) to support the other guidance.
(c) Address whether in the current economic environment, using any of the assumptions suggested other than the 5% discount rate–8% expected rate of return assumption is feasible. Address whether it would be ethical to follow the golfing buddy’s suggestion and back into interest rates that the company can live with, i.e., that give the desired results. In this regard, you should discuss how much flexibility you think there might be in selecting these discount/return rate assumptions for the purposes of determining the PBO and pension expense and still remaining in compliance with GAAP
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Iskender Corporation is a Turkish conglomerate with operations located throughout Europe and the Middle East. The company recently adopted International Financial Reporting Standards and has prepared disclosures to comply with IFRS 8, Operating Segments. Information related to revenues. Operating Segments Total Revenues Countries Sales to External Customers Automotive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23,093 Turkey 28876 Food . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22,875 Germany 18765 Retail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,987 Bulgaria 12076 Finance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,895 Russia 9897 Consumer durable . . . . . . . . 7,182 Italy 7654 Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6642 Iraq 6757 Real estate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,400 Uzbekistan 3049 Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,074 87074 Based upon this information, Iskender prepares the following note to comply with IFRS 8 Note 30: Segment Reporting (amounts in millions of Turkish Lira) Operating Segments Automotive Food Retail other External sales . . . . . . . ………. 21,678 19,781 13,987 22,397 Profit (loss). . . . . . . . . ………. 4,076 2,007 3,467 5,563 Depreciation . . . . . ………… 222 135 142 456 Total assets . . . . . . . . ………. 18,874 20,765 9,654 20,765 Capital expenditures . ………. 367 228 195 513 Equity method investments . . . . . . 398 0- 0 678 Geographic Areas Turkey Germany Bulgaria Other External sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28,876 8,765 12,076 27,357 Property, plant, and equipment . . . 7,078 2,508 3,097 5,478 Required: Evaluate whether Note 30 Segment Reporting is in compliance with IFRS 8 based upon the information provided.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HC1041 IT for Business Individual Assignment Worth 30 marks due Friday Week 10 1500 words Scenario You have been asked to explore three database alternatives for a merchant who provides shoes to retail stores. The merchant needs the database to keep the financial records, employee records, inventory records and general use records for the business. Answer the questions below in your report. 1. Identify three database systems and discuss the purpose for choosing these three options 2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This the explanation select the company from this list News papar OR 1-May bank 2-DRB resources 3-IOI plantation 4-country Height 5-proton 6-cahaya mata sarawork 7-KPJ Healthcare 8-QSR Bata Kawan 9-CIMB 10-public bank Based on their recent annual repoort from 2000 to 2010 choice just one year…..the document you look in the report 1-statment on corporate goverment 2-chairment statement 3-Managing directors review 4-auditors report 5-Management commttee members 6-Risk management This is the guideline 1-combined code 2- listing requirment by security commission 3- sarbanes oxley.. apply this is the guideline base on information you get in report……you can select 2 or apply all….
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 1-3
Due Sunday night at 10pm eastern
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hi,
I have attached the pdf. presentation (Whole Foods Market) Part 3 for review!
please do it asap, so that I can post it, otherwise if another
student gets to review it, I won’t be able to review the presentation.
Thanks!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hi,
i am sending instructions for parts 2 and 3 ppt. or pdf. presentation.
Part 3 will only be done after i have posted part 2, after that another student’s presentation will be available for review.
I will send you a new handshake for Part 3. 🙂
thanks!
——————————————————————————
I Have attached the illustrations! thanks.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Jim s Landscaping is in a business of maintaining and improving yards in the surrounding areas. The company bases its overhead cost budgets on the following data:
Variable overhead costs:
Supplies $4 per yard
Machine maintenance $2 per yard
Chemicals $6 per yard
Fixed Overhead:
Salaries and wages $2,300 per month
Depreciation $800 per month
Utilities $400 per month
Rent $1,100 per month
In June the following actual costs were incurred for 83 yards:
Supplies $320
Machine maintenance $180
Chemicals $500
Salaries and wages $2,500
Depreciation $800
Utilities $450
Rent $1,100
Construct a flexible budget performance report using the data provided: Show computations
2. Banner Inc bases its variable overhead performance report on the actual direct labor hours of the period. Data concerning the most recent year that ended on December 31 are as follows:
Budgeted direct labor hours 12,000
Actual direct labor hours 13,500
Standard direct labor hours allowed 13,000
Cost formula (per direct labor hours):
Indirect labor $0.85
Supplies $0.30
Electricity $0.15
Actual costs incurred:
Indirect labor $11,600
Supplies $4,000
Electricity $2,050
Management would like to compute both the spending and the efficiency variances for the variable overhead in the company s variable overhead performance report. Prepare a variable overhead performance report with both the variable overhead spending and the efficiency variances. Show computations and details.
3. Photos Inc has a standard cost system in which it applies overhead to products based on the standard direct labor hours allowed for the actual output of the period. Data concerning the most recent year appears below:
Total budgeted fixed overhead cost for the year $250,000
Actual fixed overhead cost for the year $265,000
Budgeted standard direct labor hours 40,000
Actual direct labor hours 41,000
Standard direct labor hours allowed for the actual output 40,800
a. Compute the fixed portion of the predetermined overhead rate for the year. Show computations
b. Compute the fixed overhead budget and volume variances. Show computations
4. Grater Inc sells product A and product B. Revenue and cost information relating to the products follow:
Product A Product B
Selling Price per unit $48.00 $65.00
Variable expenses per unit $24.50 $29.20
Traceable fixed expenses per year $144,000 $101,500
Common fixed expenses in the company total $390,000 annually. Last year the company produced and sold 10,000 of Product A and 15,000 of Product B.
Prepare a contribution format income statement for the year segmented by product lines. Show details clearly.
5. Selected sales and operating data for three divisions of three different companies are given below:
Division X Division Y Division Z
Sales $900,000 $750,000 $600,000
Average operating assets $600,000 $150,000 $200,000
Net operating income $54,000 $30,000 $10,000
Minimum required rate of return 10% 16% 8%
a. Compute the return on investment (ROI) for each division using the formula stated in terms of margin and turnover. Show computations
b. Compute the residual income for each division. Show computations
c. Under which of these methods would they accept an opportunity with a 15% return. Show computations and details
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
JOB ORDER COSTING – 2 Questions |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Here is the attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Play the lemonade stand game again using the coding methodology adopted by YOUR TEAM in week 2.
Look at the pricing for lemons, ice, cups, and sugar.
Remember that a pitcher will serve 12 cups if there is no ice, and about 20 cups if there are 3 ice cubes per cup.
Then, write a summary to reflect on your experience (250 word minimum).
Address the Following in your Paper:
Follow the following 5 step process. SHOW YOUR WORK.
1. Calculate the number of cups/pitcher you can serve. ROUND UP to the nearest whole number.
2. Calculate the number of lemons, cups of sugar, and cups you ll need to buy.
3. Look at the quantity pricing for each item and add up the cost to purchase your supplies.
4. Look at your costs. For every $1.00 of cost, how much is Cups? Sugar? Lemons? Ice?
5. Calculate your cost and revenue per cup (revenue should be price per cup). How did changing ingredients/quantity purchases affect your unit costs?
Put the summary data you want to focus on (i.e., what is your hypothesis regarding which variable affects net revenue) and put this information into a table
Discuss what your table reveals
Graph your cost and revenue data in a bar chart.
Graph your daily net revenue (revenue cost).
Discuss/describe what your graphs reveal.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lewis University
Exam #1
Accounting #1
Sept 7, 2013
1
Trial Balance
a.
Explain the purpose of the trial balance.
b.
If the trial balance balances, does that indicate all of journal entries have been posted correctly and in the proper month Please explain
2
Create a transaction that will decrease an asset and decrease equity.
3
Customer Over There owes the Wood Company $16,000 on August 31, 2013. On Sept 7, 2013. Over There sent a check for 50%,to Wood Company, of the amount due. Please explain how the Sept 7 transaction affect s the income statement for Wood Company.
4
The Shore Company has sent you a puzzle to solve. They heard you love puzzles. The pieces for the puzzle are:
a.
Assets on Aug 1, 2013 $ 732,000
b.
Assets in Aug 31, 2013 1,005,000
c.
Liabilities on Aug 1, 2013 442,000
d.
Liabilities on Aug 31, 2013 685,000
e.
During the month of August 2013, the owners invested an additional $85,000 into the company.
f.
During the month of August 2013, the owners withdrew $40,000 from the company.
Required — calculate the net income for the company during the month of August. Show your work.
5. The Woody Shore Company opened their doors to the business on August 31, 2013. The company incurred the following transactions during August 2013.
August 1 The owners deposited $87,000 into the business
August 2 Purchased supplies on credit, total $800.
August 2 Company purchased a 12 month insurance policy for their business $3,600
August 3 Paid rent for tLewis University
Exam #1
Accounting #1
Sept 7, 2013
1
Trial Balance
a.
Explain the purpose of the trial balance.
b.
If the trial balance balances, does that indicate all of journal entries have been posted correctly and in the proper month Please explain
2
Create a transaction that will decrease an asset and decrease equity.
3
Customer Over There owes the Wood Company $16,000 on August 31, 2013. On Sept 7, 2013. Over There sent a check for 50%,to Wood Company, of the amount due. Please explain how the Sept 7 transaction affect s the income statement for Wood Company.
4
The Shore Company has sent you a puzzle to solve. They heard you love puzzles. The pieces for the puzzle are:
a.
Assets on Aug 1, 2013 $ 732,000
b.
Assets in Aug 31, 2013 1,005,000
c.
Liabilities on Aug 1, 2013 442,000
d.
Liabilities on Aug 31, 2013 685,000
e.
During the month of August 2013, the owners invested an additional $85,000 into the company.
f.
During the month of August 2013, the owners withdrew $40,000 from the company.
Required — calculate the net income for the company during the month of August. Show your work.
5. The Woody Shore Company opened their doors to the business on August 31, 2013. The company incurred the following transactions during August 2013.
August 1 The owners deposited $87,000 into the business
August 2 Purchased supplies on credit, total $800.
August 2 Company purchased a 12 month insurance policy for their business $3,600
August 3 Paid rent for t
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lily Flour Company manufactures flour by a series of three processes, beginning with wheat grain being introduced in the Milling Department. From the Milling Department, the materials pass through the Sifting and Packaging departments, emerging as packaged refined flour.
The balance in the account Work in Process Sifting Department was as follows on July 1, 2014:
The following costs were charged to Work in Process Sifting Department during July:
During July, 12,000 units of flour were completed. Work in Process Sifting Department on July 31 was 1,000 units, 4 5 completed.
Required:
|
1. Prepare a cost of production report for the Sifting Department for July. If an amount is zero, enter “0”. If required, round your cost per equivalent unit answers to the nearest cent.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 2: Discussion Performance Reports and Budgeting
Review Decision Case 1 (Donna Tse) located on page 1127in you textbook. Answer the case question in the Requirements section of the case. Your memo should be at least two paragraphs in length.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Understanding Accounting and Financial Statements . Accounting can be an involved process, but none the less is essential for the manager to understand. The purpose of this module is four-fold:
- To provide assistance in understanding some of the basic accounting principles and practices.
- Provide hands on practice.
- Provide real life examples
INSTRUCTIONS:
Watchthree entertaining and informative video clips (3:30 minutes each) from The Center for Audit Quality (CAQ):
- Fight Fraud – Accounting Ethics Provides an explanation why businesses sometimes commit fraudulent accounting acts and the importance of ethics and leadership.
- System of Investor Protection : Understanding financial reporting and the team members in charge of ensuring reporting accuracy.
- Sarbanes Oxley – The Audit Committee : Understanding the significance of the Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002 and audit committee responsibilities. (Video credit: CAQorg.com)
Watch the video clip (1:07 minutes) entitled Goodbye Training Wheels . This is an example of a term called Innovation Transfer which means The transfer of a new idea or method for solving a problem from one group or individual to another, typically from a process improvement consulting group to a client business. Innovation transfer is an important part of Six Sigma and other best practice deployment approaches. In this case, I am using this example of the young boy in the video learning to ride his bicycle as an analogy of you learning accounting principles: sometimes you just need a little practice and for someone to steady the bike and before long you are peddling on your own!!
(You can read more about innovation transfer at Business Dictionary.com. Training Wheel Video credit: Andrea Dorfman. Music: Iron and Wine)
Complete the Excel workbook entitled Chpt 15 Critical Thinking Exercise Accounting. This workbook consists of two problems (each worth up to 50 points each totaling the possible 100 points you can earn). The two problems are:
- Wheatley International Preparing a Financial Statement
- Acme Incorporated Calculating Financial Ratios
Both problems are in the same Excel workbook and are listed in six (6) tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet when you open the file. Complete the work in the gray answer boxes for each assignment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Compute the annual breakeven number of meals and sales revenue for the restaurant. 2. Compute the number of meals and the amount of sales revenue needed to earn operating income of $75,600 for the year. Average revenue, include beverages and desserts .$ 45 per meal Average cost of food .$ 15 per meal Chef s and dishwasher s salaries .$ 61,200 per year Rent (premises, equipment) ..$ 4,000 per month Cleaning (linen and premises) ..$ 800 per month Replacement of dishes, cutlery, glasses .$ 300 per month Utilities, advertising, telephone ..$ 2,300 per month
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Compute the profitability ratios, including the a and b components (DuPont Methods) of ratios 2 and 3 as shown in the textbook. The profitability ratios should be shown for all three years.
2. Write a brief one-paragraph description of any trends that appear to have taken place over the three-year time period.
3. In examining the income statement in Figure 1, note that there was an extraordinary loss of $170,000 in 2006. This might have represented uninsured losses from a fire, a lawsuit settlement, etc. It probably does not represent a recurring event or affect the earnings capability of the firm. For that reason, the astute financial analyst might add back in the extraordinary loss to gauge the true operating earnings of the firm. Since it was a tax-deductible item, we must first multiply by (1-tax rate) before adding it back in.* The tax rate was 35 percent for the year.*
$170,000 Extraordinary loss
.65 (1-tax rate)
$110,500 Aftertax addition to profits from eliminating
the extraordinary loss from net income
The more representative net income number for 2003 would now be:
Initially reported (Figure 1) $200,318
Adjustment for extraordinary loss being eliminated +110,500
Adjusted net income $310,818
Based on the adjusted net income figure of $310,818, re compute the profitability ratios for 2006 (include part a and b for ratios 2 and 3).
4. Now with the adjusted net income numbers as part of the ratios for 2006, write a brief one-paragraph description of trends that appear to have taken place over the three-year time period (refer back to the data in Question 1 for 2004 and 2005).
5. Once again, using the revised profitability ratios for 2006 that you
developed in Question 3, write a complete one paragraph analysis of the
company s profitability ratios compared to the industry ratios (figure 3).
Make sure to include asset turnover and debt to total assets as supplemental
material in your analysis.
6. Harrod s has a superior sales to total assets ratio compared to the industry.
For 2006, compute ratios 4, 6 and 7 as described in the text and compare
them to industry data to see why this is so. Write a brief one-paragraph
description of the results. Note: for ratio 4, only half the sales are on credit
terms.
7. Conclusion: Based on your analysis in answering Questions 4 and 5, do you
hink that Becky Harrod has a legitimate complaint about being charged 2
percent over prime instead of one percent over prime? There is no absolute
right answer to this question, but use your best judgment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Homework Discussion: 1 Time-Driven Activity-Based Costing (ABC) Respond to the following: -Analyze the benefits and weaknesses of traditional ABC in determining accurate overhead costs over a time-driven ABC system. -Evaluate how a business can achieve a competitive advantage in the marketplace through the use of ABC and how you would convince senior management that a system should be implemented.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Homework Cost-Volume Profit Analysis Respond to the following: -When conducting a cost-volume profit analysis, determine where the most challenges for accountants occur. Recommend action to overcome the challenge(s). -Create a brief scenario in which an accountant would be asked to conduct a cost-volume profit analysis and provide a supporting rationale.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyst Report – 125 points (This assignment is to be completed individually) Part 1: Executive Summary – 10 points GOAL: For this section of the assignment you will have to succinctly summarize important information included in the annual report to provide the reader with a quick overview of the contents. Look at key findings from your report including financial information as well as industry information.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
University of Maryland University College Final Examination Acct220: Principles of Accounting I For this exam, omit all general journal entry explanations. Question 1: Suggested time 20 minutes: 15% points: The account balances appearing on the trial balance (below) were taken from the general ledger of Flip’s Copy Shop at June 30, 2012. Additional information for the month of June which has not yet been recorded in the accounts is as follows: (a) A physical count of supplies indicates $300 on hand at June 30.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need help with 2 homework questions. I have attached the details.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
How to do P7-8A, P8-8A, P13-8B, P14-8B, P15-8B in Wiley Accounting Principles Third Canadian Edition?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week 3
Assignment:The Group Project assignment is to answer questions 1, 2, and 4 from the Case Requirements section located on page 8 of your article.
Excel Spreadsheet:The spreadsheet will provide a complete operating budget of the revenues and expenses for Extended Family, Inc. Be sure to complete all three existing programs listed in the spreadsheet.
Paper: The paper will provide an analysis of the Extended Family, Inc., case study and will identify proposed consolidated operating budget based off your output from the Excel Spreadsheet. In addition, the paper will include a brief budget summary to the Board of Directors assessing specific moments and documentation regarding the effects the agency expansion and the programmatic concerns have on the proposed budget. Be sure to include an introduction and a conclusion in your paper, and follow APA format.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Answer the following questions in 200 to 300 words:
Nonprofit organizations are required to produce financial statements based on the accrual method of accounting. How is this different from the cash basis of accounting? Why is accrual accounting important?
In an accrual system, does revenue equal cash?
What is the importance of the statement of cash flow in the financial management of an organization?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Two articles about relevant, current chapter 19 content: FOR EACH ANSWER THE FOLLOWING QUESTIONS IN PARAGRAPH FORM. One paragraph is plenty, just be sure to relate the answers back to what we discussed from chapter 19. Billionaire investor Icahn wants a larger Apple buyback of stock http://www.philly.com/philly/business/20131025_Billionaire_investor_Icahn_wants_a_larger_Apple_buyback_of_stock.htmlhttp://www.philly.com/philly/business/20131025_Billionaire_investor_Icahn_wants_a_larger_Apple_buyback_of_stock.html#77Co0FutcDItlRUH.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
that only foraccountsexpert
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Need a hyppthetical business plan for my business capstone, I would like for it to be based on a resturant named Ali Baba Cafe. I am including instructions and some of the work that I started on it.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem1
E8-4
At the end of 2011, Delong Co. has accounts receivable of $700,000 and an allowance
for doubtful accounts of $54,000. On January 24, 2012, the company learns that its receivable
from Ristau Inc. is not collectible, and management authorizes a write-off of $5,400.
(a)Prepare the journal entry to record the write-off.
(b)What is the cash realizable value of the accounts receivable (1) before the write-off and
(2) after the write-off?
Problem2
E9-4
Chris Rock has prepared the following list of statements about depreciation.
1.Depreciation is a process of asset valuation, not cost allocation.
2.Depreciation provides for the proper matching of expenses with revenues.
3.The book value of a plant asset should approximate its market value.
4.Depreciation applies to three classes of plant assets: land, buildings, and equipment.
5.Depreciation does not apply to a building because its usefulness and revenue-producing
ability generally remain intact over time.
6.The revenue-producing ability of a depreciable asset will decline due to wear and tear and to
obsolescence.
7.Recognizing depreciation on an asset results in an accumulation of cash for replacement of
the asset.
8.The balance in accumulated depreciation represents the total cost that has been charged to
expense.
9.Depreciation expense and accumulated depreciation are reported on the income statement.
10.Four factors affect the computation of depreciation: cost, useful life, salvage value, and residual
value.
Instructions
Identify each statement on page 430 as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.
Problem3
E10-4
Guyer Company publishes a monthly sports magazine,Fishing Preview. Subscriptions
to the magazine cost $20 per year. During November 2011, Guyer sells 12,000 subscriptions
beginning with the December issue. Guyer prepares financial statements quarterly and recognizes
subscription revenue earned at the end of the quarter. The company uses the accounts
Unearned Subscriptions and Subscription Revenue.
Instructions
(a)Prepare the entry in November for the receipt of the subscriptions.
(b)Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2011, to record subscription revenue earned in
December 2011.
(c)Prepare the adjusting entry at March 31, 2012, to record subscription revenue earned in the
first quarter of 2012.
Problem4
E11-4
Grossman Corporation issued 1,000 shares of stock.
Instructions
Prepare the entry for the issuance under the following assumptions.
(a)The stock had a par value of $5 per share and was issued for a total of $52,000.
(b)The stock had a stated value of $5 per share and was issued for a total of $52,000.
(c)The stock had no par or stated value and was issued for a total of $52,000.
(d)The stock had a par value of $5 per share and was issued to attorneys for services during
incorporation valued at $52,000.
(e)The stock had a par value of $5 per share and was issued for land worth $52,000.
Problem5
E12-4
Dossett Company had the following transactions pertaining to stock investments.
Feb. 1 Purchased 600 shares of Goetz common stock (2%) for $6,000 cash, plus brokerage
fees of $200.
July 1 Received cash dividends of $1 per share on Goetz common stock.
Sept. 1 Sold 300 shares of Goetz common stock for $4,400, less brokerage fees of $100.
Dec. 1 Received cash dividends of $1 per share on Goetz common stock.
Instructions
(a)Journalize the transactions.
(b)Explain how dividend revenue and the gain (loss) on sale should be reported in the income
statement.
Problem6
E13-4
Villa Company reported net income of $195,000 for 2011.Villa also reported depreciation
expense of $45,000 and a loss of $5,000 on the sale of equipment.The comparative balance
sheet shows a decrease in accounts receivable of $15,000 for the year, a $17,000 increase in
accounts payable, and a $4,000 decrease in prepaid expenses.
Instructions
Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for 2011. Use the indirect
method.
Problem 7
E14-4
The comparative condensed income statements of Hendi Corporation are shown below.
HENDI CORPORATION
Comparative Condensed Income Statements
For the Years Ended December 31
2012 2011
Net sales $600,000 $500,000
Cost of goods sold 483,000 420,000
Gross profit 117,000 80,000
Operating expenses 57,200 44,000
Net income $ 59,800 $ 36,000
Instructions
(a)Prepare a horizontal analysis of the income statement data for Hendi Corporation using
2011 as a base.
(b)Prepare a vertical analysis of the income statement data for Hendi Corporation in columnar
form for both years.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
there are 8 questions
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need help with homework for:
- Intermediate accounting
- Cost accounting
- Business law
The homework requires written responses and multiple financial calculations. I need this to be completed by Sunday 5/12/13.
Thanks
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Required
Determine the amount of each of the following items.
a.Dividends declared and paid during Year 1
b.Depreciation expense for Year 1 assuming that Watson Corporation neither sold nor retired depreciable assets during Year 1
c.Inventories at the end of Year 2
d.Interest expense on borrowing during Year 2, with an interest rate of 7 percent
e.Other current liabilities at the end of Year 2
f.Property, plant, and equipment at the end of Year 3 assuming that Watson Corporation neither sold nor retired depreciable assets during Year 3
g.Retained earnings at the end of Year 3
h.Long-term debt at the end of Year 3
i.The income tax rate for Year 4
j.Purchases of inventories during Year 4
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the 2007 & 2008 Income Statement and Balance Sheet provided, calculate the following
Liquidity ratios
Current ratio
Acid-test, or quick, ratio
Receivables turnover
Inventory turnover
Profitability ratios
Asset turnover
Profit margin
Return on assets
Return on common stockholders equity
Solvency ratios
Debt to total assets
Times interest earned
Please be sure to also do the following
1. Show your calculations for each ratio
2. Create a horizontal and vertical analysis for the balance sheet and the income statement
3. Write a 350- to 700-word memo to the CEO of your selected organization (Berry s Bug Busters) in which you discuss your findings from your ratio calculations and your horizontal and vertical analysis. In your memo, address the following questions:
a) What do the liquidity, profitability, and solvency ratios reveal about the financial position of the company?
b) Which users may be interested in each type of ratio?
c) What does the collected data reveal about the performance and position of the company
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I have a quiz that is due in about 12 hours. Before offering me a handshake, please review the attachment and be sure that it is something that you know how to do.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need help with one problem on acounting it keeps coming back wrong not sure what I am doing wrong can someone help please this is due now
|
|
|
Frog |
Minnow |
Worm |
Total |
% |
|
|
Sales |
|
$ 200,000 |
$ 280,000 |
$ 240,000 |
$ 720,000 |
100.00% |
|
|
Variable Cost |
120,000 |
160,000 |
150,000 |
430,000 |
59.72% |
|
|
Contribution Margin |
$ 80,000 |
$ 120,000 |
$ 90,000 |
$ 290,000 |
40.2778% |
|
|
Fixed Cost |
|
|
|
282,000 |
|
|
|
Net Operating Margin |
|
|
$ 8,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 1 |
Fixed Cost |
|
$ 282,000 |
|
|
|
|
|
/ Contribution Margin Ratio |
40.2778% |
|
|
|
|
|
Breakeven (Dollars) |
|
$ 700,138 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Have a 20 question accounting homework assignment that requires submittal by mid-week.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Part 1 100-200 words Please respond to this Discussion question using the information from the personal budget you calculate using the http://threadcontent.next.ecollege.com/CurrentCourse/expense_dq.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
There a excel sheet attached it’s about accouting….It’s needs to be done
You will know when you open the excel sheet
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need help with this excel template case study. I keep getting different answers from everybody using older version of the case study. I need this asap, or at least by today. I have attached my recent answer and the case study details.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
need this assignment in microsoft excel spreadsheet please see attachment. I will also need a 1050 paper
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Marathon Inc. (a C corporation) reported $1,000,000 of taxable income in the current year. During the year, it distributed $100,000 as dividends to its shareholders as follows:
|
|
| $5,000 to Guy, a 5 percent individual shareholder. |
| $15,000 to Little Rock Corp. a 15 percent shareholder (C corporation). |
| $80,000 to other shareholders. |
1. award:
10 out of
10.00 points
| a. |
How much of the dividend payment did Marathon deduct in determining its taxable income (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
| b. |
Assuming Guy s marginal ordinary tax rate is 35 percent, how much tax will he pay on the $5,000 dividend he received from Marathon Inc. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
| c. |
Assuming Little Rock Corp. s marginal tax rate is 34 percent, what amount of tax will it pay on the $15,000 dividend it received from Marathon Inc. (70 percent dividends received deduction) (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
| Amount deductible |
$ 1,530 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
31. A credit balance in Cash Over and Short is reported as a(n) (Points : 3) asset.
liability.
miscellaneous expense.
miscellaneous revenue.
| Question 32. 32. A petty cash fund of $100 is replenished when the fund contains $4 in cash and receipts for $94. The entry to replenish the fund would (Points : 3) |
credit Cash Over and Short for $2. credit Miscellaneous Revenue for $2. debit Cash Over and Short for $2. debit Miscellaneous Expense for $2. |
| Question 33. 33. The size of the petty cash fund is dependent on (Points : 3) |
the wishes of the custodian of the fund. anticipated disbursements for the year. anticipated disbursements for a three- to four-week period. the size of the regular cash account. |
| Question 34. 34. A note payable is in the form of (Points : 3) |
a contingency that is reasonably likely to occur. a written promissory note. an oral agreement. a standing agreement. |
| Question 35. 35. If a corporation issued $3,000,000 in bonds which pay 10% annual interest, what is the annual net cash cost of this borrowing if the income tax rate is 30%? (Points : 3) |
$3,000,000 $90,000 $300,000 $210,000 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
as attached
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Income statement and balance sheet data for Virtual Gaming Systems are provided below.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Short-term Investments, Cost Method, Handout for Appendix D Name ______________________________________________________ Prepare the necessary general journal entries for the information provided below concerning the short-term investments for the Hotel Corporation. Record answers in the space provided. Jan 2 Purchased 10,000 shares of Greene Corporation’s common stock at $21 per share plus a $3,150 fee. Date Account Titles Debit Credit Jan.2 Aug 6 Greene Corporation paid a $1.10 per share dividend.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I would like these later this afternoon, thank you
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
i need help with journal entries exercises…
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
hi this project is for prominent_teacher…
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Homework Incremental Costs Analysis and Opportunity Costs Respond to the following: – From the first e-Activity, evaluate the opportunity costs for Damien Chrysler for failure to accept a proposal from within to manufacture a vehicle for the Indian market and suggest ways that opportunity cost can be minimized. – Analyze how excess capacity and incremental cost analysis can benefit management decisions to accept or reject projects and how this process can impact the financial performance of the business.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Homework Assignment Johnson Controls Capital Investments {Original and fresh paper} [[Visit the Website of Johnson Controls Inc., located at [http://www.jonsoncontrols.com], and review its 2012 financial forecasts. According to the forecasts, Johnson Controls will increase capital investments to approximately $1.7 billion. More than 70% of the company’s capital expenditures in 2012 are associated with growth and margin expansion opportunities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider this code using the ArrayBag of Section 5.2 and the Location class from Chapter 2. What is the output? Location i = new Location(0, 3); Location j = new Location(0, 3); b.add(i); b.add(j); System.out.println(b.countOccurrences(i)); A. 0 B. 1 C. 2 D. 3 Suppose that b and c are Integer objects. A typical use of the clone method looks like this: b = (Integer) c.clone( ); Write a short clear explanation of why the (Integer) type cast is required in this typical example. A. obj = s; B. s = obj; C. s = (String) obj; D.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Homework Liquidity Ratios Respond to the following: – From the first e-Activity, evaluate the impact of not considering the current portion of long-term liabilities in the current ratio and working capital, and how this may impact day- to-day business decisions. – Determine the implications of a significant positive change in the ratio. Provide a rationale with your response.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Homework ACC 560 – Managerial Accounting Required Resources [Weygandt, J. J., Kimmel, P.D., & Kieso, D. E. (2012). Managerial accounting: Tools for business decision making (6th ed.). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley and Sons] COURSE LEARNING OUTCOMES: . Determine the difference between managerial and financial accounting, and their Interrelationship. 2. Analyze the concepts of job order costing, process costing, and activity-based costing. 3. Conduct cost-volume profit analysis, incremental analysis, and analyze pricing issues. 4.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Advanced Auditing
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Explain the promise and risk of exporting or importing, and identify the information sources and government programs to help exporters or importers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Foundations of Accounting I
Accounting Project
Written by: Karen Pitsch
David s Entertainment is a merchandising business. Their account balances as of November 30, 2012 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows:
110 Cash $ 73,920
112 Accounts Receivable 34,250
113 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 11,000
115 Merchandise Inventory 123,900
116 Prepaid Insurance 3,750
117 Store Supplies 2,850
123 Store Equipment 100,800
124 Accumulated Depreciation-Store Equipment 20,160
210 Accounts Payable 21,450
211 Salaries Payable 0
218 Interest Payable 0
220 Note Payable (Due 2017) 15,000
310 D. Williams, Capital (January 1, 2012) 73,260
311 D. Williams, Drawing 50,000
312 Income Summary 0
410 Sales 853,445
411 Sales Returns and Allowances 20,020
412 Sales Discounts 13,200
510 Cost of Merchandise Sold 414,575
520 Sales Salaries Expense 74,400
521 Advertising Expense 18,000
522 Depreciation Expense 0
523 Store Supplies Expense 0
529 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 2,800
530 Office Salaries Expense 40,500
531 Rent Expense 18,600
532 Insurance Expense 0
533 Bad Debt Expense 0
539 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 1,650
550 Interest Expense 1,100
David s Entertainment uses the perpetual inventory system and the First-in, First-out costing method. Transportation-in and purchase discounts should be added to the Inventory Control Sheet, but since this will complicate the computation of the First-in, First-out costing method, please ignore this step in the process. They also use the Allowance Method for bad debt.
The Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary Ledgers along with the Inventory Control Sheet should be updated as each transaction affects them (daily).
David s Entertainment sells four types of television entertainment units.
The sale prices of each are:
TV A: $3,500
TV B: $5,250
TV C: $6,125
PS D: $9,000
During December, the last month of the accounting year, the following transactions were completed:
Dec. 1. Issued check number 2632 for the December rent, $2,600.
3. Purchased three TV C units on account from Prince Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $11,100.
4. Issued check number 2633 to pay the transportation changes on purchase of December 3, $400. (NOTE: Do not include shipping and purchase discounts to the Inventory Control sheet for this project.)
6. Sold four TV A and four TV B on account to Albert Co., invoice 891, terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.
10. Sold two projector systems for cash.
11. Purchased store supplies on account from Matt Co., terms n/30, $580.
13. Issued check to Prince Co. number 2634 for the full amount due, less discount allowed.
14. Issued credit memo for one TV A unit returned on sale of December 6.
15. Issued check number 2635 for advertising expense for last half of December, $1,500.
16. Received cash from Albert Co. for the full amount due (less return of December 14 and discount).
19. Issued check number 2636 to buy two TV C units, $7,600.
19. Issued check number 2637 for $6,100 to Joseph Co. on account.
20. Sold five TV C units on account to Cameron Co., invoice number
892, terms 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.
20. For the convenience of the customer, issued check number 2638 for shipping charges on sale of December 20, $700.
21. Received $12,250 cash from McKenzie Co. on account, no discount.
21. Purchased three projector systems on account from Elisha Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB destination, $15,600.
24. Received notification that Marie Co. has been granted bankruptcy with no
amount of recovery. We are to write-off her amount due. (Note: See page
402 for entry required.)
25. Issued a debit memo for return of $5,200 because of a damaged projection
system purchased on December 21, receiving credit from the seller.
26.Issued check number 2639 for refund of cash on sales made for cash, $600. (Customer was going to return goods until an allowance was arranged.)
27. Issued check number 2640 for sales salaries of $1,750 and office
salaries of $950.
28.Purchased store equipment on account from Matt Co., terms n/30, FOB
destination, $1,200.
29.Issued check number 2641 for store supplies, $470.
30.Sold four TV C units on account to Randall Co., invoice number 893,
terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.
30.Received cash from sale of December 20, less discount, plus transportation
paid on December 20. (Round calculations to the nearest dollar.)
30.Issued check number 2642 for purchase of December 21, less return
of December 25 and discount.
30.Issued a debit memo for $300 of the purchase returned from
December 28.
Instructions:
1. Enter the balances of each of the accounts in the appropriate balance column of a four-column account (General Ledger). Write Balance in the item section, and place a check mark (x) in the Post Reference column.
2. Journalize the transactions in a sales journal, purchases journal, cash receipts journal, cash payments journal, or general journal as illustrated in chapter 7. Also post to the Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary ledgers and Inventory Control Sheet as needed.
3. Total each column on the special journals and prove the journal.
4. Post the totals of the account named columns and individually post the other columns as well to the General Ledger.
5. Prepare the Schedule of Accounts Receivable and the Schedule of Accounts Payable (their total amount must equal the amount in their controlling general ledger account).
6. Prepare the unadjusted trial balance on the worksheet.
7. Complete the worksheet for the year ended December 31, 2012, using the following adjustment data:
a. Merchandise inventory on December 31 $90,800
b. Insurance expired during the year 1,250
c. Store supplies on hand on December 31 975
d. Depreciation for the current year needs to be calculated. The business uses
the Straight-line method, the store equipment has a useful life of 10 years
with no salvage value. (NOTE: the purchase and return will not be included
as the dates of the transactions were after the 15th of the month).
e. Accrued salaries on December 31:
Sales salaries $1,400
Office salaries 760 2,160
f. The note payable terms are at 8%, payment is not being made until Jan. 3, 2013. Interest must be recognized for one month.
g. Net realizable value of Accounts Receivable is determined to be $27,950.
8. Prepare a multiple-step income statement, a statement of owner s equity, and a
classified balance sheet in good form. (Recommend review of Current Liabilities on pages 166 & 167 and Current Maturities of Long-term Debt on page 480.)
9. Journalize and post the adjusting entries.
10. Journalize and post the closing entries. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line
in both balance columns opposite the closing entry.
11. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.
Check Figures for Accounting Project:
Cash Receipts Journal; Cash Column: 97,939
Unadjusted Trial Balance Total: 1,080,620
Net Income: 264,350
Post Closing Trial Balance: 347,490
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Foundations of Accounting I
Accounting Project
Karen Pitsch
Alli Co. is a merchandising business. The account balances for Alli Co. as of November 30, 2012 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows:
110 Cash $ 73,920
112 Accounts Receivable 37,875
113 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 3,500
115 Merchandise Inventory 133,900
116 Prepaid Insurance 3,750
117 Store Supplies 2,850
123 Store Equipment 100,800
124 Accumulated Depreciation-Store Equipment 20,160
210 Accounts Payable 21,450
211 Salaries Payable 0
218 Interest Payable 0
220 Note Payable (Due 2017) 10,000
310 P. Williams, Capital (January 1, 2012) 89,510
311 P. Williams, Drawing 40,000
312 Income Summary 0
410 Sales 853,040
411 Sales Returns and Allowances 20,600
412 Sales Discounts 13,200
510 Cost of Merchandise Sold 414,575
520 Sales Salaries Expense 74,400
521 Advertising Expense 18,000
522 Depreciation Expense 0
523 Store Supplies Expense 0
529 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 2,800
530 Office Salaries Expense 40,500
531 Rent Expense 18,600
532 Insurance Expense 0
533 Bad Debt Expense 0
539 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 1,650
550 Interest Expense 240
Alli Co. uses the perpetual inventory system and the last-in, first-out costing method. Transportation-in and purchase discounts should be added to the Inventory Control Sheet, but since this will complicate the computation of the Last-in, first-out costing method, please ignore this step in the process. They also use the Allowance Method for bad debt.
The Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary Ledgers along with the Inventory Control Sheet should be updated as each transaction affects them (daily).
Alli Co. sells four types of television entertainment units.
The sale prices of each are:
TV A: $3,500
TV B: $5,250
TV C: $6,125
PS D: $9,000
During December, the last month of the accounting year, the following transactions were completed:
Dec. 1. Issued check number 2632 for the December rent, $2,200.
3.
Purchased four TV C units on account from Prince Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $14,800.
4.
Issued check number 2633 to pay the transportation changes on purchase of December 3, $400. (NOTE: Do not include shipping and purchase discounts to the Inventory Control sheet for this project.)
6.
Sold four TV A and four TV B on account to Albert Co., invoice 891, terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.
10.
Sold two project systems for cash.
11.
Purchased store supplies on account from Matt Co., terms n/30, $620.
13.
Issued check to Prince Co. number 2634 for full amount due (November s balance plus December 3rd transaction), less discount allowed.
14.
Issued credit memo for one TV A unit returned on sale of December 6.
15.
Issued check number 2635 for advertising expense for last half of December, $1,500.
16.
Received cash from Albert Co. for full amount due (less return of December 14 and discount).
19. Issued check number 2636 to buy two TV C units, $7,600.
19. Issued check number 2637 for $6,100 to Joseph Co. on account.
20.
Sold three TV C units on account to Cameron Co., invoice number
892, terms 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.
20.
For the convenience of the customer, issued check number 2638 for shipping charges on sale of December 20, $600.
21.
Received $12,250 cash from McKenzie Co. on account, no discount.
21.
Purchased three projector systems on account from Elisha Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB destination, $15,600.
25. Received notification that Marie Co. has been granted bankruptcy with no
amount of recovery. We are to write-off her amount due. (Note: See page
402 for entry required.)
24.
Issued a debit memo for return of $5,200 because of a damaged projection system purchased on December 21, receiving credit from the seller.
26.
Issued check number 2639 for refund of cash on sales made for cash, $1,000. (Customer was going to return goods until an allowance was arranged.)
27. Issued check number 2640 for sales salaries of $1,750 and office
salaries of $950.
28.
Purchased store equipment on account from Matt Co., terms n/30, FOB
destination, $800.
29.
Issued check number 2641 for store supplies, $550.
30.
Sold four TV C units on account to Randall Co., invoice number 893,
terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.
30.
Received cash from sale of December 20, less discount, plus transportation
paid on December 20. (Round calculations to the nearest dollar.)
30.
Issued check number 2642 for purchase of December 21, less return
of December 24 and discount.
30.
Issued a debit memo for $200 of the purchase returned from
December 28.
Instructions:
1.
Enter the balances of each of the accounts in the appropriate balance column of a four-column account (General Ledger). Write Balance in the item section, and place a check mark ( ) in the Post Reference column.
2.
Journalize the transactions in a sales journal, purchases journal, cash receipts journal, cash payments journal, or general journal as illustrated in chapter 7. Also post to the Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary ledgers and when needed the Inventory Control Sheet.
3.
Total each column on the special journals and prove the journal.
4.
Post the totals of the account named columns and individually post the other columns as well to the General Ledger.
5.
Prepare the Schedule of Accounts Receivable and the Schedule of Accounts Payable (their total amount must equal the amount in their controlling general ledger account).
6.
Prepare the unadjusted trial balance on the worksheet.
7.
Complete the worksheet for the year ended December 31, 2012, using the following adjustment data:
a. Merchandise inventory on December 31 $110,200
b. Insurance expired during the year 1,250
c. Store supplies on hand on December 31 975
d. Depreciation for the current year needs to be calculated. Alli Co. uses the
Straight-line method, the store equipment has a useful life of 10 years with no salvage value. (NOTE: the purchase and return will not be included as the dates of the transactions were after the 15th of the month).
e. Accrued salaries on December 31:
Sales salaries $480
Office salaries 260 530
f. The note payable terms are at 8%, payment is not being made until Jan. 3, 2013. Interest must be recognized for one month (round answer to the nearest dollar amount).
g. Net realizable value of Accounts Receivable is determined to be $30,000.
8. Prepare a multiple-step income statement, a statement of owner s equity, and a
classified balance sheet in good form.
9. Journalize and post the adjusting entries.
10.
Journalize and post the closing entries. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line
in both balance columns opposite the closing entry.
11.
Prepare a post-closing trial balance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need help with 5 quesions, NOTE: please open attachments for questions details.
Q-1- On March 4, of the current year, BB, Inc. reacquired 5,000 shares of its common stock at $89 per share. On August 7, BB sold 3,500 of the reacquired shares at $100 per share. The remaining 1,500 shares were sold at $88 per share on November 29.
Journalize the transactions of March 4, August 7, and November 29.
Q2- On February 1, MA Company reacquired 7,500 shares of its common stock at $30 per share. On March 15, Marine sold 4,500 of the reacquired shares at $34 per share. On June 2, MA sold the remaining shares at $28 per share.
Journalize the transactions of February 1, March 15, and June 2.
Q-3 On January 1, 2010, YG Company obtained an $88,000, seven year 5% installment note from FF Bank. The note requires annual payments of $15,208, with the first payment occurring on the last day of the fiscal year. The first payment consists of $4,400 interest and principal repayment of $10,808.
Journalize the following entries:
Q-4 Prepare the journal entries for the following transactions for BC company.
A) BC company. purchased 1,200 shares of the total of 100,000 outstanding shares of MT Corp. stock for $20.75 per share plus a $70 commission.
Q-5 MG, Inc. reported net income for the year ending December 31, 2012 of $483,500. Dividends paid during the year totaled $42,900. The company holds available-for-sale securities with an original cost of $162,000 and a fair value of $171,000 at the end of the year. They also hold trading securities with an original cost of $150,000 and a fair value of $147,000. Retained Earnings on January 1, 2012 was $736,400 and Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income on January 1, 2012 was $16,200.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need help with 3 accounting problems, document attached.
Q1- AB Company purchased as a long-term investment $500,000 of BC Corporation 10-year, 9% bonds. Present entries to record the following selected transactions:
Q2- Present entries to record the following selected transactions of MT Co
Q3- On May 1, 2011, Stan Company purchased $50,000 of HR Company’s 12% bonds at 100 plus accrued interest of $2,000. On June 30, 2011, Stan received its first semiannual interest. On February 1, 2012, Stan sold $40,000 of the bonds at 103 plus accrued interest.
NOTE: please open attachament for questions full details. thank you
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I have been assigned General Mills in a group project and I need help with the following 4 questions. All questions are focused around General Mills. Please show work.
Q1. Forecasting
List of Specific Assumptions used in forecasts
Forecasts for a 5 year time horizon
Need explanation for time and specific assumption used in forecast. Must be done on word doc. Need to show references.
Q2. Valuation
Components of the WACC (with sources referenced)
DCF Model – Optimistic, Pessimistic & Expected
DAE Model – Optimistic, Pessimistic & Expected
DAROE Model – Optimistic, Pessimistic & Expected
I will need a written explanation to why the company is Optimistic, Pessimistic & Expected for each of the models and the WACC analysis. Must be done on word doc. Need to show references.
Q3. Assessment of Solvency
Calculation of Altman’s Z
Estimate of Bond Rating based on ratios
Actual Bond Rating (if applicable)
Will need explanation for each item. Must be done on the word doc. Need to show references.
Q4. Spreadsheets
Buffet spreadsheet
Must substitute Nike with General Mills answer the questions highlighted in yellow. Instructions are in the first 3 spreadsheets and the fourth is the actual spreadsheet to complete.
FYI: year 1 is last year and year 8 is 8 years ago. Government bond is based on long term.
Valuation spreadsheet (DCF&EVA)
This assignment has 2 parts. First Spreadsheet FCFF valuation, second spreadsheet feeds off the first spreadsheet, please check to make sure that second spreadsheet is reflecting the answers from the first spreadsheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Genesis operations management team, nearing completion of its agreement with Sensible Essentials, was asked by senior management to present a capital plan for the operating expansion. The capital plan was not to be a wish list but an analysis of the necessary expenditures to successfully establish a fully equipped operating facility overseas.
In addition, senior management requested meaningful financial and operating metrics to ensure that the performance objectives for the facility were being met. The operations management team was given five days to accomplish the following:
- Calculate the firm s WACC.
- Prepare and analyze each planned capital expenditure.
- Evaluate, rank, and recommend the capital expenditures according to beneficial value to the organization, using evaluation tools NPV, payback, and IRR. Evaluation, ranking, and recommendations should be by category of expenditures. For example, facility, equipment 1, 2, and 3, and inspection.
- Using the selected choices in part three, calculate the full cost of establishing a fully equipped facility. This would include the facility, equipment 1, 2, and 3, and inspection. In addition, calculate the payback, NPV, and IRR for the completed facility.
- Construct and recommend between three and five metrics to measure the performance of the organization. At least one metric should be dividend decision-making driven.
- Prepare an executive summary along with a separate document showing the calculations.
Following the example of the operations management team, do the following:
- Download the Capital Budgeting spreadsheet, and compute the WACC for Genesis.
- Using the information provided in the spreadsheet, analyze Genesis s project options.
Using the information provided, calculate the periodic and cumulative net cash flows for each potential project and its associated options. Please note that there are 5 projects (facility, equipment pieces 1, 2, and 3, and internal inspection) and that each project offers multiple configuration options (facility size, equipment type, etc.).
- Evaluate, rank, and recommend a specific option for each capital project according to beneficial value to the organization, using evaluation tools NPV, payback, and IRR.
- Construct and recommend between three and five metrics to measure the performance of the new operating strategy. At least one metric should reflect dividend policy as it relates to rewarding shareholders.
- Prepare an executive summary describing your recommendations for each project and the overall cost, net cash flows, and expected returns of the operating configuration that you recommend. Be sure to justify your recommendations in terms of the investment criteria applied in Step 3 above. Be sure to report the full cost of the facility as it is configured per your recommendations. Present and justify your operating strategy performance metrics.
Your complete report should include all of your calculations as appendices (5 pages, or 1 page for each project).
Write a 5 6-page report in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources
**Attached Excel Sheet For Genesis**
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LASA 1 Genesis Cash Budget Report
The Genesis operations management team is now preparing to implement the operating expansion plan. Previously the firm s cash position did not pose a challenge. However, the planned foreign expansion requires Genesis to have a reliable source of funds for both short-term and long-term needs.
One of Genesis s potential lenders tells the team that in order to be considered as a viable customer, Genesis must prepare and submit a monthly cash budget for the current year and a quarterly budget for the subsequent year. The lender will review the cash budget and determine whether or not Genesis can meet the loan repayment terms. Genesis s ability to repay the loan depends not only on sales and expenses but also on how quickly the company can collect payment from customers and how well it manages its supplier terms and other operating expenses. The Genesis team members agreed that being fully prepared with factual data would allow them to maximize their position as well as negotiate favorable financing terms.
The Genesis management team held a brainstorming session to chart a plan of action, which is detailed here.
- Evaluate historical data and prepare assumptions that will drive the planning process.
- Produce a detailed cash budget that summarizes cash inflow, outflow, and financing needs.
- Identify and compare interest rates, both short-term and long-term, using debt and equity.
- Analyze the financing mix (short/long) and the cost associated with the recommendation.
Since this expansion is critical to Genesis Corporation expanding into new overseas markets, the operations management team has been asked to prepare an executive summary with supporting details for Genesis s senior executives.
Working over a weekend, the management team developed realistic assumptions to construct a working capital budget.
- Sales: The marketing expert and the newly created customer service personnel developed sales projections based on historical data and forecast research.
- Other cash receipt: Rental income $15,000 per month.
- Production material: The production manager forecasted material cost based on cost quotes from reliable vendors, the average of which is 50 percent of sales.
- Other production cost: Based on historical cost data, this cost on an average is 30 percent of the material cost and occurs in the month after material purchase.
- Selling and marketing expense: Five percent of sales
- General and administrative expense: Twenty percent of sales
- Interest payments: Payable in December $75, 000
- Tax payments: Quarterly due 15th of April, July, October, and January $15,000
- Minimum cash balance desired: $ 25,000 per month
- Cash balance start of month (December):$15,000
- Available short-term annual interest rate is 8 percent, long-term debt rate is 9 percent, and long-term equity is 10 percent. All funds would be available the first month when the firm encounters a deficit.
- Dividend payment: None
Based on this information, do the following:
- Using the Cash Budget spreadsheet, calculate detailed company cash budgets for the forthcoming and subsequent years. Summarize the sources and uses of cash, and identify the external financing needs for both the forthcoming and subsequent years.
Cash Budget
Download this Excel spreadsheet to view the company s cash budget. You will calculate the company s monthly cash budget for the forthcoming year and quarterly budget for the subsequent year using this information.
- In an executive-level report, summarize the company’s financing needs for the forecast period and provide your recommendations for financing the planned activities. Be sure to comment on the following:
a) Your recommended financing solution and cost to the firm: If Genesis needs operating cash, how should it fund this need? Are there internal policy changes with regard to collections or payables management you would recommend? What types of external financing are available?
b) Your concerns associated with the firm’s cash budget. Is this a sign of weak sales performance or poor cost control? Why or why not?
Write a 7-page paper in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M3_A2.doc.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Income Computation for a Manufacturing Firm: The following data relate to GenMet, a U.S. based consumer goods manufacturing firm, for the fiscal year ending October 31, 2013. Reported amounts are in millions of U.S. dollars ($). GenMet incurred manufacturing costs (direct material, direct labor, manufacturing overhead) during fiscal 2013 totaling $2,752.0. Sales revenue was $6,700.2, selling and administrative expenses were $2,903.7, and interest expense was $151.9. The income tax rate is 35%. Compute GenMet’s net income for fiscal year 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Option 1:Cross-Cultural Perspectives
Research a global organization and a cultural issue that affects this organization s interactions outside the United States.
Define the cultural issue within the global organization.
Prepare an analysis of the ethical and social responsibility issues that your selected organization must deal with as result of being a global organization.
Write a 1,050- to 1,400-word paper summarizing the results of the analysis. Include the following:
Identify ethical perspectives in the global organization.
Compare these ethical perspectives across cultures involved in the global organization.
Format your paper consistent with APA guidelines.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the beginning of the year, Gonzales Company had total assets of $882,000 and total liabilities of $500,000. Answer the following independent questions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Company to write on is Nike SEC 10-K Paper: 4 – 6 pages in length, single spaced, with double spacing between paragraphs. One inch margins on all sides. APA Style for in text citations and a works cited list. SEC 10-K Power Point Presentation: 6 slides plus a cover slide and a works cited slide. This presentation will be based on your SEC 10-K paper and will allow students to see highlights of your paper. Remember a good Power Point presentation does not include paragraphs of information. Graphics, tables, and analysis may be presented.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please show all work on an excel or word document.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Group Project – Budgeting Universal Electronics is a small, rapidly growing wholesaler of consumer electronic products. The firm s main product lines are small kitchen appliances and power tools. Malinda Alexander, Universal s general manager of marketing, recently completed a sales forecast. She believes the company s sales during the first quarter of 20×1 will increase by 15% each month over the previous month s sales. Then Alexander expects sales to remain constant for several months. Universal s projected balance sheet as of December, 31, 20X0, is as follows: Cash $ 45,000 Accounts receivable .. 270,000 Marketable securities .. 15,000 Inventory .. 154,000 Net Buildings & Equipment .. 626,000 Total Assets ..$1,110,000 Accounts Payable . 176,400 Bond interest payable .. 18,750 Property Taxes payable .. 3600 Bonds Payable (15% due in 20X6) . 300,000 Common Stock . . 500,000 Retained Earnings .. 111,250 Total liabilities & equity ..$1,110,000 Shawn Garrity, the assistant controller, is now preparing a monthly budget for the first quarter of 20X1. In the process, the following information has been accumulated: 1. Projected sales for December 20X0 are $400,000. Credit sales typically are 75% of total sales. Universal s credit experience indicates 10% of the credit sales is collected during the month of sale, and the remainder is collected during the following month. 2. Universal s cost of goods sold generally is 70% of sales. Inventory is purchased on account and 40% of each month s purchases are paid during the month of purchase. The remainder is paid during the following month. To have adequate stocks of inventory on hand, the firm attempts to have inventory at the end of each month equal to half of the next month s projected cost of goods sold. 3. Garrity has estimated that the company s other monthly expenses follow: a. Sales salaries .$20,000 b. Advertising and promotion . 17,500 c. Administrative salaries .. 21,500 d. Depreciation . 25,000 e. Interest on bonds 3,750 f. Property tax .. 900 In addition, sales commissions run at the rate of 1% of sales. 4. Universal s president, Carrie Howland, has indicated the firm should invest $125,000 in an automated inventory handling system to control the movement of inventory in the firm s warehouse just after the new year begins. This equipment purchase will be financed primarily from the firm s cash and marketable securities. However, Howland believes Universal needs to keep a minimum cash balance of $25,000. If necessary, the remainder of the equipment purchases will be financed using short term credit from a local bank. The minimum period for such a loan is three months. Garrit believes that short term interest rates will be 10% per year at the time of the equipment purchases. If a loan is necessary, Howland has decided it should be paid off by the end of the first quarter if possible. 5. The board of directors has indicated its intention to declare and pay dividends of $50,000 on the last day of each quarter. 6. The interest on any short term borrowing will be paid when the loan is repaid. Interest on Budget s bonds is paid semiannually on January 31 and July 31 for the preceding six month period. 7. Property taxes are paid semiannually on February 28 and August 31 for the preceding six month period. REQUIRED: Work with your group (no more than 4 people) to prepare Universal s master budget for the first quarter of 20X1 by completing the following schedules and statements in an excel spreadsheet. You will need to name your workbook and then provide the analysis for a-i by utilizing excel formulas and references. See Blackboard for schedule formats. Given formats MUST be used. Points will be deducted for other formats used. a. Sales Budget b. Cash Receipts Budget c. Purchases Budget d. Cash Disbursements Budget e. Summary Cash Budget* f. Analysis of short-term financing needs g. Budgeted Income Statement for the first quarter of 20X1 h. Budgeted Statement of Retained Earnings for the first quarter of 20X1 i. Budgeted Balance Sheet as of 3/31/20X1 *Complete the first three lines of the summary cash budget. Then do the analysis of short-term financing needs in requirement f. Next, finish the summary cash budget. NOTE: If you must contact the instructor for assistance on this project, there will be a consulting fee for the shared intellectual capital. A simple question and answer will result in a 1 point deduction per question from the final project. A question that results in computations will result in a 5 point deduction per question from the final project. Utilize your available resources (textbook, google, etc.). DUE DATE: April 11th. Submit your excel workbook to by the deadline by using UMKC Dropbox (https://dropbox.umkc.edu/). Don t forget to identify your group within the workbook, I suggest a cover worksheet with group member information. In addition to project submission, each group member will need to complete a group evaluation form which can be found on Blackboard. These will be considered when assigning individual grades. GRADING: The project is worth a total of 200 points. 195 points are assigned to the project directly based upon the correct mathematical answers, format, and usage of excel formulas/references. To ensure you earn the additional 5 points, the group evaluation form must be completed by each student and submitted via UMKC Dropbox by the above mentioned due date. Evaluations are taken very seriously and will be considered when determining final grade for project on a per student basis.
Some Hints:
1) In order to ensure you are clear with respect to the production budget, the desired ending inventory is given in the balance sheet above (referring to the project worksheet), so use the $154k for December’s desired ending inventory. For the months going forward you’ll use the 50% of the following month’s COGS to determine desired ending inventory. Ergo the desired ending inventory is NOT $161k. And, as always, the ending inventory for one month becomes the beginning inventory for the following month. Here’s a check figure: Required purchases for December 2000 are $294,000.
That should keep you on the right track!
Ok, here’s another clarification tid-bit: When the problem talks about a minimum cash balance requirement, this is only to be taken into consideration when computing the short-term financing needs. This does not apply to the rest of the problem and here’s why. So at 1/1/XX (whatever year it is), the president says, “We’re buying a machine. And since we’ve yet to receive money from sales or pay any bills let’s make sure we keep at LEAST $25,000 in the bank to cover bills and such.” We (the accountants) say, Ok sure. So we go back to our desk and crunch the numbers in order to determine our short-term financing needs. And we say, alright on 12/31 we had a cash balance of $45K, we have to maintain a cash balance of $25K so we’ve only got $20K to put towards this purchase and we’re gonna need a WHOLE lot more than that to buy this machine. So we rangle up some more money by selling stocks and then decide to take out a loan for the rest.
2) The cash minimum is only for the very first part of January, before cash receipts come and and cash disbursements go out. So please don’t freak out if your cash balance as of 3/31/XX is less than $25K. That’s OK!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This is requirement for Accounting 212. There are highlighted areas that require extra attention.
Note says “to remember to expand your answer on the explanation questions….I want to see what you know and not just what the textbook is stating”. Applies specifically to questions 12 & 13 and/or any others that may require it.
File to be in Word, .doc or .docx format.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
7/22/2012 2010 17.25 1.1499999999999999 48.75 3 11663.98 2009 15 1.06 52.3 2.9 8785.7000000000007 2008 16.5 1 48.75 2.75 8679.98 2007 10.75 0.95 57.25 2.5 6434.03 2006 11.375 0.9 60 2.25 5602.28 2005 7.625 0.85 55.75 2 4705.97 2010 2009 2008 2007 2006 2010 0 0 0 2009 0 0 0 2008 0 0 0 2007 0 0 0 2006 0 0 0 0.05 6.0400000000000002E-2 6.0400000000000002E-2 0.05 0.1104 0.25 0.76900000000000002 0.15 0.98499999999999999 0.4 1.2230000000000001 0.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
find both company’s financial pages at:http://www.google.com/finance/stockscreener. Add the criteria of long-term debt to assets to ensure the company has debt. Add the criteria of dividends per share. Find both copany’s financial pages at:http://www.sec.gov/edgar.shtml. Look at the long term debt on the balance sheet. Determine the coupon price, the length until maturity and the yield to maturity. Calculate today’s price of bond.
1. List the pertinent information on the bond you chose and then calculate the price of one bond from both companies.
2. Which bond is receiving the higher price? Explain your answer.
3. From a time value of money frame of mind what does each rate say about the viewpoint on the time value of money?
4. Which company has a better credit rating? Explain your answer.
5. Based on the credit rating which company do you believe the bank feels more secure will pay back the loan? Explain your answer.
6. Why does the bank charge more interest for one company than the another?
7. What does the credit rating say to investor?
8. Which bond looks is more finanically attractive? Explain why do you chose the answer you did.
700 – 1,000 words cities and References
Part II: Understanding how to properly find the value of a stock using the dividend growth rate is a fundamental building block in valuation. Using the same two companies, evaluate each stock using a constant dividend growth model
1. Calculate the future growth rate for both companies.
2. Which stock has better growth rate? Do you agree with this assessment? Explain. Support your answer with either a description of a new product growth or from past growth performance.
3. Calculate the future stock price for both companies.
4. From a time value of money point of view stand point what does the calculated stock price say about the market’s view on the time value of money for each stock?
5. Compare the calculated stock price with the current stock price for both companies.
6. Is either stock underpriced or overpriced? Explain.
7. Should an investor purchase either of those stocks?
8. Should one stock out perform the other?
9. Based on the ratings found in Phase 4, does one stock seem more finally healthy? Explain.
10. Does this financial health make a stronger case to invest in the stock? Explain.
700 – 1,000 words Cities and References and please elaborate on the answers to the questions that are given that the correction from my professor.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This assignment is in regards to finance and financial management:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
i need this with in 8 hours can anybody do it?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week 4 Assignment — due Day 7 (Sunday)
|
Individual
Exercise 2
|
Resource: Ch. 4 of Financial Accounting
Complete Exercise BE4-1.
Complete Problems 4-2A & 4-3A.
Submit as either a Microsoft Excel (this is preferred — use multiple tabs) or Microsoft Word document place your work in only one file.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pretty Simple assignment, just time consuming.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PROJECT:The project is completion of a step by step spreadsheet following the accounting cycle. The spreadsheet and steps are provided to the students. Students may also obtain consultation/guidance from the instructor throughout the semester in regards to their progress on the project. The project should take 8-10 hours in total.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Accounting Excel project
PROJECT:The project is completion of a step by step spreadsheet following the accounting cycle. The spreadsheet and steps are provided to the students. Students may also obtain consultation/guidance from the instructor throughout the semester in regards to their progress on the project.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In this task you will use the Competition Bikes Inc. Storyline case study to prepare a summary report based on your evaluation of the company s operations.
Task:
Note: Be sure to submit a copy of your Excel workbook when submitting your JET2 Task 1 work. The evaluator will need a copy of your data to ensure correct evaluation.
A. Prepare a summary report in which you do the following:
1. Evaluate the company s operational strengths and weaknesses based on the following:
a. Horizontal analysis results
b. Vertical analysis results
c. Trend analysis results
d. Ratio analysis results
2. Analyze the working capital of Competition Bikes Inc. Consider the following in your analysis:
Ways to improve the working capital
Ways to use excess working capital to generate an increase in profits
3. Evaluate the internal controls for the Competition Bikes Inc. purchasing system.
a. Recommend corrective actions for any weaknesses.
b. Identify the risks to the company.
i. Discuss how to mitigate the risks arising from internal control weaknesses.
4. Analyze compliance with Sarbanes Oxley requirements.
a. Recommend corrective actions for noncompliant areas.
B. If you use sources, include all in-text citations and references in APA format
| |
Unsatisfactory
|
Needs Revision
|
Satisfactory
|
Score/Level
|
|
Articulation of Response (clarity, organization, mechanics)
|
The candidate provides unsatisfactory articulation of response.
|
The candidate provides weak articulation of response.
|
The candidate provides adequate articulation of response.
|
|
|
A1a. Horizontal Analysis
|
The candidate does not provide a logical evaluation of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the horizontal analysis results.
|
The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with insufficient support, of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the horizontal analysis results.
|
The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with sufficient support, of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the horizontal analysis results.
|
|
|
A1b. Vertical Analysis
|
The candidate does not provide a logical evaluation of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the vertical analysis results.
|
The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with insufficient support, of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the vertical analysis results.
|
The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with sufficient support, of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the vertical analysis results.
|
|
|
A1c. Trend Analysis
|
The candidate does not provide a logical evaluation of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the trend analysis results.
|
The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with insufficient support, of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the trend analysis results.
|
The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with sufficient support, of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the trend analysis results.
|
|
|
A1d. Ratio Analysis
|
The candidate does not provide a logical evaluation of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the ratio analysis results.
|
The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with insufficient support, of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the ratio analysis results.
|
The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with sufficient support, of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the ratio analysis results.
|
|
|
A2. Working Capital
|
The candidate does not provide a plausible analysis of the working capital of Competition Bikes Inc.
|
The candidate provides a plausible analysis, with insufficient support, of the working capital of Competition Bikes Inc.
|
The candidate provides a plausible analysis, with sufficient support, of the working capital of Competition Bikes Inc.
|
|
|
A3. Internal Controls
|
The candidate does not provide a logical evaluation of the internal controls for the Competition Bikes Inc. purchasing system.
|
The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with insufficient detail, of the internal controls for the Competition Bikes Inc. purchasing system.
|
The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with sufficient detail, of the internal controls for the Competition Bikes Inc. purchasing system.
|
|
|
A3a. Weakness Corrective Actions
|
The candidate does not provide an appropriate recommendation of corrective actions for any weaknesses.
|
The candidate provides an appropriate recommendation, with insufficient detail, of corrective actions for any weaknesses.
|
The candidate provides an appropriate recommendation, with sufficient detail, of corrective actions for any weaknesses.
|
|
|
A3b. Risks
|
The candidate does not identify the risks to the company.
|
Not applicable.
|
The candidate identifies the risks to the company.
|
|
|
A3bi. Risk Mitigation
|
The candidate does not provide a logical discussion of how to mitigate the risks arising from internal control weaknesses.
|
The candidate provides a logical discussion, with insufficient support, of how to mitigate the risks arising from internal control weaknesses.
|
The candidate provides a logical discussion, with sufficient support, of how to mitigate the risks arising from internal control weaknesses.
|
|
|
A4. Compliance
|
The candidate does not provide a plausible analysis of compliance with Sarbanes Oxley requirements.
|
The candidate provides a plausible analysis, with insufficient support, of compliance with Sarbanes Oxley requirements.
|
The candidate provides a plausible analysis, with sufficient support, of compliance with Sarbanes Oxley requirements.
|
|
|
A4a. Noncompliance Corrective Actions
|
The candidate does not provide an appropriate recommendation of corrective actions for noncompliant areas.
|
The candidate provides an appropriate recommendation, with insufficient detail, of corrective actions for noncompliant areas.
|
The candidate provides an appropriate recommendation, with sufficient detail, of corrective actions for noncompliant areas.
|
|
|
B. Sources
|
If the candidate uses sources, the candidate does not provide in-text citations and/or references for each source used.
|
If the candidate uses sources, the candidate provides appropriate in-text citations and/or references with major deviations from APA style.
|
If the candidate uses sources, the candidate provides appropriate in-text citations and/or references accurately or with only minor deviations from APA style, OR the candidate does not use sources.
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
To get started:
- Review the attached PPT and WORD files on analysis of financial data.
- Open the attached Excel document. Rename and save the document to your computer.
The Balance Sheet and Income Statement for Wal-Mart, Inc. are provided in the Walmart excel file, along with the worksheet you will complete.
On the Ratio Analysis worksheet, complete a ratio analysis of Walmartbased on the five categories of analysis discussed in the PPT lesson.
In EXCEL format, calculate at least two ratios from each category of Liquidity, Activity, Debt, Profitability, and Market, using the figures in the Jan 2011 and Jan 2012 columns.
This is a ratio calculation assignment- no written analysis.
For the Market/Book and Price/Book Ratios, you will need to find the current stock price for WalMart online.
If you do not have MS Excel, this assignment can be done in OpenOffice.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise 1
As auditor for Banquo & Associates, you have been assigned to check Duncan Corporation s computation of earnings per share for the current year. The controller, Mac Beth, has supplied you with the following computations.
| Net income |
$3,374,960 |
| Common shares issued and outstanding: |
|
Beginning of year
|
1,285,000 |
End of year
|
1,200,000 |
Average
|
1,242,500 |
| Earnings per share: |
|
|
|
| $3,374,960 |
= $2.72 per share |
| 1,242,500 |
You have developed the following additional information.
- There are no other equity securities in addition to the common shares.
- There are no options or warrants outstanding to purchase common shares.
- There are no convertible debt securities.
- Activity in common shares during the year was as follows.
| Outstanding, Jan. 1 |
1,285,000 |
| Treasury shares acquired, Oct. 1 |
(250,000) |
|
1,035,000 |
| Shares reissued, Dec. 1 |
165,000 |
| Outstanding, Dec. 31 |
1,200,000 |
Questions:
- On the basis of the information above, do you agree with the controller s computation of earnings per share for the year? If you disagree, prepare a revised computation of earnings per share.
- Assume the same facts as those presented above, except that options had been issued to purchase 140,000 shares of common stock at $10 per share. These options were outstanding at the beginning of the year, and none had been exercised or canceled during the year. The average market price of the common shares during the year was $25, and the ending market price was $35. What earnings per share amounts will be reported?
Exercise 2
Powerpuff Corp. carries an account in its general ledger called investments, which contained the following debits for investment purchases and no credits.
| Feb. 1, 2012 |
Blossom Company common stock, $100 par, 200 shares |
$ 37,400 |
| April 1 |
U.S. Government bonds, 11%, due April 1, 2012, interest payable April 1 and October 1, 100 bonds of $1,000 par each |
100,000 |
| July 1 |
Buttercup Company 12% bonds, par $50,000, dated March 1, 2012, purchased at par plus accrued interest, interest payable annually on March 1, due March 1, 2032 |
52,000 |
Questions:
- Assuming that all the investments are classified as available-for-sale, use the spreadsheet Journal Entries to prepare the journal entries necessary to classify the amounts into the proper accounts.
- Prepare the entry to record the accrued interest on December 31, 2012.
- The fair values of the investments on December 31, 2012, were:
- Blossom Company common stock $ 33,800 (1% interest)
- U.S. Government bonds 124,700
- Buttercup Company bonds 58,600
Use the spreadsheet
Available for Sale to prepare a schedule indicating any fair value adjustment needed at December 31, 2012. 4. Now assume Powerpuff s investment in Blossom Company represents 30% of Blossom s shares. In 2012, Blossom declared and paid dividends of $9,000 (on September 30) and reported net income of $30,000. Prepare a brief memorandum explaining how the accounting for the Blossom investment will change, and discuss the impact on the financial statements of Powerpuff Corp.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
needs help doing an assignment due next monday
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 9-22
Required
Use the financial statements for Bernard Company from Problem 9-22 to calculate the following for 2012 and 2011.
a. Working capital
b. Current ratio
c. Quick ratio
d. Accounts receivable turnover (beginning receivables at January 1, 2011, were $47,000)
e. Average number of days to collect accounts receivable
f. Inventory turnover (beginning inventory at January 1, 2011, was $140,000)
g. Average number of days to sell inventory
h. Debt to assets ratio
i. Debt to equity ratio
j. Times interest earned
k. Plant assets to long-term debt
l. Net margin
m. Asset turnover
n. Return on investment
o. Return on equity
p. Earnings per share
q. Book value per share of common stock
r. Price-earnings ratio (market price per share: 2011, $11.75; 2012, $12.50)
s. Dividend yield on common stock
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Statement Analysis provides information that indicates how a company is performing. By comparing financial statements of different years, a manager can make informed decisions about investments, expenditures, and activities that impact revenues.
Directions: Read the chapter in the text titled Financial Statement Analysis. Using the comparative financial statements for Baby Cakes International Inc. (see BabyCakes_Financial_Project_Data.xls linked in the lesson activities) , complete the following tasks.
Note: The market price of BabyCakes Int l, Inc. common stock was $20 on December 31, 2008.
Part A:
Complete the 19 ratios listed below.
Determine the following measures for 2008:
1.
Working Capital
2.
Current ratio
3.
Quick ratio
4.
Accounts receivable turnover
5.
Number of days sales in receivables
6.
Inventory turnover
7.
Number of days sales in inventory
8.
Ratio of fixed assets to long-term liabilities
9.
Ratio of liabilities to stockholders equity
10.
Number of times interest charges earned
11.
Number of times preferred dividends earned
12.
Ratio of net sales to assets
13.
Rate earned on total assets
14.
Rate earned on stockholders equity
15.
Rate earned on common stockholder s equity
16.
Earnings per share on common stock
17.
Price-earnings ratio
18.
Dividends per share of common stock
19.
Dividend yield
Part B:
Explain what the results of each ratio indicate about the company.
Part C:
Complete a horizontal analysis for the Income Statement, and explain your findings.
Part D:
Complete a vertical analysis for the Income Statement, and explain your findings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The task is on the picture uploadded,
no plagerism
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Statements
We are going to be looking at the Balance Sheet (BS), the Profit and Loss Statement (P&L), and the Cash Flow Statement (CF). Obviously, all three are important but the P&L and Balance Sheet can reveal much about the current and dynamic state of the financial of the organization. This knowledge, while mundane for Accountants and Financial Managers, is sometimes not well understood even by high level managers of other departments. Marketing, Operations, Human Resources, Purchasing, Quality Assurance, and Sales departments need to deal with basic financial statements on a routine basis.
To some non-financial managers, the terminology and statements of the Finance Department can be as perplexing as a foreign language or a coded message. As a young manager, I attended an American Marketing Association course called “Finance for the Non-Financial Manager”. I thought it might be a waste of my time, but it really helped me advance in the organization. After the course, when I attended management meetings and the financial group presented their data using accounting jargon, I knew just what they were saying and felt comfortable interacting with them. I also gained respect from them for knowing how they presented information.
Just as important to your future is this: if you are going to rise up through the management hierarchy and eventually become a Vice President or President/CEO, you will certainly need to be able to understand and comment on the monthly financials. And when you present information to your Board of Directors, you will need to explain and answer questions on financial information. These financial statements are important.
- For this assignment, you will examine the financial statements found on pages 549 and 550. We will use the only P&L and the Balance Sheet for this exercise. Looking at the statements from a managerial point of view, I want you to decide the five (5) most important numbers, areas, etc. that you would initially look at for each statement. While doing so, comment on each one you have chosen and explain why you have singled them out as key indicators to you. Here are a few considerations to help you make your decision:
- Which statement would you go to first? Why this one? Would you do this if you were the manager of a different department within the organization?
- If you identify areas on the statement(s) that are of concern, where might you go next to dig deeper and verify your thoughts or allay your concerns?
- Think about receiving an annual report for a stock you own. You will notice that it is thick but the statements we are looking at are but a few pages. Why is this? What is important about the rest of the report? (You can find annual reports online at the company website).
- How are these statements interrelated? Do you see any common elements on both? How would you relate the two statements to come to a conclusion on the financial health of the organization?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Statements
We are going to be looking at the Balance Sheet (BS), the Profit and Loss Statement (P&L), and the Cash Flow Statement (CF). Obviously, all three are important but the P&L and Balance Sheet can reveal much about the current and dynamic state of the financial of the organization. This knowledge, while mundane for Accountants and Financial Managers, is sometimes not well understood even by high level managers of other departments. Marketing, Operations, Human Resources, Purchasing, Quality Assurance, and Sales departments need to deal with basic financial statements on a routine basis.
To some non-financial managers, the terminology and statements of the Finance Department can be as perplexing as a foreign language or a coded message. As a young manager, I attended an American Marketing Association course called “Finance for the Non-Financial Manager”. I thought it might be a waste of my time, but it really helped me advance in the organization. After the course, when I attended management meetings and the financial group presented their data using accounting jargon, I knew just what they were saying and felt comfortable interacting with them. I also gained respect from them for knowing how they presented information.
Just as important to your future is this: if you are going to rise up through the management hierarchy and eventually become a Vice President or President/CEO, you will certainly need to be able to understand and comment on the monthly financials. And when you present information to your Board of Directors, you will need to explain and answer questions on financial information. These financial statements are important.
- For this assignment, you will examine the financial statements found on pages 549 and 550. We will use the only P&L and the Balance Sheet for this exercise. Looking at the statements from a managerial point of view, I want you to decide the five (5) most important numbers, areas, etc. that you would initially look at for each statement. While doing so, comment on each one you have chosen and explain why you have singled them out as key indicators to you. Here are a few considerations to help you make your decision:
- Which statement would you go to first? Why this one? Would you do this if you were the manager of a different department within the organization?
- If you identify areas on the statement(s) that are of concern, where might you go next to dig deeper and verify your thoughts or allay your concerns?
- Think about receiving an annual report for a stock you own. You will notice that it is thick but the statements we are looking at are but a few pages. Why is this? What is important about the rest of the report? (You can find annual reports online at the company website).
- How are these statements interrelated? Do you see any common elements on both? How would you relate the two statements to come to a conclusion on the financial health of the organization?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Forum due Tuesday Discuss the concept of risk and how it might be measured.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question is attached !!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Paid in capital-excess of par 46,000,000 ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You work for the Farmers Wholesale Cooperative and help the financial director prepare and analyze revenue and expenses. He has asked you to create two PivotTables and corresponding PivotCharts from the annual sales worksheet for the Farmers Wholesale Cooperative. One PivotTable and PivotChart summarize the sales by farm and the other PivotTable and PivotChart summarize the dairy sales by month for the top dairy producer. Instructions: 1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The exam is based on Chapters 8, 9 and 10. Part 1 is a 40-question multiple choice exam located on Wileyplus. It is worth 80 points. It is timed, with 180 minutes to complete. Part 2 is a multi-part exam with journal entries and calculations from Chapters 8-10. Part 2 is worth 40 points. You have until the end of Wednesday, July 24 to complete the Exams. Accounting homework on wilyeplus: HW7-Ch11&12.Sum 2013 Statistics Homework #4 The exam is based on Chapters 8, 9 and 10. Part 1 is a 40-question multiple choice exam located on Wileyplus. It is worth 80 points.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
EXCELLENTASSIGNMENTS ONLY!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Resources: Ch. 11 & 12 of Financial Accounting
Complete Exercises E11-15, E12-1, & E12-2.
Complete Problem 11-6A.
Submit as a Microsoft Excel or Word document.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PLEASE SEE ATTACHED….
COMPLETE EXERCISES
E9-1
E9-7
E9-12
COMPLETE PROBLEM
P9-7B
Need by 6/9/2013
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Topic:Exporting American
fashion to Eastern Europe
I am looking to do a paper on American fashion (clothing) to be distributed and sold in
Eastern Europe mainly in Poland. Examine how to
create a business proposal format or a business plan.
Also, below you will find 4 individual assignments which I will need ASAP. Except, the last
one #4 which is due 10-13-13. They are to be used in The Final Paper.
Main Elements and
Format
The final paper (not including the title page or bibliography) should be 8-10 pages
double spaced.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Thomas Franklin arrived at the following tax information:
Gross salary, $46,660
Interest earnings, $225
Dividend income, $80
One personal exemption, $3,400
Itemized deductions, $7,820
Adjustments to income, $1,150
What amount would Thomas report as taxable income?
2. If Lola Harper had the following itemized deductions, should she use Schedule A or the standard deduction? The standard deduction for her tax situation is $5,450.
Donations to church and other charities, $1,980
Medical and dental expenses that exceed 7.5 percent of adjusted gross income, $430
State income tax, $690
Job-related expenses that exceed 2 percent of adjusted gross income, $1,610
3. What would be the average tax rate for a person who paid taxes of $4,864.14 on a taxable income of $39,870?
4. Based on the following data, would Ann and Carl Wilton receive a refund or owe additional taxes?
Adjusted gross income, $46,186
Itemized deductions, $11,420
Child care tax credit, $80
Federal income tax withheld, $4,784
Amount for personal exemptions, $6,800
Average tax rate on taxable income, 15%
5. Would you prefer a fully taxable investment earning 10.7 percent or a tax-exempt investment earning 8.1 percent? Why? (Assume a 28 percent tax rate.)
6. On December 30, you decide to make a $1,000 charitable donation. If you are in a 28 percent tax bracket, how much would you save in taxes for the current year? If that tax savings was deposited in a savings account for the next five years at 6 percent, what would be the future value of that account?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
FDP Company produces a variety of home security products. Gary Price, the company’s president, is concerned with the fourth quarter market demand for the company’s products. Unless something is done in the last two months of the year, the company is likely to miss its earnings expectation of Wall Street analysts. Price still remembers when FDP’s earnings were below analysts’ expectation by two cents a share three years ago and the company’s share price fell 19% the day earnings were announced. In a recent meeting, Price told his top management that something must be done quickly. One proposal by the marketing vice president was to give a deep discount to the company’s major customers to increase the company’s sales in the fourth quarter. The company controller pointed out that while the discount could increase sales, it may not help the bottom line; to the contrary, it could lower income. The controller said, Since we have enough storage capacity, we might simply increase our production in the fourth quarter to increase our reported profit.
You will be using Chapter 6 Ethics Challenge p 236 AND the IMA Code of Ethical Practice (found in doc sharing Week 2) as the basis for this written project. You will be required to review the case in the text and provide solutions to the situation along with any ethical concerns based on the IMA Code. This will be done in the form of a memo to Gary Price explaining your answer and why this is or is not ethical based on the IMA Code.
Grading Rubric:
|
Category
|
Grade
|
Comments
|
|
Student Name:
|
Scale of 5-0 where
5=Requirements met
0=Requirements not met
|
|
|
Format / Citations -20%
|
|
|
|
o
Format:Proper Memo format used
|
|
|
|
o
Memo uses, 1 margins, 12 pt font in Times New Roman style and pages are numbered
|
|
|
|
*Remember if sources are not noted it is considered plagiarism
|
|
|
|
o
Citations: Sources used in the paper are cited in APA format (author name, date, page number if needed for direct quotes).
|
|
|
|
o
Sources are listed on a separate references page in APA format (alphabetical order by author, if there is one, with all needed information).
|
|
|
|
Content / Quality -80%
|
|
|
|
o
Content: There is a clear concise opening segment including the purpose of the memo, the context and the specific task
|
|
|
|
o
There is a clear context section this is the event, circumstance, or background of the problem you are solving
|
|
|
|
o
There is a clear task statement where you should describe what you are doing to explain the problem
|
|
|
|
o
There is a clear summary statement that provides a brief statement of the key recommendations you have reached.
|
|
|
|
o
There is a clear discussion segment that includes all the details and research that support your ideas
|
|
|
|
o
There is a clear closing segment summarizing your key points for the reader.
|
|
|
|
o
There is a smooth transition between paragraphs.
|
|
|
|
o
The information presented including exhibits is accurate and terms are used correctly.
|
|
|
|
o
Concepts covered in class are incorporated into the paper.
|
|
|
|
o
No more than 20% of the paper was taken from outside sources.
|
|
|
|
Paper is not less than 1 1/2 and not more than 2 pages of text (not including exhibits and reference page).
|
|
|
|
o
Quality: used the IMA Code and textbook to explain the problem and to tie in any ethical concerns in this case
|
|
|
|
o
Used proper grammar, spelling, and punctuation; did not use slang or other forms of casual language.
|
|
|
|
o
Submitted paper on or before the date due.
|
|
|
|
o
Extra credit if the report from the OWL is submitted and corrections are made.
|
|
|
|
Total
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
part 1
David, a CPA for a large accounting firm, works 10- to 12-hour days. As a requirement for his position, he must attend social events to recruit new clients. In addition to his job with the accounting firm, he also has private clients in his unincorporated professional practice. David purchased exercise equipment for $3,000. He works out on the equipment to maintain his stamina and good health that enable him to carry such a heavy workload. What tax issues should David consider? Please cite IRC code at least once.
part 2 I need a question or observation to say ask or tell to a fellow student who posted the answer below to the same question. It only needs to be 2 or 3 sentences long.
Betty said:
David should consider the substantiation of the expenses that he incurs when he must attend social events for his employer.01 Section 162(a) allows a deduction for all ordinary and necessary expenses paid or incurred during the taxable year in carrying on any trade or business, including certain expenses for meals and entertainment.If you are an employee and have ordinary and necessary business-related expenses for travel away from home, local transportation, entertainment, and gifts, you may be able to deduct these expenses. Generally, you must file Form 2106 or Form 2106-EZ to claim these expenses.
IRC Section 274(d) and Treas. Regs. Section 1.274-5 also provide for full disallowance of meals, entertainment and lodging expenses unless the taxpayer can substantiate the business purpose of the expenditure. The following details must be documented for each lodging and other expenditures in excess of $75:1) the amount of expense 2) the time and place of the meal, entertainment, etc. 3) the business purpose of the expenditure and 4) the business relationships of those in attendance. In regards to his own business he needs to keep separate records from his regular job. He may consider taking the in home office deduction on Form8829.
To be tax deductible, an office in the home, unless it is in a separate structure, must be used as either the principle place of business or as a place of business used to meet customers, clients, or patients in the normal course of business. In all cases, the office in the home must be used exclusively for business and on a regular basis for these purposes. An employee can only qualify if the business use is for the convenience of the employer. Section 280A.
In regards to the $3,000 treadmill David cannot take it as a medical expense unless he gets a doctor s note indicating that he needs the treadmill for a medical reason such as obesity or a heart problem. He would record it on Schedule A subjectto a 10% ceiling of AGI (2013).
part 3
Wayne and Maria file a joint tax return on which they itemize their deductions and report AGI of $50,000. During the year, they incurred $1,500 of medical expenses when Maria broke her leg. Furthermore, their dentist informed them that their daughter, Alicia, needs $3,000 of orthodontic work to correct her overbite. Wayne also needs a new pair of eyeglasses that will cost $300. What tax issues should Wayne and Maria consider?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Basic Cash Budget
P 3. Felasco Nurseries Inc. has been in business for six years and has four divisions. Ethan Poulis, the corporation s controller, has been asked to prepare a cash budget for the Southern Division for the first quarter. Projected data supporting this budget follow.
Sales (60% on credit) Purchases
|
November
|
$160,000
|
December
|
$ 86,800
|
|
December
|
200,000
|
January
|
124,700
|
|
January
|
120,000
|
February
|
99,440
|
|
February
|
160,000
|
March
|
104,800
|
|
March
|
140,000
|
|
|
Collection records of accounts receivable have shown that 30 percent of all credit sales are collected in the month of sale, 60 percent in the month following the sale, and 8 percent in the second month following the sale; 2 percent of the sales are uncollectible. All purchases are paid for in the month after the purchase. Sala ries and wages are projected to be $25,200 in January, $33,200 in February, and $21,200 in March. Estimated monthly costs are utilities, $4,220; collection fees, $1,700; rent, $5,300; equipment depreciation, $5,440; supplies, $2,480; small tools, $3,140; and miscellaneous, $1,900.
Each of the corporation’s divisions maintains a $6,000 minimum cash bal ance. As of December 31, the Southern Division had a cash balance of $9,600.
Required
1. Prepare a monthly cash budget for Felasco Nurseries’ Southern Divisiontor the first quarter.
2. Should Felasco Nurseries anticipate taking out a loan for the Southern Divi sion during the quarter? If so, how much should it borrow, and when?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Five Assignment Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Basic present value calculations Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar: A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at an 11% rate of return.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
help with
my final exam
thanks!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
DIRECTIONS: Exam consists of 35 QUESTIONS. Questions 1-20 are multiple choice and worth 2 pts each. Questions 21-35 are essay and/or calculation problems. These are worth 4 points each. Total exam is worth 100 point. Please answer on the exam itself. You may also submit an Excel spreadsheet as backup if you wish. Wrong answers may receive partial credit if work is shown.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I. An overall risk profile of the company based on current economic and industry issues that it may be facing.
II. Current company cash flow
a. You need to complete a cash flow statement for the company using the direct method.
b. Once you ve completed the cash flow statement, answer the following questions:
i. What does this statement of cash flow tell you about the sources and uses of the company?
ii. Is there anything ABC Company can do to improve the cash flow?
iii. Can this project be financed with current cash flow from the company? Why or why not?
iv. If the company needs additional financing beyond what ABC Company can provide internally (either now or sometime throughout the life of the project), how would you suggest the company obtain the additional financing, equity or corporate debt, and why?
III. Product cost: ABC Company believes that it has an additional 5,000 machine hours available in the current facility before it would need to expand. ABC Company uses machine hours to allocate the fixed factory overhead, and units sold to allocate the fixed sales expenses. ABC Company expects that it will take twice as long to produce the expansion product as it currently takes to produce its existing product.
a. What is the product cost for the expansion product?
b. By adding this new expansion product, it helps to absorb the fixed factory and sales expenses. How much cheaper does this expansion make the existing product?
c. Assuming ABC Company wants a 40% gross margin for the new product, what selling price should it set for the expansion product
d. Assuming the same sales mix of these two products, what are the contribution margins and break-even points by product?
IV. Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years:
Year 1, $15,000
Year 2, $13,000
Year 3, $10,000
Year 4, $10,000
Year 5, $6,000
ABC Company uses the net-present-value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment.
a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment ignore income taxes and depreciation?
b. Assuming a 5-year straight-line depreciation, how will this impact the factory s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow?
c. Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time-value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not
ABC’s Product information
Current Product Expansion Product (estimate)
Selling Price $12.00 ?
Units produced and expected to be sold 80,000 5,000
Machine Hours 40,000 5,000
Direct Materials $1.30 per unit $5.60 per unit
Direct labor dollars needed per product $2.80 per unit $4.00 per unit
Variable Factory Overhead $1.00 per Machine Hour $1.00 per Machine Hour
Variable Selling Expense $0.20 per unit $0.20 per unit
Total Fixed Costs:
Fixed Factory Overhead $ 198,000
Fixed Selling expenses $ 191,250
Additional Requirements
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jennifer’s Stuffed Animals reported the following: Revenues $2,000 Variable manufacturing costs $ 600 Variable nonmanufacturing costs $ 460 Fixed manufacturing costs $ 300 Fixed nonmanufacturing costs $ 280 Required: a. Compute contribution margin. b. Compute gross margin. c. Compute operating income. Explain the difference between a static budget and a flexible budget. Explain what is meant by a static budget variance and a flexible budget variance. The textbook discusses a five-step decision process. Briefly explain each of the five steps.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Technology Project (parts 1 and 2)
Part 1 of this project will be a written analysis of the requirements needed to automate a firm’s accounting information system (5-7 pages)
Part 2 of this project will be an executive summary of part 1, done in Microsoft PowerPoint. (10-20 slides)
Project Description
Assume you are a CPA with a small local practice. You have three professional employees, all relatively new CPAs, and an office manager. Your practice consists primarily of tax and write-up work. You have a new client a homeowners’ association consisting of 150 homeowners and you have contracted to perform the following services:
- billing: Each quarter, you will send each homeowner an itemized bill. Dues are $50 per month ($150 per quarter). Late fees are one percent per month of the unpaid balance. The bills will be mailed the first day of the last month of the quarter. Payment is due by the end of the quarter.
- collection: You rent a post office box and will receive the checks there. You are responsible for depositing the checks (you have opened a checking account for the association).
- payment: You will write about five checks a month. Besides your own monthly fee, there are monthly checks to a lawn maintenance company and a refuse removal company. There are also checks written for taxes, postage, supplies, and the like.
- reporting: You will be responsible for reporting on all collections, all checks written, outstanding homeowners’ balances, and quarterly financial statements.
- tax payment: You will be responsible for preparing the association’s federal and state tax returns.
- advising: You will be responsible for advising the board on an as-needed basis, especially in the areas of budgeting, purchasing, and investment.
You are hoping to expand this new area of your practice. You want to computerize the main functions of this system, concentrating especially on the billing and reporting aspects. Assume that the tax preparation, financial statements, and checking account will not be computerized initially; only the billing and collections portions will be computerized for now.
Required: Using the methodology developed in this course, document and illustrate the system (describe inputs, outputs, controls, and so on); don’t overlook manual functions. Consider what reports will be necessary; what kinds of documents/forms will be needed (such as invoices and receipts); and what the reports, documents, and forms will look like. Design at least three documents (reports and/or forms), and provide them as appendices. Include a discussion about problem areas that could arise, assuming that you will eventually have many more clients and several more employees.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I have about ten hours for this project. I am familiar with it, so I know that it takes about 2-3 hours and it is about looking up information.
1) Make sure you have the time tonight before bidding.
2) Provide me a price quote over private message
3) Make sure you read Individual Learning Project Instructions (1st)
4) Make sure you read the questions.
-Note, some of the questions do not require complete sentences, but some do.
-Some responses require EXCEL documents.
5) I don’t have a problem cleaning up questions 53-55, if you just provide a summary of a few sentences.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
University of Maryland University College Final Examination Acct425: International Accounting Question 1: Suggested time 40 minutes: 20% points: Corcovado Company was created as a wholly owned subsidiary of Campinhas Corporation on January 1, 2012. On that date Campinhas invested $42,000 in Corcovado’s capital stock. Given the exchange rate on that date of $0.84 per cruzeiro, the initial investment of $42,000 was converted into 50,000 cruzeiros (Cz). Other than the capital investment in January 1, there were no transactions involving stockholder’s equity for 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
income statemet and cash flow chart
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
MY MIDTERM IS DUE ALSO BY TUESDAY, THE 21ST OF MAY.
The Unit 3 Assignment includes the following textbook problems:
Exercise 9-35 found on page 350 in your textbook
Problem 10-43 found on page 407 in your textbook
Submit your assignment using a single Excel workbook. Place each exercise/problem on a separate tab (sheet). Format the Excel spreadsheet to make all computations. The computations must be included in the assignment solutions. Be sure that you highlight or otherwise distinguish the answers.
When you have completed the assignment, upload your completed Excel document to the Unit 3 Assignment Dropbox before Tuesday, 11:59 PM (ET) of Unit 3. Name your assignment filename using this format: LastName_FirstName_Unit#_AssignmentName. For example, the Unit 3 assignment would be named:
Smith_John_Unit03_Assignment
Assignments submitted late will be subject to the Late Policy described in your Syllabus.
ID: GB519-03-09-A
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- Individual Research Paper
In Unit 1, you are to choose a topic that you will do your individual research paper on. Once a topic has been identified you will answer questions found in the PDF below. This Assignment should take be a minimum of 1-page in length. Save the document as Part1_Research Paper.doc. When you are ready, submit your paper to the Unit 1 Research Paper (Individual) Dropbox.
- Case Analysis Assignment
Read the Harvard Business Case Study for Unit 1: Sind, M., & Yoffie, D.B. (February, 2008)Apple, inc.(Case Study) Retrieved from the Harvard Business Online website. Prepare a Case Analysis on the topic of Strategic Management and why is it critical to the success of an organization in meeting its goals and mission. Submit your paper to the Case Analysis Dropbox.
View the PDF below for the full details on both assignments.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Green Mountain Sports sells a full line of outdoor clothing and accessories, including waterproof hiking boots. Due to competition, Green mountain can sell these hiking boots for only $54 but must pay suppliers $40 per pair. One order is placed per season; excess inventory is sold at a 50% price discount at the end of the season. At $54, estimated demand over the season is 400 pairs of boots with standard deviation of 300. a. Given the prices and costs, how many waterproof hiking boots should Green Mountain order given its demand estimate? b. Suppose Green Mountain orders 380 pairs of boots? What would the fill rate be? c. Suppose Green Mountain orders 380 pairs of boots? What would the expected profit be? d. Suppose marketing is unhappy with the order quantity in part a? They argue that Green Mountain should maintain a high service level and insist that enough boots be ordered to have at least a 98% fill rate. What order size corresponds to a 98% fill rate for these boots?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
http://vizedhtmlcontent.next.ecollege.com/(NEXT(a8a07076bf))/Main/CourseMode/VizedHtmlView/RenderVizedHtmlView.ed?courseItemSubId=173248528&courseItemType=CourseContentItem& CASE 9–30 Master Budget with Supporting Schedules [LO2, LO4, LO8, LO9, LO10] You have just been hired as a new management trainee by Earrings Unlimited, a distributor of earrings to various retail outlets located in shopping malls across the country. In the past, the company has done very little in the way of budgeting and at certain times of the year has experienced a shortage of cash.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Instructions on first page of excel sheet. I need tabs 2, 3, and 4 completed. The areas needed are highlighted at the bottom. This is my first finance class so they should be really easy, the military just does not give me enough time to do all of it. This is the second of four homeworks I will have that I cant figure out.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Instructions on first page of excel sheet. I need tabs 2, 3, and 4 completed. The areas needed are highlighted at the bottom. This is my first finance class so they should be really easy, the military just does not give me enough time to do all of it. This is the fourth of four homeworks I will have that I cant figure out.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the end of each module, you will apply the module s concepts by completing comprehensive assignments from the textbook.
Complete problems P16A-17B (p. 898), P16A-19B (p. 899), P18-26A (p. 980) in your textbook.
Present your analysis of the assigned problems in Excel format. Enter non-numerical responses in the same worksheet using textboxes.
| Assignment 3 Grading Criteria |
Maximum Points |
| P16A-17B |
|
| Drew time line for assembly department |
2 |
| Computed the equivalent units |
3 |
| Assigned total costs in the assembling department |
3 |
| Prepared T-account for WIP inventory |
3 |
| P16A-19B |
|
| Drew time line for preparation department |
3 |
| Computed the equivalent units |
3 |
| Compute total costs |
3 |
| Prepared journal entry to record costs of sheets |
3 |
| Posted journal entries to WIP inventory and calculated ending balance |
3 |
| P18-24A |
|
| Computed revenue and VC for each show |
2 |
| Computed number of shows BP must perform to break even |
3 |
| Computed number of shows needed to earn $3,825,000 profit |
3 |
| Prepared BP s contribution margin income statement |
3 |
| P18-26A |
|
| Computed Big Time s break even revenue in dollars |
3 |
| Computed dollar revenues needed to earn OI of $11,200 |
3 |
| Graphed Big Time s CVP relationships |
4 |
| Computed new BEP if average revenues increased to $900 per trade |
3 |
| Total: |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ENG 221 Week 5 ;Final UOP Forums Manual
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACC 226 APPENDIX E WEEK 5.xls
ACC 226 ASSIGNMENT 16 1A WEEK 6.xls
ACC 226 ASSIGNMENT WEEK 8.doc
ACC 226 BTN 10 1 KRISPY CREAM WEEK 2.doc
ACC 226 BTN 13 KRISPY KREME WEEK 4.doc
ACC 226 BTN 16 1 KRISPY KREME WEEK 6.doc
ACC 226 CHECKPOINT 1 WEEK 8.doc
ACC 226 CHECKPOINT 2 WEEK 8.doc
ACC 226 Checkpoint Week 1.xls
ACC 226 CHECKPOINT WEEK 2.doc
ACC 226 CHECKPOINT WEEK 3.xls
ACC 226 CHECKPOINT WEEK 5.xls
ACC 226 CHECKPOINT WEEK 6.doc
ACC 226 CHECKPOINT WEEK 7.xls
ACC 226 EXERCISES WEEK 2.xls
ACC 226 RANDY COMPANY WEEK 8.doc
ACC 226 WEEK 1 CHK 1 WEEK 4.xls
ACC 226 WEEK 1 CHK 2 WEEK 4.xls
ACC 226 WEEK 1 DQ 1.doc
ACC 226 WEEK 1 DQ 2.doc
ACC 226 WEEK 3 DQ 2.doc
ACC 226 WEEK 5 DQ 1.doc
ACC 226 WEEK 5 DQ 2.doc
ACC 226 WEEK 7 DQ 1.doc
ACC 226 WEEK 7 DQ 2.doc
ACC 226 APPENDIX C WEEK 2.xls
ACC 226 APPENDIX D WEEK 4.xls
ACC 226 APPENDIX D WEEK 4.zip
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Read the article
prpeare a short 3 pages report consisting of:
1 The title and author of the article read (source)
2 a brief summary of the article
3 your oppinion and comments about the article
4 a statement of wheather you think this assigment was of value to you
The report should be double spaced using 1 inch top, bottom and left margains and a 1-1/2 inch right margin
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethics andprofessional conduct in business
Script: Once you ve read the transcript, respond to the discussion questions below.
How would you interpret this situation? Is Tripp behaving in an ethical and professional manner? Be specific with your answers and back them up with examples. Cite all websites and text references. Also must be at least 100 words
Kelly Tough, president of Tu-Rock Industries Inc., believes that reporting operating cash flow per share on the income statement would be a useful addition to the company s just completed financial statements. Please read a transcript of the discussion which took place between Kelly Tough and Tu-Rock controller, Tripp Kelso, in January, after the close of the fiscal year.
Kelly: I have been reviewing our financial statements for the last year. I am disappointed that our net income per share has dropped by 10% from last year. This is not going to look good to our shareholders. Isn t there anything we can do about this?
Tripp: What do you mean? The past is the past, and the numbers are in. There isn t much that can be done about it. Our financial statements were prepared according to generally accepted accounting principles, and I don t see much leeway for significant change at this point.
Kelly: No, no.I m not suggesting that we cook the books. But look at the cash flow from operating activities on the statement of cash flows.
Kelly: The cash flow from operating activities has increased by 20%. This is very good news and, I might add, useful information. The higher cash flow from operating activities will give our creditors comfort.
Tripp: Well, the cash flow from operating activities is on the statement of cash flows, so I guess users will be able to see the improved cash flow figures there.
Kelly: This is true, but somehow I feel that this information should be given a much higher profile. I don t like this information being buried in the statement of cash flows. You know as well as I do that many users will focus on the income statement. Therefore, I think we ought to include an operating cash flow per share number on the face of the income statement someplace under the earnings per share number. In this way users will get the complete picture of our operating performance. Yes, our earnings per share dropped this year, but our cash flow from operating activities improved! And all the information is in one place where users can see and compare the figures. What do you think?
Tripp:I ve never really thought about it like that before. I guess we could put the operating cash flow per share on the income statement, under the earnings per share. Users would really benefit from this disclosure. Thanks for the idea I ll start working on it.
Kelly: Glad to be of service.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Evaluation of Correlation Data are gathered regarding the length of tenure top executives have at a major corporation and whether those executives have been divorced. The Human Resources department is evaluating this data to drive decision-making in regard to their hiring process. The data for eight executives is as follows: Tenure Divorce 1 9.0 No 2 9.5 No 3 11.0 Yes 4 11.5 Yes 5 10.0 Yes 6 9.8 No 7 10.0 No 8 10.3 Yes In a three to five page paper, excluding title page and reference page(s), answer the following questions to analyze the data. Include clearly labeled calculations, if applicable. Calculations conducted in Excel must be copied and pasted into the Word document. This paper should be formatted according to APA guidelines outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. 1. What s the most appropriate procedure for evaluating the relationship between tenure and divorce? 2. What is the correlation and how can it be interpreted in terms of magnitude, direction and practical importance? 3. How much of whether executives have been divorced can be accounted for by their length of tenure with the organization? How much of tenure can be explained by whether there has been a divorce? 4. Make a logical argument for why lengthy tenure may be causing divorce. 5. Make another logical argument for why divorce may be causing lengthy tenure. Make sure to support your arguments with at least two articles from the Ashford Library or other scholarly sources. All calculations conducted in Excel must be copied and pasted into the Word document before submission. Be sure to clearly label all calculations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The score went from a 2.4/ to a 2.5/4 on the 1st task. I think it’s time fo a refund. I will hire someone else. Thanks for trying though. Please see the attached eval. I need a refund immediately. Thanks.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
i NEED DONE CHAPTER 6 CASE 1, AND CASE 2
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) At the Todd Company, the cost of the personnel department has always been charged to production departments based upon number of employees. Recently, opinions gathered from the department managers indicate that the number of new hires might be a better predictor of personnel costs. Total personnel department costs are $320,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Student Name: (10 points) Donald’s Engine Company manufactures part TE456 used in several of its engine models. Monthly production costs for 1,000 units are as follows: Direct materials $ 20,000 Direct labor 5,000 Variable overhead costs 15,000 Fixed overhead costs 10,000 Total costs $50,000 It is estimated that 10% of the fixed overhead costs assigned to TE456 will no longer be incurred if the company purchases TE456 from the outside supplier. Donald’s Engine Company has the option of purchasing the part from an outside supplier at $42.50 per unit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I attached the problem with the required.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Country Vista Company_Statement of cash flows
Download and review the income statement for the Country Vista Company. You will use the income statement to help you complete Part 1 and Part 2 below.
Country Vista Income Statement
|
Country Vista Company
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
For the Year Ended December 31, 2011
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
$2,48,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
$1,16,000
|
|
Gross Profit
|
|
$1,32,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
|
|
|
Wages and Salaries Expense
|
$44,000
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
$16,000
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
$30,000
|
|
|
Other Operating Expenses
|
$18,000
|
$1,08,000
|
|
Income from Operations
|
|
$24,000
|
|
Gain on Sale of Equipment
|
|
$26,000
|
|
Income before Income Taxes
|
|
$50,000
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
|
$17,500
|
|
Net Income
|
|
$32,500
|
Part 1: Indirect Method
Using Excel, prepare the Statement of Cash Flows Indirect Method. Your SOCF should be based upon the income statement and the additional information below:
Additional Information:
Increase in Accounts Receivables=$4,000
Increase in Accounts Payables=$16,000
Increase in Income Taxes Payable=$300
Decrease in Prepaid Expenses=$10,000
Decrease in Merchandise Inventory=$14,000
Decrease in Long Term Notes Payable=$20,000
Cash Paid to Purchase Land=$50,000
Cash Paid to Purchase Equipment=$15,000
Cash Paid to Retire Bonds=$25,000
Cash Paid to for Dividends=$10,000
Cash Received from the Sale of common stock=$50,000
Cash at the start of the year=$24,000
Part 2: Direct Method
Using Excel and the below information please prepare the complete statement of cash flows using the direct method.
Additional Information:
Cash Received from Customers=$80,000
Cash Payments for Merchandise=$10,000
Cash Payments for Operating Expenses=$5,000
Cash payments for Interest=$6,000
Cash Payments for Income Taxes=$3,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Your Course Project
Financial Statement Analysis Project — A Comparative Analysis of Kohl s Corporation and J.C. Penney Corporation
Below is the link for the financial statements for Kohl s Corporation for the 2010 fiscal year ending January 29, 2011. Under the term Groupings Filter, change the term All Forms to Annual Filings using the drop-down arrow and press Search.
You should then scroll down and select the 10k dated 3/18/2011 and choose to download in Word or PDF format.
http://www.kohlscorporation.com/InvestorRelations/sec-filings.htm
Below is the link for the financial statements for J.C. Penney Corporation for the 2010 fiscal year ending January 29, 2011. Under the term Groupings Filter, change the term All Forms to Annual Filings using the drop-down arrow and press Search.
You should then scroll down and select the 10k dated 3/29/2011 and choose to download in Word format.
http://ir.jcpenney.com/phoenix.zhtml?c=70528&p=irol-sec
A sample project template is available for download in Doc Sharing. The sample project compares the ratio performance of Tootsie Roll and Hershey using the 2009 financial statements of Tootsie Roll and Hershey provided in Appendix A and Appendix B of your textbook.
This course contains a Course Project where you will be required to submit one draft of the project at the end of Week 5 and the final completed project at the end of Week 7. Using the financial statements for Kohl s Corporation and J.C. Penney Corporation, respectively, you will calculate and compare the financial ratios listed further down this documentfor the fiscal year ending 2010 and prepare your comments about the liquidity, solvency, and profitability of the two companies based on your ratio calculations.The entire project will be graded by the instructor at the end of the final submission in Week 7 and one grade will be assigned for the entire project.
For the Final Submission:
Your final Excel workbook submission should contain the following. You cannot use any other software but Excel to complete this project.
1. A completed worksheet title page tab, which is really a cover sheet with your name, the course, the date, your instructor s name, and the title for the project.
2. A completed worksheet profiles tab, which contains a-one paragraph description regarding each company with information about their history, what products they sell, where they are located, etc.
3. All 18 ratios for each company with the supporting calculations and commentary on your worksheet ratio tab. Supporting calculations must be shown either as a formula or as text typed into a different cell. The ratios are listed further down this document. Your comments for each ratio should include more than just a definition of the ratio. You should focus on interpreting each ratio number for each company and support your comments with the numbers found in the ratios.
4. The Summary and Conclusions worksheet tab, which is an overall comparison of how each company compares in terms of the major category of ratios (liquidity, profitability, and solvency). A nice way to conclude is to state which company you think is the better investment and why.
5. The Bibliography worksheet tab must contain at least your textbook as a reference. Any other information you use to profile the companies should also be cited as a reference.
Required Ratios for Final Project Submission
1. Earnings per share
- Current ratio
- Gross profit rate
- Profit margin ratio
- Inventory turnover ratio
- Days in inventory
7. Receivables turnover ratio
8. Average collection period
- Asset turnover ratio
- Return on assets ratio
- Debt to total assets ratio
- Times interest earned ratio
- Payout ratio
- Return on common stockholders equity ratio
- Free cash flow
- Current cash debt coverage ratio
- Cash debt coverage ratio
- Price/earnings ratio [For the purpose of this ratio, for both Kohl s and J.C. Penney, use the market price per share on January 31, 2011.]
The Excel files uploaded in the Dropboxes should not include any unnecessary numbers or information (such as previous years’ ratios, ratios that were not specifically asked for in the project, etc.).
Please upload your final submission to the Week 7 Dropbox by Sunday at the end of Week 7.
For the Draft:
Create an Excel spreadsheet or use the project template to show your computations for the first 12 ratios listed above. The more you can complete regarding the other requirements, the closer you will be to completion when Week 7 arrives. Supporting calculations must be shown either as a formula or as text typed into a different cell. If you plan on creating your own spreadsheet, please follow the format provided in the Tootsie Roll and Hershey template file.
Please upload your draft submission to the Week 5 Dropbox by Sunday at the end of Week 5.
Other Helpful information:
If you feel uncomfortable with Excel, you can find many helpful references on Excel by performing a Google search.
The Appendix to Chapter 13 contains ratio calculations and comparison comments related to Kellogg and General Mills, so you will likely find this information helpful.
BigCharts.com provides historical stock quotes.
Either APA or MLA style can be used to complete the references on your Bibliography tab. There is a tutorial for APA and MLA style within the Syllabus.
The entire project will be graded by the instructor at the end of the final submission in Week 7, and one grade will be assigned for the entire project. The project will count for 18% of your overall course grade.
|
Category
|
Points
|
%
|
Description
|
|
Documentation and Formatting
|
9
|
5%
|
The report will be submitted in the form of an Excel Workbook, with each page (worksheet) of the workbook named appropriately.Please do not use any other software (such as MS Works or Lotus) to complete the project. A quality report will include a title worksheet tab, a worksheet tab for the profile of the two companies, a worksheet tab for the ratio calculations and comments, a worksheet tab for the summary and conclusion, proper citations if applicable, and a Bibliography worksheet tab for the references.
|
|
Organization and Cohesiveness
|
9
|
5%
|
A quality report will include the content described above in the documentation and formatting section. The ratios should be listed in the same order in which they appear in the project information above.
|
|
Editing
|
18
|
10%
|
A quality report will be free of any spelling, punctuation, or grammatical errors. Sentences and paragraphs will be clear, concise, and factually correct.Ratios will be expressed as numbers or percentages, depending on what is appropriate, as is shown in the textbook.Note that not all ratios are shown as percentages. Two decimal places is sufficient for each of the ratios.
|
|
Content
|
144
|
80%
|
A quality report will have correct ratio calculations and accurate supporting commentary. Any assumptions, if made, should be spelled out clearly. Supporting calculations must be shown either as a formula or as text typed into a different cell.
|
|
Total
|
180
|
100%
|
A quality report will meet or exceed all of the above requirements.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The good, the bad and the ugly – Partnerships?Post one good thing about forming a partnership OR say one bad thing about forming a partnership. Student’s comment: Two things come to mind when forming a partnership. The first thing is that you and your partner are liable for your business. If your business defaults on a loan or gets sued then you and your partner are held legally and financially accountable. Whereas in a corporation the owner’s or shareholder’s finances aren’t touched if the business defaults on a loan or is sued for some reason.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
U.S. Supreme Court COMMISSIONER v. DUBERSTEIN., 363 U.S. 278 (1960) 363 U.S. 278 COMMISSIONER OF INTERNAL REVENUE v. DUBERSTEIN ET UX. CERTIORARI TO THE UNITED STATES COURT OF APPEALS FOR THE SIXTH CIRCUIT. No. 376. Argued March 23, 1960. Decided June 13, 1960. * 1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Obs # |
Gender |
Q3: |
|
Hypothesis 3 tests the statement that women are more likely to report not sleeping well than men. |
|
| 1 |
2 |
4 |
|
H30: Women are more likely to report not sleeping well than men. |
|
|
|
|
| 2 |
1 |
2 |
|
H3a: Women are not more likely to report not sleeping well than men. |
|
|
|
|
| 3 |
1 |
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 4 |
1 |
3 |
|
1= Males |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 5 |
1 |
4 |
|
2= Females |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 6 |
2 |
4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 7 |
2 |
5 |
|
I need this data analyzed using the t-test if appropriate for the two variables, men and women. |
|
| 8 |
2 |
4 |
|
Show a scatterplot, bar graph, or frequency table |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 9 |
1 |
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 10 |
1 |
1 |
|
Please show me the steps to arriving at the answer, so I may learn. Thank you. |
|
|
|
| 11 |
2 |
4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 12 |
1 |
1 |
|
Pts |
Answer |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 13 |
2 |
3 |
|
1 |
Strongly Agree |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 14 |
2 |
2 |
|
2 |
Agree |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 15 |
1 |
3 |
|
3 |
Neutral |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 16 |
1 |
3 |
|
4 |
Disagree |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 17 |
1 |
2 |
|
5 |
Strongly Disagree |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 18 |
1 |
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 19 |
2 |
5 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 20 |
2 |
4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 21 |
2 |
4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 22 |
2 |
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 23 |
1 |
1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 24 |
1 |
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 25 |
2 |
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 26 |
2 |
5 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 27 |
2 |
4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 28 |
2 |
4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 29 |
2 |
4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 30 |
1 |
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 31 |
1 |
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 32 |
2 |
3 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 33 |
2 |
4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 34 |
1 |
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 35 |
1 |
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 36 |
2 |
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 37 |
1 |
4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 38 |
1 |
3 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 39 |
1 |
1 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 40 |
2 |
4 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 41 |
1 |
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 42 |
1 |
2 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Introduction:
For this task, you will use the Shuzworld case study (see Web Links section below). You will need to read the entire case study to be able to complete this task correctly.
Scenario:
As the operations consultant for Shuzworld, you have been asked to provide recommendations after analyzing the following problems and applying the appropriate decision analysis tool to help you with your recommendation.
By utilizing excel om or pom software.
You have been asked to look at the data used to determine the various costs of building a new stand-alone store, building one in a strip mall, or not building one at all.
In addition, there is a store already under construction that must be built in time for the planned grand opening. It is currently behind schedule. It would be better to run over costs than to be late in finishing.
For this task, you will prepare a report to present your analysis and recommend solutions to the problems presented in the following tasks. Senior management will be interested in understanding why you chose the decision analysis tool you did to develop your recommendations.
Task:
Create a report
A. Recommend whether Shuzworld should build the proposed stand-alone store, the strip mall store, or not proceed with construction, utilizing the appropriate decision analysis tool.
1. Submit a copy of the output from your decision analysis tool of choice.
a. Explain why you chose the decision analysis tool you used.
2. Discuss two important factors that Shuzworld should consider while evaluating location alternatives for a new store.
B. Recommend project techniques that can be used with the construction project plan for the store being built.
1. Present a network diagram indicating the critical path.
C. Evaluate the trade-offs of allocating production line workers to minimize production costs.
1. Recommend a production mix that maximizes profits for Shuzworld s Shanghai plant, utilizing the appropriate decision analysis tool.
a. Submit a copy of the output from your decision analysis tool of choice.
i. Explain why you chose the decision analysis tool you used.
D. Evaluate Shuzworld s reordering practices at the Baltimore store,utilizing a Monte Carlo simulation to evaluate variables that exhibit random (probabilistic) behavior as inputs to a 20-day inventory simulation.
E. Discuss ways to give Shuzworld a competitive advantage by doing the following:
1. Recommend a human resources strategy to improve employee efficiency and effectiveness in the operations segments of Shuzworld.
2. Discuss applicable operations management philosophies that focus on reducing waste and increasing efficiency in Shuzworld s production processes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
111 113 115 117 145 146 212 213 214 311 312 313 411 511 512 514 517 519 2011 8/1/2012 8/1/2012 8/1/2012 8/2/2012 8/7/2012 8/8/2012 8/12/2012 8/13/2012 2011 8/15/2012 8/16/2012 8/19/2012 8/20/2012 8/21/2012 8/22/2012 8/23/2012 8/26/2012 8/30/2012 2011 7/31/2012 2800 22480 8/1/2012 8/2/2012 8/7/2012 8/12/2012 8/13/2012 8/15/2012 8/16/2012 8/19/2012 8/21/2012 8/22/2012 8/23/2012 8/26/2012 8/30/2012 2011 7/31/2012 400 5000 8/1/2012 8/16/2012 8/20/2012 8/31/2012 2011 7/31/2012 3660
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Very simple assignment that has already been done for the most part just missing a very good powerpoint presentation
In M6: Assignment 2, you analyzed Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company’s budgetary control system, explained how the use of an activity-based costing system could change the results of the budget and improve ROI, and made recommendations for goal alignment. This assignment was also the LASA 2.
In this assignment, you will develop an executive summary of your findings in a Microsoft PowerPoint presentation format.
Include the following in your presentation:
- Include a statement of the problem or topic of LASA 2, a concise analysis of the findings, and a recapitulation of any main conclusions or recommendations.
- Be sure to incorporate specific details from LASA 2 to highlight or support the summary.
- Using your knowledge of capital budgeting techniques, explain how principles of capital budgeting, such as the payback method, IRR, and NPV, can be used to assess changes in performance and make decisions for the future based on decisions made within the organization.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 2: Designing Value-Based Service As the rate of innovation increases, companies face expanding product/service lines, shorter product and service lifecycles, and more frequent product/service transitions. All of these can bring tremendous value but also pose enormous challenges and risks. The article The Art of Managing New Product Transitions by Erhun, Gonclave, and Hopman (2007) from the readings for this module includes a matrix titled Product Drivers and Risk Factors, which focuses on Intel, a company that manufactures high-tech products (p. 76). Based on your readings and research, address the following issues: Redesign the product risk factor matrix so that the factors are appropriate for a services firm that delivers traditional tax accounting and audit services. For example, among the supply risks, assume that the company relies on individuals with specific knowledge of the tax law in the jurisdictions where its clients operate, be it state, federal, or foreign. Now, assume that the firm wants to develop a management consultancy practice. (Alternatively, you may choose to add a legal services line instead.). Create a separate new matrix that summarizes the additional risk factors for this firm launching a management consultancy or legal services line. What additional risk factors are you adding to your matrix? Explain how the business risks differ between traditional tax and audit services and management consulting services. In your opinion, what are the three biggest risks the firm faces if it diversifies into the new service line? Recommend whether the firm should organically grow into a consultancy service or acquire a third party to achieve new goals. Justify your recommendations. Develop a 6 8-slide presentation in PowerPoint format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M2_A2.ppt. Be sure to include the following in your presentation: A title slide An agenda slide A reference slide Headings for each section Speaker notes to support the content in each slide By Sunday, July 28, 2013, deliver your assignment to the M2: Assignment 2 Dropbox. Erhun, F., Gon alves, P., & Hopman, J. (2007). The art of managing new product transitions. MIT Sloan Management Review, 48(3), 73. (ProQuest Document ID:224964759) http://search.proquest.com.libproxy.edmc.edu/docview/224964759?accountid=34899 Assignment 2 Grading Criteria Maximum Points Redesigned the product risk factor matrix for a services firm that has traditionally provided tax and audit services and now wants to develop into a management consultancy. 20 Created a new matrix that summarizes the additional risk factors for this firm launching a management consultancy or legal services line. Identified additional risk factors to add to the matrix. 20 Explained how the business risks differ between these two types of services. Listed and ranked the three biggest risks if the firm diversifies into the new service line. 40 Recommended with appropriate justification on whether the firm should organically grow itself into a consultancy or acquire a third party to achieve its goals 10 Wrote using ethical scholarship, visual aesthetics, proper grammar, and mechanics. 10 Total: 100
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Case Study for PROJ587 will place the student in the role of a senior manager in charge of one of your company s Strategic Business Units (SBU). Your first task in this new position is to develop a project portfolio management process and then use this process to select projects for your SBUs portfolio. The Case Study will involve the application of the tools and techniques of multi-project/program management and will deal with the analysis and establishment of project management systems based on the structure of the project.
The expected outputs from this Case Study will be in the form of a two part written report due week five.
The senior management of your company has already made the strategic decisions to allocate annual funding to each of the Strategic Business Units (SBU) within the company. You have been hired to manage one of the companies SBUs.
Your new company is a mid cap company with revenues of approximately $350 million dollars a year. This company, like many others, is struggling in today s economy. It realizes in order to survive it needs to both expand and control costs at the same time. You are new to this industry. This company s vision is to become the go to support or the provider of choice for the cruise ship industry throughout the world.
This company currently is in the travel and hotel support industry. As such, you supply support services to the travel and hotel industry such as linen services to cruise ships and major hotel chains in the Southeastern United States. Most of your new company s revenues are derived for the cruise ship industry versus the hotel industry. This company is home based in Tampa, Florida, as most of your business is in that geographic area.
You are in charge of the Operations SBU and responsible for the management of a product portfolio in this strategic business unit. The Operations SBU is the SBU that provides all the company s services to its clients. There are a number of projects already in progress, but there has not been a good portfolio management process in place.
The parent company has set the following strategic goals for the entire company:
- Expansion goals are to grow the company 10% per year, specifically to include the following:
- Expand into new markets in Alaska and Europe
- Expand services provided to current customers
- Increase revenues by 10%
- Increase customer satisfaction by 15%
- Cost Control goals include the following
- Reduce operating costs by 10%
- Reduce overhead and warehousing costs by 5%
Assignment: Due Week 5
This is a two part assignment.
Part 1
First, develop project selection criteria and a high level process for applying the criteria and managing the portfolio. The criteria should be consistent with the business environment for the industry, consistent with your company’s overall mission/strategies, and consistent with the mission and strategies of your strategic business unit. You are proposing a process, not individual projects.
The deliverable for Part 1 is a written proposal for the project selection criteria and a high level description of a proposed portfolio management process. You may also be expected to make an informal presentation of the report in class.
The proposal should be in the form of a memorandum to your Vice President (your instructor) outlining your proposal. The memorandum should be no more than 10 pages, including any figures and tables. It should be double-spaced, 10 or 12 point font with one-inch margins. This is a summary for an executive, so be concise, to the point, and leave out the fluff. If you don’t need 10 pages to document your proposal fully, I am sure that your Vice President will be happy with less as long as it is complete. Using appropriate grammar, spelling, punctuation, and sentence structure will be part of your grade.
The actual proposal should include the following:
1.
A description of the proposed portfolio process. You are explaining it to the executives.
2.
The reasons it was selected (tie to strategies as appropriate.)
3.
A description of the proposed selection criteria. How will the process be applied in your SBU?
4.
The method for applying the selection criteria, and the justification for both. How are you going to score the projects and evaluate the scores?
Hints for a Successful Part 1:
This is not a complete project proposal or even a complete status report. You are making a specific proposal to management of a Project Portfolio Evaluation and Selection Process .
All reports and memos to executives should include an executive summary at the beginning. This one is no exception.
The discussion of the organization should be limited to how the SBU organization supports projects and the PPM process. It is not necessary to discuss the total company.
Pay attention to the specifics requested in the deliverables. Do NOT make your memo a list of questions and answers. That is not the way a business memo is written.
It is easy to select a process that is presented in a reference but you must propose one that works for your SBU.
When you think you are finished put yourself in the role of someone who was not working on the solution and read your presentation. You can assume you know the basics of PPM.
Does your presentation provide a good description of the process and how it will be applied?
Are there obvious questions that it raises that are not answered?
This is not a classroom assignment, it is a business memo. Also it is not a research report and you are not trying to demonstrate your academic expertise and how well you are read.
Part 2
In Part 1 of the project, the new Vice President (your instructor) of your Strategic Business Unit had asked you to create a portfolio management process and project selection criteria for use by the SBU. It is now time to apply this process in selecting this year s projects for your portfolio.
In the annual budget cycle, your SBU was allocated $24 million dollars of funding uniformly spread over the next year for your portfolio. This means you have $6 million dollars to spend any given quarter. You may select any of the below projects to be included in your portfolio, but you cannot spend more than the allotted dollars allocated to your SBU. Your task is to select those projects, using your selection criteria, that most benefit the overall company without exceeding you quarterly budget of $6 million dollars. You must also lay out a plan for what quarter your selected projects will start in.
Below are your possible projects:
Project Call Center
Currently you have no call center to address customer complaints or accept orders. Customers must use the internet to fill out an online form to address their complaints or service needs. These forms are processed by employees in your department. Currently the turnaround time on any given form is between four to eight hours. This creates a number of other customer complaints. Project Call Center is designed to reduce this turnaround time by 75% by creating and staffing a call center in Tampa. Building acquisition, building renovations, building fit out, IT system upgrades, and hiring and training of staff are estimated to cost $8.5 million dollars. This $8.5 million dollars can be paid evenly in any two quarters in the next year. In addition, seven new employees will need to be hired at $40,000 burdened labor costs per year to staff the call center. Management of this project could easily be done with the current in-house staff. Most of the work of this project would be outsourced and will have minimal impact on day-to-operations.
Project Ordering Upgrade
Currently ordering processing is done online. The software and hardware used in this system are about ten years old. As such, order processing is a long, arduous process for the fifteen person staff. Upgrading this process to a state of the art system would cost approximately $2.5 million dollars, and it is a onetime pay in full internal charge to your SBU. It would also result in a reduction in the fifteen person staff by 7 individuals and reduce order processing time by 50%. Each individual in this department is paid $35,000 burdened labor costs a year. Most of the work of this project could be done internally with existing staff. One weekend of operations will be impacted by the project in its entirety.
Project Rocky
The Alaskan cruise ship industry is booming. For some reason, people like to look at icebergs. Unfortunately, our company is servicing no cruise ships in Alaska. Project Rocky is to expand into the Alaskan market. This project will require the acquisition of property in Alaska, renovation of that property, and staffing of the facility. This project is seen as a major money maker for the company and has a NPV of $19 million dollars over five years. Its costs would be $13 million dollars to initially set up the project and $400,000 a year to operate the facility. This initial cost can be spread evenly over each of four quarters of the entire year. These initial costs should be recovered within the first two or three years of operation. Most of the work of this project would be outsourced and management of the project would likely be difficult.
Project Europa
The Mediterranean cruise ship industry is booming. Unfortunately, our company is servicing no cruise ships in the entire European area. Project Europa is to expand into the Mediterranean market. This project will require the acquisition of property in Italy, renovation of that property, and staffing of the facility. The current governmental overspending and austerity issues may impact this project. However, this project is seen as a major money maker for the company and has a NPV of $15 million dollars over seven years. Its costs would be $11 million dollars to initially set up the project and $500,000 a year to operate the facility. This initial cost can be spread evenly over each of the four quarters of the entire year. These initial costs should be recovered within the first three years of operation. Most of the work of this project would be outsourced and management of the project would be extremely difficult.
Project Robot
Our key distribution center is in St. Petersburg, Florida. It has a staff of 100 individuals to process the linens for the Florida cruise industry. Automation would allow us to reduce staff by 35 individuals. The average burdened labor costs of each of these individuals is $45,000 dollars a year. The cost of such automation would be in the neighborhood of $17 million dollars. This initial cost can be spread evenly over the entire year. This project would also likely disrupt the facility for about 3 months while the work is being done. Upon completion, the newly remodeled facility will be 1/3 smaller allowing our need for warehousing space to be reduced by 1/3. This would allow us to sublet this space for an estimated $2 million dollars a year in revenue. Most of the work of this project would be outsourced.
Project Tableware
In order to become the provider of choice for the cruise industry, our company needs to expand to more than just linens. A suggestion was made to expand into supplying tableware to the cruise industry, as much tableware is lost every cruise to breakage. Currently this need is supplied by a number of smaller companies that we could easily compete with. This project would involve creating a Just In Time process to receive and supply the cruise ships. It would also involve the need for a minimal warehouse facility. This project is likely to cost $5.5 million dollars and have a NPV of $1 million dollars over five years. All initial costs can be spread over any two quarters of the upcoming year. It would likely take four years to recover the initial costs of this project. It would further cost approximately $300,000 dollars a year to operate this facility. All of the work of this project would be outsourced.
Your Assignment
Your task is to use your portfolio process to determine which of the above projects best fit into your portfolio and create a time based plan by quarters as to when each project selected should begin and be paid for. Once this is accomplished, you need to write an internal memo to your Vice President denoting the projects selected, the time based plan in quarters, and why you chose as you did.
The document should be double-spaced, 10 or 12 point font with one inch margins. This is a Recommendation Memo for an executive, so be concise and to the point. If you don’t need more than eight pages to document your plan adequately, I am sure that your manager will be happy with it as long as it is complete. The use of appropriate grammar, spelling, punctuation, and sentence structure is part of your grade.
Submit This Document to the Dropbox by the end of Week 5.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The problem for Foundational 15 is on page 264-265, Diego Company while Ethics Challenge is on page 278-279.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Need homework help. See case attached below. Please show working for each question.
Thanks
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Income from continuing operations sometimes includes gains from non-operating activities.
2. Intraperiod tax allocation is the process of associating income tax effects with the income statement components that create those effects.
3. Material restructuring costs are reported as an element of income from continuing operations.
4. Earnings quality refers to the ability of reported earnings (income) to predict future earnings.
5. Gains, but not losses, from discontinued operations must be separately reported in an income statement.
6. An item must meet the subjective criteria of being either unusual or infrequent to be reported as extraordinary.
7. The definition of what constitutes an extraordinary item should be independent of the operating environment.
8. Income statements prepared according to both U.S. GAAP and International Accounting Standards require the separate reporting, as an extraordinary item, of material gains and losses from events that are both unusual and infrequent.
9. A change in depreciation method is accounted for by retrospectively revising prior years’ financial statements.
10. Changes in accounting estimates require disclosure of their effects, if material, on current year net income and EPS but do not require restatement of prior years’ financial statements.
11. The income effect of a change in reporting entity is shown separately in the income statement in the year of the change.
12. EPS disclosure is required only for income from continuing operations.
13. Comprehensive income reports an expanded version of income to include four types of gains and losses not included in traditional income statements.
14. Comprehensive income is the total change in shareholders’ equity that occurred during the period.
15. The direct and indirect methods of reporting the statement of cash flows present different information for investing and financing activities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The United States in the Global Economy Chapter 05 Multiple Choice Questions 1. The physical export of motorcycles from the United States to Mexico best illustrates a: A. trade flow. B. resource flow. C. financial flow. D. technology flow. 2. The physical import of DVD players to the United States from Japan best illustrates a: A. resource flow. B. financial flow. C. trade flow. D. technology flow. 3. The spending by Americans while traveling in Europe best illustrates a: A. trade flow. B. labor flow. C. financial flow. D. technology flow. 4.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A 20-year, 8% semiannual coupon bond with a par value of $1,000 may be called in 5 years at a call price of $1,040. The bond sells for $1,100. (Assume that the bond has just been issued.)
a. What is the bond s yield to maturity?
b. What is the bond s current yield?
c. What is the bond s capital gain or loss yield?
d. What is the bond s yield to call?
NOW ANSWER THE FOLLOWING NEW QUESTIONS:
e. How would the price of the bond be affected by changing the going market interest rate? (Hint: Conduct a sensitivity analysis of price to changes in the going market interest rate for the bond. Assume that the bond will be called if and only if the going rate of interest falls below the coupon rate. That is an oversimplification, but assume it anyway for purposes of this problem.)
f. Now assume the date is 10/25/2010. Assume further that a 12%, 10-year bond was issued on 7/1/2010, pays interest semiannually (January 1 and July 1), and sells for $1,100. Use your spreadsheet to find the bond s yield.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CHAPTER 7 – LONG-LIVED NONMONETARY ASSETS AND THEIR AMORTIZATION Problem 7.1-7.5
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need some help with this Accounting Test.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Quiz Questions for Chapter 9 1. A truck was purchased for $25,000. It has a six-year life and a $4,000 salvage value. Under the straight-line method, what is the assets carrying value (book value) after 2 1/2 years? a. $8,750. b. $12,250. c. $14,583. d. $16,250. 2. On January 1, 20X1, Superior Landscaping Company paid $17,000 to buy a stump remover. If the equipment is used to remove 2,500 stumps per year, it would have an estimated useful life of 10 years and a salvage value of $4,500.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I have chapter 17,18 and 20. I just need help improving my homework grade in those chapters and its on cengage. The $15 is for all three not per chapter.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.
The following Classified Balance Sheet has numerous errors. Indicate the errors in this Balance Sheet by preparing a corrected Classified Balance Sheet with all required information.
Additional Information:
Land has an original cost of $3,000 and inventory cost the company $5,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS QUESTION 1 A friend who likes to invest in the stock market made the following statements to you recently. “I don’t invest in entities that operate in service or knowledge – based industries because their financial statements don’t really reflect the true value of the entity. This makes it very difficult for me to make informed decisions about whether to invest or not.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
**********PLEASE READ ALL THE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY!
NO PLAGIARISM. I WILL USE A PLAGIARISM CHECK SOFTWARE TO CHECK THE COMPLETED WORK
This is a 12-a page (or more) RESEARCH (NOT ESSAY) paper and MUST BE formatted according to APA style .
1.) Research Paper- INSTRCUTIONS
The objectives/purpose of the research paper project are to enable you to do a comprehensive financial analysis of a publicly traded corporation; and provide you with substantial information for you to make recommendations regarding investing in this corporation.
Your financial analysis report will be driven by a rigorous ratio analysis, and aggressively supplemented with your written analysis, interpretation, and evaluation of the data.
Your research should be strategically driven by two probing questions:
-Would you invest your financial capital in the selected firm as a shareholder?
-Would you invest your human and intellectual capital in the firm as an employee?
Steps in preparation of financial analysis report:
1.) Select a publicly held company
2.) Select a benchmark firm to compare your company against. The benchmark firm is typically the largest competitor.
3.) Obtain the firm s balance sheet, income statement, and statement of cash flows for
the past 5 years. Download or read the firm s annual report.
4.) Go to: http://www.sec.gov/edgar/searchedgar/webusers.htm
Research EDGAR s database for additional SEC report filings: 8-k, 10-Q.
4.) The following table is the type of Excel or Word table that should be used to gather and report your ratio and financial performance data. Note the 5 financial diagnostic categories that should be used in your analysis.
|
Financial diagnostic categories
|
Chosen company vs.
|
Benchmark competitor
|
|
|
|
|
|
1.) Liquidity of short-term assets
|
-Current ratio
-Cash ratio
-Quick ratio
|
-Current ratio
-Cash ratio
-Quick ratio
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.) Long-term debt-paying ability
|
-Debt ratio
-Debt-equity ratio
-Times interest earned
|
-Debt ratio
-Debt-equity ratio
-Times interest earned
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.) Profitability
|
|
|
|
|
-Net income/sales (profit margin)
-Net income/assets (ROA)
-Net income/shareholder equity (ROE)
|
-Net income/sales (profit margin)
-Net income/assets (ROA)
-Net income/shareholder equity (ROE)
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.) Asset utilization/ management efficiency
|
-Total asset turnover
-Inventory turnover measures
-Accounts receivable turnover
|
-Total asset turnover
-Inventory turnover measures
-Accounts receivable turnover
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.) Market measures
|
-Price/earnings ratio
-Earnings per common share
-Dividend payout
|
-Price/earnings ratio
-Earnings per common share
-Dividend payout
|
|
|
|
|
Use 2-3 ratios per diagnostic category. Place your ratio calculations in the table for your selected companies primary company and benchmark competitor. Using 5 diagnostic categories, and 3 ratios to assess each category, results in 15 ratio measures per company that will be compared side by side.
6.) To validate your research, 5 years of data should be analyzed.
7.) The financial analysis report must be written properly. They must include a title page, a table of contents, and a reference page. For both midterm and final report, information sources from the web, etc. must be cited properly, using APA style.
This means that every table that you cut and pasted or typed from the web must have a source at the bottom of the table AND that citing must also be included in a reference page at the end of the report.
Your project should include:
a. An overview of the corporation.
i. Provide general information regarding the type of business, products and/or services, location of headquarters, name of CEO, number of employees, and countries of operation, etc.
b. The latest financial statements
i. Get the income statement, balance sheet, cash flow statement, and the statement of owners equity for the past fiscal year. Create Turnitin-friendly versions of the financial statements; do not just cut and paste them in your report. Do not forget to cite the source under each statement.
ii. If you cannot cut and paste them, you may have to type in the information in a table in your report.
c. A summary of each financial statement
i. Take each statement and state the key parts in words. Tell a story from each of the financial statements. For example, for the income statement, the story starts like, Total Revenues in 2010 were $10 billion, while Cost of Goods Sold were $8 billion, leaving a gross profit margin of $2 billion, or 20 percent of total revenues .After taking out interest and taxes from EBIT, the net income was $0.5 billion, or 5 percent of total revenues.
d. Ratio calculation (include 5 major types of ratios. Refer to chapter 3, Analysis of Financial Statements)
i. Organization of this section is based on the FIVE types of ratios listed in the text book. Calculate the ratios from the financial statements in part c above using Excel or your calculator and present them in a table.
ii. Find industry financial ratios online (eg. Yahoo.com) and compare your corporation s ratios to these industry ratios.
iii. Present your results following the five types of ratios discussed in part d.
iv. A table with both corporation and industry ratios is required;
v.
e. Discussion of key statistics provided by sources like Yahoo finance.
i. There are many different other statistics available for your corporation. These include market value, beta, and diluted EPS, etc. Discuss some of the key statistics that you think can assist you to determine if this corporation is a good buy or sell.
f. For you to decide if a corporation s stock is a good buy or sell, you must forecast several key variables, including the stock price.
i. Use historical prices (5 years of monthly data recommended) and forecast the stock price for the next year. Use regression analysis, and/or moving average, etc. to create your forecast.
ii. Create a graph from the historical data and show your forecast on the same graph. You can add a trend line to the graph to help you with a forecast. Include the graph in your report.
iii. You need to say specifically what the forecasted value of the stock price is.
iv. You must address the question, Is this forecast reasonable Must you amend your analysis to get a more reasonable forecast
g. Other information pertinent to the corporation that could affect its future performance and stock price.
i. This could include dividend policy, capital structure, bond ratings, expert opinions on TV, new projects, litigation, regulation, etc. Search for information on the web regarding this corporation. Look at company complaint blogs, etc.
h. Recommendation regarding the future of this corporation.
i. Is the stock a good buy, average buy, or a poor buy (implying a good sell)
ii. Include a justification of your recommendation based on your analysis and research.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Complete the table by answering the following questions. Cite work (ea. question) include references at bottom of worksheet (according to APA style). Post assignment as attachment. Chapter 14 included (If needed).
- What criterion must be met for true comparability?
- What elements of consistency should be considered?
- What is the manager s responsibility in comparing data?
- What are the four common uses of comparative data?
- What is meant by standardized data?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
attachment below
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Required:
- Use the following information to complete Phillip and Claire Dunphy’s 2012 federal income tax return. If information is missing, use reasonable assumptions to fill in the gaps. Ignore the alternative minimum tax for this problem.
- Any required forms, schedules, and instructions can be found at the IRS Web site (www.irs.gov). The instructions can be helpful in completing the forms. The following forms are required:
o 1040
o Schedule C
o Schedule D
o Form 4562
o Form 4797
o Form 8949
o Schedule SE
AMT (alternative minimum tax) is NOT part of this Project; You do NOT have to calculate AMT!!!
Also, you do NOT need to depreciate the Artwork
Facts:
- Phillip and Claire are married and file a joint return. Phillip is self-employed as a real estate agent, and Claire is a flight attendant. Phillip and Claire have three dependent children. All three children live at home with Phillip and Claire for the entire year.
The Dunphys provide you with the following additional information:
- The Dunphys do not want to contribute to the presidential election campaign.
- The Dunphys live at 3701 Brighton Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90018.
- Phillip’s birthday is 11/5/1965 and his Social Security number is 321-44-5766.
- Claire’s birthday is 5/12/1968 and her Social Security number is 567-77-1258.
- Haley’s birthday is 11/6/1999 and his Social Security number is 621-18-7592.
- Alex’s birthday is 2/1/2001 and her Social Security number is 621-92-8751.
- Luke’s birthday is 12/12/2005 and his Social Security number is 621-99-9926.
- The Dunphys do not have any foreign bank accounts or trusts.
Claire is a flight attendant for Western American Airlines (WAA), where she earned $57,000 in salary. WAA withheld federal income tax of $6,375, state income tax of $1,800, Los Angeles city income tax of $675, Social Security tax of $3,600, and Medicare tax of $825. Phillip and Claire received $300 of interest from State Savings Bank on a joint account. They also received a qualified dividend of $395 on jointly owned stock in Xila Corporation. Phillip’s real estate business is named Phillip Dunphy Realty. His business is located at 645 Grove Street, Los Angeles, CA 90018, and his employer identification number is 93-3488888. Phillip’s gross receipts during the year were $730,000. Phillip uses the cash method of accounting for his business. Phillip’s business expenses are as follows:
|
Advertising
|
$ 5,000
|
|
Professional dues
|
800
|
|
Professional journals
|
200
|
|
Employee wages
|
48,000
|
|
Insurance on office contents
|
1,120
|
|
Accounting services
|
2,100
|
|
Miscellaneous office expense
|
500
|
|
Utilities and telephone
|
3,360
|
|
Payroll taxes
|
3,600
|
|
Depreciation
|
To be calculated
|
On March 20, Phillip moved his business out of the old offices at 1103 Allium Lane into a newly constructed and equipped office on Grove Street. Phillip sold the old office building and all its furnishings. Phillip’s expenditures for the new office building are as follows:
|
Date Acquired
|
Asset
|
Cost
|
|
3/20
|
Land
|
$300,000
|
|
3/20
|
Office building
|
2,500,000
|
|
3/20
|
Furniture
|
200,000
|
|
4/1
|
Computer system
|
350,000
|
|
6/1
|
Artwork
|
150,000
|
Phillip computes his cost recovery allowance using MACRS. He would like to use the 179 immediate expensing, but he has elected to not claim any bonus depreciation. Phillip has never claimed 179 or bonus depreciation before. The assets Phillip sold on March 20 are as follows:
|
Date Acquired
|
Asset
|
Sales Price
|
Original Cost
|
Accumulated Depreciation as of Beginning of the Year
|
|
5/1/05
|
Office building
|
$940,000
|
$900,000
|
$129,825
|
|
5/1/05
|
Land
|
200,000
|
100,000
|
0
|
|
7/1/05
|
Furniture
|
50,000
|
239,000
|
206,998
|
|
8/13/07
|
Furniture
|
10,000
|
324,000
|
222,782
|
|
4/12/08
|
Office equipment
|
100,000
|
120,000
|
67,524
|
|
5/13/10
|
Computers
|
$ 30,000
|
50,000
|
10,000
|
Phillip has never sold any assets relating to his business before this transaction.
- The Dunphys sold 60 shares of Fizbo Corporation common stock on September 3, for $65 a share (minus a $50 total commission). The Dunphys purchased the stock on November 8, 2010, for $90 a share. They also sold a painting for $13,000 on March 1. Claire purchased the painting for $20,050 on September 1, 2004, as an investment.
- The Dunphys filed their 2011 federal, state, and local returns on April 14, 2012. They paid the following additional 2011 taxes with their returns: federal income taxes of $630, state income taxes of $250, and city income taxes of $75.
- The Dunphys made timely estimated federal income tax payments of $16,000 each quarter during 2012. They also made estimated state income tax payments of $1,000 each quarter and estimated city income tax payments of $300 each quarter. The Dunphys made all fourth-quarter payments on December 31, 2012. They would like to receive a refund for any overpayments.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Page 1 Acct Information Systems ACCT326 – Fall 2013 -7380 M.G. Persh FINAL EXAM You have 3 hours to complete this exam. It is “open book, open notes”, but every student must complete the exam independently. There are 25 questions on the exam. Please record your answers on a separate sheet(s) and submit/upload the sheet(s) into WebTycho (FinalExam tab). Section 1: Multiple Choice 1. When the AIS provides information in a timely and accurate manner, it stands as an example of A) improved decision making. B) improving the quality and reducing the costs of products or services.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive Problem More Co. is a merchandising business. The account balances for More Co. as of November 30, 2012 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows: 110 Cash $ 13,920 112 Accounts Receivable 34,220 115 Merchandise Inventory 133,900 116 Prepaid Insurance 3,750 117 Store Supplies 2,550 123 Store Equipment 114,300 124 Accumulated Depreciation-Store Equipment 12,600 210 Accounts Payable 21,450 211 Salaries Payable 0 218 Interest Payable 0 220 Note Payable (Due 2017) 10,000 310 P. Williams, Capital (January 1, 2012) 103,280 311 P. Williams, Drawing 10,000 312 Income Summary 0 410 Sales 715,800 411 Sales Returns and Allowances 20,600 412 Sales Discounts 13,200 510 Cost of Merchandise Sold 360,500 520 Sales Salaries Expense 74,400 521 Advertising Expense 18,000 522 Depreciation Expense 0 523 Store Supplies Expense 0 529 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 2,800 530 Office Salaries Expense 40,500 531 Rent Expense 18,600 532 Insurance Expense 0 539 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 1,650 550 Interest Expense 240 More Co. uses the perpetual inventory system and the last-in, first-out costing method. Transportation-in and purchase discounts should be added to the Inventory Control Sheet, but since this will complicate the computation of the Last-in, first-out costing method, please ignore this step in the process. More Co. sells four types of television entertainment units. The sales price of each are: TV A: $3,500 TV B: $5,250 TV C: $6,125 PS D: $9,000 During December, the last month of the accounting year, the following transactions were completed: Dec. 1. Issued check number 2632 for the December rent, $1,600. 3. Purchased four TV C units on account from Prince Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $14,800. 4. Issued check number 2633 to pay the transportation changes on purchase of December 3, $400. (NOTE: Do not include shipping and purchase discounts to the Inventory Control sheet for this project.) 6. Sold four TV A and 4 TV B on account to Albert Co., invoice 891, terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. 7. Received $7,500 cash from Marie Co. on account, no discount. 10. Sold two project systems for cash. 11. Purchased store supplies on account from Matt Co., terms 1/10, n/30, $620. 13. Issued check number 2634 for merchandise purchased on December 3, less discount. 14. Issued credit memo for one TV A unit returned on sale of December 6. 15. Issued check number 2635 for advertising expense for last half of December, $1,500. 16. Received cash from sale of December 6, less return of December 14 and discount. 19. Issued check number 2636 for two TV C units, $7,600. 19. Issued check number 2637 for $6,100 to Joseph Co. on account. 20. Sold three TV C units on account to Cameron Co., invoice number 892, terms 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. 20. For the convenience of the customer, issued check number 2638 for shipping charges on sale of December 20, $600. 21. Received $11,750 cash from McKenzie Co. on account, no discount. 21. Purchased three projector systems on account from Elisha Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB destination, $15,600. 24. Issued a debit memo for return of $5,200 because of a damaged projection system purchased on December 21, receiving credit from the seller. 26. Issued check number 2639 for refund of cash on sales made for cash, $1,000. (Customer was going to return goods until partial refund was arranged.) 27. Issued check number 2640 for sales salaries of $1,750 and office salaries of $950. 28. Purchased store equipment on account from Matt Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB destination, $800. 29. Issued check number 2641 for store supplies, $550. 30. Sold four TV C units on account to Randall Co., invoice number 893, terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. 30. Received cash from sale of December 20, less discount, plus transportation paid on December 20. 30. Issued check number 2642 for purchase of December 21, less return of December 24 and discount. 30. Issued a debit memo for $200 of the purchase returned from December 28. Instructions: 1. Enter the balances of each of the accounts in the appropriate balance column of a four-column account (General Ledger). Write Balance in the item section, and place a check mark ( ) in the Post Reference column. 2. Journalize the transactions in a sales journal, purchases journal, cash receipts journal, cash payments journal, or general journal as illustrated in chapter 7. Also post to the Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary ledgers. 3. Total each column on the special journals and prove the journal. 4. Post the totals of the account columns and individually post the other columns as well as the general journal. 5. Prepare the Schedule of Accounts Receivable and the Schedule of Accounts Payable (their total amount must equal the amount in their controlling general ledger account). 6. Prepare the unadjusted trial balance on the worksheet. 7. Complete the worksheet for the year ended December 31, 2012, using the following adjustment data: a. Merchandise inventory on December 31 $111,040 b. Insurance expired during the year 1,250 c. Store supplies on hand on December 31 975 d. Depreciation for the current year needs to be calculated. More Co. uses the Straight-line method, the store equipment has a useful life of 10 years with no salvage value. (NOTE: the purchase and return will not be included as the dates of the transactions were after the 15th of the month). e. Accrued salaries on December 31: Sales salaries $350 Office salaries 180 530 f. The note payable terms are at 8%, payment is not being made until Jan. 3, 2013. Interest must be recognized for one month (round answer to the nearest dollar amount). 8. Prepare a multiple-step income statement, a statement of owner s equity, and a classified balance sheet in good form. 9. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. 10. Journalize and post the closing entries. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both balance columns opposite the closing entry. 11. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is from the comparative balance sheets of Discovery Tech Corporation at June 30, 2011 AND 2010
(IN THOUSANDS) AT June 30 2011 2010
Current Assets:
Cash $2,750 $2,115
Accounts Receivable 3,000 2,750
Inventory 1,700 1,025
Prepaid Insurance 270 320
Total Current Assets $7,720 $6,210
Current Liabilitieis
Accounts payable $1,800 $1,750
Salaries Payable $3,750 $3,150
Total Current Liabilities $5,550 $4,900
Net income for the year ended Jan 30, 2011, was $425,000. Depreciation expense of $105,000 was included in the operating expenses for the year.
Requirement
Use the indirect method to prepare the cash from operations section of the statement of cash flows for Discovery Tech Corportation for the year ended June 30, 2011
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is from the financial statements of Abby’s International Pasta Corporation
Requirements
1. Calcuate the gross profit ratio for the last two years shown
2. Calcuate the inventory turnover ratio for the last two years shown
3. What information do these comparisons provide?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Campbell Company is considering adding a robotic paint sprayer to its production line. The sprayer’s base price is $960,000, and it would cost another $23,000 to install it. The machine falls into the MACRS 3-year class (the applicable MACRS depreciation rates are 33.33%, 44.45%, 14.81%, and 7.41%), and it would be sold after 3 years for $635,000. The machine would require an increase in net working capital (inventory) of $18,000. The sprayer would not change revenues, b
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Note: Unlike some discussion memos, this example did not require any computations of amounts. You should direct your memo to the appropriate parties and not just copy the headings below and be sure to address the specific issues that the discussion memo asks you to address. Also, this example references authoritative guidance in FASB’s Accounting Standard’s Codification (ASC) and nonauthoritative guidance outside the codification. You are required to cite any authoritative ASC guidance on point and are not required to cite any nonauthoritative guidance, but can do so if you choose.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need to complete capsim – xm See attachmenets
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carrie A. Morgan, age 45, is single and lives with her dependent mother at 426 Grouse Avenue, Allentown, PA 18105. Her social security number is 111-11-1111.
1. Carrie is a licensed hairstylist and operates her own business. Located at 480 Laurel Street, Allentown, PA 18105, the business is conducted under the name of Carrie’s Coiffures. Carrie’s business activity code is 812112. In addition to 10 workstations (i.e., stylist chairs) and a small reception area, the shop has display and storage areas for the
products Carrie sells (see item 2 below). During the year, Carrie leased nine of the stations to other hairstylists. As is common practice in similar businesses in the area, the other stylists are considered to be self-employed. In fact, the IRS sanctioned the self-employment classification for the stylists in an audit of one of Carrie’s prior tax returns. Each stylist pays Carrie a fixed rent for the use of a workstation, resulting in
$68,000 of rents received during 2012. From her own station, Carrie earned $44,000
(including tips of $12,000) for the styling services she provided to her own clients.
2. Carrie’s Coiffures is the local distributor for several beauty products (e.g., conditioners,
shampoos) that cannot be purchased anywhere else. Carrie buys these items from the
manufacturers and sells them to regular patrons, walk-in customers, and other
beauticians (including those who lease chairs from her). Carrie’s Coiffures is also
known for the selection and quality of its hairpieces (i.e., wigs, toupees). Through the
shop, Carrie made the following sales during the year:
Hairpieces and wigs $69,000
Beauty products 48,000
3. Although Carrie operates her business on a cash basis, she maintains inventory
accounts for the items she sells as required by law. Relevant information about the
inventories (based on lower of cost or market) is summarized below.
4.
12/31/11 12/31/12
Hairpieces and wigs $10,700 $12,600
Beauty products 11,400 9,900
5. Carrie’s purchases for 2012 were $30,500 of hairpieces and wigs and $26,100 of beauty
products.
6. Carrie’s Coiffures had the following operating expenses for 2012:
Utilities (i.e., gas, electric, telephone) $12,900
Ad valorem property taxes:
On realty (e.g., shop building and land) $4,200
On personalty (e.g., equipment, inventory) 1,800 6,000
Styling supplies (e.g., rinses, dyes, gels, hair spray) 5,700
Fire and casualty insurance 4,100
Liability insurance 4,000
Accounting services 3,800
Janitorial services 2,400
Sewer service, garbage pickup $ 2,300
Water 2,200
Occupation licenses (city and state) 1,500
Waiting room supplies (e.g., magazines, coffee) 1,300
7. As Carrie prefers to avoid employer-employee arrangements and the payroll tax
complexities, she retains outside agencies to handle her accounting and janitorial
needs.
8. In early 2012, Carrie decided to renovate the waiting room. On May 10, she spent
$10,400 for new chairs, a sofa, various lamps, coffee bar, and other furnishings. Carrie
follows a policy of claiming as much depreciation as soon as possible. The old
furnishings were thrown away or given to customers. For tax purposes, the old
furnishings had a zero basis.
9. Carrie’s Coiffures is located in a building Carrie had constructed at 480 Laurel Street in
March 1998. The shop was built for a cost of $300,000 on a lot she purchased earlier
for $35,000. Except for a down payment from savings, the cost was financed by a 20-
year mortgage. For tax purposes, MACRS depreciation is claimed on the building.
During 2012, the following expenses were attributable to the property:
Repainting (both exterior and interior) $8,000
Repairs (plumbing and electrical) 1,900
10. In May (after her accident settlement discussed in item 11 below), Carrie paid the
balance due on the business mortgage. To do so, she incurred a prepayment penalty of
$4,400. Prior to paying it off, she paid regular interest on the mortgage in 2012 of
$6,000.
11. In February 2012, Carrie’s Coiffures was cited by the city for improper disposal of
certain waste chemicals. Carrie questioned the propriety of the proposed fine of $2,000
and retained an attorney to represent her at the hearing. By pleading nolo contendere,
the attorney was able to get the fine reduced to $500. Carrie paid both the fine of $500
and the attorney’s fee of $600 in 2012.
12. In August 2012, Carrie saw an ad in a trade publication that attracted her attention.
The owner of a well-respected styling salon in Reading (PA) had died, and his estate
was offering the business for sale. Carrie traveled to Reading, spent several days
looking over the business (including books and financial results), and met with the
executor. Carried treated the executor to dinner and a music concert. Immediately after
the concert, Carrie made an offer for the business, but the executor rejected it. Her
expenses in connection with this trip were as follows:
Car rental $140
Entertainment of executor 280
Motel (August 6-7) 220
Meals 110
13. In March 2011, Joan Myers, one of Carrie’s best stylists, left town to get away from a
troublesome ex-husband. In order to help Joan establish a business elsewhere, Carrie
loaned her $7,000. Joan signed a note dated March 3, 2011, that was payable in one
year with 6% interest. On December 30, 2012, Carrie learned that Joan had declared
bankruptcy and was awaiting trial on felony theft charges. Carrie never received
payment from Joan, nor did she receive any interest on the loan.
14. At Christmas, Carrie gave each of her 35 best customers a large bottle of body lotion.
Each bottle had a wholesale cost to Carrie of $12 but a retail price of $24. Carrie also
spent $3 to have each bottle gift wrapped. (Note: The lotion was special order
merchandise and was not part of the business’s inventory or purchases for the year see item 2 above.) She also gave each of the nine stylists who leased chairs from her a
basket of fruit that cost $30 (not including $5 delivery cost).
15. In March 2012, the Pennsylvania Department of Revenue audited Carrie’s state income
tax returns for 2009 and 2010. She was assessed additional state income tax of $340
for these years. Surprisingly, no interest was included in the assessment. Carrie paid
the back taxes promptly.
16. On a morning walk in November 2011, Carrie was injured when she was sideswiped by
a delivery truck. Carrie was hospitalized for several days, and the driver of the truck
was ticketed and charged with DUI. The owner of the truck, a national parcel delivery
service, was concerned that further adverse publicity might result if the matter went to
court. Consequently, the owner offered Carrie a settlement if she would sign a release.
Under the settlement, her medical expenses were paid and she would receive a cash
award of $200,000. The award specified that the entire amount was for physical pain
and suffering. Because she suffered no permanent injury as a result of the mishap, she
signed the release in April 2012 and received the $200,000 settlement.
17. In January 2012, Carrie was contacted by the state of Pennsylvania regarding a tract of
land she owned in York County. The state intended to convert the property into a
district headquarters, barracks, and training center for its highway patrol. Carrie had
inherited the property from her father when he died on August 11, 2011. The property
had a value of $140,000 on that date and had been purchased by her father on March
3, 1980, for $30,000. On July 25, 2012, after considerable negotiation and after the
state threatened to initiate condemnation proceedings, she sold the tract to the state
for $158,000. Since Carrie is not comfortable with real estate investments, she does not
plan to reinvest any of the proceeds received in another piece of realty.
18. When her father died in 2011, Carrie did not know that he had an insurance policy on
his life (maturity value of $50,000) in which she was named as the beneficiary. When
her mother told her about the policy in July 2012, Carrie filed a claim with the carrier,
Falcon Life Insurance Company. In August 2012, she received a check from Falcon for
$51,500 (including $1,500 interest).
19. Upon the advice of a client who is a respected broker, Carrie purchased 1,000 shares of
common stock in Grosbeak Exploration for $40,000 on March 4, 2012. In the months
following her purchase, the share value of Grosbeak plummeted. Disgusted with the
unexpected erosion in the value of her investment, Carrie sold the stock for $28,000 on
December 23, 2012.
20. While on her way to work in 2011, Carrie was rear-ended by a hit-and-run driver. The
damage to her Lexus was covered by her insurance company, General Casualty, except
for the $1,000 deductible she was required to pay. In 2012, the insurance company
located the driver who caused the accident and was reimbursed by his insurer.
Consequently, Carrie received a $1,000 refund check from General Casualty in May
2012 to reimburse her for her $1,000 deductible.
21. After her father’s death, Carrie’s mother (Mildred Morgan, Social Security number
12345-6789) moved in with her. Mildred’s persistent back trouble made it difficult for
her to climb the stairs to the second-floor bedrooms in Carrie’s house. So Carrie had an
elevator installed in her personal residence at a cost of $12,000 in January 2012. A
qualified appraiser determined that the elevator increased the value of the personal
residence by $7,000. The appraisal cost $400. The operation of the elevator during
2012 increased Carrie’s electric bill by $300.
22. As a favor to a long-time client who is a drama professor at a local state university,
Carrie spent a weekend as a stylist preparing hairdos for the key actresses in the annual Theater Department fund-raising event. The drama professor supplied all of the
resources that Carrie needed to provide her services. Carrie estimates that she would
have charged $800 for the services she donated to this charitable event.
23. In addition to the items already mentioned, Carrie had the following receipts during
2012:
Interest income
CD at Scranton First National Bank $900
City of Lancaster general purpose bonds 490
Money market account at Allentown State Bank 340 $1,730
Qualified dividends on stock investments
General Motors $470
AT&T common 380 850
Federal income tax refund (for tax year 2011) 791
Pennsylvania state income tax refund (for tax year 2011) 205
24. Expenditures for 2012, not previously noted, are summarized below.
Contribution to pension plan $10,000
Medical
Premiums on medical insurance $4,800
Dental bills 1,400 6,200
Property taxes on personal residence 3,800
Interest on home mortgage 3,200
Professional expenses
Subscriptions to trade journals $ 180
Dues to beautician groups 140 320
25. The $10,000 contribution to the pension plan is to a 401(k) type of plan she
established in 2011. Previously, she had contributed to an H.R. 10 (Keogh) plan but
found that the 401(k) retirement arrangement provides more flexibility and is less
complex. The medical insurance policy covers Carrie and her dependents and was
issued in the name of the business (i.e., Carrie’s Coiffures ). It does not cover dental
work or capital modifications to a residence (see item 16 above).
26. During 2012, Carrie made the following total estimated tax payments with respect to
her 2012 tax returns:
Federal estimated income tax payments $20,800
Pennsylvania estimated income tax payments 2,400
Allentown City estimated income tax payments 800
Requirements
Prepare an income tax return (with appropriate schedules) for Carrie for 2012. In doing this, use the
following guidelines:
1) Make necessary assumptions for information not given in the problem.
2) Carrie has itemized deductions ever since she became a homeowner many years ago.
3) The sales tax option was not chosen in 2011, and Carrie had no major purchases that
qualify for the sales tax deduction in 2012.
4) Carrie has substantiation (e.g., records, receipts) to support the transactions involved.
5) If a refund results, Carrie wants it sent to her.
6) Carrie is preparing her own return (i.e., no preparer is involved).
7) Carrie does not wish to contribute to the Presidential Election Campaign Fund.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
First assignment
- Prepare a perpetual inventory record using FIFO.
- Prepare a perpetual inventory record using LIFO.
- Prepare a perpetual inventory record using average cost
Second assignment
- Estimate the August 31 inventory using the gross profit method.
- Prepare the August income statement through gross profit for Whitewater Co.
- Calculate the Inventory Turnover Ratio for Whitewater for years 2009 and 2010.
- Provide a reason why the Inventory Turnover has changed from the previous year
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Case Study: Database Development Due Week 8 and worth 90 points Read the following articles available in the ACM Digital Library: Dual Assessment of Data Quality in Customer Databases, Journal of Data and Information Quality (JDIQ), Volume 1 Issue 3, December 2009, Adir Even, G. Shankaranarayanan. Process-centered review of object oriented software development methodologies, ACM Computing Surveys (CSUR), Volume 40 Issue 1, February 2008, Raman Ramsin, and Richard F. Paige. Please follow the steps below to access ACM Digital Library: Login to iCampus at https://icampus.strayer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Need attached assignment completed by Saturday. Please show calculation and answer all questions.
Thanks
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
POP’S INCORPORATED MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING AS A STRATEGIC DECISION TOOL Brian Miller Assistant Professor of accounting Cedarville University, Cedarville, Ohio Jon Austin Associate Professor of Marketing Cedarville University, Cedarville, Ohio Kenneth Schappell Finance Group Manager The Procter and Gamble company, Cincinnati, Ohio Background Paulo “Pops” Gigliotti emigrated from Italy and settled in Dayton, Ohio. In Italy, Mr. Gigliotti had earned both a bachelors and masters degree in food chemistry and worked for several food processing companies.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CASE STUDY- ACT5725
Refer to financial statements of Campbell Soup company in Appendix A.
Required:
1. How much cash does Campbell soup collect from customers during year 10 ? (CC3)
2. How much is paid in Cash dividends on common stock during Year 11? (CC3)
3. How much is the total cost of good and services produced and otherwise generated in Year 11? Consider all inventories. (CC3)
4. Explain how Campbell Soup Company can have net income of $401.5 million , but generate $805.2 million in cash from operations in Year 11. Illustrate our explanation by reference to the major reconciling items. (CC5)
5. Note 1 to the financial statements discusses the accounting for disposal of property. Where is the adjustment for any gain or loss reported in the statement of cash flows?(CC3)
6.Compute free cash flows for all years shown.(CC3)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
See attachments of the case 14 and the questions. one page to answer tow questions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PR 16-1B Statement of cash flows and indirect method
The comparative balance sheet of Juras Equipment Co. for December 31, 2013 and 2012, is as follows:
The following additional information was taken from the records of Juras Equipment:
1.
Equipment and land were acquired for cash.
2.
There were no disposals of equipment during the year.
3.
The investments were sold for $129,600 cash.
4.
The common stock was issued for cash.
5.
There was a $228,960 credit to Retained Earnings for net income.
6.
There was a $144,000 debit to Retained Earnings for cash dividends declared.
Instructions
Prepare a statement of cash flows, using the indirect method of presenting cash flows from operating activities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I have five decently long problems that need to be completed by tonight. If you are good with cash flow statements it should not take more than twenty minutes. I would prefer if you would print out my assignment and then scan your finished work to attach as my answer so that I can see your work. WORK MUST BE SHOWN!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This is an easy one for someone who is good with accounting. Please see attached. Need quickly. Thank you
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The deliverable for this assignment is a 7 page paper, font 12, double spaced. This project will detail all information you found or did not find in the budget or the CAFR for the city you have chosen. This includes a cover sheet (1 page) and a reference page (1 page). The objective of this activity is for you to be aware of what is happening in the real world that relates to governmental and not-for-profit accounting and reporting–to make the study of accounting more meaningful, to bridge the gap between theory. It is also intended to provide an opportunity to practice applying what was learned to the real-world.
Body of the order should be 5 pages.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The deliverable for this assignment is a 7 page paper, font 12, double spaced. This project will detail all information you found or did not find in the budget or the CAFR for the city you have chosen. This includes a cover sheet (1 page) and a reference page (1 page). The objective of this activity is for you to be aware of what is happening in the real world that relates to governmental and not-for-profit accounting and reporting–to make the study of accounting more meaningful, to bridge the gap between theory. It is also intended to provide an opportunity to practice applying what was learned to the real-world.
Body of the order should be 5 pages.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The deliverable for this assignment is a 7 page paper, font 12, double spaced. This project will detail all information you found or did not find in the budget or the CAFR for the city you have chosen. This includes a cover sheet (1 page) and a reference page (1 page). The objective of this activity is for you to be aware of what is happening in the real world that relates to governmental and not-for-profit accounting and reporting–to make the study of accounting more meaningful, to bridge the gap between theory. It is also intended to provide an opportunity to practice applying what was learned to the real-world.
Body of the order should be 5 pages.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- Discuss how administrative agencies like the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) or the Commodities Futures Trading Commission (CFTC) take action in order to be effective in preventing high-risk gambles in securities / banking, a foundation of the economy.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
As you have learned, generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) require organizations to prepare both an income statement and a balance sheet. Before the balance sheet can be prepared, the organization’s net income must be determined. This requires the accountant to pull together data from numerous system accounts and other sources of information. In this assignment, you will demonstrate your skill in putting together the necessary account data and preparing an income statement in good form.
Instructions
For this assignment, use the BUS3061 Assignment u02a3 Template (listed under Resources) to prepare an income statement
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please refer to both attachments for work.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.Problem 4-1 Growth and financing [LO4]
|
Philip Morris is excited because sales for his clothing company are expected to double from $650,000 to $1,300,000 next year. Philip notes that net assets (Assets Liabilities) will remain at 50 percent of Sales. His clothing firm will enjoy a 12 percent return on total sales. He will start the year with $250,000 in the bank and is already bragging about the two Mercedes he will buy and the European vacation he will take.
|
|
(a)
|
Compute his likely cash balance or deficit for the end of the year. Start with beginning cash and subtract the asset buildup (equal to 50 percent of the sales increase) and add in profit. (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
(b)
|
Does his optimistic outlook for his cash position appear to be correct?
|
|
|
|
2.Problem 4-3 Growth and financing [LO4]
|
Galehouse Gas Stations, Inc., expects sales to increase from $1,710,000 to $1,910,000 next year. Mr. Galehouse believes that net assets (Assets Liabilities) will represent 45 percent of sales. His firm has a 8 percent return on sales and pays 20 percent of profits out as dividends.
|
|
(a)
|
What effect will this growth have on funds (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
|
|
|
The cash balance will change by $ .
|
|
(b)
|
If the dividend payout is only 15 percent, what effect will this growth have on funds (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
|
|
|
The cash balance will change by $ .
|
3.Problem 4-4 Sales projections [LO2]
|
The Alliance Corp. expects to sell the following number of units of copper cables at the prices indicated, under three different scenarios in the economy. The probability of each outcome is indicated.
|
|
Outcome
|
Probability
|
Units
|
Price
|
|
A
|
.30
|
260
|
$
|
27
|
|
B
|
.50
|
440
|
|
42
|
|
C
|
.20
|
650
|
|
52
|
|
|
What is the expected value of the total sales projection (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
4.Problem 4-6 Sales projections [LO2]
|
Cyber Security Systems had sales of 3,200 units at $60 per unit last year. The marketing manager projects a 15 percent increase in unit volume sales this year with a 40 percent price increase. Returned merchandise will represent 5 percent of total sales.
|
|
What is your net dollar sales projection for this year (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
5.Problem 4-8 Production requirements [LO2]
|
Sales for Western Boot Stores are expected to be 49,000 units for October. The company likes to maintain 25 percent of unit sales for each month in ending inventory (i.e., the end of October). Beginning inventory for October is 13,000 units.
|
|
How many units should Western Boot produce for the coming month?
|
6.Problem 4-11 Cost of goods sold-FIFO [LO2]
|
On December 31 of last year, Wolfson Corporation had in inventory 560 units of its product, which cost $18 per unit to produce. During January, the company produced 960 units at a cost of $21 per unit.
|
|
Assuming that Wolfson Corporation sold 1,020 units in January, what was the cost of goods sold (assume FIFO inventory accounting) (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
7.Problem 4-13 Cost of goods sold-LIFO and FIFO [LO2]
|
At the end of January, Mineral Labs had an inventory of 925 units, which cost $9 per unit to produce. During February the company produced 1,650 units at a cost of $13 per unit.
|
|
(a)
|
If the firm sold 2,350 units in February, what was the cost of goods sold (Assume LIFO inventory accounting.) (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
(b)
|
If the firm sold 2,350 units in February, what was the cost of goods sold? (Assume FIFO inventory accounting.) (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
8.Problem 4-14 Gross profit and ending inventory [LO2]
|
The Bradley Corporation produces a product with the following costs as of July 1, 2011:
|
|
|
|
|
Material
|
$ 4 per unit
|
|
Labor
|
2 per unit
|
|
Overhead
|
2 per unit
|
|
|
Beginning inventory at these costs on July 1 was 3,650 units. From July 1 to December 1, 2011, Bradley produced 13,300 units. These units had a material cost of $2, labor of $4, and overhead of $2 per unit. Bradley uses FIFO inventory accounting.
|
|
(a)
|
Assuming that Bradley sold 14,300 units during the last six months of the year at $13 each, what would gross profit be (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
(b)
|
What is the value of ending inventory (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
9.Problem 4-15 Gross profit and ending inventory [LO2]
|
The Bradley Corporation produces a product with the following costs as of July 1, 2011:
|
|
|
|
|
Material
|
$ 4 per unit
|
|
Labor
|
4 per unit
|
|
Overhead
|
2 per unit
|
|
|
Beginning inventory at these costs on July 1 was 3,750 units. From July 1 to December 1, 2011, Bradley produced 13,500 units. These units had a material cost of $4, labor of $6, and overhead of $3 per unit. Bradley uses LIFO inventory accounting.
|
|
(a)
|
Assuming that Bradley sold 16,000 units during the last six months of the year at $18 each, what would gross profit be (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
(b)
|
What is the value of ending inventory (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
10.Problem 4-19 Schedule of cash receipts [LO2]
|
Watt’s Lighting Stores made the following sales projections for the next six months. All sales are credit sales.
|
|
|
|
March
|
$
|
48,000
|
June
|
$ 52,000
|
|
April
|
|
54,000
|
July
|
60,000
|
|
May
|
|
43,000
|
August
|
62,000
|
|
|
Sales in January and February were $51,000 and $50,000, respectively. Experience has shown that of total sales, 10 percent are uncollectible, 35 percent are collected in the month of sale, 45 percent are collected in the following month, and 10 percent are collected two months after sale.
|
|
(a)
|
Prepare a monthly cash receipts schedule for the firm for March through August. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
(b)
|
Of the sales expected to be made during the six months from March through August, how much will still be uncollected at the end of August? How much of this is expected to be collected later (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
|
Amount
|
|
Uncollected
|
$
|
|
Expected to be collected
|
$
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.Problem 6-2 Expected value [LO6]
|
Sharpe Knife Company expects sales next year to be $1,540,000 if the economy is strong, $820,000 if the economy is steady, and $540,000 if the economy is weak. Mr. Sharpe believes there is a 25 percent probability the economy will be strong, a 60 percent probability of a steady economy, and a 15 percent probability of a weak economy.
|
|
What is the expected level of sales for the next year (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Expected level of sales
|
$
|
2.Problem 6-4 External financing [LO1]
|
Antivirus, Inc., expects its sales next year to be $3,600,000. Inventory and accounts receivable will increase by $590,000 to accommodate this sales level. The company has a steady profit margin of 12 percent with a 30 percent dividend payout.
|
|
How much external financing will the firm have to seek? Assume there is no increase in liabilities other than that which will occur with the external financing. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
3.Problem 6-6 Level versus seasonal production [LO1]
|
Bambino Sporting Goods makes baseball gloves that are very popular in the spring and early summer season. Units sold are anticipated as follows:
|
|
|
March
|
3,200
|
|
April
|
7,200
|
|
May
|
11,400
|
|
June
|
9,400
|
|
|
|
31,200
|
|
|
|
|
If seasonal production is used, it is assumed that inventory will directly match sales for each month and there will be no inventory buildup.
|
|
|
The production manager thinks the above assumption is too optimistic and decides to go with level production to avoid being out of merchandise. He will produce the 31,200 units over four months at a level of 7,800 per month.
|
|
(a)
|
What is the ending inventory at the end of each month (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required.)
|
|
Ending inventory
|
|
March
|
|
|
April
|
|
|
May
|
|
|
June
|
|
|
|
(b)
|
If the inventory costs $17 per unit and will be financed at the bank at a cost of 6 percent, what is the monthly financing cost and the total for the four months? (Use 0.5 percent as the monthly rate.) (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Inventory financing cost
|
|
March
|
$
|
|
April
|
|
|
May
|
|
|
June
|
|
|
|
|
Total financing cost
|
$
|
|
|
|
rev: 01_07_2013
4.Problem 6-8 Short-term versus longer-term borrowing [LO3]
|
Biochemical Corp. requires $530,000 in financing over the next three years. The firm can borrow the funds for three years at 11.60 percent interest per year. The CEO decides to do a forecast and predicts that if she utilizes short-term financing instead, she will pay 8.25 percent interest in the first year, 12.75 percent interest in the second year, and 9.50 percent interest in the third year.
|
|
(a)
|
Determine the total interest cost under each plan. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Interest cost
|
|
Fixed cost financing
|
|
|
Variable short-term financing
|
|
|
|
(b)
|
Which plan is less costly?
|
|
|
|
|
5.Problem 6-9 Short-term versus longer-term borrowing [LO3]
|
Stern Educational TV, Inc., has decided to buy a new computer system with an expected life of three years at a cost of $410,000. The company can borrow $410,000 for three years at 11 percent annual interest or for one year at 9 percent annual interest.
|
|
(a)
|
How much would the firm save in interest over the three-year life of the computer system if the one-year loan is utilized, and the loan is rolled over (reborrowed) each year at the same 9 percent rate? Compare this to the 11 percent three-year loan. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Amount
|
|
9 Percent
|
|
|
11 Percent
|
|
|
Interest saving
|
|
|
|
(b)
|
What if interest rates on the 9 percent loan go up to 14 percent in the second year and 17 percent in the third year? What would be the total interest cost compared to the 11 percent, three-year loan (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Amount
|
|
1st year
|
|
|
2nd year
|
|
|
3rd year
|
|
|
Extra interest cost
|
|
|
6.Problem 6-10 Optimal policy mix [LO5]
|
Assume that Hogan Surgical Instruments Co. has $3,200,000 in assets. If it goes with a low-liquidity plan for the assets, it can earn a return of 15 percent, but with a high-liquidity plan, the return will be 11 percent. If the firm goes with a short-term financing plan, the financing costs on the $3,200,000 will be 7 percent, and with a long-term financing plan, the financing costs on the $3,200,000 will be 9 percent.
|
|
(a)
|
Compute the anticipated return after financing costs with the most aggressive asset-financing mix.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
(b)
|
Compute the anticipated return after financing costs with the most conservative asset-financing mix.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
(c)
|
Compute the anticipated return after financing costs with the two moderate approaches to the asset-financing mix. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Anticipated return
|
|
Low liquidity
|
|
|
High liquidity
|
|
|
7.Problem 6-11 Optimal policy mix [LO5]
|
Assume that Atlas Sporting Goods, Inc., has $990,000 in assets. If it goes with a low-liquidity plan for the assets, it can earn a return of 16 percent, but with a high-liquidity plan the return will be 13 percent. If the firm goes with a short-term financing plan, the financing costs on the $990,000 will be 10 percent, and with a long-term financing plan, the financing costs on the $990,000 will be 12 percent.
|
|
(a)
|
Compute the anticipated return after financing costs with the most aggressive asset-financing mix.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
(b)
|
Compute the anticipated return after financing costs with the most conservative asset-financing mix.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
(c)
|
Compute the anticipated return after financing costs with the two moderate approaches to the asset-financing mix. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Anticipated return
|
|
Low liquidity
|
|
|
High liquidity
|
|
|
|
(d)
|
If the firm used the most aggressive asset-financing mix described in part a and had the anticipated return you computed for part a, what would earnings per share be if the tax rate on the anticipated return was 30 percent and there were 20,000 shares outstanding (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
(e-1)
|
Now assume the most conservative asset-financing mix described in part b will be utilized. The tax rate will be 30 percent. Also assume there will only be 5,000 shares outstanding. What will earnings per share be (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
(e-2)
|
Would it be higher or lower than the earnings per share computed for the most aggressive plan computed in part d?
|
|
|
|
8. Problem 6-12 Matching asset mix and financing plans [LO3]
|
Winfrey Diet Food Corp. has $4,550,000 in assets.
|
|
|
|
|
Temporary current assets
|
$
|
1,100,000
|
|
Permanent current assets
|
|
1,505,000
|
|
Fixed assets
|
|
1,945,000
|
|
|
|
|
Total assets
|
$
|
4,550,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Short-term rates are 7 percent. Long-term rates are 12 percent. Earnings before interest and taxes are $970,000. The tax rate is 20 percent.
|
|
|
If long-term financing is perfectly matched (synchronized) with long-term asset needs, and the same is true of short-term financing, what will earnings after taxes be (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1.Problem 2-1 Income statement [LO1]
|
Frantic Fast Foods had earnings after taxes of $1,200,000 in the year 2009 with 322,000 shares outstanding. On January 1, 2010, the firm issued 30,000 new shares. Because of the proceeds from these new shares and other operating improvements, earnings after taxes increased by 24 percent.
|
|
(a)
|
Compute earnings per share for the year 2009. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
(b)
|
Compute earnings per share for the year 2010. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
2.Problem 2-3 Gross profit [LO1]
|
Hillary Swank Clothiers had sales of $428,000 and cost of goods sold of $260,000.
|
|
(a)
|
What is the gross profit margin (ratio of gross profit to sales) (Round your answer to the nearest whole percentage. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)
|
|
(b)
|
If the average firm in the clothing industry had a gross profit of 35 percent, how is the firm doing?
|
3.Problem 2-4 Operating profit [LO1]
|
A-Rod Fishing Supplies had sales of $2,160,000 and cost of goods sold of $1,550,000. Selling and administrative expenses represented 10 percent of sales. Depreciation was 6 percent of the total assets of $4,450,000.
|
|
What was the firm s operating profit (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
4.Problem 2-6 Income statement [LO1]
|
Given the following information, prepare an income statement for the Dental Drilling Company. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Selling and administrative expense
|
$
|
72,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
|
71,000
|
|
Sales
|
|
536,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
|
45,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
179,000
|
|
Taxes
|
|
53,000
|
|
5.Problem 2-7 Income statement [LO1]
|
Given the following information, prepare an income statement for Jonas Brothers Cough Drops. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
|
|
|
Selling and administrative expense
|
$
|
326,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
|
196,000
|
|
Sales
|
|
1,600,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
|
124,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
551,000
|
|
Taxes
|
|
167,000
|
|
6.Problem 2-11 Depreciation and earnings [LO1]
|
Stein Books, Inc., sold 2,300 finance textbooks for $200 each to High Tuition University in 2010. These books cost $170 to produce. Stein Books spent $12,300 (selling expense) to convince the university to buy its books.
|
|
Depreciation expense for the year was $15,500. In addition, Stein Books borrowed $102,000 on January 1, 2010, on which the company paid 17 percent interest. Both the interest and principal of the loan were paid on December 31, 2010. The publishing firm s tax rate is 30 percent.
|
|
|
|
Prepare an income statement for Stein Books. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
7.Problem 2-15 Development of balance sheet [LO3]
|
Arrange the following items in proper balance sheet presentation (Be sure to list the assets in order of their liquidity. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response):
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
$
|
347,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
46,000
|
|
Cash
|
|
14,000
|
|
Bonds payable
|
|
137,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
51,000
|
|
Plant and equipment original cost
|
|
668,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
38,000
|
|
Allowance for bad debts
|
|
6,000
|
|
Common stock, $1 par, 100,000 shares outstanding
|
|
100,000
|
|
Inventory
|
|
71,000
|
|
Preferred stock, $52 par, 1,000 shares outstanding
|
|
52,000
|
|
Marketable securities
|
|
28,000
|
|
Investments
|
|
24,000
|
|
Notes payable
|
|
39,000
|
|
Capital paid in excess of par (common stock)
|
|
91,000
|
|
8.Problem 2-16 Earnings per share and retained earnings [LO1, 3]
|
Okra Snack Delights, Inc., has an operating profit of $241,000. Interest expense for the year was $35,800; preferred dividends paid were $34,100; and common dividends paid were $39,600. The tax was $61,400. The firm has 23,700 shares of common stock outstanding.
|
|
(a)
|
Calculate the earnings per share and the common dividends per share. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
|
|
|
Earnings per share
|
|
|
Common dividends per share
|
|
|
|
(b)
|
What was the increase in retained earnings for the year (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
|
Increase in retained earnings
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
u01a3 U01a2 u01a1 BUS 3061 – Fundamentals of Accounting Unit 1 Template for all assignments Owner’s Equity 1. Purchased supplies on account 2. Received cash for providing a service 3. Paid expenses in cash 4. Owner invested cash in the business 5. Owner withdraws cash from the business 6. Received cash from a customer who had previously been billed for services provided 7. Paid cash to purchase equipment 8. Paid employee salaries 9. Paid a creditor from whom the business had previously purchased supplies on account 10. The company sells new shares of stock 11.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Model Essay Link to article: Bernstein, N. (2011): “Getting Tough on Immigrants To Turn a Profit.” New York Times, September 29: A1. http://www.nytimes.com/2011/09/29/world/asia/getting-tough-on-immigrants-to-turn-a-profit.html?scp=1&sq=Getting%20Tough%20on%20Immigrants&st=cse [Note: Please do not include the link to the article on which you base the paper you will submit. It is included here only for your reference.] His gaze leaped impatiently from his Rolex to the window and the grey London cityscape below. Nick Buckles, CEO of G4S, has a busy day ahead.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the sample financial statements, calculate the financial ratios and then interpret those results against historical data and industry benchmarks.
Write a 350- 400 word summary of your analysis.
Showfinancial calculations where appropriate.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Case Study: Should I Stay or Should I Go? This assignment has two parts. The scenario to be used for the case study is shown below. Part I Kristin was enjoying her senior year at Stanford University in 2000. A number of the Fortune 500 firms had called her for interviews. Clearly, they recognized her talents and offered several exciting employment packages for her to consider. Kristin’s future was looking bright as she poured over the offers and decided to accept MBI’s offer for a junior executive management position.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
need this revised in order of the table of contents and headed
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This project would need to be completed by 8/13.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Briefly describe theNVP, IRR, accounting rate of return, and payback period for this analysis. Indicate the discount rate you used, and how you arrived at it.
4.1Cashflows
Provide an excel spreadsheet screenshot that shows how you arrive at the net cashflows for each period in your planning horizon and describe its highlights.
4.2NPV Analysis
Provide a screen shot of your Excel NPV Analysis here, and describe its highlights.
4.3Rate of Return
Provide a screen shot of your IRR and Accounting Rate of Return calculations here, and explain the highlights.
4.4Payback Period
Provide a screen shot of your Excel calculation of the payback period for this venture.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Individual Financial Analysis Report
Start on the Individual Financial Analysis Report, due Week 3. Note that this is not a team assignment. Be sure to include proper citations for all references you use.
Go to the CanGo Intranet and pull the financial statements. (Listed Below) Use these to fill out the table found in Doc Sharing labeled Financial Analysis Project. (Will attach as well)
Assumptions:
- At the beginning of 2009, CanGo purchased the online gaming company. This purchase was for cash, paid for through the proceeds of the IPO and results in goodwill.
- 90% of the online book sales comes from JIT, the other 10% through the inventory which CanGo possesses. 100% of the CD/DVD/MP3 come through CanGo inventory. The result is that 80% of ALL sales is JIT and 20% is inventory.
- There is one warehouse for shipping of books and one plant for manufacturing.
- There are three divisions: a CD/DVD/MP3 division, an online gaming division and a books division. All manufacturing takes place in the CD/DVD/MP3 division.
- The IPO took place at the beginning of 2009.
- The CD/DVDs were customized beginning in 2008. The MP3 players were built beginning in the start of 2009.
- The online gaming company was purchased for $30,000,000 and both Elizabeth and Andrew initiated the process.
- The company began in 2006, has a VC infusion in 2007 and 2008. It showed a profit in 2008 and 2009. Its only profitable division is the online book sales division.
- It has some type of international operations, hence the need for a “translation gain or loss” in owner’s equity.
- It has an extraordinary loss from fire and a sale of a segment of its business in 2009.
Balance Sheet
|
ASSETS
|
December 31, 2009
|
|
|
Cash
|
$20,900,000
|
|
|
Marketable Securities
|
$117,000,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$33,000,000
|
|
|
Less: Allowance for Bad Debts
|
$(880,000)
|
|
|
Net Accounts Receivable
|
$32,120,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Inventory
|
|
|
|
Raw Materials
|
$2,000,000
|
|
|
Work-in-process
|
$1,000,000
|
|
|
Finished Goods
|
$5,000,000
|
|
|
Inventory Purchased for Resale
|
$24,000,000
|
|
|
Total Inventory
|
$32,000,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Plant, Property and Equipment
|
$6,700,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated Depreciation
|
$(320,000)
|
|
|
Net Plant, Property and Equipment
|
$6,380,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Prepaid Expenses
|
$200,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Goodwill and Other Purchased Intangibles
|
$28,000,000
|
|
|
Less: Amortization
|
$(700,000)
|
|
|
Net Goodwill and Other Purchased Intangibles
|
$27,300,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total Assets
|
$235,900,000
|
|
|
|
LIABILITIES AND OWNERS’ EQUITY
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
$22,000,000
|
|
|
Accrued Advertising
|
$11,800,000
|
|
|
Other Liabilities and Accrued Expense
|
$1,400,000
|
|
|
Current Portion of Long-Term Debt
|
$2,300,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Long Term Debt
|
$57,400,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Preferred Stock, $100 par value per share,
|
|
|
|
100,000 authorized, 0 shares issued and outstanding
|
$0
|
|
|
|
|
|
Common Stock, $1 par value per share,
|
|
|
|
250,000,000 shares authorized, 13,000,000 shares
|
|
|
|
issued, 12,900,000 outstanding
|
$13,000,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Additional Paid-in-Capital in excess of par value, Common Stock
|
$117,000,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Treasury Stock
|
$(1,000,000)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Retained Earnings (less Cash Dividends Paid)
|
$12,000,000
|
$11,000,000
|
|
|
|
|
Total Liabilities and Owner’s Equity
|
$235,900,000
|
|
Income Statement
|
December 31, 2009
|
December 31, 2008
|
|
Sales Revenues
|
$51,000,000
|
$10,300,000
|
|
Less: Sales Returns
|
$(1,000,000)
|
$(300,000)
|
|
Net Sales Revenues
|
$50,000,000
|
$10,000,000
|
|
Less: Cost of Goods Sold
|
$(9,000,000)
|
$(4,000,000)
|
|
Gross Profit
|
$41,000,000
|
$6,000,000
|
|
|
|
|
Operating Expenses:
|
|
|
|
Advertising and Sales
|
$(26,000,000)
|
$(3,000,000)
|
|
Depreciation
|
$(160,000)
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages
|
$(1,700,000)
|
$(1,400,000)
|
|
Product Development
|
$(4,000,000)
|
$(1,200,000)
|
|
Merger and Acquisition Related Costs, including
|
|
|
|
Amortization of Goodwill and Other Intangibles
|
$(700,000)
|
$0
|
|
Total Operating Expenses
|
$(32,560,000)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Income from Continuing Operations Before Income Taxes
|
$8,440,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Less: Income Taxes at 35%
|
$(2,954,000)
|
|
|
Income from Continuing Operations
|
$5,486,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Discontinued Operations:
|
|
|
|
Income from Operations of Discontinued Division
|
|
|
|
(less applicable income taxes)
|
$350,000
|
|
|
Loss on Disposal of Discontinued Division
|
|
|
|
(less applicable income taxes)
|
$(150,000)
|
|
|
Total Gain from Discontinued Operations
|
$200,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Extraordinary Items:
|
|
|
|
Loss from fire (less applicable income taxes)
|
$(200,000)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Net Income
|
$5,486,000
|
|
|
|
Divisional Revenues
|
|
Books
|
$15,000,000
|
$7,000,000
|
|
Online gaming
|
$25,000,000
|
|
|
Customized MP3/CD/DVD
|
$10,000,000
|
$3,000,000
|
|
Customized MP3/CD/DVD Inventory at end of 2009
|
$8,000,000
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, 2010, the super fast subs company purchased a delivery automobile for $31,000. The estimated useful life of the vehicle is five years, and the estimated salvage value is 1,000. The company expects the automobile to be driven 200,000 miles during its service life. Actual miles driven were:
Year Miles
2010 35,000
2011 40,000
2012 45,000
2013 39,000
2014 41,000
Requirements
1. Calculate the depreciation expense for each year of the five-year-life of the automobile using the following methods. (Round your answers to the nearest dollar.)
a, Straight-line method
b. Double-declining balance method
c. Activity method
2. How does the choice of depreciation methods affect net income in each of the years? How does the choice of depreciation methods affect the balance sheet in each of the years?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Schilig & Gray Industries purchased a new machine at the beginning of 2011 for $9,500. The company expected the machine to last for four years and have a salvage value of $500. The productive life of the machine was estimated to be 180,000 units. Yearly production was as follows: in 2011 it produced 50,000 units; in 2012 it produced 45,000 units; in 2013 it produced 30,000 units, and in 2014 it produced 55,000 units.
Requirements
1. Calculate the depreciation expense for each year of the four-year life of the machine using the following methods. (Round to the nearest dollar.)
a . Straight-line method
b. Double- declining balance method
c. Activity method using units
2. For each method, give the amount of accumulated depreciation that would be shown on the balance sheet at the end of the year.
3. Calculate the book value of the machine at the end of the year for each method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Need help on doing P17-8A and P18-8A assignment in accounting. Need to be in xls or xlsx format.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
3 assignments
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eval summary for task 2
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Which of the following should you consider when deciding whether to use the client s internal auditors?
a. to whom they report
b. education
c. certification (cpa, cia, or cma)
d. all of the above
2. Which of the following is the use of analytical procedures not required?
a. when planning the audit
b. as a substantive test
c. at the end of the audit as a type of reasonableness test
d. all of the above are required
3. The 10 audit standards :
a. no longer are considered GAAS
b. addresses the nature of the audit
c. refers to the quantity of procedures
d. none of the above are correct
4. Which of the following provides the greatest level of assurance?
a. review
b. projection
c. audit
d. compilation
5. Which of the following would prevent you from accepting an audit engagement?
a. unable to contact previous auditor
b. weaknesses in internal control
c. the presence of related party transactions
d. management prevents you from sending confirmations
6. Which of the following would be addressed to underwriters?
a. management representation letter
b. comfort letter
c. attorney s letter
d. none of the above
7. Which of the following is a procedure you would perform while planning an engagement?
a. tests of control
b. set materiality level for accounts receivable
c. research the integrity of management
d. obtain a management representation letter
8. Which of the following would you not include in an engagement letter?
a. fees
b. responsibilities of management and the auditors
c. an overview of the audit procedures
d. all of the above should be included
9. Which of the following would indicate a possible related party transaction?
a. the corporation sells land in exchange for a zero interest note receivable.
b. selling products to an individual at a volume discount
c. issuing stock in exchange for legal services
d. none of the above would alert you to a related party transaction
10. To whom should internal auditors report to?
a. the board of directors
b. the president of the company
c. the controller
d. the independent auditors
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1 (100 marks)
Mona s Pharmacy Inc. (MPI) is a new audit client of Sharp and Ming, CGAs. In your first engagement since being promoted to the position of audit senior, you have been assigned to the audit of MPI as part of a team for the year ended December 31, 2012. During several meetings and discussions with the audit manager, you made the following notes:
1. MPI is owned by Mona Mane and her husband, Michael Mane. The business consists of a small retail pharmacy shop and an import and wholesale operation for various pharmaceutical-related products. Recently the store unit next door has become available for lease. Mona and Michael have decided to expand the business by leasing this unit and combining it with the current location. They plan on using the extra square footage for a small grocery section within the store, which would include basic grocery items (bread, milk, and packaged goods). In the past, the business was financed from their personal resources and loans from family members. In order to finance the expansion they are currently seeking approval of a loan from a bank.
2. The bank has outlined the following preliminary conditions for the loan:
o MPI must provide audited financial statements prepared in accordance with Accounting Standards for Private Enterprises to accompany the loan application. Subsequent to the loan being approved, audited financial statements will be required within 90 days of each year end. In previous years, the financial statements of MPI were reviewed by a CGA practising as a sole practitioner, who did not want to expand her business to include audit engagements.
o The net income before taxes and management bonus must remain above $450,000.
o MPI s inventory will be held as collateral for the loan.
3. MPI sells a range of prescription and non-prescription medical products and a variety of beauty products, souvenir items, and so on. The company also imports other pharmaceutical-related products such as first aid and hygiene products. These products are sold wholesale to other local owner-managed pharmacies and convenience stores. MPI provides all of its wholesale customers payment terms of net 30 days.
4. In order to keep prices lower than its competitors, MPI buys in bulk to benefit from supplier discounts, and encourages retail customers to use cash or debit cards as payment by offering a discount. In the past, this worked well with, on average, 60% of its retail sales and services volumes paid by debit cards or cash. In the current year, this has dropped by 10%, with 50% of its retail sales now being paid by debit cards or cash.
5. You have conducted a preliminary survey to gain some knowledge about both the client company and the industry in which it competes. Recently Salmart and Boblaws have both opened large super center retail outlets in the neighbourhood, both containing pharmaceutical departments. As a result, both MPI and many of MPI s wholesale customers have been experiencing increased competitive price pressure.
6. In the current year, MPI has experienced a 15% reduction in sales. Inventory levels have increased by 20%, and there is concern that various high dollar value pharmaceutical items are approaching their expiry dates. The preliminary financial statements indicated a net income before taxes of $357,000 and a net income after taxes of $285,600. Mona and Michael were each awarded a $100,000 bonus.
7. The firm s policy, in the absence of known adverse factors, is to set audit risk at 3%. Your preliminary assessment of inherent risk for the revenue and collections cycle indicates that there is a 55% likelihood of a material misstatement occurring. Your preliminary assessment of control risk indicates a 10% probability that the control systems in place will not prevent or detect such an error. Your firm uses the planning model (audit risk model) to determine detection risk.
8. As part of this assessment of control risk, you reviewed the accounting systems and internal controls over sales transactions. The controller has provided the following description of the company s system of processing sales:
o Orders are received in writing and by telephone from retail stores that sell the company s products. Based on this information, a clerk prepares a two-part pre-numbered sales order. Part #1 of the order is sent to the warehouse, while part #2 is sent to the billing clerk.
o The warehouse fills the orders and ships the goods to the customers. Any items that are not in stock at the time an order is filled are marked back ordered on part #1 of the order form. The shipping clerk prepares a three-part bill of lading. Copy #1 accompanies the goods, while copy #2 is attached to part #1 of the order form and the two documents are sent to the billing clerk. The third copy of the bill of lading is retained at the warehouse in numerical sequence.
o At the beginning of each month, the billing clerk matches the order/bill of lading copies received from the warehouse with part #2 of the order form, and then prepares a three-part pre-numbered sales invoice. The description of items and quantities shipped are taken from part #2 of the order, while the prices are taken from the company s approved standard price list. The terms of all sales are net 30 days.
o The original invoice is sent to the customer. Invoice copy #2, together with the sales order copies and the copy of the bill of lading, are filed by customer in the billing department. The third copy of the invoice is sent to the bookkeeper to serve as the basis for posting to the individual customer accounts and for preparing the monthly sales journal. Statements are prepared by the bookkeeper and sent to customers only when requested.
9. In your discussions with the controller, he mentioned that the following issues have been occurring and he would like to know if you can provide any recommendations:
Many customers have indicated that they have been overcharged.
Customers have called, indicating they have not yet received goods that they ordered weeks ago.
The time to collect accounts receivable balances has increased from 30 days to 45 days, and several customers continue to order goods even though they have not yet paid for previous orders.
Required
Based on the work completed to date, the following items need to be resolved and tasks (among others) need to be completed.
Task 1: Distinguish between an audit, a review, and a compilation engagement (10 marks)
A friend of Mona and Michael told them that there are several different types of assurance that an auditor can provide. They would like you to explain the differences between an audit, a review, and a compilation engagement. They also would like to know the likely reason(s) that the bank has requested an audit. (10 marks)
Task 2: Materiality and audit risk model (25 marks)
a. Identify three factors specific to MPI that could affect the preliminary assessment of inherent risk. For each factor, indicate whether it is at the account level or the financial statement level. For all factors affecting a specific account, indicate the account and assertion affected. (6 marks)
b. Based on MPI s preliminary financial information for December 31, 2012, calculate a preliminary materiality. Describe the users of the financial statements and explain your reasoning for the quantitative measure selected. (5 marks)
c. Based on the preliminary determination of audit risk and your assessment of the risk of material misstatement, calculate the planned detection risk for the audit of the revenue and collections cycle. Show your work. (2 marks)
d. Prepare a short analysis of each of the following independent what-if situations for the audit manager. Consider each situation independently, varying only the factors stated in each situation and holding all other factors constant. When determining the effect of various changes on the detection risk, calculate the new detection risk and explain whether the detection risk varies directly, inversely, or independently of the factor that has changed.
i. After further study of the client s operations, you decide that the inherent risk of a material error is 45%. What effect would this have on the calculated detection risk? (2 marks)
ii. You decide to test key internal controls and find that the control risk is 25%. What effect would this have on the calculated detection risk? (2 marks)
e. What effect does a decrease in the detection risk you are prepared to take have on the nature of the audit work performed? What effect does it have on the extent of audit work performed? What effect does it have on the timing of audit work performed? (3 marks)
f. Assume you decide to decrease the amount of misstatement considered material by $20,000. What effect will this decrease in the amount considered material have on the detection risk? A change in the amount considered material is not an explicit component of the audit risk model. How then (if at all) does a change in the amount considered material result in a change in the detection risk if there is no change in the audit risk and no change in the client s operations or controls? (5 marks)
Task 3: Audit programs and working papers (12 marks)
a. During the course of the audit, you will be performing tests of control audit procedures as well as substantive procedures. Briefly explain the difference between these two types of procedures and describe the two major categories of substantive procedures. (6 marks)
b. The audit work performed must be documented using appropriate working papers. List six purposes of audit working papers. (6 marks)
Task 4: Internal control assessment sales transactions (17 marks)
a. Identify three control weaknesses based on the controller s description of the company s system of processing sales and the current issues that MPI is experiencing. For each weakness identified, describe the implications of the weakness and provide a control recommendation. Use three columns headed Control weakness, Implication, and Recommendation. (9 marks)
b. Identify two control procedures based on the controller s description of the company s system of processing sales. For each procedure, list the key objective it fulfills for internal control over sales transactions. Use two columns headed Control procedure and Control objective. (4 marks)
c. List two examples of control tests that the auditor could perform to ensure the operating effectiveness of the controls identified in Task 4(b). Explain under what circumstances the auditor would perform the tests of controls. (4 marks)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1 (7 marks)
The following are independent statements concerning certain auditing issues.
Required
Indicate whether you agree or disagree with each statement, and explain your reasoning.
a. Each of the following changes (considered independently and holding other things constant) can be expected to decrease the level of detection risk associated with the auditor s substantive tests: (1 mark)
1. decreasing materiality
2. increasing inherent risk
3. decreasing audit risk
b. An auditor was appointed to the audit of BID Inc. (BID) subsequent to BID s year-end date. BID is in the business of providing IT consulting services and is also a computer equipment reseller. BID only orders inventory from the manufacturer once a customer has placed an order. This allows for BID to have low levels of inventory. As a result of being appointed to the audit subsequent to year end, the auditor was unable to attend the year-end inventory count and could not obtain sufficient and appropriate audit evidence for the inventory balance. In this circumstance the auditor should issue a qualified opinion due to a scope limitation and the audit report should set out the nature of the qualification in the auditor s responsibility paragraphs. (1 mark)
c. When the auditor s preliminary assessment of control risk is that the control risk is low to medium and the auditor plans to place some reliance on the operating effectiveness of the controls to reduce the amount of substantive testing, the sample size required in testing the effectiveness of the controls should be larger since control risk is lower. (1 mark)
d. Auditors perform analytical procedures on the draft financial statements at the planning stage of the audit looking for relationships that do not make sense, as these may indicate problem areas where there may be material misstatements. (1 mark)
e. In audit and review engagements, an assessment of the CGA s independence from the entity is required, whereas in compilation engagements the assessment is not required. (1 mark)
f. The auditor will decide on the nature, extent, and timing of the audit evidence to be obtained and evaluated. An auditor must obtain the best available evidence with the consideration of cost. (1 mark)
g. The auditor, in an audit using a combined approach, will rely on the client s internal controls. It is the auditor s responsibility to develop and implement effective controls. (1 mark)
Question 2 (7 marks)
The audit risk model has become the commonly used basis for audit planning. The following are independentsituations that could have an effect on various components of the audit risk model.
Required
For each situation, identify the element(s) of the audit risk model (that is, audit risk, inherent risk, control risk, and detection risk) that is (are) most likely to be directly affected and the nature of the change in risk levels (increase or decrease) relative to a typical audit. Explain your reasoning.
a. A company provides all customers with the option to return unused goods within two weeks of the purchase. (1 mark)
b. In the current year, the company began performing credit checks for all new customers. The customers credit ratings were used to determine credit limits for the customers. (1 mark)
c. A client s sales team is primarily compensated on a commission basis. Commissions are determined on a percentage-of-sales basis. (1 mark)
d. All cheques greater than a pre-determined limit require the signature of the controller and the chief financial officer. (1 mark)
e. In order to raise capital, in the current year the owner-manager of a business sold 20% of the common shares to a private-equity investor. The owner will remain actively involved in the business. The private-equity investor will not actively partake in the daily management of the business. (1 mark)
f. An auditor tests a control and observes several compliance deviations. (1 mark)
g. In the past two prior-year audits, the auditor has identified several material overstatements in inventory. (1 mark)
Question 3 (12 marks)
Required
For each of the following independentsituations, state whether the CGA has violated generally accepted auditing standards and/or the CGA-Canada Code of Ethical Principles and Rules of Conductor Independence Standardand explain your reasoning.
a. Emily, CGA, owns a material amount of units in a mutual fund that owns stock in Emily s largest audit client. Reading the mutual fund s most recent financial report, Emily learned that the mutual fund significantly increased its holdings in her client. (2 marks)
b. Martha, CGA, has a practice with two departments. One department performs assurance services and the other performs bookkeeping services. One of her publicly accountable audit clients lost its controller and the bookkeeping department provided controllership services for 30 days while the company searched for a new controller. As this was an emergency, it was necessary for Martha s firm to provide the service because it has an intimate knowledge of the client s system. (2 marks)
c. In an effort to expand his business, Mathew, CGA, places an advertisement in the business section of the local newspaper listing specific services he performs and his rate for performing each type of service, some of which are available for a fixed fee and others for an hourly fee, which was also stated in the advertisement. (2 marks)
d. Howard, CGA, discovered, during the audit of his client Ignoble Enterprises Inc., that the company had failed to include a significant amount of income on last year s corporate income tax return. Howard suggested to the controller that he submit an amended return. When the controller refused, Howard resigned from the engagement. Howard later received a letter from the successor auditor asking if Howard was aware of any circumstances that they should be aware of prior to accepting Ignoble as a client. Howard replied by letter and informed the successor auditor that Ignoble s management failed to adjust income tax returns containing significant material errors. (2 marks)
e. Emma, CGA and auditor for Nestco (a public company), recommends that the company improve its internal controls and accepts a 90-day engagement to design and implement new controls, and to train company staff on them. (2 marks)
f. Harry, a CGA student, is currently employed by a CGA firm in public practice. He accepts a 15% discount on purchases from an audit client. Harry believes that he has not violated the Rules of Conduct because he is not yet a CGA member and the discount is at the same percentage that is available to the client s own staff members. (2 marks)
Question 4 (12 marks)
The purpose of substantive testing is to verify the assertions made by management in the financial statements. Consider the following unrelated audit tests, which a CGA performed for the audit of the financial statements of a client with a fiscal year end of December 31, 2011.
Required
For each of the six audit procedures listed below, identify the primarymanagement assertion being tested and the account balance being verified, name the specific audit procedure being used, and state the quality of the audit evidence obtained (high, moderate, or low), explaining why the evidence is the quality level you specify. Organize your answer with these headings:
|
Management assertion and account balance
|
Audit procedure
|
Quality of audit evidence
|
a. Calculated the ratio for sales commission expense to sales as a test of sales commission. (2 marks)
b. Reviewed the accounts receivable balances with the credit manager to discuss collectability. (2 marks)
c. Obtained a letter from the client s lawyer stating that they are not aware of any existing lawsuits filed against your client. (2 marks)
d. Examined a piece of equipment to make sure that the acquisition of the equipment took place and is operating. (2 marks)
e. Recalculated depreciation for each category of property, plant and equipment as at December 31, 2011. (2 marks)
f. Examined and counted Canadian government bond certificates held as investments as of December 31, 2011. (2 marks)
Question 5 (12 marks)
Julia, CGA, is an audit partner with the CGA firm of Cristi & Jones LLP, based in Toronto. Julia and her audit team recently completed the audit of Falcon Limited (Falcon) and planned to issue an unqualified opinion on the financial statements. The issuance of the opinion would occur in two weeks time, after the board of directors approved the financial statements. Prior to the issuance of the Falcon report, Julia and the same audit team began the audit of Eagle Limited (Eagle). During the fiscal year, Eagle sold a significant amount of property to Falcon. Eagle and Falcon are non-related parties and deal at arm s length. During the audit of Falcon, Julia s team verified the selling price of the property by reviewing the purchase and sale agreement and vouching the payment to the cancelled cheque. Subsequently, while performing the Eagle audit work, the auditors discovered that Eagle had dealt with Falcon unfairly by selling them property that was significantly overpriced.
Required
What are the moral/ethical issues, if any? What should Julia do? Use the relevant steps from the nine-step case analysis approach you studied in Topic 2.5. (You can also find the case analysis approach in Analyze a case under the Resources tab.)
Marks will be allocated as follows:
|
Identify problems and issues
|
2 marks
|
|
Generate alternatives
|
2 marks
|
|
Select the decision criteria
|
1 mark
|
|
Analyze and evaluate the alternatives
|
6 marks
|
|
Recommend an action for Julia (explain your reasoning)
|
1 mark
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BA350 Principles of Finance: Ch02 P14 Build A Model (Cumberland Industries)
BA350 Principles of Finance: Ch03 P15 Build A Model (Joshua & White Technologies)
Ch02 P14 Build A Model (Excel Template)a. Cumberland Industries’ most recent sales were $455,000,000; operating costs (excluding depreciation) were equal to 85% of sales; net fixed assets were $67,000,000; depreciation amounted to 10% of net fixed assets; interest expenses were $8,550,000; the state-plus-federal corporate tax rate was 40% and Cumberland paid 25% of its net income out in dividends. Given this information, construct Cumberland’s income statement. Also calculate total dividends and the addition to retained earnings.b. Cumberland Industries’ partial balance sheets are shown below. Cumberland issued $10,000,000 of new common stock in the most recent year. Using this information and the results from part a, fill in the missing values for common stock, retained earnings, total common equity, and total liabilities and equity.c. Construct the statement of cash flows for the most recent year.
Chapter 3. Solution to 3-15 Joshua & White Technologies
Chapter 3. Solution to 3-15
Joshua & White Technologies: December 31 Balance Sheets
(Thousands of Dollars)
Assets 2010 2009
Cash and cash equivalents $21,000 $20,000
Short-term investments 3,759 3,240
Accounts Receivable 52,500 48,000
Inventories 84,000 56,000
Total current assets $161,259 $127,240
Net fixed assets 218,400 200,000
Total assets $379,659 $327,240
Liabilities and equity
Accounts payable $33,600 $32,000
Accruals 12,600 12,000
Notes payable 19,929 6,480
Total current liabilities $66,129 $50,480
Long-term debt 67,662 58,320
Total liabilities $133,791 $108,800
Common stock 183,793 178,440
Retained Earnings 62,075 40,000
Total common equity $245,868 $218,440
Total liabilities and equity $379,659 $327,240
Joshua & White Technologies December 31 Income Statements
(Thousands of Dollars)
2010 2009
Sales $420,000 $400,000
Expenses excluding depr. and amort. 327,600 320,000
EBITDA $92,400 $80,000
Depreciation and Amortization 19,660 18,000
EBIT $72,740 $62,000
Interest Expense 5,740 4,460
EBT $67,000 $57,540
Taxes (40%) 26,800 23,016
Net Income $40,200 $34,524
Common dividends $18,125 $17,262
Addition to retained earnings $22,075 $17,262
Other Data 2010 2009
Year-end Stock Price $90.00 $96.00
# of shares (Thousands) 4,052 4,000
Lease payment (Thousands of Dollars) $20,000 $20,000
Sinking fund payment (Thousands of Dollars) $0 $0
Ratio Analysis 2010 2009 Industry Avg
Liquidity Ratios
Current Ratio 2.58
Quick Ratio 1.53
Asset Management Ratios
Inventory Turnover 7.69
Days Sales Outstanding 47.45
Fixed Assets Turnover 2.04
Total Assets Turnover 1.23
Debt Management Ratios
Debt Ratio 32.1%
Times-interest-earned ratio 15.33
EBITDA coverage ratio 4.18
Profitability Ratios
Profit Margin 8.86%
Basic Earning Power 19.48%
Return on Assets 10.93%
Return on Equity 16.10%
Market Value Ratios
Earnings per share NA
Price-to-earnings ratio 10.65
Cash flow per share NA
Price-to-cash flow ratio 7.11
Book Value per share NA
Market-to-book ratio 1.72
a. Has Joshua & White’s liquidity position improved or worsened? Explain.
b. Has Joshua & White’s ability to manage its assets improved or worsened? Explain.
c. How has Joshua & White’s profitability changed during the last year?
d. Perform an extended Du Pont analysis for Joshua & White for 2008 and 2009.
ROE = PM x TA Turnover x Equity Multiplier
2010
2009
e. Perform a common size analysis. What has happened to the composition
(that is, percentage in each category) of assets and liabilities?
Common Size Balance Sheets
Assets 2010 2009
Cash and cash equivalents
Short-term investments
Accounts Receivable
Inventories
Total current assets
Net fixed assets
Total assets
Liabilities and equity 2010 2009
Accounts payable
Accruals
Notes payable
Total current liabilities
Long-term debt
Total liabilities
Common stock
Retained Earnings
Total common equity
Total liabilities and equity
Common Size Income Statements 2010 2009
Sales
Expenses excluding depr. and amort.
EBITDA
Depreciation and Amortization
EBIT
Interest Expense
EBT
Taxes (40%)
Net Income
f. Perform a percent change analysis. What does this tell you about the change in profitability
and asset utilization?
Percent Change Balance Sheets Base
Assets 2010 2009
Cash and cash equivalents
Short-term investments
Accounts Receivable
Inventories
Total current assets
Net fixed assets
Total assets
Base
Liabilities and equity 2010 2009
Accounts payable
Accruals
Notes payable
Total current liabilities
Long-term debt
Total liabilities
Common stock
Retained Earnings
Total common equity
Total liabilities and equity
Base
Percent Change Income Statements 2010 2009
Sales
Expenses excluding depr. and amort.
EBITDA
Depreciation and Amortization
EBIT
Interest Expense
EBT
Taxes (40%)
Net Income
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1000 to 1500 words.
ready in 12 hours.
Due in singapore time 5pm
Email me privately at michelleyu1022@hotmail.com
8 different source of references
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need help doing a balance sheet and cash flow using direct/indirect method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
i have attached the document to be completed please reply with qualifications
profit loss accounts
overdraft limits
Analyse the business plan in terms of cost; volume; profit and in relation to its location and the demographics of the area.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chicago referencing
1k-1.5k words
Due in 11 hours time.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bell Company, a manufacturer of audio systems, started its production in October 2014. For the preceding 3 years, Bell had been a retailer of audio systems. After a thorough survey of audio system markets, Bell decided to turn its retail store into an audio equipment factory.
Raw materials cost for an audio system will total $75 per unit. Workers on the production lines are on average paid $14 per hour. An audio system usually takes 6 hours to complete. In addition, the rent on the equipment used to assemble audio systems amounts to $5,008 per month. Indirect materials cost $6 per system. A supervisor was hired to oversee production; her monthly salary is $3,455.
Factory janitorial costs are $2,164 monthly. Advertising costs for the audio system will be $9,292 per month. The factory building depreciation expense is $6,384 per year. Property taxes on the factory building will be $8,472 per year.
Assuming that Bell manufactures, on average, 1,598 audio systems per month, enter each cost item on your answer sheet, placing the dollar amount per month under the appropriate headings. Total the dollar amounts in each of the columns.
|
|
Product Costs
|
|
|
|
Cost Item
|
|
Direct Materials
|
|
Direct Labor
|
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
|
Period Costs
|
|
Raw materials (1)
|
|
$
|
|
$
|
|
$
|
|
$
|
|
Wages for workers (2)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Rent on equipment
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Indirect materials (3)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Factory supervisor s salary
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Janitorial costs
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Advertising
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation on factory building (4)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Property taxes on factory building (5)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$
|
|
$
|
|
$
|
|
$
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Handout to review material covering Bonds (10 points) 1. Why would bonds ever sell at a premium? a. Stated Rate = Market Rate b. Stated Rate > Market Rate c. Stated Rate < Market Rate 2. Why would bonds ever sell at a discount? a. Stated Rate = Market Rate b. Stated Rate > Market Rate c. Stated Rate < Market Rate 3. At what amount do bonds sell for if the Stated Rate is equal to the Market Rate? a. Bonds sell at a Discount b. Bonds sell at Face Value c. Bonds sell at a Premium 4. $500,000, 10%, 20 year bonds sell at 102.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need someone to do the below assignments, they are pretty easy i was
able to do majority of them in anywhere between 10-30 minutes not
having a clue about what i was doing. Attached is a PDF of the book. If
you are able to do these and get a good grade i have 2 more projects
that i would like done if you are willing.
There are data files that go with each of these assignments so a good
chunk of it is already setup for you.
Below is a dropbox link to the book in PDF format…
https://www.dropbox.com/s/2eyf12hgbv3jmx5/New%20Perspectives%20on%20Microsoft%20Excel%202010%20Comprehensive.pdf
Here is a dropbox link to the data files…
https://www.dropbox.com/sh/24hij3u0lff4o0h/HA9YTlylIs
Due the night of November 12th… PST
Tutorial 10, Case Problem 2, pgs 609-610
In step 5, cells B5 and B4 are reversed. B5 should be the row input
cell and B4 should be the column input cell.
DUE NOVEMBER 17TH
Tutorial 11, Sessions 11.1, 11.2 and 11.3, pgs 613-674
Page 637: Steps 1-4 on the bottom of the To connect to an Access data
source section may not work correctly if you are in the classroom or
another networked location. If not, use the following steps instead:
1. Click New Data Source in the Choose Data Source dialog box.
2. Verify that the Use the Query Wizard to create/edit
queries check box is checked, and then click the OK button. The Create
New Data Source dialog box opens.
3. In the Create New Data Source dialog box enter the following:
1) Give a Name = Horizons
2) Select a Driver = Microsoft Access Driver (.mdb, .accdb)
3) Click Connect button
4) Click Select button
4. Navigate to the Horizons database on your USB, and then click
the Horizons.accdb file in the Database Name box and click OK.
5. Click OK three more times.
6. Screen should look like Figure 11-19 on page 638.
7. Continue with Step 1 at the bottom of page 638.
DUE NOVEMBER 24TH
Submit To Be Scored:
Appendix C, Bright Light Case Problem
The Bright Light Case Problem is not in your textbook. Complete this
Case problem using the instructions listed below.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
See Part 2 attached below.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
These are the missing numbers to complete budget assignment. The missing numbers were: 20, 21 and 22. See attached below.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Attached file
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to the equity accounts of Bottling Company:
a. Contributed capital on January 1, 2010, consisted of 80,000 issued and outstanding shares of common stock with par value of $1; additional paid-in-capital in excess of par of $480,000; and retained earnings of $560,000.
b. During the first quarter of 2010, Bottling Company issued an additional 5,000 shares of common stock for $7 per share.
C. on july 15, the company declared a 3-for-1 stock split
d. on october 15, the company declared and distributed a 5% stock dividend. The market price of the stock on that date was $8 per share.
e. on November 1, the company declared a dividend of $0.90 per shareto be paid on November 15.
f. Near the end of the year, the company’s CEO decided the comapny should buy 1,000 shares of its own stock. At that time, the stock was trading for $9 per share in the stock market.
g. Net income for 2010 was $75,500
Requirements
show how each of the transactions would affect the accounting equation
prepare the shareholders equity section of the balance sheet at Dec 31, 2010
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Evaluate the following scenarios, assuming both companies use the net credit sales as the basis for estimating bad debts expense:
a. At year end, Bonnie Company has accounts receivable of $112,000. The allowance for uncollectible accounts has a balance prior to adjustments of $(400). In other words, there were fewer specific write-offs than estimated., leaving an excess in the allowance account. Net credit sales for the year were $315,000 and 3% is estimated to be uncollectible.
b. At year end, Clyde Company has acounts receivable of $220,000. The allowance for uncollectible accounts has a balance prior to adjustment of $200. In other words, more specific accounts were written off than estimated, so the allowance was short by $200. Net credit sales for the year were $1,525,000 and 1% is estimated to be uncollectible.
Requirements
for each situation compute the following:
1. the bad debts expense for the year
2. the balance in the allowance for uncollectible accounts account at year end
3. the net realizable value of accounts receivable at year end
4. assuming Bonnie company had an accounts receivable (net) balance of $105,000 at the beginning of the year, what is Bonnie accounts receivable turnover ratio for the year
5. Assuming Clyde Company had an accounts receivable (net) balance of $226,000 at the beginning of the year, what is Clyde’s accounts receivable turnover ratio for the year?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Decide upon an initiative you want to implement that would increase sales over the next five years, (for example, market another product, corporate expansion, and so on).
Usingthe sample finan14cial statements, create pro forma statements of five year projections that are clear, concise, and easy to read. Be sure to double check the calculations in your pro forma statements. Make assumptions that support each line item increase or decrease for your forecasted statements.
Discuss and interpret the financials in relation to the initiative. Make recommendations on potential discretionary financing needs.
Writea 350 – 700 word analysis of the company’s short term and long term financing needs and determine strategies for the company to manage working capital.
Click the Assignment Files tab to submit your assignment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chapter 8 Review Questions 1. If your vendor ships more than you ordered on a purchase order (an over shipment), which of the following actions would not be appropriate? A. You could refuse the extra shipment and send it back to the vendor without recording it in QuickBooks B. You could receive the extra shipment using an inventory adjustment transaction C. You could receive the extra shipment into inventory and keep it (and pay for it) D. You could receive the extra shipment into inventory, and then send back and record a bill credit in QuickBooks 2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Answer any three (3) of the following questions. Submit your answer in an Excel file, with a separate, labelled tab for each question chosen. Format your spreadsheets so that they are easy to follow and calculations are readily apparent. Verbal answers should be concise and clearly stated. Each question counts 30 points.
- XYZ Corporation operates a Marketing Research department. This department compiles information from published sources, and from its own consumer studies, to assist marketing personnel in forecasting product demand and making pricing and promotion decisions. A large marketing research firm has bid $280,000 per year for a three-year contract to perform the same services. For the most recent year, XYZ s controller determined the cost of operating the Marketing Research department to be $346,000:
Salary and fringes:
Senior researcher $68,000
Staff researcher 48,000
Clerical staff 70,000
VP Marketing (1) 62,000
Occupancy (2) 31,000
Subscriptions and travel (3) 67,000
(1) Represents 30% of cost of the VP, who is estimated to spend 30% of his time
on marketing research issues
(2) Occupancy costs are $31/sq ft: depreciation, $14; utilities, $11; maintenance, $6.
Utilities are 70% variable; maintenance is an allocation of fixed costs. There are no plans for alternate use of the space.
(3) Subscriptions and travel costs would be borne by outside research firm.
Required:
a. Determine the cost differential to XYZ of outsourcing versus retaining this function.
b. Discuss the factors that XYZ management should consider in making this decision.
2. Lewiston, Inc. is a manufacturer with a calendar accounting year. A physical inventory is taken on January 1, and any items not in inventory are charged to cost of goods sold.
a. In late March, Lewiston signed a $3,600,000 contract with Hawthorn, Inc. for production and installation of custom machinery at Hawthorn s plant. On December 22, Lewiston shipped Hawthorn the completed machinery, and billed Hawthorn $3,600,000, debiting a receivable and crediting revenue. Lewiston also debited COGS and credited inventory for $2,750,000, the cost of producing the machinery. The machinery is of no use to Hawthorn without installation and calibration by Lewiston employees. This work had not begun as of December 31.
b. This year, Lewiston began selling multi-year extended service contracts on some of its products. Lewiston sold $3,800,000 of service contracts, recording the entire amount as revenue. Of that amount, 80% relates to service to be performed in future years.
c. In August, Lewiston signed a lease on an office building to be used for administrative (not manufacturing) purposes. An advance rent payment of $1,000,000 was made and debited to Prepaid Rent. The controller forgot to make the year-end adjusting entry to record the expiration of $450,000 of this prepayment during 2013.
d. In December, Lewiston shipped goods on consignment to a dealer, booking revenue of $350,000 and cost of goods sold of $235,000. None of these goods had actually been sold to customers by year-end.
e. Two years ago, Lewiston acquired another manufacturing company whose operations have been integrated with Lewiston s. The acquisition price included $1,000,000 for customer lists, which has not been amortized. An appraiser with expertise in this industry estimates that the customer lists have lost 40% of their original value due to competitive changes in the industry. Lewiston s management disregarded this appraisal in preparing the financial statements.
For 2013, Lewiston reported operating income (before interest and taxes) of $20,000,000. Compute the correct amount of operating income/loss, showing any necessary calculations and explaining your reasoning.
3. Hinds Industries, Inc. is a manufacturer of soup and condiment products under its own standard and premium labels. The company has been in business for many years, and is a household name . Their Denver soup plant has a capacity of 120,000 cases/month, but has been operating at a normal volume of 75,000 cases/month Hinds has been approached by Mondo Mart, a large discount retailer, about producing a line of soups under a Mondo Mart house label. Mondo would initially place an order for 10,000 cases/month, with the understanding that the order will be expanded if the product is successful. The initial order would be for a reduced line of four relatively simple, standard-label soups, following Hinds normal recipes.
All of these soups have essentially the same production cost of $27 per case, as follows: ingredients and packaging, $14; direct labor, $2; overhead, $11. The overhead is 65% fixed manufacturing costs, 20% variable manufacturing costs, and 15% allocated general corporate overhead. Hinds would incur $2,000/month additional setup costs if the order is accepted. Packaging would cost ten cents/case less because of a cheaper label used by Mondo.
Hinds normally sells these soups for $34/case. Mondo Mart has offered $23/case, arguing that the steep discount is necessary for them to price the product in conformity with their pricing philosophy and customer expectations.
The regional marketing director is inclined to reject the offer, because it is below cost, and therefore Hinds will lose money on the contract. The ultimate decision is up to the regional director of operations. Discuss the factors that the operations director should consider in making the decision.
The factors to be considered are as follows:
a. The relevant cost of the decision. $27 current cost is not relevant as the company is working under capacity, therefore the relevant cost would be as follows:
Direct Material + Direct Labor + 20% variable manufacturing overhead+monthly setup cost-saving in packaging cost = 14+2+2.2+0.2-.1 = 18.3.
b. The benefit per case which is 23-18.3 = $4.7, therefore the project can be accepted as it will increase the monthly profit by $47000,
c. The impact of price reduction on existing customer as they can also ask for reduced selling price.
d. The loss of market share if the b
c. The loss of market share if the buyer is also selling in the same market in which Hinds is selling its product.
Thanks F.Naz for asnwering my question. But I am sorry, Its not correct.
We need to consider un-used capacity also. Plus, we donont have to consider only per unit costs. I think, We need to calcuate this question in little broader prospect.
I would appreciate if Business Tutor could input her review. As I ma already having another solution of F.Naz as well Business Tutor for similar question. But Solution by Business Tutor was little more appealing to me .Thanks
You can see that the unused capacity has been considered therefore the fixed cost has been considered as irrelevant cost. The answer is 100% correct. thanks.
- Acme Company manufactures a variety of industrial products which are sold throughout the country. Fred Riley has been manager of the Eastern Branch of Acme Company for the past three years. Starting in year 2, he was able to qualify for a $50,000 annual bonus for meeting a target growth rate of 10% of gross sales. Income statements for Eastern for the three year period are given below. Amounts are in the $ thousands.
|
|
|
Year 1
|
|
Year 2
|
|
Year 3
|
|
Gross sales
|
|
20,300
|
|
22,400
|
|
24,800
|
|
Returns and allowances
|
|
150
|
|
320
|
|
480
|
|
Net sales
|
|
20,150
|
|
22,080
|
|
24,320
|
|
COGS
|
|
13,100
|
|
15,020
|
|
17,170
|
|
Gross margin
|
|
7,050
|
|
7,060
|
|
7,150
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Operating expense:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Manager salary/bonus
|
|
100
|
|
150
|
|
150
|
|
Other branch overhead
|
|
840
|
|
870
|
|
910
|
|
Selling expense
|
|
840
|
|
1,020
|
|
1,190
|
|
Advertising
|
|
530
|
|
750
|
|
910
|
|
General and admin
|
|
4,060
|
|
4,480
|
|
4,960
|
|
Total
|
|
6370
|
|
7270
|
|
8120
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Branch Income (loss)
|
|
680
|
|
(210)
|
|
(970)
|
All advertising is local to the branch, and is controlled by the manager. Selling expense is all such expenses other than advertising, such as sales staff compensation and travel. General and administrative expense represents corporate overhead which is allocated at the rate of 20% of gross sales.
Required:
1) Comment on the effectiveness of the bonus plan used by Acme.
2) Because Eastern Branch is showing increasing losses, a senior vice president has suggested that the branch be closed. Comment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 1 (20 Points) 1. Short-term obligations can be reported as long-term liabilities if: A. The firm has a long-term line of credit B. The firm has tentative plans to issue long-term bonds C. The firm intends to and has the ability to refinance as long-term D. The firm has the ability to refinance on a long-term basis 2. When Bonds are retired prior to their maturity date: A. GAAP has been violated B. The issuing company probably will report an ordinary gain or loss C. The issuing company probably will report an extraordinary gain or loss D.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Washington-Pacific invests $2 million to buy a tract of land and plant some young pine trees. The trees can be harvested in 14 years, at which time W-P plans to sell the forest at an expected price of $4 million. What is W-P’s expected rate of return? Round your answer to two decimal places. % You have $45,886.53 in a brokerage account, and you plan to deposit an additional $6,000 at the end of every future year until your account totals $350,000. You expect to earn 8.1% annually on the account. How many years will it take to reach your goal? Round your answer to the nearest whole.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This is a large assignment. I hope that someone is willing to help me if your serious about doing the work. If you have any questions please ask me. Needs to be done by 7:30 tomorrow, Central Time.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please share relevant information (newspaper, magazine, website, etc.) found outside of class related to the objectives covered during class.
Students are required to communicate accounting information. Please write at least 400 words and apply concepts and teachings from the weekly readings. Whenever possible, try to relate the article to real-word applications from your work experiences. Please proofread for grammar and spelling and format your comments consistent with APA guidelines.
Please use
– explanatory and descriptive paragraphs and
– business letters and memoranda
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 2: Discussion ABC Analysis
Review the Decision Case 1 (Harris Systems) located on page 942-943 in you textbook. Answer the four case questions in the Requirements section of the case. In addition, address the following in one to two paragraphs:
- Compare and contrast ABC costing and traditional costing methods, giving examples.
- In the assigned case, which system provides a more accurate picture of the cost incurred to produce the jobs?
- Provide examples of manufacturers in your geographic area and explain which system would be best for them.
Respond to each directive or question in 1 2 paragraphs. Apply current APA standards for writing style to your work.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 2: Discussion CVP Analysis
Review Decision Case 1 (Steve and Linda Hom) starting on page 984 of your text. In your initial post, answer the two case questions:
- Compute the annual breakeven number of meals and sales revenue for the restaurant.
- Compute the number of meals and the amount of sales revenue needed to earn operating income of $75,600 for the year.
In addition, address the following in one to two paragraphs:
- Identify and discuss several qualitative factors that should be considered in the decision process in addition to the quantitative data already computed in the case assignment.
- What are the potential benefits of applying CVP analysis to business decision making?
- Provide an example of another business scenario that could benefit from CVP analysis and explain how you would apply CVP analysis in the decision-making process.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 3: Culturally Diverse Individuals Are Effective Workers
Suppose you work as a human resource (HR) executive at Total Solutions, Inc., a culturally and geographically diverse organization. A recent government study on human statistics indicates that colleagues who share culturally similar backgrounds perform more efficiently and effectively on the job. These study findings, however, appear contrary to the basic research on the value of diverse workforces. John, the vice president of HR has read extensively about this study. He meets with senior management to discuss if the concept can be implemented at Total Solutions, Inc. The senior management reviews the study and decides to execute the process in one office before a policy decision is made.
John decides that the process should be piloted in the new HR office being set up in Atlanta. He receives the board’s permission to apply the concept in the new office. He needs to relocate five employees from the headquarters in New York to the Atlanta office. John obtains the list of employees based in the New York office. The list has a brief profile of the employees. John asks you to help him analyze the profiles and present your recommendations as to who are the best five employees for the Atlanta assignment.
Present your analysis to John in the form of a two- to three page report in Microsoft Word following APA format. Make sure you provide a clear recommendation of which five employees should be selected for the Atlanta assignment and that you apply the basic concepts of diversity in your selection process. Provide rationale for your selection based on your examination of the evidence and references to at least three authoritative sources from the Argosy library or the Internet. Click here to view the list.
Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M1_A3.doc. For example, if your name is John Smith, your document will be named SmithJ_M1_A3. doc
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 3: Excel Problems
At the end of each module, you will apply the module s concepts by completing comprehensive assignments from the textbook.
Complete problems P16A-17B (p. 898), P16A-19B (p. 899), P18-24A (p. 979), P18-26A (p. 980) in your textbook.
Present your analysis of the assigned problems in Excel format. Enter non-numerical responses in the same worksheet using textboxes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Needs to be done in an hour and a half
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. award: 1.00 point 2. award: 1.00 point 3. award: 1.00 point 4. award: 1.00 point 5. award: 1.00 point 6. award: 1.00 point 7. award: 1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
SEC 10-K Project. Week 7 – Powerpoint Slide Presentation In Week 7, you will need to prepare a Powerpoint presentation and post it to the SEC Conference set up for that purpose. You will also need to comment on at least one classmate’s presentation. The Powerpoint slides are worth 24 points, and the comment on a classmate’s presentation will be worth 6 points (30 points, 3% of grade) Your Powerpoint Slide Presentation should have a minimum of 6 slides, and not more than 10 slides. The slides should include the following items. Title slide.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please help!
~Accounting~
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
i need help with this,
please discuss/your thoughts
on the presentations
just 1 or 2 short paragraphs for each.
thanks!
🙂
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
please discuss on these presentations.
just one paragraph for each.
thanks.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
please discuss on these presentations.
just a paragraph for each.
thanks.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
help with this project.
please read instructions carefully.
i will need the same tutor to
complete the remaining parts.
thanks.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
i need someone to discuss on
these ppt presentations.
just 1 or 2 short paragraphs for each ppt.
thanks
🙂
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
please reply to these posts.
do you agree, disagree, why or why not?
1 or 2 short paragraphs for each.
thanks!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
please post your thoughts on these discussions
just 1 short paragraph for each.
thanks!
🙂
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
i need help with this
acct exericse.
please see attached.
thanks!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACG2071 Final Exam Part 1
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify the applicable accounting convention for each of the following business scenarios. More than one convention may apply to each scenario. Please explain your choices for each scenario.
Scenario 1: The Acme Company is undergoing a reorganization to improve its financial structure. As part of this process, the company is considering lowering its expense calculations to improve the bottom line net income.
Scenario 2: Regal Enterprises has purchased $45,000 worth new equipment for use in its manufacturing operations and would like to write off the cost of this equipment in just a couple of years, instead of the usual 10 years for this equipment type. The company’s president fears that the economic conditions in its industry will worsen and cause the company to sell the equipment sooner than expected.
Scenario 3: Bozrah Industries, a small independent retailer, wants to change its accounting system from cash-based to accrual-based, and is concerned about how this change will affect the recording of sales and expenses.
Scenario 4: Randolph, Inc., has experienced major turnover in its accounting department, and the new head of accounting has been going through the current records of transactions. A couple of those transactions appear problematic. The first contains an error of $10,000 that the previous accountant decided was not large enough to adjust before the financial statements were prepared. This error would understate income and make the company look more profitable than it actually is.
Scenario 5: The Morrison Company receives much of its revenue from those customers who buy or rent furniture and appliances on the installment plan. Because the company uses an accrual-based accounting system, revenue is recognized at the point of sale, even though cash comes in on a monthly basis from customers. Lately, the company’s accountant is questioning the use of the accrual basis for recognizing revenue, because several customers have defaulted on their contracts, causing problems in the accounting system.
Scenario 6: Charter Communications has recently found itself at the wrong end of multiple lawsuits for failure to provide necessary services according to their contractual obligations. Senior management does not want to disclose the potential liability of these lawsuits on its financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Do page First pic. (1st picture)
By using 2,3,4,5,6,
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACT300Portfolio Project:KellyConsultingPracticeSet
You are given thefollowinginformation:
Post closing trialbalancefor April 30, 2008
Transactions for themonthofMay2008and adjustingentriesforMay2008
The followingcan be download fromtheModule8 Assignment pageortheCourse Information page
1.Journal page tocopyanduse
2.Ledger pagetocopy and use
3.Portfolio Project ExcelSpreadsheet templatewith accountspre-entered
See Attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attached for description. Original and quality work only. No word minimum.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Here are the additional materials.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This is part of the Business Plan and Budget project that needs to be included. Have a handshake to NEEL.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
i want to be done in 3 hours ,, anyone has free time to do it
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
anyone have free time do this assighment ,, i nees it in 13 hours
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
There is one exam from Session I that I need completed ASAP. There is a lot of writing on it and graphing that needs to be done. Then, there is one exam from Session II which has some writing on it to help with how the problems should be set up. Along with that there is one question on my homework circled as Situation 9 which I started but need to complete. I also have a packet listed as Homework from Session II which has tons of writing on it. If you could put together what I have started and complete it that would be a miracle for me.The only ones that need to be done are the ones which are circled. Lastly, theres my Session III stuff. There’s one test and one homework packet. Everything needs to be completed by Monday 6pm.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
please help!!! and use the format style asked at the bottom!!!
the accounting records of Helen’s Clock Shop reflected following balances as of January 1, 2011.
cash $50,800
beginning inventory 56,000 (200 units @ $280)
common stock 43,000
Retained earnings 63,800
the following five transactions occurred in 2011:
1. first purchase (cash) 120 units @ $300
2. second purchase (cash) 140 units @ $330
3. sales (all cash) 400 units @ $450
4. paid $ 30,000 cash for salaries expense.
5. paid cash for income tax at the rate of 25 percent of income before taxes.
1. fifo cost flow, 2. lifo cost flow, 3. weighted average
2.and to prepare the 2012 income statement, balance sheet and statement of cash flows under FIFO, LIFO, and Weighted average
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cash balance Borrowings Repayments Credit Sales SCHEDULE FOR EXPECTED PAYMENTS FOR PURCHASE OF INVENTORY Inventory purchases Total Cash Collections Total Payments for Inventory Purchases Cash Budget Add: Receipts Total receipts Total Available Cash Less: Disbursements Total disbursements Excess (deficiency of available cash over disbursements) Financing Ending cash balance Collections from customers Sale of plant assets Sale of new common stock Cash sales Operating expenses Selling and administrative expenses Dividends Equipmen
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
#9 #8 #6 & 7 #4 & 5 #3 #1 & 2 Answers Ratio a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 ACCOUNTING 101A SECTION 10915 FALL SEMESTER 2013 1. 3 PTS. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 4 PTS. 10. 6 PTS. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. a. b. c. What are the two “timing differences” which occur when preparing a bank reconciliation? from $15,000 to $18,000. In the other income secion of the income statement was a gain on the sale of land in the amount of $30,000. A company shows a net income for 2012 of $100,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
need all calculations shown and proper journal entries
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Multiple Choice Question 119 Ann Ellis’s regular rate of pay is $15 per hour with one and one-half times her regular rate for any hours which exceed 40 hours per week. She worked 48 hours last week. Therefore, her gross wages were $780. $720. $1,080. $600. Multiple Choice Question 134 The following totals for the month of June were taken from the payroll register of Ford Company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
SECOND (GROUP) PROJECT REQUIRED: This project is worth 20 points. It is an opportunity to put together some of the things you have learned in different parts of this course. Read the case and answer the requirements below. For this project you may work together in groups of up to 3 people. Group members may come from any of professor Milbrath’s or Professor Li’ sections of Acct. 2332. The names, usernames and Peoplesoft numbers of the group members must be written clearly below. If there is only one member in the group you should leave the rows for the second and third member below blank.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
i need help with two quizzes in accounting..
Part 1 is in paper
PART 2 IS ON WILEYPLUS.
thanks!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
2013 2012 1000000 1200000 450000 600000 550000 600000 600000 450000 -50000 150000 2013 2012 380000 376000 -20000 -16000 360000 360000 480000 440000 3400000 3080000 1600000 1440000 780000 680000 Problem 1 Problem 2 Sales Cost of goods sold Gross margin Operating expenses Net income % Sales Comments Accounts receivable Inventory Allowance for doubtful accounts Net accounts receivable Required: Compute (1) accounts receivable turnover for 2013, (2) the inventory turnover for 2013, and (3) the net margin for 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
120000 148000 124000 24000 310000 -46000 306000 0 0 0 0 0 Problem 1 Problem 2 (25 points) Beginning inventory, raw materials Purchases of raw materials Plus: Purchases of raw materials Raw materials available for use Less: Ending raw materials inventory Cost of direct raw materials used Manufacturing overhead Total manufacturing costs Total work in process Cost of goods manufactured Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured Break-even point in units Fixed Costs Break-even point in dollars Break-even point in units * selling price Required: JZ is a musician who is conside
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
100000 -50000 50000 25000 30000 5000 8000 11000 9000 4500 4 4 36000 18000 Problem 1 Problem 2 Direct or Indirect? Salary of manufacturing supervisor Wages of manufacturing worker Telephone costs Rent Material used in production Old Machine Original cost Accumulated depreciation Market value (now) Book value Salvage value (in 5 years) Annual depreciation expense Times number of years New machine Required: GH Company is trying to decide whether to replace a current piece of machinery with a new machine.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
245000 125000 350000 1200000 775000 1500000 Problem 1 Problem 2 Division A Division B Division C (10 points) Required: In the space below, describe the advantages of budgeting. Operating income Operating assets Required: Compute the ROI for each division below to two decimal places.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACCT504 Case Study 3 on Cash Budgeting
The cash budget was covered during Week 4 when we covered TCO D and you read Chapter 7. There is also a practice case study to work on. Your professor will provide the solution to the practice case study at the end of Week 5. This case study should be uploaded by 11:59 p.m. mountain time on Sunday at the end of Week 6 to the Week 6 Assignment Dropbox. You are encouraged to use the Excel template file provided in Doc Sharing.
The LBJ Company has budgeted sales revenues as follows.
April May June
Credit sales $94,000 $89,500 $75,000
Cash sales 48,000 75,000 57,000
Total sales $142,000 $164,500 $132,000
Past experience indicates that 30% of the credit sales will be collected in the month of sale and the remaining 70% will be collected in the following month.
Purchases of inventory are all on credit and 40% is paid in the month of purchase and 60% in the month following purchase. Budgeted inventory purchases are $195,000 in April, $135,000 in May, and $63,000 in June.
Other budgeted cash receipts: (a) sale of plant assets for $33,000 in May, and (b) sale of new common stock for $50,000 in June. Other budgeted cash disbursements: (a) operating expenses of $15,000 each month, (b) selling and administrative expenses of $10,150 each month, (c) purchase of equipment for $35,000 cash in May, and (d) dividends of $20,000 will be paid in June.
The company has a cash balance of $20,000 at the beginning of May and wishes to maintain a minimum cash balance of $20,000 at the end of each month. An open line of credit is available at the bank and carries an annual interest rate of 10%. Assume that all borrowing is done on the first day of the month in which financing is needed and that all repayments are made on the last day of the month in which excess cash is available. Also assume that there is no outstanding financing as of May 1.
Requirements:
1. Use this information to prepare a cash budget for the months of May and June, using the template provided in Doc Sharing.
2. What are the three sections of a cash budget, and what is included in each section?
3. Why is a cash budget so vital to a company?
4. What are the five basic principles of cash management that a company can follow in order to improve its chances of having adequate cash?
Grading Rubric for Cash Budget Case Study
|
Category
|
Points
|
%
|
Description
|
|
Documentation and Formatting
|
6
|
10%
|
Case Study worksheet will be done in Excel and will contain formulas to receive maximum credit.
|
|
Organization and Cohesiveness
|
6
|
10%
|
A quality solution will include the content properly organized in accordance with the instructions provided. The cash budgets will be complete and the analysis will be consistent with the cash budgets presented.
|
|
Editing
|
6
|
10%
|
Quality work will be free of any mathematical, spelling, punctuation, or grammatical errors. Sentences and paragraphs (where appropriate) will be clear, concise, and factually correct.
|
|
Content
|
42
|
70%
|
A quality project will have all required work completed and will be correct.
|
|
Total
|
60
|
100%
|
A quality project will meet or exceed all of the requirements.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hello. I need someone to look over my case study to make sure it is correct and to put the calculations in it as well. I have attached the case study details and the excel sheet I have completed. My tutor on here will not answer messages and I am running out of time.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACCT504 Practice Case Study 3 on Cash Budgeting
This is a practice case study to help you become familiar with how to create a comprehensive cash budget. The cash budget relates to TCO D and is discussed in Chapter 7. Your professor will provide the solution by the end of Week 5 in Doc Sharing.
The actual case study assignmentshould be uploadedby 11:59 p.m.mountain time on Sunday at the end of Week 6 to the Week 6 AssignmentDropbox. You are encouraged to use the Excel template file provided in Doc Sharing.
The Cambridge Company has budgeted sales revenues as follows.
Jan Feb Mar
Credit sales $45,000 $36,000 $27,000
Cash sales 27,000 76,500 58,500
Total sales $72,000 $112,500 $85,500
Past experience indicates that 60% of the credit sales will be collected in the month of sale and the remaining 40% will be collected in the following month.
Purchases of inventory are all on credit and 40% is paid in the month of purchase and 60% in the month following purchase. Budgeted inventory purchases are $97,500 in January, $67,500 in February, and $31,500 in March.
Other budgeted cash receipts: (a) sale of plant assets for $18,525 in February, and (b) sale of new common stock for $25,275 in March. Other budgeted cash disbursements: (a) operating expenses of $10,125 each month, (b) selling and administrative expenses of $18,750 each month, (c) dividends of $28,500 will be paid in February, and (d) purchase of equipment for $9,000 cash in March.
The company has a cash balance of $15,000 at the beginning of February and wishes to maintain a minimum cash balance of $15,000 at the end of each month. An open line of credit is available at the bank and carries an annual interest rate of 12%. Assume that all borrowing is done on the first day of the month in which financing is needed and that all repayments are made on the last day of the month in which excess cash is available.Also assume that there is no outstanding financing as of February 1.
Requirements:
1. Use this information to prepare a cash budget for the months of February and March, using the template provided in DocSharing.
Please note: This is not a graded assignment, but your instructor will share the solution for this practice exercise by the end of Week 5. It is highly recommended that you try to build the cash budget on your own first.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
COURSE PROJECT A INSTRUCTIONS
You have just been hired as a new management trainee by Earrings Unlimited, a distributor of earrings to various retail outlets located in shopping malls across the country. In the past, the company has done very little in the way of budgeting and at certain times of the year has experienced a shortage of cash.
Since you are well trained in budgeting, you have decided to prepare comprehensive budgets for the upcoming second quarter in order to show management the benefits that can be gained from an integrated budgeting program. To this end, you have worked with accounting and other areas to gather the information assembled below.
The company sells many styles of earrings, but all are sold for the same price $10 per pair. Actual sales of earrings for the last three months and budgeted sales for the next six months follow (in pairs of earrings):
The concentration of sales before and during May is due to Mother’s Day. Sufficient inventory should be on hand at the end of each month to supply 40% of the earrings sold in the following month.
Suppliers are paid $4 for a pair of earrings. One-half of a month’s purchases is paid for in the month of purchase; the other half is paid for in the following month. All sales are on credit, with no discount, and payable within 15 days. The company has found, however, that only 20% of a month’s sales are collected in the month of sale. An additional 70% is collected in the following month, and the remaining 10% is collected in the second month following sale. Bad debts have been negligible.
Monthly operating expenses for the company are given below:
Insurance is paid on an annual basis, in November of each year.
The company plans to purchase $16,000 in new equipment during May and $40,000 in new equipment during June; both purchases will be for cash. The company declares dividends of $15,000 each quarter, payable in the first month of the following quarter.
A listing of the company’s ledger accounts as of March 31 is given below:
The company maintains a minimum cash balance of $50,000. All borrowing is done at the beginning of a month; any repayments are made at the end of a month.
The company has an agreement with a bank that allows the company to borrow in increments of $1,000 at the beginning of each month. The interest rate on these loans is 1% per month and for simplicity we will assume that interest is not compounded. At the end of the quarter, the company would pay the bank all of the accumulated interest on the loan and as much of the loan as possible (in increments of $1,000), while still retaining at least $50,000 in cash.
Required:
Prepare a master budget for the three-month period ending June 30. Include the following detailed budgets:
1.
o
a. A sales budget, by month and in total.
o
b. A schedule of expected cash collections from sales, by month and in total.
o
c. A merchandise purchases budget in units and in dollars. Show the budget by month and in total.
o
d. A schedule of expected cash disbursements for merchandise purchases, by month and in total.
2. A cash budget. Show the budget by month and in total. Determine any borrowing that would be needed to maintain the minimum cash balance of $50,000.
3. A budgeted income statement for the three-month period ending June 30. Use the contribution approach.
4. A budgeted balance sheet as of June 30.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 6000 2000 4000 2000 1000 12000 Problem 1 Problem 2 Cost of new machine Required: In the space below, describe the net present value method of capital budgeting. Incremental revenue Required: Compute the average annual cash inflows. Compute the payback period using the accumulation method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
i need help with these!
please discuss on each topic.
about 75 words each.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Arab Open University
B292: TMA 2nd Semester 2012-2013
Cut-Off Date: 27thof April 2013
About TMA:
The TMA covers the financial accounting concepts and practices in the businesses. It is marked out of 100 and is worth 20% of the overall assessment component. It is intended to assess students understanding of some of the learning points within Books9, 11, 12,and13. This TMA requires you to apply the course concepts.
The TMA is intended to:
Increase the students knowledge about the reality of the accounting as a profession.
Assess students understanding of key learning points within the books.
Develop the ability to understand and interact with the nature of the financial statements in reality.
Develop students communication skills, such as memo writing, essay writing, analysis and presentation of material.
Develop basic ICT skills such as using the internet.
The TMA:
This TMA is based around two cases of Compass Group and Relevant Information and Opportunity Costs. Marks will be awarded for blending the context of each case and with relevant theory by means of your own interpretation. In addition to this, some researchis required.
The TMA requires you to:
1-Review various study Books (1, 2, 3, and 4) of Management Accounting .
2-Conduct a simple information search using the internet.
3-Present your findings in not more than 2,000 words (220 words for part A, 680 for Part B, and 1,100 for part C).
4-You should use a Microsoft Office Word and Times New Roman Font of 12 points.
5-You should read and follow the instructions below carefully. Each part of the process will carry marks for the assignment.
Criteria for Grade Distribution:
Criteria
Content
Referencing&e-library
Structure and Presentation of ideas
Total marks
Part A
Part B
Part C
Marks
32
25
43
(10)
(10)
100
The TMA Questions
Part A
Breakeven Analysis
Harrison Research manufactures and sells specialized titanium rods used in medical equipment. The product is manufactured and sold in 0.25 meter long “sticks.’ The product is generally produced and sold to match customer demand, and there is not a significantamount of finished goods inventory at any point in time. Summary information for 2012 is as follows:
Sales were $5,000,000, consisting of 200,000 sticks.
Total variable costs were $3,500,000.
Total fixed costs were $1,250,000.
Net income was $250,000.
Due to deteriorating general economic conditions there is some concern about a reduction in sales volume.
Required:
a- What is the company’s break-even point in ‘sticks?’ Can the company sustain a 30% reduction in total volume, and remain profitable?
b- The company’s sole shareholder, Chem Harrison, relies on the dividends paid by the company. The company typically declares and pays a dividend equal to 25% of net income. If Chem needs to receive $150,000 in dividends for normal living expenses, what totalrevenues must Harrison Research produce in 2013?
c- If total volume is expected to decrease by 20%, and the company wishes to continue to produce a $250,000 net income by raising the per unit selling price, what revised per stick price must be imposed? Will this pricing strategy work in the market place?
d- If the company expects a drop in raw material prices to reduce total variable costs to $15 per stick, but all other revenue and cost factors to be unaffected, what will be the revised break-even point in sales and units?
[Marks (Words): 4×8 = 32 (220)]
Part B
Case study: Activity Based Costing
Orange Ltd manufactures micro-chips products for the computer industry. Orange s management accountant has produced a profit report showing the profitability of each of its three main Products for last year (Table 1).
Table l: Orange products profit report:
A
B
C
D
Total
Sales
5,000,000
5,000,000
5,000,000
5,000,000
20,000,000
Cost of materials
1,200,000
1,800,000
1,500,000
2,500,000
7,000,000
Cost of labour
700,000
800,000
800,000
200,000
2,500,000
Gross profit
3,100,000
2,400,000
2,700,000
2,300,000
10,500,000
Corporate overheads (allocated as 30 % of sales):
6,000,0000
Operating profit
4,500,000
The company wishes to keep producing only three products, it plans to discontinue production of the least profitable product.
Calculation of predetermined overhead rate:
Manufacturing overhead budget:
Machine setup
2,000,000
Machinery
1,400,000
Inspection
800,000
Material handling
1,800,000
Total
6,000,000
The cost drivers are as follow:
Activity Cost pool
Cost Driver
Product
A
B
C
D
Machine setup
Number of setups
10,000
3,000
5,000
2,000
Machinery
Machine hours
10,000
2,000
7,000
1,000
Inspection
Number of inspections
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
Material handling
Raw-material costs
Required:
From the case, provide a recommendation concerning which product to discontinue using the ABC costing method and describe the state of the current accounting system. (Hint: you need to compare the profitability under each method)
[Marks (Words) =25(700)]
PART C
Budgeting
(Case study: Planning a budget)
Davis Service Group is a large public limited company employing around 17,000 people. Its shares are quoted on the London Stock Exchange. The business is based on service contracts to source, clean and maintain industrial textiles, such as protective clothingand linens. This is across four key sectors: work wear, healthcare, hotels and restaurants, and general facilities, such as washroom linen. Access the Davis case study on www.thetimes100.co.uk.From home page click on Case studies and then in Finance choose budgeting , and then choose Davis, Planning a Budget.
Instructions
Use the case study to answer the following questions:
1. Outline the purpose of budgets within organisations.
[Marks (Words) = 7(250)]
2.Explain the relationship between an objectives budget and operational budgets and give an example.
[Marks (Words) = 7(70)]
3.Analyse the factors that managers might have to take into consideration when preparing budgets.
[Marks (Words) = 9(230)]
4.Critically evaluate how budgeting can contribute to the success of a business’s strategy
[Marks (Words) = 20(550)]
[Total Marks: 32 +25 + 43 + 20marks of deduction for general presentation and references]
In your answer, you should explain each point or inquire separately. Use the following headings (below) to make up the different sections of your work:
The PT3 form (Available on LMS)
Title and contents page
Part A
Breakeven Analysis
Part B
Case study : Activity Based Costing
Part C
Case study : Budgeting (Planning a budget)
References (Recorded according to the Harvard style – Available on LMS)
Good Luck!
Mr. Jacques Hendieh
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attched. I need help with all required answers. Didn’t leave myself time due to busy work schedule. Thanks.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
THE EXCEL SHEET IS THE ANSWER SHEET.
YOU CAN GIVE ME A PRICE.
9 PROBLEMS
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please finish exam and place answers on designated answer sheet
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) I need this within the next eight hours.
2) I need the answers in EXCEL, with each question clearly labeled.
3) I need ALL work shown. ALL.
4) The question is: I need the Current Ratio and also the Acid Test Ratio.
5) The data for use figuring out the Current Ratio and the Acid Test Ratio are attached.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 6000 2000 4000 2000 1000 12000 Problem 1 Problem 2 (10 points) (40 points total) Cost of new machine Required: In the space below, describe the net present value method of capital budgeting. Required: Compute the average annual cash inflows. (20 points) Compute the payback period using the accumulation method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Course Project
This course has a six-part project with deliverables due in six of the eight weeks.
The course project takes a new company through hypothetical scenarios to reinforce the TCOs. By using a single entity, in a variety of business situations, you will see the practical application of a number of managerial accounting concepts taught in this course.
You will have access to an interactive Excel Template in Doc Sharing to complete your work in proper format. Each week’s Assignment page will tell you which portion of the template you need to complete for that week.
You will have Dropbox deliverables in Weeks 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, and 7. Point values do vary in that Week 1 is worth 10 points, Week 2 is worth 30 points, and the remaining Weeks (3, 5, 6, and 7) are 40 points apiece.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
accountexrt4u
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
this is the assignment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1)
Nic Saybin Enterprises Accounting Department collects all pertinent monthly operating data. Selected data are presented below for the current month. From the data provided, please provide Saybin Enterprises Management with a flexible budget analysis to see how costs were controlled.
Actual Costs Incurred Static Budget
Activity level (in units) 754,009 746,500
Variable Costs:
Indirect materials $328,897 $325,640
Utilities $174,332 $171,890
Fixed Costs:
General and administrative $237,985 $244,908
Rent $135,500 $135,000
2)
(TCO D) McMullen Co. manufactures automatic door openers. The company uses 15,000 electronic hinges per year as a component in the assembly of the openers. You have been engaged by McMullen to assist with an evaluation of whether the company should continue producing the hinges or purchase them from an outside vendor.
The Accounting Department provided the following detail regarding the annual cost to produce electronic hinges:
Direct materials $54,000
Direct labor 60,000
Variable manufacturing overhead 36,000
Fixed manufacturing overhead 90,000
Total costs $240,000
The Procurement Department provided the following supplier pricing:
Supplier A price per hinge $11.00
Supplier B price per hinge $10.75
Supplier C price per hinge $10.50
The supplier pricing was obtained in response to a formal request for proposal (RFP). Procurement has determined these suppliers meet McMullen’s technical specifications and quality requirements.
If McMullen stops producing the part internally, 10% of the fixed manufacturing overhead would be eliminated.
Required: Prepare a make-or-buy analysis showing the annual advantage or disadvantage of accepting an outside supplier’s offer.
3)
(TCO E) Topple Company produces a single product. Operating data for the company and its absorption costing income statement for the last year are presented below:
Units in beginning inventory 2,000
Units produced 9,000
Units sold 10,000
Sales $100,000
Less cost of goods sold:
Beginning inventory 12,000
Add cost of goods manufactured 54,000
Goods available for sale 66,000
Less ending inventory 6,000
Cost of goods sold 60,000
Gross margin 40,000
Less selling and admin. expenses 28,000
Net operating income $12,000
Variable manufacturing costs are $4 per unit. Fixed factory overhead totals $18,000 for the year. This overhead was applied at a rate of $2 per unit. Variable selling and administrative expenses were $1 per unit sold.
Required: Prepare a new income statement for the year using variable costing. Comment on the differences between the absorption costing and the variable costing income statements.
4)
TCO A) The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of the Maroon Corporation for the just-completed year.
Sales 1,200
Raw materials inventory, beginning 25
Raw materials inventory, ending 50
Purchases of raw materials 180
Direct labor 230
Manufacturing overhead 250
Administrative expenses 400
Selling expenses 200
Work-in-process inventory, beginning 150
Work-in-process inventory, ending 120
Finished goods inventory, beginning 100
Finished goods inventory, ending 110
Use the above data to prepare (in thousands of dollars) a schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured and a Schedule of Cost of Goods Sold for the year. In addition, what is the impact on the financial statements if the ending finished goods inventory is overstated or understated?
5)
Carter Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below.
Work in process, beginning:
Units in beginning work-in-process inventory 400
Materials costs $6,900
Conversion costs $2,500
Percentage complete for materials 80%
Percentage complete for conversion 15%
Units started into production during the month 6,000
Units transferred to the next department during the month 5,800
Materials costs added during the month $112,500
Conversion costs added during the month $210,300
Ending work in process:
Units in ending work-in-process inventory 1,400
Percentage complete for materials 70%
Percentage complete for conversion 40%
Required: Calculate the equivalent units for materials (using the weighted-average method) for the month in the first processing department.
6)
(TCO G) (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Five years ago, the City of Paranoya spent $30,000 to purchase a computerized radar system called W.A.S.T.E. (Watching Aliens Sent To Earth). Recently, a sales rep from W.A.S.T.E. Radar Company told the city manager about a new and improved radar system that can be purchased for $50,000. The rep also told the manager that the company would give the city $10,000 in trade on the old system. The new system will last 10 years. The old system will also last that long but only if a $4,000 upgrade is done in 5 years. The manager assembled the following information to use in the decision regarding which system is more desirable:
Old System New System
Cost of radar system $30,000 $50,000
Current salvage value $10,000 –
Salvage value in 10 years $5,000 $8,000
Annual operating costs $34,000 $29,000
Upgrade required in 5 years $4,000 –
Discount rate 14% 14%
Required:
(a) What is the City of Paranoya’s net present value for the decision described above? Use the total cost approach.
(b) Should the City of Paranoya purchase the new system or keep the old system?
7)
TCO B) Madlem, Inc., produces and sells a single product whose selling price is $240.00 per unit and whose variable expense is $86.40 per unit. The company’s fixed expense is $720,384 per month.
Required:
Determine the monthly break-even in either unit or total dollar sales. Show your work!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACCT 525 Managerial Accounting
Heritage Company manufactures a beautiful bookcase that enjoys widespread popularity. The company has a backlog of orders that is large enough to keep production going indefinitely at the plant’s full capacity of 4,200 bookcases per year. Annual cost data at full capacity follow
Required:
Enter the dollar amount of each cost item under the appropriate headings. Note that each cost item is classified in two ways: first, as either variable or fixed with respect to the number of units produced and sold; and second, as either a selling and administrative cost or a product cost. (If the item is a product cost, it should also be classified as either direct or indirect.) (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Direct materials used (wood and glass)
$ 432,000
Administrative office salaries
$ 108,000
Factory supervision
$ 70,000
Sales commissions
$ 63,000
Depreciation, factory building
$ 108,000
Depreciation, administrative office equipment
$ 2,000
Indirect materials, factory
$ 16,000
Factory labor (cutting and assembly)
$ 88,000
Advertising
$ 96,000
Insurance, factory
$ 7,000
Administrative office supplies (billing)
$ 5,000
Property taxes, factory
$ 22,000
Utilities, factory
$ 49,000
Cost Item Variable Fixed (Selling or admin costs ) direct indirect
Direct materials used (wood, glass)
Administrative office salaries
Factory supervision
Sales commissions
Depreciation, factory building
Depreciation, admin. Office equipment
Indirect materials, factory
Factory labor (cutting and assembly)
Advertising
Insurance, factory
Administrative office supplies (billing)
Property taxes, factory
Utilities, factory
Total costs
2.
Compute the average product cost per bookcase. (Round your answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Average product cost $ per bookcase ?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Responding to a Classmate. This week, you should post a response to a classmate’s SEC post. Find another company that a classmate used(studentsppt file). Find the profit margin your classmate reported for his or her company. Compare to your profit margin(carmax, inc.file) and tell which company is more profitable (the higher the percentage, the more profitable the company is). For the one that was the most profitable, tell why you think their results were the highest of the two. Responding to a Classmate. This week, you should post a response to a classmate’s SEC post.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
help with 2 exercises, please.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
some more accounting rubbish
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
11-55 Aunt Molly’s Old Fashioned Cookies bakes cookies for retail stores. The company’s best-selling cookie is chocolate nut supreme, which is marketed as a gourmet cookie and regularly sells for $8.00 per pound. The standard cost per pound of chocolate nut supreme, based on Aunt Molly’s normal monthly production of 400,000 pounds, is as follows: Cost Item Quantity Standard unit cost Total Cost Direct materials Cookie mix 10oz $ .
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
16-58 Pensacola Cablevision Company provides television cable service to two counties in the Florida pan-handle. The firm’s management is considering the construction of a new satellite dish in December of 20×0. The new antenna would improve reception and the service provided to customers. The dish antenna and associated equipment will cost $200,000 to purchase and install. The company’s old equipment, which is fully depreciated, can be sold now for $20,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise 3 Economic Order Quantity For each of the following independent cases, use the equation method to compute the economic order quantity. Case A Case B Case C Annual requirement (in units) 13,230 1,681 560 Cost per order $250 $40 $10 Annual holding cost per unit 6 20 7 Exercise 4 Lead Time and Safety Stock Andrew and Fulton, Inc.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please complete by using corresponding excel template
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Post Closing Trial Balance Closing Entries Financial Statements Adjusted Trial Balance Adjusting Entries Trial Balance General Ledger Journal Entries REQUIREMENT #1: completed the following transactions: July 1 Began business by making a deposit in a company bank account of $24,000, in exchange Paid the premium on a one-year insurance policy, $2,400. Paid the current month’s rent, $2,080. July 3 placed on account. Payments will be $400.00 per month for nineteen months. The first payment is due 8/1. July 8 July 12 Paid utility bill for July, $308.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Describe a difference between traditional cost systems and ABC cost systems.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The book is attached.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HERE YOU GO 🙂
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HERE YOU GO 🙂
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
see attached and below;
HMWK 9-45
We really need to get this new material-handling equipment in operation just after the new-year begins. I hope we can finance it largely with cash and marketable securities, but if necessary we can get a short-term loan down at MetroBank. This statement by Beth Davies-Lowry, president of Intercoastal is a small, Company, concluded a meeting she had called with the firm s top management. Intercoastal is a small, rapidly growing wholesaler of consumer electronics products. The firm s main product lines are small kitchen appliances and power tools. Marcia Wilcox, Intercoastal s General Manager of Marketing, has recently completed a sales forcast. She believes the company s sales during the first quarter of 20×1 will increase by 10 percent each month over the previous month s sales. Then Wilcox expects sales to remain constant for several months. Intercoastal s projected balance sheet as of December 31, 20×0, is as follows:
CASH $35,000
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE 270,000
MARKETABLE SECURITIES 15,000
INVENTORY 154,000
BLDG S AND EQUIPMENT 626,000
TOTAL ASSETS $1,100,000
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE $176,000
BOND INTEREST PAYABLE 12,500
PROPERTY TAX PAYABLE 3,600
BONDS PAYABLE (10% due 20×6) 300,000
COMMON STOCK 500,000
RETAINED EARNINGS 107,500
TOTAL LIABILITIES/STOCKHOLDERS EQUITY $1,100,000
Jack Hanson, the assistant controller, is now preparing a monthly budget for the first quarter of 20×1. In the process, the following information has been accumulated:
1. Projected sales for December of 20×0 are $400,000. Credit sales typically are 75 percent of the total sales. Intercoastal s credit experience indicates that 10% of the credit sales are collected during the month of sale, and the remainder collected during the following month.
2. Intercoastal s cost of goods sold generally runs at 70% of sales. Inventory is purchased on account and 40% of each month s purchases are paid during the month of purchase. The remainder is paid during the following month. In order to have adequate stocks of inventory on hand, the firm attempts to have inventory at the end of each month equal to half of the next month s projected cost of goods sold.
3. Hanson has estimated the Intercoastal s other monthly expenses will be as follows:
SALES SALARIES $21,000
ADVERTISING/PROMOTOIONS 16,000
ADMINISTRATIVE SALARIES 21,000
DEPRECIATION 25,000
INTEREST ON BONDS 2,500
PROPERTY TAXES 900
In addition, sales commission runs at 1% of sales.
4. Intercoastal s president, Davies-Lowry, has indicated that the firm should invest $125,000 in an automated inventory-handling system to control the movement of inventory in the firms warehouse just after the new year begins. These equipment purchases will be financed primarily from the firm s cash and marketable securities. However, Davies-Lawry believes that Intercoastal needs to keep a minimum cash balance of $25,000. If necessary, the remainder of the equipment purchases will be financed using short term credit from a local bank. The minimum period for such a loan is 3 months. Hanson believes short term interest rates will be 10% per year at the time of the equipment purchases. If a loan is necessary, Davies-Lowry has decided it should be paid off by the end of the first quarter if possible.
5. Intercoastal s board of directors has indicated an intention to declare and pay dividends of $50,000 on the last day of each quarter.
6. The interest on any short term borrowing will be paid when the loan is repaid. Interest on Intercoastals bonds is paid semiannually on January 31, and July 31 for the preceding 6 month period.
7. Property taxes are paid semiannully on February 28 and August 31 for the preceding 6 month period.
Prepare Intercoastal Electronic Company s master budget for the first quarter of 20×1 by completing the following schedules and statements.
1. SALES BUDGET:
20×0 20×1 December January February March 1st Qtr
Total Sales
Cash Sales
Sales on account
2. Cash Receipts Budget:
20×1
January February March 1st Qtr
Cash Sales
Cash Collections from Credit sales (current Month)
Cash Collections from Credit Sales (preceding month)
Total cash receipts
3. Purchasee Budget:
20×0 20×1
January January February March 1st Qtr
Budgeted Cost of Goods Sold
Add: Desired ending inventory
Total goods needed
Less: Expected beginning Inventory
Purchases
4. Cash Disbursment Budget:
20×1
January February March 1st Qtr
Inventory purchases:
Cash payments for purchases(current month)
(preceding month)
Total cash payments for inventory purchase
Other expenses:
Sales Salaries
Advertising and promotion
Administrative salaries
Interest on bonds
Property Taxes
Sales Commissions
Total cash payments for other expenses
Total cash disbursements
5. Complete the 1st three lines of the summary cash budget. Then do the analysis of short term financing needs in requirement (6). Then finish requirement (5).
Summar Cash Budget:
20×1
January February March 1st Qtr
Cash receipts (from schedule 2)
Less: Cash Disbursements(from schedule 4)
Change in cash balance during period due to operations
Sale of marketable securities(1/2/x1)
Poceeds from bank loan(1/2/x1)
Purchase of equipment
Repayment of bank loan(3/31/x1)
Interest on bank loan
Payment on dividends
Change in cash balance during
1st quarter
Cash balance(1/1/x1)
Cash balance(3/31/x1)
6. Analysis of short term financing needs:
Projected cash balances as of December 31, 20×0 $
Less: Minimum cash balance _________
Cash available for equipment purchases $
Projected proceeds from sale of marketing securities _________
Cash available $
Less: Cost of investment in equipment _________
Required short term borrowing $
7. Prepare Intercoastal s Electronics budgeted statement for the 1st quarter of 20×1. (ignore income taxes)
8. Prepare Intercoastal s Electronics budgeted statement of retained earnings for the 1st quarter of 20×1.
9. Prepare Intercoastal s Electronics budgeted balance sheet as of March 31, 20×1. (Hint; On March 31, 20×1, Bond Interest Payable is $5,000 and Property Taxes Payable is $900.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Give an example of one of the four adjusting entries for an actual company. My introductory post, below will give an example of each type to get you started. Then I want you to think of just one for any of the 4 types. To get things started, here is one example of each of the four types of Adjusting Journal Entries. 1. Prepaid Expenses: Larry’s Fun House bought $600 in Food and Beverages in July. In August, the business used up $250 of those supplies. Here is the adjusting journal entry: DR Food and Beverages Expense $250 CR Food and Beverages $250 2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
HW 2 (Corrections of a Balance Sheet) The bookkeeper for Garfield Company has prepared the following balance sheet as of July 31, 2012. GARFIELD COMPANY Balance Sheet As of July 31, 2012 Cash $71,370 Notes and accounts payable $46,580 Accounts receivable (net) 43,080 Long-term liabilities 77,370 Inventories 62,370 Stockholders’ equity 157,870 Equipment (net) 84,000 $281,820 Patents 21,000 $281,820 The following additional information is provided. Cash includes $1,200 in a petty cash fund and $12,290 in a bond sinking fund.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
WP4.1 (Analysis of Amortization Schedule and Interest Entries) The following amortization and interest schedule reflects the issuance of 10-year bonds by Capulet Corporation on January 1, 2006, and the subsequent interest payments and charges. The company’s year-end is December 31, and financial statements are prepared once yearly.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Transaction Analysis–Service Company) Christine Ewing is a licensed CPA. During the first month of operations of her business (a sole proprietorship), the following events and transactions occurred. April 2 Invested $35,197 cash and equipment valued at $18,933 in the business. 2 Hired a secretary-receptionist at a salary of $290 per week payable monthly. 3 Purchased supplies on account $712. (Debit an asset account.) 7 Paid office rent of $684 for the month. 11 Completed a tax assignment and billed client $1,555 for services rendered. (Use Service Revenue account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting 291 Comprehensive Problem Fall Semester 2013 The Baker Company is a merchandising enterprise that uses the perpetual inventory system.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please use the outline format in attachment. All sections must be completed accordingly.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Arab Open University BE210: TMA – 2nd Semester 2012-2013 Cut-Off Date: 25th of April 2013 About TMA: The TMA covers the financial accounting concepts and practices in the businesses. It is marked out of 100 and is worth 20% of the overall assessment component. It is intended to assess students’ understanding of some of the learning points within chapters 1 to 4. This TMA requires you to apply the course concepts. The TMA is intended to: Increase the students’ knowledge about the reality of the accounting as a profession.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Arab Open University BE211: TMA – 2nd Semester 2012-2013 Cut-Off Date: 27th of April 2013 About TMA: The TMA covers the management accounting concepts and practices in the businesses. It is marked out of 100 and is worth 20% of the overall assessment component. It is intended to assess students’ understanding of some of the learning points within chapters 15, 18, and 19. This TMA requires you to apply the course concepts. The TMA is intended to: Assess students’ understanding of key learning points within chapters 15, 18, and 19.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This assignment is already given to Speccy- The Professor
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please make one-page summary and discussion for your opinions on the current practice after reading the article written by Graham et al.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please read the article attached, and answer the following questions. YOU SHOULD REFER THE ARTICLE TO ANSWER THE QUESTIONS.
1. Discuss the FASB’s standard setting process. You should summarize what the article discussed for the process, and then should provide your opinions.
2. What is XBRL? Please discuss for the SEC’s position on the adoption of XBRL.
3. Please discuss the roles of DCF in SEC
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Do the following:
Write a 500 word essay discussing the attached WellCare of Kentucky Managed Care Contract while
answering the following questions:
What is the function of the contract
What are the terms of the contract
Why is it important to specify the terms of the contract
Who monitors and evaluates the contracts
What is the process for monitoring and evaluating the contracts
Use MS Word or WordPad to complete your assignment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hello,
I have attached an excel spreedsheet with three questions to the problem. Please let me know if you can assit me in finding the solution as a lesson.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
There are 6 total questions for accounting……..You will see it when you open attached document that is attached. It a word document six different questions that needs to be solved
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Course: Healthcare for Financial Accounting
Review Exhibit 9-2 in Ch. 9 of Health Care Finance, regarding annualizing calculations and positions.
Complete the Axia Material: Annualizing Staffing worksheet by determining the physician practice staffing needs
Calculate the staffing factor.
Post your assignment as an attachment.
Worsheet and Chapters Attached (IF NEEDED) Week 4
No Plagiarism
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment: Computing Book Depreciation
Complete the table by defining the five methods of computing book depreciation.
Write an explanation for why it is important for a health care facility or physician practice to pay attention to depreciation more than a computer software business (150 words or better).
Post assignment as an attachment. No Plagiarism.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hello,
I have accounting HW and I need help, its 37 Q.
Thank you
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Answer review questions and Introduction problem 1 on page 27 and 28
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Answer review questions and Introduction sales problem 1 on page 69 thru 72.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week One Exercise Assignment Basic Accounting Equations 1. Recognition of normal balances The following items appeared in the accounting records of Triguero’s, a retail music store that also sponsors concerts. Classify each of the items as an asset, liability; revenue; or expense from the company’s viewpoint. Also indicate the normal account balance of each item. a. Amounts paid to a mall for rent. b. Amounts to be paid in 10 days to suppliers. c. A new fax machine purchased for office use. d. Land held as an investment. e. Amounts due from customers. f.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
3. Complete the following balance sheet for the Davenport Limited using the following information: Debt to Assets = 50 percent Quick Ratio = 1.2 Asset Turnover = 5x Fixed Asset Turnover = 12.037x Current Ratio = 2 Average Collection Period = 16.837 days CSoash Current Liabilities Receivables Bonds Payable Inventory Total Liabilities Total Current Assets Net Worth Plant and Equipment Total Assets 348,000 Total Liabilities & Net Worth 7. Stuandlu, Corp have financing needs for $385,000 in Assets for the new dog treat company they started.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need following 3 problems completed –
1. Post your answers to BE4-12 on p. 176 of Financial Accounting in a word doc.
2. Complete E4-4 on p. 177 of Financial Accounting. Use the
templates in Appendix F and complete all three tabs.
Post the completed Appendix F as an attachment.
3.Complete the Comprehensive Problem on pp. 189 and 190 of
Financial Accounting.
Use the templates in Appendix G to complete the problem; complete
all six tabs.
Post the completed Appendix G as an attachment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week 4 Assignment 2 David Bradley ACC 201 Principles of Financial Accounting Instructor: Phillip Sarakatsannis April 3, 2013 Week 4, Assignment 2 Read ATC 8-4 in Chapter 8 and write a memo describing the advantages and disadvantages of organizational forms. You may research other sources regarding accounting internal controls. The paper should be at least 400 words and should include your personal observations and conclusions. References RUNNING HEAD: 4.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
management of this company need assistance to determined the best sale and production mix for the company yr here is the data/ product marcy- next yr unit=26k selling price per unit=35k direct material 3.50 cents direct laboe= 4.60 cents/ product tina- next yr 42k per unit selling price= 24k direct material = 2.30 cents direct labor 3.00/ cari product 40k selling price = 22k direct material4.50 cents; direct labor= 8.40 cents/ lenny product- 45k selling price 18k direct material 3.10 direct labor 6.99/ sewing kit 450k selling price per unit 14k direct material 1.50 cents direct labor 2.49cents/ the company plant has a capacity of 150k direct labor hrd per yr on a single shift bases. this company present staff and equipment can produce all 5 product. the direct labor rate of 12.00 per hr is expect to remain our chain during the coming yr. fix cost total 356k per yr variable cost are 4.00 direct labor hr. all of this company non manufacture cost are fixed. the company finish goods inventory can be ignored. question I ned to determined the contribution margin per direct labor hr expend on each product.. I need to prepare a schedule showing the total direct labor hrs that will be require to produce the unit estimate to be sold during the coming yr. I need to examine the data/ how would u allocate the 150k direct labor hrs of capicaity to this company different product.. what is the highest price in term of rate per hr that this company should be willing to pay for additional capacity 4 added direct labor time. I need to explain in ways that this company might be able to obtain additional output so it would not have to leave some demand for its product unsatisy can u assit me with the asnswer jac dumb
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attached.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On April 21, Killarny Enterprises acquired a large tract of land from McSwain Corporation. Killarny issued 1,400 shares of its $1 par value common stock to McSwain in exchange for the land.
(a) Prepare the journal entry to record this transaction by Killarny Enterprises, if the company’s stock is not publicly traded and the land has an appraised value of $110,000.
(b) Assume that on April 20, the Killarny stock traded on the New York Stock Exchange for $75 per share. The land has an appraised value of $110,000. Prepare the appropriate journal entry to record this exchange transaction by Killarny Enterprises.
(c) Suppose, instead, that Killarny sold 1,400 shares of stock on April 20 for $80 cash per share. The company then acquired the land from McSwain Corporation on April 21 for its appraised value. Prepare the journal entries for these two transactions by Killarny Enterprises.
(d) Determine the differences between the financial statement results in parts (a), (b), and (c). Explain why these differences occured.
Accounting for Cash Dividends
Lupinski Distributors has 1,000,000 shares of common stock outstanding. On January 11 of the current year, Lupinski declared a cash dividend of $0.20 per share, payable on March 9 to stockholders of record on February 12.
(a) When did this dividend become a liability to Lupinski?
(b) Prepare any journal entries required in Lupinski’s accounting records relating to this cash dividend on the following dates in the current year:
(1) January 11
(2) February 12
(3) March 9
(4) December 31
(c) What group of individuals authorized the declaration of this dividend?
(d) What general types of information must public companies regulated by the SEC disclose in their annual reports regarding their dividend policies? Why is this information important to potential investors?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Accounting Questions |
| Question Detail:
This is due this Saturday at 10 am
See attached word document
ACT 5744
Fall 2013
Pick the best answer.
1. Carlton executed and delivered to Raymond a $1,000 negotiable note payable to Raymond or bearer. Raymond then negotiated it to Fred and endorsed it on the back by merely signing his name. Which of the following is a true statement?
a. The instrument is bearer paper, and Fred can convert it to order paper by writing pay to the order of Fred above Raymond s signature.
b. Raymond s endorsement was a special endorsement.
c. The instrument was initially bearer paper and cannot be converted to order paper.
d. Raymond s endorsement was necessary to Fred s qualification as a holder.
2. Under the Secured Transactions Article of the UCC, which of the following remedies is available to a secured creditor when a debtor fails to make a payment when due?
Proceed Obtain a General
against the Judgment against
Collateral__ the Debtor_
a. Yes Yes
b. Yes No
c. No No
d. No Yes
3. On July 27, 2011 Summerson sent Fallson a letter offering to sell Fallson a vacation home for $150,000. On August 2, 2011 Fallson replied by mail agreeing to buy the home for $145,000. Summerson did not reply to Fallson. Do Summerson and Fallson have a binding contract?
a. Yes, because Summerson s silence is an implied acceptance of Fallson s letter.
b. No, because Fallson failed to sign the letter that was sent by Fallson.
c. No, because Fallson s letter was a counteroffer.
d. Yes, because Summerson s offer was validly accepted.
4. Cindy, Odsen Corp. s agent, needs a written agency agreement to
a. Hire an attorney to collect a business debt owed Odsen.
b. Purchased an interest in undeveloped land for Odsen.
c. Retain an independent general contractor to renovate Odsen s office building.
d. Enter into a series of sales contracts on Odsen s behalf.
5. A party who filed a financing statement covering inventory on April 1, 2010 would have a superior interest to which of the following parties?
a. A holder of a mechanic s lien whose lien was filed on March 15, 2010.
b. A judgment lien creditor who filed its judgment on April 15, 2010.
c. A holder of a purchase money security interest in after-acquired inventory filed on March 20, 2010.
d. A purchaser in the ordinary course of business who purchased on April 10, 2010.
6. In determining whether the consideration requirement to form a contract has been satisfied, the consideration exchanged by the parties to the contract must be
a. Fair and reasonable under the circumstances.
b. Legally sufficient.
c. Exchanged simultaneously by the parties.
d. Of approximately equal value.
7. Pavers Roadway, Inc., contracts with Best Building Corporation to repave Best Building Corporation’s parking lot. The elements of a contract do not include
a. consideration.
b. contractual capacity.
c. legality.
d. practicality.
8. Holly writes a check on her account at Investment Bank to Jerry to pay a debt. Jerry negotiates the check by indorsement to Kelly, who negotiates the check by indorsement to Lisa, who presents it for payment to Interstate Bank. Holly is
|
not liable for payment under any circumstances.
|
|
primarily liable.
|
|
secondarily liable.
|
|
simultaneously liable.
|
9. Holly writes a check on her account at Investment Bank to Jerry to pay a debt. Jerry negotiates the check by indorsement to Kelly, who negotiates the check by indorsement to Lisa, who presents it for payment to Interstate Bank. If Investment Bank dishonors the check, Lisa can obtain payment from Jerry
|
if Lisa timely notifies Jerry.
|
|
only if Holly refuses to pay the check.
|
|
only if Holly and Kelly refuse to pay the check.
|
|
under no circumstances.
|
10. Nora enters into a contract with Owen’s Transport Company for the delivery of a shipment of fresh produce. If ambiguities appear in the contract, they will be construed against
a. the party who drafted the contract.
b. the party with the greater bargaining power.
c. the promisor.
d. the promisee.
11. On November 1, 2013, Ted sent by overnight mail a letter to Zena in which Ted offered to sell a rare vase. The offer requested that Zena s respond by telegram and that the response be sent on or before 5:00 p.m. on November 2, 2013. On November 2, 2013 at 3:00 p.m., Zena sent an acceptance by overnight mail. It did not reach Ted until November 5, 2013. Ted refused to complete the sale to Zena. Is there an enforceable contract?
a. No, because Zena did not accept by telegram.
b. No, because the offer required receipt of the acceptance within the time specified.
c. Yes, because the acceptance was effective when sent.
d. Yes, because the acceptance was made within the time specified.
12. Mary promises to pay her assistant Ned $10,000 in consideration of the services he provided over the years. Mary never pays Ned. Mary is
a. liable for payment of the $10,000.
b. liable only if Ned still works for Mary.
c. not liable, because the consideration is in the past.
d. not liable, because the consideration was unintentional.
13. Collection of EZ Sales Company’s debt to First Storage Corporation is barred by a statute of limitations. A new promise by EZ to pay the debt
a. may become enforceable if payments are made.
b. must be in writing.
c. requires consideration.
d. will not revive the obligation.
14. Auto Body Repair Shop (ABRS) promises to pay Ben $1,000 a week to work for ABRS. Ben accepts and quits his job with Car Care Service. ABRS fails to provide a job for Ben. Ben has a cause of action based on
a. an illusory promise.
b. a release.
c. past consideration.
d. promissory estoppel.
15. Pat, a world famous musician and composer, agrees to give ten piano lessons to Quinn in exchange for $1,000. Pat’s attempt to delegate his contract to Ruth, an inexperienced pianist, will probably be
a. permitted because contracts may be freely delegated.
b. permitted because the contract is concerned with music lessons.
c. prohibited because contracts may not be freely delegated.
d. prohibited because Pat and Ruth have very different skill levels.
16. Jill and Karl contract for the sale of Jill’s horse for $1,000. Unknown to either party, the horse has died. Karl is
|
a. entitled to another horse of equivalent value.
|
|
b. not required to pay due to the mutual mistake.
|
|
c. not required to pay due to the unilateral mistake.
|
|
d. required to pay because he assumed the risk the horse might die.
|
17. Alpha Company offers to sell Beta, Inc., 1,000 computers for a $1 million, states that the offer will be open for six days, and asks for a response by fax. On the fourth day, Beta sends an acceptance to Alpha via the mail, which is received on the sixth day. In this deal
a. a contract is formed.
b. no contract is formed, because Alpha asked for a response by fax.
c. no contract is formed, because Alpha received the acceptance late.
d. no contract is formed, because Beta sent the acceptance late.
18. Holly writes a check on her account at Investment Bank to Jerry to pay a debt. Jerry negotiates the check by indorsement to Kelly, who negotiates the check by indorsement to Lisa, who presents it for payment to Interstate Bank. If Investment Bank dishonors the check, Lisa can obtain payment from Kelly
|
if Lisa timely notifies Kelly.
|
|
only if Holly refuses to pay the check.
|
|
only if Holly and Jerry refuse to pay the check.
|
|
under no circumstances.
|
19. Furnishings, Inc., agrees to lease a desk to Better Resources, Inc. (BRI), which requests that the desk be left outside City Warehouse for BRI to pick up. Before BRI retrieves the desk, it is stolen. The loss is suffered by
a. A-1 Furnishings and BRI, but not City Warehouse.
b. A-1 Furnishings, BRI, and City Warehouse.
c. A-1 Furnishings only.
d. BRI only.
20. John, the secured party, perfects its security interest by filing a financing statement. What is the effect of perfection of John s security interest?
a. The secured party has priority in the collateral over most creditors who acquire a security interest in the same collateral after the filing.
b. The security interest becomes enforceable against the debtor.
c. The debtor is protected against all other parties who acquire an interest in the collateral after the filing.
d. None of the above.
21. Ample Country Stables contracts to buy 1,000 horseshoes from Blacksmith, Inc., for $1 per shoe. When the market price decreases to 50 cents per shoe, Ample refuses to go through with the deal. Blacksmith can recover
a. $1,500.
b. $1,000.
c. $500.
d. 0.
22. Farm Equipment, Inc., makes farming machinery. Gail discovers that her Farm Equipment tractor is defective and sues the maker for product liability based on negligence. To win, Gail must show that
a. Farm Equipment sold the tractor to Gail.
b. Gail knew and appreciated the risk caused by the defect.
c. Gail suffered an injury caused by the defect.
d. the “defect” was a commonly known danger.
23. Ida signs a check payable to Jane and gives it to her. Jane indorses the back, and transfers the check to Kyle. To negotiate the check to Leo, Kyle must
a. indorse “Kyle” on the back and deliver the check to Leo.
b. indorse “pay to the order of Leo [signed] Kyle” on the back and deliver the check to Leo.
c. only deliver the check to Leo.
d. transfer the check through the drawee bank.
24. Local Appliance Store, the secured party, sells a refrigerator to John, a consumer, for the use of John s family. John signs a sales agreement, a loan note, and a security agreement. Local Appliance Store fails to file either the security agreement or a financing statement with the secretary of state. Which of the following statements is accurate?
a. The secured party has priority in the collateral over most creditors who subsequently acquire a security interest in the same collateral.
b. The security interest is not enforceable against the debtor.
c. The security interest is not enforceable against subsequent creditors.
d. The assets subject to the security interest cannot become part of the bankruptcy estate in the event the creditor files an involuntary petition against the debtor.
25. Ruth, a minor, charges groceries at Sam’s Mini-Mart. Two days later, Ruth disaffirms the purchase. Ruth owes Sam’s Mini Mart
|
the reasonable value of the groceries.
|
|
the retail value of the groceries.
|
|
the wholesale value of the groceries.
|
|
|
26. With regard to a prior perfected security interest in goods for which a financing statement has been filed, which of the following parties is most likely to have a superior interest in the same collateral?
a. The trustee in bankruptcy of the debtor.
b. Lien creditors of the debtor.
c. A buyer of goods in the ordinary course of business.
d. A subsequent buyer of consumer goods who purchased the goods from another consumer.
27. Beth is convicted of arson for burning down her warehouse.. On an application for insurance from Cover-All Insurance Company on a new building, in answer to a question about prior convictions, Beth does not disclose her conviction. This makes the contract
|
binding because the omission is immaterial to Cover-All’s decision to issue coverage.
|
|
binding due to Cover-All’s failure to discover Beth’s conviction.
|
|
voidable by Beth because the omission is immaterial to Cover-All’s decision to issue coverage.
|
|
voidable by Cover-All because the omission is material to its decision to issue coverage.
|
Fact Pattern for Question 28
Fred enters into a contract under Gene’s threats. Later, Fred refuses to perform, claiming that he acted under duress.
28. Refer to Fact Pattern B. Gene sues to enforce the contract. In order for Fred to establish duress, Gene must have threatened
|
a. a civil suit.
|
|
b. a lost opportunity.
|
|
c. a social snubbing.
|
|
d. a wrongful act.
e. none of the above.
|
29. Century Properties. Inc., and Dandy Capital Corporation enter into a contract for a sale of land. To be enforceable, the contract must be in writing
|
Only if the land is valued at $50 or more.
|
|
Only if the land is valued at $500 or more.
|
|
Only if the land is valued at $5,000 or more.
|
|
In any case.
|
30. Timber Trees, Inc., and Land Corporation enter into an oral contract for Timber Trees, Inc. to sell its lumber mill to Land Corporation . Before Land Corporation takes possession, this contract is enforceable by
|
either party.
|
|
neither party.
|
|
Timber Trees only.
|
|
Land Corporation only because only the buyer can get specific performance.
|
31. Lola agrees to pay Mira’s debt to New Sales Corporation if Mira does not pay it. Lola does not get any personal benefit for or from the agreement. To be enforceable against Lola, the promise must be in writing
|
if the debt is paid by Mira.
|
|
if the debt is for at least $50.
|
|
if the debt is for at least $500.
|
|
in any case.
|
Fact Pattern for Question 32
Macro Marketing, Inc. (Macro), and National Food Corporation (NFC) discuss the terms of a contract under which NFC is to provide personal services to Macro. The next day, Macro faxes NFC a memo on Macro’s letterhead that summarizes the items on which they agreed, including a two-year term. NFC immediately begins to perform, but Macro refuses to pay. NFC promptly institutes a law suit seeking damages.
32. Refer to Fact Pattern for question 32. The contract between Macro and NFC is
|
subject to the Statute of Frauds collateral-promise provision, and is probably unenforceable.
|
|
subject to the Statute of Frauds services rule, and is probably enforceable.
|
|
barred by the statute of limitations, and is therefore probably unenforceable.
|
|
subject to the Statute of Frauds one-year rule, and is probably unenforceable.
|
Fact Pattern for Question 33
Jeff and Kris sign a written contract for the sale of Jeff’s Koffee Kiosk to Kris. The parties intend their written contract to be a final statement of the terms of their agreement.
33. Refer to Fact Pattern for question 33. Kris later disputes some of the provisions of the deal with Jeff. The dispute results in litigation, and the court finds the terms of the agreement are ambiguous. The court will most likely
|
exclude evidence that buttresses the written terms.
|
|
exclude evidence that contradicts the written terms.
|
|
allow evidence that explains the terms.
|
|
dismiss the action because there was a lack of mutual asset and no contract was formed.
|
34. Tom dies owning stock as joint tenant with right of survivorship with his son, having bank accounts in his name in trust for his daughter, and owning real estate as tenants by the entirety with his wife. The trustee of Tom s revocable trust holds title the rest of his assets. Under the terms of the revocable trust, all assets of the trust will be distributed to Tom s son and daughter on Tom s death. Tom s wife, son and daughter survive him. Under the terms of Tom s will, Tom leaves all of his property to his mother, who also survived him. Tom died
a. intestate.
b. without any probate assets.
c. with a last will that will controls the disposition of his assets.
d. None of the above.
35. Manny, as buyer, wants to transfer his rights under a written real estate contract with Nila, as seller, to Opie. To ensure that the transfer of rights is valid, Manny must
|
have this right expressly stated in the contract.
|
|
file a notice of assignment in the public records.
|
|
have the contract recorded in the public records.
|
|
none of the choices.
|
36. Rural Development Corporation (RDC) and Sid enter into a contract for the clear-cutting of RDC’s fifty-acre tract for which RDC agrees to pay Sid. Sid is the owner of Timber Logging Company. Sid transfers his duty to log the tract under the contract to Timber Logging Company. Timber Logging Company is
|
a delegatee and is subject to the terms of the agreement between RDC and Sid.
|
|
a delagetee and is not entitled to collect under the contract from RDC for services provided by Timber.
|
|
an obligee and is not required to perform under the contract.
|
|
a prohibitee.
|
37. Mke, a physician, renders aid to Nancy, who is injured and unconscious after an avalanche. Mike can recover the cost of the aid from Nancy
|
even if Nancy was not aware of the aid when it was given.
|
|
only if Nancy recovers because of the aid.
|
|
only if Noel was aware of the aid at the time it was given.
|
|
under no circumstances.
|
38. Pat, a world famous musician, agrees to give ten piano lessons to Quinn in exchange for $1,000. Pat’s attempt to transfer his contract duties to Ruth, an inexperienced pianist, will probably be
|
permitted because contracts may be freely delegated.
|
|
prohibited in this case unless the contract expressly permits delegation.
|
|
permitted if the contract is silent on the issue.
|
|
prohibited in any case.
|
39. Chaz and Dolly enter into a five year contract under which Chaz agrees to provide maintenance services for Dolly’s Ski Resort. Chaz transfers his rights and obligations under the contract to Mark. Mark
|
performs
|
under the contract, and Dolly is aware of the Mark s performance of the contract. However, Dolly refuses to pay Mark. Assuming Mark s services are properly performed and Mark sues Dolly, Mark
|
|
a. will be successful in enforcing the contract if performance depends on the personal skills or talents of the obligor.
|
|
b. will probably not be able to recover under the express terms of the contract.
|
|
.
|
c. may be able to recover the value of his services.
d. may not recover.
|
40. On August 1, 2010 Delia and Edwin entered into an agreement for Edwin to lease Delia s country home for two months during the following summer for $1000 per month. Delia promised to vacate the property for Edwin by July 1, 2011 with the lease to begin on July 1, 2011. If these promises are not in writing, they are most likely
41. To avoid liability for intentional injuries, Power Corporation includes in its contracts an exculpatory clause. This is
|
enforceable if the other parties are protected from liability.
|
|
enforceable if the other parties sign the contract.
|
|
enforceable if the other parties have equal bargaining power.
|
|
not enforceable.
|
42. MicroCorp hires Nick to work for one month at a weekly salary of $400. A MicroCorp representative orally agrees two weeks later to double Nick’s salary. This agreement is
|
enforceable because an employment contract is an adhesion contract.
|
|
enforceable because the parties have executed an accord and satisfaction.
|
|
unenforceable because Nick has incurred no additional detriment in exchange for MicroCorp’s promise.
|
|
unenforceable because Nick’s performance is uncertain.
|
43. Karen writes on a piece of paper, “I owe you $600,” signs it, and gives it to Lou. This instrument is
|
|
|
nonnegotiable, because it does not recite any consideration.
|
|
nonnegotiable, because it does not state any conditions to payment.
d. none of the above.
|
44. Pam signs an instrument payable to the order of Quick Credit, Inc., that allows a holder to demand payment of the entire amount due, with interest, if Pam fails to make a payment. This instrument is
|
|
|
nonnegotiable, because a holder can move up the payment date.
|
|
nonnegotiable, because moving up the payment date is conditional.
|
|
nonnegotiable, because the exact payment date cannot be determined from the face of the instrument.
|
45. Wyatt inherits a promissory note from Xena, his aunt. Wyatt has no notice that the note has been dishonored or is overdue. Wyatt has the rights of
|
a holder and an HDC.
|
|
a holder only.
|
|
an HDC only.
|
|
neither a holder nor an HDC.
|
46. Kettlecorn Investment Bank, Inc., and Lone Bank are secured parties with security interests in property owned by Metal Fabrication Corporation. Priority between these security interests is generally determined by
|
the amount of the claim.
|
|
the custom in the trade.
|
|
the time of perfection.
|
|
the date of the loan.
|
47. General Leasing Company (GLC) buys equipment for use as inventory, borrowing $1,000,000 from Helpful Finance Corporation (Helpful), with Helpful taking back a security interest in the equipment. The next day, GLC borrows $500,000 from Interstate Bank (Interstate), which loan is also secured by a security interest in the equipment. GLC defaults on both loans. Suppose that two weeks after GLC takes possession of the equipment, Helpful and Interstate file financing statements, with Interstate filing first. In that circumstance, the party with priority to the equipment is
|
|
|
Helpful and Interstate proportionately.
|
|
Helpful only.
|
|
Interstate Bank only
|
48. Which is not allowed as a federal exemption under the Federal Bankruptcy Code?
- A specified amount of equity in one motor vehicle.
- Unemployment compensation.
- A specified amount of value in books and tools of one s trade.
- All of the above are allowed.
49. Under the liquidation provisions of Chapter 7 of the Federal Bankruptcy Code, a debtor will be denied a discharge in bankruptcy if the debtor
- Fails to list a creditor.
- Owes alimony or child support.
- Cannot pay administration expenses.
- Refuses to satisfactorily explain a loss of assets.
50. Which of the following transfers by a debtor, within 90 days prior to the filing for bankruptcy, could be set aside as a preferential payment?
- Making a gift to charity.
- Paying a business utility bill.
- Borrowing money from a bank secured by a mortgage on the debtor s business property.
- Prepaying an installment loan on inventory.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. (TCO 7) Elliot’s Escargots sells commercial and home snail extraction tools and serving pieces. Currently, the snail extraction line of products takes up approximately 50 percent of the company’s retail floor space. The CEO of Elliot’s wants to decide if the company should continue offering snail extraction tools or focus only on serving pieces. If the snail extraction tools are dropped, salaries and other direct fixed costs can be avoided and serving piece sales would increase by 13 percent. Allocated fixed costs are assigned based on relative sales.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. What distinguishes a merchandising business from a service business?
2. Can a business earn a gross profit but incur a net loss? Explain.
3. In computing the cost of merchandise sold, does each of the following items increase or decrease that cost? (a) freight, (b) beginning merchandise inventory,
(c) purchase discounts, (d) ending merchandise inventory
4. Describe how the periodic system differs from the perpetual system of accounting for merchandise inventory.
5. Differentiate between the multiple-step and the single-step forms of the income statement.
6. What are the major advantages and disadvantages of the single-step form of income statement compared to the multiple-step statement?
7. What type of revenue is reported in the Other income section of the multiple-step income statement?
8. Name at least three accounts that would normally appear in the chart of accounts
of a merchandising business but would not appear in the chart of accounts of a service business.
9. How are sales to customers using MasterCard and VISA recorded?
10. The credit period during which the buyer of merchandise is allowed to pay usually begins with what date?
11. What is the meaning of (a) 1/15, n/60; (b) n/30; (c) n/eom?
12. What is the nature of (a) a credit memo issued by the seller of merchandise, (b) a debit memo issued by the buyer of merchandise?
13. Who bears the freight when the terms of sale are (a) FOB shipping point, (b) FOB destination?
14. Business Outfitters Inc., which uses a perpetual inventory system, experienced a normal inventory shrinkage of $9,175. What accounts would be debited and credited to record the adjustment for the inventory shrinkage at the end of the accounting period?
15. Assume that Business Outfitters Inc. in Eye Opener 14 experienced an abnormal inventory shrinkage of $80,750. Business Outfitters Inc. has decided to record the abnormal inventory shrinkage so that it would be separately disclosed on the income statement. What account would be debited for the abnormal inventory shrinkage?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attachment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise 10-11 Prepare a statement of stockholders’ equity [LO7] Power Drive Corporation designs and produces a line of golf equipment and golf apparel. Power Drive has 100,000 shares of common stock outstanding as of the beginning of 2012. Power Drive has the following transactions affecting stockholders’ equity in 2012. March 1 Issues 55,000 additional shares of $1 par value common stock for $52 per share. May 10 Repurchases 5,000 shares of treasury stock for $55 per share. June 1 Declares a cash dividend of $1.50 per share to all stockholders of record on June 15.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week 6 – Chapter 7 Pre- Quiz Study 15 QUESTIONS Question 1 Which of the following stages of the management decision-making process is improperly sequenced? Evaluate possible courses of action ? Make decision. Assign responsibility for the decision ? Identify the problem. Identify the problem ? Determine possible courses of action. Assign responsibility for decision ? Determine possible courses of action.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need help on an accounting quiz and test
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Exercise 14-27 Accounting Rate of Return
You may use the attached spreadsheet to help you complete this activity, but you are not required to do so. You will find the spreadsheet by clicking on the link in the drop-down menu above.
Each of the following scenarios is independent. Assume that all cash flows are after-tax cash flows.
a. Cobre Company is considering the purchase of new equipment that will speed up the process for extracting copper. The equipment will cost $3,600,000 and have a life of five years with no expected salvage value. The expected cash flows associated with the project are as follows:
b. Emily Hansen is considering investing in one of the following two projects. Either project will require an investment of $75,000. The expected cash revenues minus cash expenses for the two projects follow. Assume each project is depreciable.
c. Suppose that a project has an ARR of 30 percent (based on initial investment) and that the average net income of the project is $120,000.
d. Suppose that a project has an ARR of 50 percent and that the investment is $150,000.
1. Compute the ARR on the new equipment that Cobre Company is considering. Round your answer to one decimal place. _________________ %
2. Conceptual Connection: Which project should Emily Hansen choose based on the ARR? Notice that the payback period is the same for both investments (thus equally preferred).
_________________
Unlike the payback period, explain why ARR correctly signals that one project should be preferred over the other.
The input in the box below will not be graded, but may be reviewed and considered by your instructor.
_________________
3. How much did the company in Scenario c invest in the project? If required, round your answer to the nearest dollar. $ _________________
4. What is the average net income earned by the project in Scenario d? If required, round your answer to the nearest dollar. $ _________________
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
One comprehensive forum topic response is assigned weekly. Students are required to select and research one of the forum topics listed below using a minimum of 3 reference sources in addition to the textbook and then write a 1,000-word or more response to the forum topic. (Will be submitted using “Turn It In”).
Chapter 1: An Overview of Financial Management and the Financial Environment
-Types of Company Ownership
-The Primary Objective of the Corporation
-The Process of Securitization and its Results
-Financial Institutions
-Financial Markets
-The Global Economic Crisis
-Derivatives (Web Extension 1A)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please see attached for description. No word minimum. PLease use APA when citing sources. Original work only.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
One comprehensive forum topic response is assigned weekly. Students are required to select and research one of the forum topics listed below using a minimum of 3 reference sources in addition to the textbook and then write a 1,000-word or more response to the forum topic. (Will be submitted using “Turn It In”).
Chapter 1: An Overview of Financial Management and the Financial Environment
-Types of Company Ownership
-The Primary Objective of the Corporation
-The Process of Securitization and its Results
-Financial Institutions
-Financial Markets
-The Global Economic Crisis
-Derivatives (Web Extension 1A)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Please READ INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY for this slideshow assignment.
2. Will include Instructions as an attachment. Chapters 16, 19, 20 &29 (mini case study-4 in Ch 29) is also attached, if needed (CHAPTERS provided are not required)
3. Post assignment ONLY as slideshow attachment
4. Cite work. No plagiarism.
5. First slide- Use as a Title Page.
6. Last slide- Use as areference page (APA guidelines).
7. Use footnotes at bottom of each slide, when possible.
8. Pictures and color sheme is NOT REQUIRED.
9. Any questions please email me before posting completed work.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Non- current asset
Internal Reporting
External Reporting
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Louella was born into a low-income family and lives in a poverty-stricken neighborhood. She recently landed a job as wardrobe consultant at High Fashions Ltd., a retailer of expensive women’s clothing at an Elm Grove shopping mall. The employee manual at High Fashions makes it clear that employees should wear not only fashions of the type available in the store but “careful attention should be paid to wearing the latest cutting-edge fashions whether they have met with commercial success or not.” In addition, under the theory that certain colors are more flattering than others, Louella has been instructed to wear clothes that are primarily shades of black or grey each day. Louella takes her job seriously and wears the latest in black or grey haute couture whether she likes the clothes or not. In fact, due to her modest upbringing, Louella only wears her work clothes while at the store and commuting to and from work. Besides, Louella believes that wearing the same color of clothes each day outside of work would be odd and it’s not “her color.” Can Louella deduct the cost and upkeep of her expensive outfits under §162 as a business expense deduction on her Federal income tax return?
Your responsibility:
Prepare a tax research memo that resolves the issue of deducting Louella’s work clothes. You will need to support your conclusion using primary sources of tax law. Your textbook is NOT primary authority.
You
must use proper citation form in your memo (see Chapter 2 for help with citation form). The form for this communication should be professional and in the form of a tax research memo (example posted on Blackboard and a similar example in your text on p. 2-27). Do yourself a favor and look at the grading rubric
before you submit.
This memo should be whatever length you feel is appropriate to resolve the issues. We do NOT use a bibliography or list of references in a tax research memo. You will see that citations are within the text of the document in the example. Once a court case has been cited in full, it can be referred to using simply the name in
italics.
You are required to individually prepare this document (no assistance from your classmates). Please
upload your memo into Turnitin in Blackboard by the due date at 11:30pm.
The grading rubric is posted in Blackboard. For this assignment, points are distributed as follows:
| Content – Facts |
5 |
| Content – Analysis |
10 |
| Content – Conclusion |
5 |
| Organization |
5 |
| Audience |
5 |
| Style |
5 |
| Mechanics |
10 |
| Referencing |
5 |
| Total |
50 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Question 1 (17 marks)
HiSpeed Ltd. plans to manufacture cross-country skiing equipment. Its cash flows are highly dependent on the weather in early winter. HiSpeed operates under ideal conditions of uncertainty. On August 1, 2014, the beginning of its first year in business, HiSpeed acquires equipment to be used in its operations. The equipment will last two years, at which time its salvage value will be zero. The company finances the equipment purchase by issuing common shares.
HiSpeed s annual net cash flows will be $800 if the weather is snowy and $300 if it is not snowy. Assume that cash flows are received at year end. In each year, the objective probability that the weather is snowy is 0.7 and 0.3 that it is not snowy. The interest rate in the economy is 3% in both years.
HiSpeed will pay a dividend of $50 at the end of each year of operation.
Required
a. (9 marks)
In 2014, the weather is snowy. Prepare a statement of financial position as at July 31, 2015, the end of HiSpeed s first year of operations, and an income statement for the year.
b. (2 marks)
What timing of revenue recognition is implicit in the income statement you have prepared in part (a)? When ideal conditions do not hold, is this timing of revenue recognition relevant? Is it reliable? Explain.
c. (6 marks)
Assume that HiSpeed paid the present value you calculated in part (a) for its equipment. Calculate HiSpeed s net income for the year ended July 31, 2015 on a historical cost basis, assuming that equipment is depreciated on a straight-line basis. Under the more realistic assumption that ideal conditions do not hold, which measure of net income is most relevant? Which is most reliable? Why?
Question 2 (18 marks)
Prem has $2,000 that he wishes to invest for one year. He has narrowed his choices down to one of the following two actions:
i: Buy bonds of X Ltd., a company that has a very high debt-to-equity ratio. These bonds pay 8% interest, unless X defaults, in which case Prem will receive no interest but will recover his principal. (a1)
ii: Buy Canada Savings Bonds, paying 3% interest. (a2)
Prem assesses the prior probability of X Ltd. defaulting as 0.40. His utility for money is given by the square root of the amount of his net payoff. That is, if he buys the Canada Savings Bonds, his net payoff is $60, yielding utility of 60 = 7.75, and so on. Prem is a rational decision maker.
Required
a. (4 marks)
Based on his prior probability calculations, which action should Prem take? Show your calculations.
b. (9 marks)
Before making a final decision, Prem decides he needs more information. He obtains X Ltd. s current financial statements and examines its times-interest-earned ratio. This ratio can be either high or low. Upon calculating the ratio, Prem observes that it is low. On the basis of his prior experience in bond investments, Prem knows the following conditional probabilities:
|
|
Debt-to-Equity Ratio
|
|
Future State
|
Low
|
High
|
|
ND (no default)
|
0.50
|
0.50
|
|
D (default)
|
0.05
|
0.95
|
Which action should Prem take based on this new information? Show your calculations; take each step to two decimal places.
c. (5 marks)
An accounting standard (IAS 16) allows X Ltd. to value its property, plant, and equipment at fair value. The company plans to adopt this option, since it will reduce its debt-to-equity ratio.
Evaluate (in words no calculations required) the likely impact of this adoption on the main diagonal probabilities of the information system in part (b).
Question 3 (15 marks)
Efficient securities market theory has long been under attack from behavioural finance, which draws on behavioural theories of investor behaviour to explain why security prices do not always behave as the economic theories of rational investing and market efficiency predict. These attacks have increased since the 2007-2008 security market meltdowns.
Required
a. (4 marks)
Explain why prospect theory predicts that security prices will differ from their prices under efficient security markets theory.
b. (4 marks)
Describe two accounting-related efficient securities market anomalies and, for each, explain why it is an anomaly.
c. (3 marks)
The efficient securities market anomalies suggest that investors underreact to the full information content of financial statements. Choose one behavioural theory that predicts this underreaction and explain why it predicts underreaction.
d. (4 marks)
Should accountants be concerned that the importance of financial reporting may decline if behaviourally biased investors do not use all the information in the financial statements? Explain.
Assignment 2 Session 2 (Winter)
This assignment is based on Modules1through7and is due at the end of Module7. It is worth10%of your final course grade.
Refer to the general instructions in Assignment 1.
Question 1 (20 marks)
Empirical tests of the three hypotheses of positive accounting theory (PAT) are often based on the amount of discretionary accruals contained in net income.
Required
a. (4 marks)
What are discretionary accruals? Why are they useful in testing the three PAT hypotheses?
b. (5 marks)
The methodology designed by Jones (1991) (called the Jones Model) is usually used to estimate discretionary accruals. Outline in words how the Jones Model measures discretionary accruals.
c. (4 marks)
For good corporate governance, contracts should be designed efficiently. A researcher finds, for a sample of firms, that the covenant slack in debt contracts (the difference between the critical value of a debt covenant ratio as specified in a debt contract and the value of that ratio on the borrower s books on the date of the contract) is greater on average with greater variability over time of the debt covenant ratios. Is this finding evidence of efficient or opportunistic contracting? Explain your answer.
d. (7 marks)
Discretionary accruals can be used opportunistically or efficiently. Conservative accounting can be regarded as a form of discretionary accruals because the firm chooses to report (that is, accrue) lower asset values and/or higher liability values. A researcher finds that firms with income escalator clauses in their debt contracts (an escalator clause increases the covenant level of net worth the firm is required to maintain under the contract by a percentage of reported net income) tend to use more conservative accounting than similar firms with no escalator clauses in their debt contracts. Is this finding consistent with efficient or opportunistic contracting? Explain your answer.
Question 2 (20 marks)
Several accounting standards include ceiling tests (also called impairment tests).
Required
a. (6 marks)
What is a ceiling test? Identify two IASB accounting standards that contain a ceiling test and describe the test.
b. (6 marks)
Ceiling tests are usually regarded in this course as one-sided examples of the measurement approach. However, they can also be regarded as examples of conservative accounting, as assets are written down but not written up. Ceiling tests are an example of conservative accounting. Why do bondholders favour ceiling tests? How do bondholders reward the firm for conservative accounting such as ceiling tests?
c. (4 marks)
Explain briefly why auditors favour ceiling tests.
d. (4 marks)
Outline the accounting for research and development (R&D) under IASB standards. Is this accounting conservative? Why? Explain why accountants account for R&D as they do.
Question 3 (22 marks)
New Century Financial Corp., formed in 1995, was a large mortgage lender in the United States. Many of these mortgages were securitized and transferred to investors. New Century accounted for the proceeds of these securitizations as sales. However, New Century committed to buy back mortgages that became troubled within up to a year after transfer.
New Century would retain some mortgages for itself (called retained interests), from which it would receive future cash flows. Also, the transfer agreements included the right to service the mortgages, for which New Century charged a fee. New Century valued these retained interests and servicing rights at current value, based on their discounted expected future cash flows. Thus, revenue from retained interests was recognized at the time of retention, and servicing revenue was recognized at the time of mortgage transfer. These policies required numerous estimates, and contrasted with a more conservative policy of recognizing revenues as cash flows from retained interests were received and servicing responsibilities rendered.
The company s share price increased dramatically, to a high of US$64 in 2004. Its reported net income reached $1.4 billion in 2005.
However, New Century seriously underestimated the extent of its mortgage buybacks and resulting credit losses. Of $40 billion of mortgages granted in the first three quarters of 2006, it provided only $13.9 million for buybacks. Investor concerns about increasing buybacks rose in 2006 as the 2007-2008 market meltdowns approached. These buyback concerns added to concerns about early revenue recognition from retained interests and servicing. Also, the company failed to write down its retained interests as the current value of the underlying mortgages decreased.
New Century was soon unable to borrow money to finance mortgage buybacks. Its shares lost 90% of their value, and the company was delisted from the New York Stock Exchange. In April 2007, it filed for bankruptcy protection.
New Century s auditor (KPMG) was drawn into the lawsuits that followed. KPMG denied liability, claiming that the provisions for buybacks were deemed adequate at the time, and blaming New Century s failure on the market meltdowns of 2007-2008. In December 2009, the SEC filed civil fraud charges against three former executives of New Century, seeking damages and return of bonuses. Several other lawsuits followed. In November 2010, financial media reported final settlement of a class action lawsuit that included a payment of over $65 million by former company officers and directors, and a payment of $44.75 million by auditor KPMG.
Required
a. (4 marks)
Use the concept of relevance to defend New Century s policy of recognizing revenue as it securitized and sold mortgages. What was the policy s major weakness?
b. (4 marks)
Outline a more conservative accounting policy for New Century s mortgage sale transactions. Consider both statement of financial position and net income effects of your policy.
Hint: Read Theory in Practice 8.3, text page 314.
c. (6 marks)
Use two characteristics of investor behaviour based on psychology to explain the rapid rise in New Century s share price. Be sure to identify the specific behavioural characteristics you draw on in your answer.
d. (4 marks)
Despite your answer in part (c), is the rapid rise in New Century s share price necessarily inconsistent with (semi-strong) securities market efficiency? Explain.
e. (4 marks)
Note that retained interests meet the definition of a financial instrument. How would these financial instruments be accounted for under IAS 39?
Question 4 (18 marks)
Paul owns and operates a small, fast-growing business. He decides to hire a full-time manager. He will then take a year off to travel, and on his return will concentrate on the technical aspects of the business.
Martha applies for the job. During her interview, Paul finds that Martha is risk averse, with utility for money equal to the square root of the dollar compensation received. She has reservation utility of 6 and is effort averse, with disutility of effort of 2 if she works hard (a1), and 1 if she does not work hard (a2).
Paul s business has, in previous years, earned net income before manager compensation of $800 75% of the time, and income of $0 25% of the time. Paul has taken courses in accounting and has always prepared the financial statements himself. Paul has always worked hard, and reckons that if he did not work hard net income would have been $800 only 20% of the time and $0 80% of the time. He expects this earnings pattern to continue into the future with a new manager. Paul realizes that he must motivate Martha to work hard, and offers her a one-year contract, with compensation based on a proportion of net income before manager compensation.
Note: Take all calculations to two decimal places.
Required
a. (6 marks)
What proportion of net income must Paul offer Martha so that she will accept the position and work hard? Show calculations.
b. (8 marks)
Assuming that Martha accepts Paul s offer from part (a), show calculations that verify she will in fact be motivated to work hard.
c. (4 marks)
Paul realizes that he cannot observe his firm s unmanaged net income he can only observe the net income Martha reports. He is concerned that Martha will opportunistically manage earnings while he is away to report net income of $800 while not working hard. Suggest to Paul how he can reduce the likelihood that Martha will do this in a one-year contract.
Question 5 (20 marks)
Most firms hedge at least some of their risks. Hedging can take two basic forms, namely natural hedging and hedging by means of derivative instruments. The use of derivatives as hedges has expanded greatly in recent years.
Generally, under accounting standards (IAS 39 and related U.S. standards), derivative instruments are fair valued with any unrealized gain or loss included in net income. However, hedge accounting provides some exceptions to this rule.
Required
a. (4 marks)
A firm has a large amount of long-term debt (valued on a cost basis), and decides to set up a natural hedge of this debt. However, a natural hedge can lead to excess net income volatility, that is, net income volatility greater than the actual volatility of the firm s operations. Explain how this can happen.
b. (6 marks)
Suggest two ways that the excess net income volatility arising in part (a) can be prevented.
c. (6 marks)
IAS 39 identifies two basic types of hedge. Describe each type. For each type, explain how IAS 39 controls excess net income volatility arising from entering into the hedge.
d. (4 marks)
Use the bonus plan hypothesis of positive accounting theory to explain why a firm manager dislikes excess net income volatility. Are the policies to control excess net income volatility you described in parts (a) and (b) unethical? Explain why or why not.
Assignment 3 Session 2 (Winter)
This assignment is based on Modules1through9and is due at the end of Module9. It is worth5%of your final course grade.
Refer to the general instructions in Assignment 1.
Question 1 (14 marks)
In July 2011, financial media reported that Glencore International, plc, a large, Swiss-based multinational producer of metals, energy, and agricultural commodities, had decided to stop reporting quarterly financial results from the second quarter of 2011. Glencore s first-quarter 2011 sales and earnings were sharply higher than they were for the same quarter of the previous year, but it appeared that earnings for the first quarter still fell short of market expectations.
Required
a. (4 marks)
Outline two possible reasons why Glencore reduced its information production in this manner.
b. (4 marks)
How do you predict that the stock market will react to this decision by Glencore? Explain.
c. (6 marks)
The covenants in Glencore s debt contract required the company to report quarterly. To overcome the rigidity inherent in debt contracts, Glencore offered to make a cash payment to consenting bondholders of 0.25% of their holdings, up to a maximum of $2.4 million, if they agreed to drop the covenant. If you were a Glencore bondholder, would you accept Glencore s offer or not? Explain your reasons.
Question 2 (18 marks)
Income smoothing is a common earnings management pattern. Many managers feel that their reputations, and their firms share prices, are enhanced by a smooth, steadily growing sequence of reported earnings.
Required
a. (4 marks)
A behaviourally biased investor observes a firm s earnings increasing steadily over time. The investor decides that this firm is a growth firm. Identify the specific behavioural bias that may underlie this investor behaviour and explain why it leads to identifying the firm as a growth firm. Is the investor necessarily correct in this identification as a growth firm? Explain why or why not.
b. (4 marks)
Some firms have used low-persistence accruals to smooth net income to a level that the firm s managers felt would persist. Is this type of earnings management good or bad in terms of usefulness to equity investors?
Does such smoothing benefit the manager whose compensation depends on reported net income? Explain why or why not.
c. (5 marks)
A researcher finds that firms that are growing rapidly have, on average, a lower proportion of manager compensation based on net income, relative to share-based compensation, than firms that are not growing rapidly. Explain why. Use concepts of recognition lag, sensitivity, and precision in your answer.
d. (5 marks)
A firm that has smoothed earnings for many years needs to manage its earnings upwards this year to maintain the pattern of smooth, steady earnings that it has been reporting. The firm anticipates a period of lower earnings next year. Would the firm manager be wise to smooth earnings this year? Explain why or why not.
Question 3 (18 marks)
In January 2011, the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) adopted a requirement that companies give shareholders a say on pay of senior management. This requirement is part of the implementation of the 2010 Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act, passed by the U.S. congress in response to the 2007-2008 market meltdowns, including widespread concerns that senior managers were overpaid. Shareholders will be asked to vote on executive compensation packages at least once every three years. The result of the vote is non-binding on the company. Results of the shareholder vote must be publicly disclosed.
In Canada, the Ontario Securities Commission is considering similar requirements.
Required
a. (2 marks)
With what theory of executive compensation is say on pay most consistent? Explain.
b. (6 marks)
The SEC is proposing that the compensation committee of the board of directors must consist of members independent of management. Also, the committee will have full authority to retain consultants, lawyers, and other advisors. Would such proposals, if implemented, eliminate the need for giving shareholders a say on pay? Explain.
c. (4 marks)
The expected utility of compensation to a manager can be much less than the sum of dollar compensation, share, and option awards. Explain why.
d. (6 marks)
Do you think the say on pay requirements and implementation of the SEC proposals on compensation committee member independence and freedom to hire advisors will be effective in increasing the efficiency of executive compensation contracts? Explain. Define a (second-best) efficient compensation contract as part of your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
- After reading the article of Apple Tree, please summarize the key issues and your opinion on each valuation approach.
- How can you estimate firm’s cost of equity (minimum rate of return that investors require in the market) from PE (price/earnings ratio)? What does it mean? How is it related to valuation process?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wayne Terrago, controller for Robbin Industries, was reviewing production cost reports for the year. One amount in these reports continued to bother him-advertising. During the year, the company had instituted an expensive advertising campaign to sell some of its slower-moving products. It was still too early to tell whether the advertising campaign was successful.
There had been much internal debate as how to report advertising cost. The vice president of finance argued that advertising costs should be reported as a cost of production, just like direct materials and direct labor. He therefore recommended that this cost be identified as manufacturing overhead and reported as part of inventory costs until sold. Others disagreed. Terrago believed that this cost should be reported as an expense of the current period, based on the conservatism principle. Others argued that it should be reported as Prepaid Advertising and reported as a current asset.
The president finally had to decide the issue. He argued that these costs should be reported as inventory. His arguments were practical ones. He noted that the company was experiencing financial difficulty and expensing this amount in the current period might jeopardize a planned bond offering. Also, by reporting the advertising costs as inventory rather than as prepaid advertising, less attention would be directed to it by the financial community.
Instructions
1. Who are the stakeholders in this situation?
2. What are the ethical issues involved in this situation?
3. What would you do if you were Wayne Terrago?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Raney Company uses a flexible budget for manufacturing overhead based on direct labor hours. Variable manufacturing overhead costs per direct labor hour are as follows:
|
Indirect labor
|
1.00
|
|
Indirect materials
|
0.50
|
|
Utilities
|
0.40
|
|
Fixed overhead costs per moth are:
|
|
|
Supervision
|
4,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
1,500
|
|
Property taxes
|
800
|
The company believes it will normally operate in a range of 7,000 to 10,000 direct labor hours per month.
Instructions:
Prepare a monthly flexible manufacturing overhead budget for 2010 for the expected range of activity, using increments of 1,000 direct labor hours.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Coca-cola Company hardly needs an introduction. A line taken from the cover of a recent annual report says it all: if you measured time in servings of Coca-Cola, “a billion Coca-cola’s ago was yesterday morning.” On average, everyU.S.citizen dinks 363 8-ounce servings of Coca-cola products each year. Coca-Cola’s primary line of business is the making and selling of syrup to bottlers. These bottlers then sell the finished bottles and cans of Coca-Cola to the consumer. In the annual repot of Coca-Cola, the following information was provided.
THE COCA-COLA COMPANY
Management Discussion
Our gross margin declined to 61 percent this year from 62 percent in the prior yearr, primarily due to costs for materials such as sweeteners and packaging.
The increases [in selling expenses] in the last two years were primarily due to higher marketing expenditures in support of our Company’s volume growth.
We measure our sales volume in two ways: (1) gallon shipment of concentrates and syrups and (2) cases of finished product (bottles and cans of Code sold by bottlers).
Instructions
Answer the following questions.
a. Are sweeteners and packaging a variable cost or a fixed cost? What is the impact on the contribution margin of an increase in the per unit cost of sweeteners or packaging? What are the implications for profitability?
b. in your opinion, are marketing expenditures a fixed cost, variable cost, or mixed cost
c. Which of the two measures cited for measuring volume represents the activity index as defined in this chapter? Why might Coca-Cola use two different measures?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bluma Co. uses a perpetual inventory system and both an accounts receivable and an accounts payable subsidiary ledger. Balances related to both the general ledger and the subsidiary ledger for Bluma are indicated in the working papers. Presented on the next page are a series of transactions for Bluma Co. for the month of January. Credit sales terms are 2/10, n/30. The cost of all merchandise sold was 55% of the sales price.
Jan. 3 Sell merchandise on account to B. Richey $3,100, invoice no. 510, and to J. Forbes $1,800, invoice no. 511.
5 Purchase merchandise fromS. Vogel$5,000 and D. Lynch $2,200, terms n/30.
7 Receive checks fromS. LaDew$4,000 and B. Garcia $2,000 after discount period has lapsed.
8 Pay freight on merchandise purchased $235.
9 Send checks to S. Hoyt for $9,000 less 2% cash discount, and to D. Omara for $11,000 less 1% cash discount.
9 Issue credit of $300 to J. Forbes for merchandise returned.
10 Summary daily cash sales total $15,500.
11 Sell merchandise on account to R. Dvorak $1,600, invoice no. 512, and to S. LaDew $900, invoice no. 513.
12 Pay rent of $1,000 for January.
13 Receive payment in full from B. Richey and J. Forbes less cash discounts.
15 Withdraw $800 cash by M. Bluma for personal use.
15 Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.
16 Purchase merchandise from D. Omara $18,000, terms 1/10, n/30;S. Hoyt$14,200, terms 2/10, n/30; and S. Vogel $1,500, terms n/30.
17 Pay $400 cash for office supplies.
18 Return $200 of merchandise toS. Hoytand receive credit.
20 Summary daily cash sales total $20,100.
21 Issue $15,000 note, maturing in 90 days, to R. Moses in payment of balance due.
21 Receive payment in full fromS. LaDewless cash discount.
22 Sell merchandise on account to B. Richey $2,700, invoice no. 514, and to R. Dvorak $1,300, invoice no. 515.
22 Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.
23 Send checks to D. Omara and S. Hoyt in full payment less cash discounts.
25 Sell merchandise on account to B. Garcia $3,500, invoice no. 516, and to J. Forbes $6,100, invoice no. 517.
27 Purchase merchandise from D. Omara $14,500, terms 1/10, n/30; D. Lynch $1,200, terms n/30; and S. Vogel $5,400, terms n/30.
27 Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.
28 Pay $200 cash for office supplies.
31 Summary daily cash sales total $21,300.
31 Pay sales salaries $4,300 and office salaries $3,800, for a total salaries of $8,100.
Instructions:
a. Record the January transactions in a sales journal, a single-column purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash payments journal, and a two-column general journal.
b. Post the journals as necessary.
c. Prepare a trial balance at January 31, 2012, in the trial balance columns of the worksheet. Complete the worksheet using the following additional information.
1. Office supplies at January 31 total $900.
2. Insurance coverage expires on October 31, 2012.
3. Annual depreciation on the equipment is $1,500.
4. Interest of $50 has accrued on the note payable.
d. Prepare a multiple-step income statement and an owner’s equity statement for January and a classified balance sheet at the end of January.
e. Prepare and post adjusting and closing entries.
f. Prepare a post-closing trial balance, and determine whether the subsidiary ledgers agree with the control accounts in the general ledger.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pinkerton Corporation’s trial balance at December 31, 2011, is presented below. All 2011 transactions have been recorded except for the items described after the trial balance.
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$ 28,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
36,800
|
|
|
Notes Receivable
|
10,000
|
|
|
Interest Receivable
|
–0–
|
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
36,200
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
3,600
|
|
|
Land
|
20,000
|
|
|
Building
|
150,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
60,000
|
|
|
Patent
|
9,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
$ 500
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Building
|
|
50,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
24,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
27,300
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
–0–
|
|
|
Unearned Rent
|
|
6,000
|
|
Notes Payable (short-term)
|
|
11,000
|
|
Interest Payable
|
|
–0–
|
|
Notes Payable (long-term)
|
|
35,000
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
50,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
63,600
|
|
Dividends
|
12,000
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
900,000
|
|
Interest Revenue
|
|
–0–
|
|
Rent Revenue
|
|
–0–
|
|
Gain on Disposal
|
|
–0–
|
|
Bad Debts Expense
|
–0–
|
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
630,000
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Buildings
|
–0–
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Equipment
|
–0–
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
–0–
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
–0–
|
|
|
Other Operating Expenses
|
61,800
|
|
|
Amortization Expense—Patents
|
–0–
|
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
110,000
|
|
|
Total
|
$1,167,400
|
$1,167,400
|
Unrecorded transactions
1. On May 1, 2011, Pinkerton purchased equipment for $16,000 plus sales taxes of $800 (all paid in cash).
2. On July 1, 2011, Pinkerton sold for $3,500 equipment which originally cost $5,000. Accumulated depreciation on this equipment at January 1, 2011, was $1,800; 2011 depreciation prior to the sale of equipment was $450.
3. On December 31, 2011, Pinkerton sold for $5,000 on account inventory that cost $3,500.
4. Pinkerton estimates that uncollectible accounts receivable at year-end are $4,000.
5. The note receivable is a one-year, 8% note dated April 1, 2011. No interest has been recorded.
6. The balance in prepaid insurance represents payment of a $3,600, 6-month premium on September 1, 2011.
7. The building is being depreciated using the straight-line method over 30 years. The salvage value is $30,000.
8. The equipment owned prior to this year is being depreciated using the straight-line method over 5 years. The salvage value is 10% of cost.
9. The equipment purchased on May 1, 2011, is being depreciated using the straight-line method over 5 years, with a salvage value of $1,800.
10. The patent was acquired on January 1, 2011, and has a useful life of 9 years from that date.
11. Unpaid salaries at December 31, 2011, total $2,200.
12. The unearned rent of $6,000 was received on December 1, 2011, for 3 months’ rent.
13. Both the short-term and long-term notes payable are dated January 1, 2011, and carry a 10% interest rate. All interest is payable in the next 12 months.
14. Income tax expense was $15,000. It was unpaid at December 31.
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries for the transactions listed above.
b. Prepare an updated December 31, 2011, trial balance.
c. Prepare a 2011 income statement and a 2011 retained earnings statement.
d. Prepare a December 31, 2011, balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(TCO 2) On August 15, 2006, Willis Inc. purchased all of the outstanding common stock of Bork Inc. paying $7,400,000 cash. The book values and fair values of Willis’ assets and liabilities are listed below:
Book Value Fair Value
|
Account Receivable
|
$1,080,000
|
$975,000
|
|
Inventories
|
$1,620,000
|
$2,400,000
|
|
Property Plant and equipment
|
$5,400,000
|
$6,975,000
|
|
Account Payable
|
$1,800,000
|
$1,800,000
|
|
Bond Payable
|
$2,700,000
|
$2,475,000
|
Required:
Prepare the journal entry to record the acquisition by Willis Inc.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
GOLD MOUNTAIN SKI RESORT
You work for a venture firm and have been asked to analyze a proposal from a group of investors interested in building a new ski area in Colorado. The demand for skiing is growing and existing resorts have raised prices and reported record profits for the last two seasons.
Gold Mountain’s business strategy is to offer the ultimate ski experience; short lift lines, uncongested ski slopes, and spectacular scenery. With a 2,500 foot vertical drop, 10 trails, and one triple (three person) ski lift, it can provide a very uncongested ski resort. The planned triple-person lift delivers a chair every 20 seconds, 180 chairs per hour (3 chairs per minute, 60 minutes per hour), or 540 skiers per hour (180 chairs per hour, 3 skiers per chair). This puts an average of only 54 skiers per hour on each of the 10 trails. Some trails will be more popular than others, but this average number of skiers per trail per hour is still below the industry average.
The cost to build the ski runs, parking lots, and buildings and to erect the chair lift is $52M. To raise this amount of capital requires an annual financing cost (debt service & dividends) of $8.3M. The annual fixed operating cost (land lease, utilities, labor, taxes, and insurance) of the ski resort is projected to be $4.1M. For each 100 skiers per day, additional employees must be hired to staff the ticket office, ski patrol, parking lots, etc. The daily cost of the additional labor is $200 per 100 skiers per day.
The typical skier makes two ski runs per day (uses the lift twice). Ski resorts operate their lifts 8 hours per day, 120 days per year. Gold Mountain plans to sell one day lift tickets for $60 per skier, no half day or season passes will be offered.
Required:
Part A: Write a memo to the venture partner in charge of this account recommending one of three actions: aggressively pursue this investment; gather more information; or reject the project. Justify your recommendation with a concise, well-reasoned, fact based analysis. In addition to the memo, you should attached an easy to understand spreadsheet that shows your full analysis of the numbers. In the spreadsheet, you should design an input area for further “what-if analysis” that allows for changes to be made in the base numbers. This input area should flow to the calculations in your spreadsheet.
Part B: After completing your analysis in Part A, but before you submit the memo to your boss, Gold Mountain informs you that they are considering a change from the triple-person lift to a four-person chair lift. The new chair lift will add an additional $75,000 per year to the annual financing cost, bringing the annual financing cost to $8.375M. This lift will be able to carry 720 skiers per hour, as the triple would only carry 540 per hour. How do these changes alter your conclusion from Part A? Add this new analysis and discussion of the possible change to your memo.
Part C: In addition to the information you have been given, consider alternatives to the existing plan that you might recommend to make the venture more successful. If your ideas increase revenues and/or expenses, be sure to incorporate those estimates into your analysis to show the effect.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Honey butter, Inc. Manufactures a product that goes through two departments prior to completion-the Mixing Department followed by the Packaging Department. The following information is available about work in the first department. The Mixing Department, during June.
|
|
|
|
|
Percent Completed
|
|
|
|
|
Units
|
|
Materials
|
Conversions
|
|
Work in Process, beginning
|
70,000
|
|
70%
|
40%
|
|
|
Started into production
|
460,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Completed and Transferred out
|
450,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Work in Process, ending
|
80,000
|
|
75%
|
25%
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
Conversions
|
|
Work in Process, beginning
|
|
|
36550
|
13500
|
|
|
Cost added during June
|
|
|
391850
|
287300
|
|
1) Determine the equivalent units for June for the Mixing Department
2) Compute the costs per equivalent unit for June for the Mixing Department.
3) Determine the total cost of ending work in process inventory and the total cost of units transferred to the packing Department.
4) Prepare a cost reconciliation report for the Mixing Department for June.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ssignment (Character Traits Paper)
Complete the Character Traits Paper.
- Choose one character trait among the following:
a. Professional judgment
b. Values
c. Competence
d. Objectivity
e. Integrity
f. Confidentiality
g. Independence
h. Discipline
- Define in your own words the character trait that you selected and what it means to you in terms of appropriate business and professional conduct.
- Research your state’s professional code of conduct for the definition and expectations of your selected character trait.
- Research the AICPA professional code of conduct to determine their definitions and expectations of the trait that you selected.
- Search the Internet, Business Journal, or other periodicals for current news about corporate ethics. Select a current (later than 2008) news article related to business ethics that illustrates your character trait and its application (or non-application).
- Write a one to two page summary of your research findings.
| Category |
Points |
% |
Description |
| Documentation & formatting |
5 |
12.5 |
A quality paper will include a proper title page and references (as noted above). |
| Organization & cohesiveness |
10 |
25 |
A quality paper will include an introduction stating the purpose/intent of the paper (5%). The body of the paper will be derived from the assignment itself, and it will be properly subdivided into sections based upon what the paper must address (5%). In a quality paper, the conclusion will summarize the previously presented content (5%). |
| Editing |
5 |
12.5 |
A quality paper will be free of any spelling, punctuation, or grammatical errors. Sentences and paragraphs will be clear, concise, and factually correct. |
| Content |
20 |
50 |
A quality paper will have significant scope and depth of analysis/research to support any statements. Relevant illustration or examples are encouraged. A quality paper will employ sound use of reasoning and logic to reinforce conclusions, and opinions must be supported. |
| Total |
40 |
100 |
A quality paper (and presentation) will meet or exceed all of the above requirements. |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
the file “Sample.xlsx” cointains questions, with answers using Excel functions and also using Excel to do the calculation using normal formulas. “Todo.xls” contains 8 more questions, these need to be solved just like the questions in “Sample.xlsx”, showing detailed calculations to get same answer as Excel function. PLEASE MAKE SURE THAT THIS IS DONE JUST LIKE THE WORK IN “Sample.xlsx”.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
the company has a large amount of t- bone steak on hand and it is trying to decide the t- bone steak as is or to process them futher into filet and mignon and new York cut steak. management believe that a 1 pound t- bone steak would yield the following profit. wholesale selling price=2.25 cent per pound; less joint costs incurred up to the split point where t bone steak can be identified as separate product.=1.70 cents. profit per pound= 0.55. as mention above instead of being sold as is/ t bone steak could be process into filet mignon and new York cut steak. cutting one side of a t bone provide the filet mignon and cutting the other side provide the new York cut. one 16 ounce t bone steak cut in this way will yield one 6 ounce filet mignon and one 8 ounce new York cut.; the remain ounce are waste.. the cost of processing the t bone steak into these cut is 0. 20 pound. the filet mignon can be sold for 3. 60 per pound and the new York cut can be sold wholesale for 2.90 per pound.. I need to determine the profit per pound from processing the t bone steak further into filet mignon and new York cut steaks.2. would you recommend that the t bone steak be sold as is or processing futher and why/ can u assi me with these question jac dumb
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
. this company produce and and sell 40;000 gallon of glue each month.. this glue is call mj-7 is used in the wood industry to manfactury plywood. the selling price of mj-7 is 35 dollar gallon; variable cost=21 dollar per gallon; fixed manfacture overhead cost in the plant total 230,000, per month/ because of strike in the mill that purchase the bulk of the mj-7 glue have cuse this company sale todrop to only 11,000 gallon per month. this company think the strike will last only 2 months..after strike the sale should pick up. due to the current low level of sale this company is thinking of closing this plant.. if this company do close plant; fixture manufacture overhead cost can be reduce by 60,000 per month and fix selling cost can bereduce by 10 percent.Start up cost at the end of the shutdown period would total 14 .000. because of this there are no inventory on hand,. question assume that the strike continue for 2 months would u recommend that this company close the plant. and give the reason
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
/ thiscompany has just revieve a offer from a outside supplier to provide the ink cartridge for this company. at a price of 0.48 per dozen. Bronson inc is interested in this offer because its own production of cartridege is at at capacity. this company estimate that if that if thesupplier offer were accepted; the direct labor and variable manfacture overhead cost of the zippo pen line would reduce by 10 percent and the direct material cost would be reduce by 20 pecent. under present operation this company manufacture all of it own pen from start to finish. the zippo pen are sold thru wholesale at 4 dollar per box. each box contain one dozen pen. fixed manufacture overhead cost charge to the the zippo pen line total 50k per yr. the same equipment and facilties are used to produce serval pen line. the present cost of producing one dozen zippo 1. direct material=1.50 cents direct labor= 1.00 manufacture overhead=0.80 cents total cost = 3.30 cents question 1. should this company accept the outside supplier and why/2. what is the max price that this company should be willing to pay outside supllyier per dozen cartridge and why/ 3.Due to bankruptcy from other compant. Bronson inc expect to sell 150;000 boxes of zippo pen next year. as stated earlier this company has enough to only produce the cartridge 4 only 100,000 box of zippo pen annually.. By adding 30k in fix cost each yr this company could expand its production of cartiage to satisy the demand of zippo pen. the variable cost per unit to produce the additional cartiage should be purchase from the outside supplier and how many should be made by this company. 4. what factor should Bronson inc consider in determined whether it should be make or buy the ink cartiage ; give reason
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
tracy douglas is the owner and manager heritage garden furniture llc; a afica company that makes quality outdoor furtinure. she needs advice corcern the elinattion the model c3 lawn chair. these chair are not making money.a absorption cost income statement for this company and 4 model c3 lawnchaire for the quarter ending in june 30 below/ sale- all product=2,900.000 model c3=300.000./ cost of goods direct material-759.00 model c3 122.000 direct labor 680k model c3 72,000 fringe benefit 20 percent of direct labor 136k model c3 = 14,400 variable manufacture overhead=28k model c3 = 3,600/ blding rent and mainatainc 30k model c3 4,000 depreciation = 75k model c3 = 19,1000/ total cost of goods sold= 1,708.000 model c3 235,1000/ gross margin= 1,192.000 model c3 = 64.900 selling and adm exp product managers salaries= 75k model c3 10k sale commission 5 percent of sale- 145k model c3= 15k fringe benfit 20 percent of salary and commission= 44k modelc3= 5,000 shipping 120k model c3 10k general adm exp=464k model c3= 48k/ total selling and admin exp=848k model c3= 88k net operating income= 344k model c3 = 23.1000. the following additional data have been supplies by the company/ a, direct labor is a variable cost. b.. all of the company product are manufacturer in the same faculty and use the same equipment. bldging rent and maintain and deperication are allocated to prduct using various base. the equipment do not wear. c. there is a ample capacity to fill out orders. d. dropping the model c3 lawchair would have no effect on sale of other product line. e. work in process and finish goods inventory are insignicant. f. shipping cost are trace directly to the products. general adm exp are allocated to product on the base of sale. there would be no effect on the total general adm expeneses if the model c3 lawnchair were drop. if the c3 model were drop the anager would be laid off. question 1. given the current level of sale would u recommend that the model c3 lawchair be drop and why give reason. question 2- what would sale of the model c3 lawchair have to be in order to retian the product. can u assit assit me with these question please jacdumv
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Below is a list of control goals followed by a list of short scenarios describing system failures (i.e. control goals not met) and/or instances of successful control plans (i.e. plans that helped to achieve control goals).
Required:
On the blank line to the left of each numbered scenario, place the capital letter of the control goal that best matches the situation described. HINT: Some letters may be used more than once. Conversely, some letters may not apply at all.
Control Goals
A. Ensure effectiveness of operations
B. Ensure efficient employment of resources
C. Ensure security of resources
D. Ensure input validity
E. Ensure input accuracy
F. Ensure input completeness
G. Ensure update accuracy
H. Ensure update completeness
Scenarios
1. A batch of documents sent by the mail room to the accounts receivable department were lost in the intercompany mail and never recorded.
2. A flow in the processing logic of a computer program results in cash received from customers being added to their accounts receivable balances rather than subtracted.
3. A mail room clerk fabricated a phony document for a friend to make it look like the friend had paid his accounts receivable balance. The phony document got recorded.
4. An accounts receivable clerk made a copy of the company’s accounts receivable master data and sold this customer information to a competing company.
5. Customer checks received in the mail room are batched and set to the cashier several times a day so that they can be deposited as fast as possible.
6. In a manual bookkeeping system, an accounts receivable clerk failed to post an entire page of transactions from the cash receipts journal to the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger.
7. In a manual bookkeeping system, cash receipts recorded correctly in the cash receipts journal but some were inadvertently posted to the wrong customer accounts.
8. In keying remittance advices into his computer terminal, an accounts receivable clerk entered a receipt of $200 as $2,000.
9. The cost of the people and computers needed to process incoming checks in less than the benefit obtained from the incoming funds.
10. The company’s accounts receivable system was infiltrated by a hacker.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For each of the following, indicate whether is is a characteristic of a:
A. physical data flow diagram
B. logical data flow diagram
C. systems flowchart
1. A graphical representation of a system showing the system’s processes, data stores and the flow of data into and out of the processes and data stores.
2. Used by auditors and managers to understand a system and to analyze a system’s controls.
3. Depicts a system’s infrastructure.
4. Depicts the sequence of activities performed as the business events flow through the process
5. Includes the operations process and management context for a system.
6. Labels on flows of data describe the nature of the data but not how the data are transmitted.
7. Presents a logical and physical rendering of the who, how and where of information and operations processes.
8. Processes are labeled with nouns.
9. Processes are labelled with verbs.
10. Provides a complete picture of a system by combining the physical and logical aspects of the system.
11. Represents what activities the system is performing, but not how, where or by whom.
12. Specifies where, how and by whom a system’s processes are accomplished.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
SY Telc has recently started the manufacture of RecRobo, a three-wheeled robot that can scan a home for fires and gas leaks and then transmit this information to a mobile phone. The cost structure to manufacture 20,000 RecRobo’s is as follows.
|
|
Cost
|
|
Direct materials ($40 per robot)
|
$ 800,000
|
|
Direct labor ($30 per robot)
|
600,000
|
|
Variable overhead ($6 per robot)
|
120,000
|
|
Allocated fixed overhead ($25 per robot)
|
500,000
|
|
Total
|
$2,020,000
|
SY Telc is approached by Chen Inc. which offers to make RecRobo for $90 per unit or $1,800,000.
Instructions
(a) Using incremental analysis, determine whether SY Telc should accept this offer under each of the following independent assumptions.
(1) Assume that $300,000 of the fixed overhead cost can be reduced (avoided).
(2) Assume that none of the fixed overhead can be reduced (avoided). However, if the robots are purchased from Chen Inc., SY Telc can use the released productive resources to generate additional income of $300,000.
(b) Describe the qualitative factors that might affect the decision to purchase the robots from an outside supplier.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Twyla Enterprises uses a computer to handle its sales invoices. Lately, business has been so good that it takes an extra 3 hours per night, plus every third Saturday, to keep up with the volume of sales invoices. Management is considering updating its computer with a faster model that would eliminate all of the overtime processing.
|
|
Current Machine
|
New Machine
|
|
Original purchase cost
|
$15,000
|
$25,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
$6,000
|
–
|
|
Estimated annual operating costs
|
$24,000
|
$18,000
|
|
Useful life
|
5 year
|
5 year
|
If sold now, the current machine would have a salvage value of $5,000. If operated for the remainder of its useful life, the current machine would have zero salvage value. The new machine is expected to have zero salvage value after five years.
Instructions
Should the current machine be replaced?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pro Sports Inc. manufactures basketballs for the National Basketball Association (NBA). For the first 6 months of 2008, the company reported the following operating results while operating at 90% of plant capacity and producing 112,500 units.
|
|
Amount
|
|
Sales
|
$4,500,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
3,600,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
450,000
|
|
Net income
|
$450,000
|
Fixed costs for the period were: cost of goods sold $1,080,000, and selling and administrative expenses $225,000.
In July, normally a slack manufacturing month, Pro Sports receives a special order for 10,000 basketballs at $28 each from the Italian Basketball Association (IBA). Acceptance of the order would increase variable selling and administrative expenses $0.50 per unit because of shipping costs but would not increase fixed costs and expenses.
Instructions
(a) Prepare an incremental analysis for the special order.
(b) Should Pro Sports Inc. accept the special order? Explain your answer.
(c) What is the minimum selling price on the special order to produce net income of $4.10 per ball?
(d) What nonfinancial factors should management consider in making its decision?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lewis Manufacturing Company has four operating divisions. During the first quarter of 2008, the company reported aggregate income from operations of $176,000 and the following divisional results.
|
Division
|
I
|
II
|
III
|
IV
|
|
Sales
|
$250,000
|
$200,000
|
$500,000
|
$400,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
200,000
|
189,000
|
300,000
|
250,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
65,000
|
60,000
|
60,000
|
50,000
|
|
Income (loss) from operations
|
$(15,000)
|
$(49,000)
|
$140,000
|
$100,000
|
Analysis reveals the following percentages of variable costs in each division.
|
|
I
|
II
|
III
|
IV
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
70%
|
90%
|
80%
|
75%
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
40
|
70
|
50
|
60
|
Discontinuance of any division would save 50% of the fixed costs and expenses for that division.
Top management is very concerned about the unprofitable divisions (I and II). Consensus is that one or both of the divisions should be discontinued.
Instructions
(a) Compute the contribution margin for Divisions I and II. (b) Prepare an incremental analysis concerning the possible discontinuance of (1) Division I and (2) Division II. What course of action do you recommend for each division?
(c) Prepare a columnar condensed income statement for Lewis Manufacturing, assuming Division II is eliminated. Use the CVP format. Division II’s unavoidable fixed costs are allocated equally to the continuing divisions.
(d) Reconcile the total income from operations ($176,000) with the total income from operations without Division II.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For each of the following entries, enter the letter of the explanation that most closely describes it in the space beside each entry. (You can use letters more than once.)
A. To record receipt of unearned revenue.
B. To record this period’s earning of prior unearned revenue.
C. To record payment of an accrued expense.
D. To record receipt of an accrued revenue.
E. To record an accrued expense.
F. To record an accrued revenue.
G. To record this period’s use of a prepaid expense.
H. To record payment of a prepaid expense.
I. To record this period’s depreciation expense.
|
1. Rent Expense
|
2,000
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
2,000
|
|
2. Interest Expense
|
1,000
|
|
Interest Payable
|
1,000
|
|
3. Depreciation Expense
|
4,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
4,000
|
|
4. Unearned Professional Fees
|
3,00
|
|
Professional Fees Earned
|
3,000
|
|
5. Insurance Expense
|
4,200
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
4,200
|
|
6. Salaries Payable
|
1,400
|
|
Cash
|
1,400
|
|
7. Prepaid Rent
|
4,500
|
|
Cash
|
4,500
|
|
8. Salaries Expense
|
6,000
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
6,000
|
|
9. Interest Receivable
|
5,000
|
|
Interest Revenue
|
5,000
|
|
10. Cash
|
9,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable (from consulting)
|
9,000
|
|
11. Cash
|
7,500
|
|
Unearned Professional Fees
|
7,500
|
|
12. Cash
|
2,000
|
|
Interest Receivable
|
2,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Account Analysis
Custom Computers is a company started by two engineering students to assemble and market personal computers to faculty and students. The company operates out of the garage of one of the students’ homes.
From the following costs of a recent month, compute the total cost function and total cost for the month:
|
Telephone
|
$50, fixed
|
|
Utilities
|
200: fixed, 40% attributable to the garage, 60% to the house
|
|
Advertising
|
85, fixed
|
|
Insurance
|
65, fixed
|
|
Materials
|
18,000, variable, for 12 computers
|
|
Labor
|
2,060: $1,100 fixed plus $960 for horly help for assembling five computers
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ingles Company has accounts receivable of $93,100 at March 31. An analysis of the accounts shows the following.
Month of SaleBalance, March 31
|
March
|
60,000
|
|
February
|
17,600
|
|
January
|
8,500
|
|
Prior to January
|
7,000
|
|
|
93,100
|
Credit terms are 2/10, n/30. At March 31, Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $1,200 prior to adjustment. The company uses the percentage-of-receivables basis for estimating uncollectible accounts. The company’s estimate of bad debts is as follows.
|
Age of Accounts
|
Estimated Percentage Uncollectible
|
|
1-30 days
|
2%
|
|
31-60 days
|
5%
|
|
61-90 days
|
30%
|
|
Over 90 days
|
50%
|
Instructions:
a. Determine the total estimated uncollectibles.
b. Prepare the adjusting entry at March 31 to record bad debts expense.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Coats Galore, Inc. uses activity-based costing as the basis for information to set prices for its six lines of seasonal coats. Compute the activity-based overhead rates using the following budgeted data for each of the activity cost pools.
Activity Cost Pools Estimated Expected Overhead Cost Use of Drivers per Activity
|
Designing
|
450,000
|
12,000 designer hours
|
|
Sizing and cutting
|
4,000,000
|
160,000 machine hours
|
|
Stitching and trimming
|
1,440,000
|
80,000 labor hours
|
|
Wrapping and packing
|
336,000
|
32,000 finished units
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mallory Luongo, Inc, manufactures five models of kitchen appliances at itsMesaplant. The company is installing activity-based costing and has identified the following activities performed at itsMesaplant. Having analyzed itsMesaplant operations for purposes of installing activity-based costing, Mallory Luongo, Inc. identified its activity cost centers. It now needs to identify relevant activity cost drivers in order to assign overhead costs to its products. Using the activities listed below, identify for each activity one or more cost drivers that might be used to assign overhead to Mallory Luongo’s five products.
Instructions
Using the activities listed above, identify for each activity one or more cost drivers that might be used to assign overhead to Mallory Luongo’s five products.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sorce Instrument, Inc. manufactures two products: missile range instruments and space pressure gauges. During April, 50 range instruments and 300 pressure gauges were produced, and overhead costs of $89,500 were estimated. An analysis of estimated overhead costs reveals the following activities.
|
Activities
|
Cost Drivers
|
($) Total Cost
|
|
1. Materials Handing
|
Number of requisition
|
35,000
|
|
2. Machine setups
|
Number of setups
|
27,500
|
|
3. Quality inspections
|
Number of inspections
|
27,000
|
|
|
|
$89,500
|
The cost driver volume for each product was as follows:
|
|
Cost Drivers Instruments
|
Gauges
|
Total
|
|
Number of requisition
|
400
|
600
|
1,000
|
|
Number of setups
|
200
|
300
|
500
|
|
Number of inspections
|
200
|
400
|
600
|
Instructions:
(a) Determine the overhead rate for each activity.
(b) Assign the manufacturing overhead costs for April to the two products using activity based costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Skaros Stairs Co. of Moore designs and builds factory-made premium wooden stairways for homes. The manufactured stairway components (spindles, risers, hangers, hand rails) permit installation of stairways of varying lengths and widths. All are of white oak wood. Budgeted manufacturing overhead costs for the year 2011 are as follows.
Overhead Cost Pools Amount
|
Overhead cost pools
|
Amounts
|
|
Purchasing
|
57,000
|
|
Handing materials
|
82,000
|
|
Production (cutting, milling, finishing)
|
210,000
|
|
Setting upt machines
|
85,000
|
|
Inspecting
|
90,000
|
|
Inventory control (raw materials and finished goods)
|
126,000
|
|
Utilities
|
180,000
|
|
Total budget overhead costs
|
830,000
|
|
Activity cost pools
|
Cost Drivers
|
Expected Use of Cost Drivers
|
|
Purchasing
|
Number of orders
|
600
|
|
Handing materials
|
Number of moves
|
8,000
|
|
Production (Cutting, milling, finishing)
|
Direct labor hours
|
100,000
|
|
Setting up machines
|
Number of setupt
|
1,250
|
|
Inspecting
|
Number of inspections
|
6,000
|
|
Inventory control (raw materials and finished goods)
|
Number of components
|
168,000
|
|
Utilities
|
Square feet occupied
|
90,000
|
David Hannon, sales manager, has received an order for 280 stairs from Community Builders, Inc., a large housing development contractor. At David’s request, Neal prepares cost estimates for producing components for 280 stairs so David can submit a contract price per stair to Community Builders. He accumulates the following data for the production of 280 stairways.
|
Direct materials
|
103,600
|
|
Direct labor
|
112,000
|
|
Machine hours
|
14,500
|
|
Number of purchase orders
|
60
|
|
Number of material moves
|
800
|
|
Number of machine setups
|
100
|
|
Number of inspections
|
450
|
|
Number of components
|
16,000
|
|
Number of square feet occupied
|
8,000
|
Requirement:
a. Compute the predetermined overhead rate using traditional costing with machine hours as the basis.
b. What is the manufacturing cost per stairway under traditional costing?
c. What is the manufacturing cost per stairway under the proposed activity-based costing?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Polzin Corporation produces two grades of wine from grapes that it buys fromCaliforniagrowers. It produces and sells roughly 3,000,000 liters per year of a low-cost, high-volume product called CoolDay. It sells this in 600,000 5-liter jugs. Polzin also produces and sells roughly 300,000 liters per year of a low-volume, high-cost product called LiteMist. LiteMist is sold in 1-liter bottles.
|
|
CoolDay
|
LiteMist
|
|
Direct materials per liter
|
0.40
|
1.20
|
|
Direct labor cost per liter
|
0.25
|
0.50
|
|
Direct labor hours per liter
|
0.05
|
0.09
|
|
Total labor hours
|
150,000
|
27,000
|
Expected Use of Cost Drivers per Product
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Cost Driver
|
Estimated overhead
|
Expected Use of Cost
|
Drivers CoolDay
|
LiteMist
|
|
Grape processing
|
Cart of grapes
|
145,860
|
6,600
|
6,000
|
600
|
|
Aging
|
Total months
|
396,000
|
6,600,000
|
3,000,000
|
3,600,000
|
|
Botting and corking
|
Number of bottles
|
270,000
|
900,000
|
600,000
|
300,000
|
|
Maintain and inspect equipment
|
Number of inspections
|
240,800
|
800
|
350
|
450
|
|
Total estimated overhead
|
$1,241,600
|
Requirement:
1. Under traditional product costing using direct labor hours, compute the total manufacturing cost per liter of both products.
2. Under ABC, prepare a schedule showing the computation of the activity-based overhead rates (per cost driver).
3. Prepare a schedule assigning each activity’s overhead cost pool to each product, based on the use of cost drivers. What is the overhead cost per liter?
4. Compute the total manufacturing cost per liter for both products under ABC.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following direct materials and direct labor data pertain to the operations of Batista Manufacturing Company for the month of August.
|
Costs
|
|
|
|
Actual labor rate
|
13
|
Per hour
|
|
Actual materials price
|
128
|
Per ton
|
|
Standard labor rate
|
12
|
Per hour
|
|
Standard materials price
|
130
|
Per ton
|
|
Quantities
|
|
|
Actual hours incurred and used
|
4,250 hours
|
|
Actual quantity of materials purchased and used
|
1,250 tons
|
|
Standard hours used
|
4,300 hours
|
|
Standard quantity of materials used
|
1,200 tons
|
Instructions
a. Compute the total, price, and quantity variances for materials and labor.
b. Provide two possible explanations for each of the unfavorable variances calculated above, and suggest where responsibility for the unfavorable result might be placed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mega Electronix sells television sets and DVD players. The business is divided into two divisions along product lines. CVP income statements for a recent quarter’s activity are presented below.
|
|
TV Division
|
DVD Division
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
600,000
|
400,000
|
1,000,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
450,000
|
240,000
|
690,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
150,000
|
160,000
|
310,000
|
|
Fixed costs
|
124,000
|
|
|
|
Net Income
|
186,000
|
|
|
Instructions
(a) Determine sales mix percentage and contribution margin ratio for each division.
(b) Calculate the company’s weighted-average contribution margin ratio.
(c) Calculate the company’s break-even point in dollars.
(d) Determine the sales level in dollars for each division at the break-even point.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determine missing amounts in cost of goods manufactured schedule. An incomplete cost of goods manufactured schedule is presented below.
|
MADLOCK MANUFACTURING COMPANY
|
|
Cost of Goods Manufactured Schedule
|
|
For the Year Ended December 31, 2005
|
|
Work in process (1/1)
|
|
|
210,000
|
|
Direct materials:
|
|
|
|
|
Raw materials inventory (1/1)
|
?
|
|
|
|
Add: Raw materials purchases
|
158,000
|
|
|
|
Total raw materials available for use
|
?
|
|
|
|
Less: Raw materials inventory (12/31)
|
7,500
|
|
|
|
Direct materials used
|
|
190,000
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
?
|
|
|
Manufacturing overhead:
|
|
|
|
|
Indirect labor
|
18,000
|
|
|
|
Factory depreciation
|
36,000
|
|
|
|
Factory utilities
|
68,000
|
|
|
|
Total overhead
|
|
122,000
|
|
|
Total manufacturing costs
|
|
|
?
|
|
Total cost of work in process
|
|
|
?
|
|
Less: Work in process (12/31)
|
|
|
81,000
|
|
Cost of goods manufactured
|
|
|
530,000
|
Instructions:
Complete the cost of goods manufactured schedule for Madlock Manufacturing Company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A job cost sheet of Battle Company is given below.
|
Job Cost Sheet
|
|
|
Job No.469
|
Quantity: 2,000
|
|
Item: White Lion Cages
|
Date Requesteed: 7/2
|
|
For: Tesla Company
|
Date Completed: 7/31
|
|
Date
|
Direct Materials
|
Direct labor
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
|
7/10
|
828
|
|
|
|
7/12
|
900
|
|
|
|
7/15
|
|
440
|
528
|
|
7/22
|
|
380
|
456
|
|
7/27
|
1,600
|
|
|
|
7/27
|
1,500
|
|
|
|
7/31
|
|
540
|
648
|
Instructions
(a) Answer the following questions.
(1) What are the source documents for direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead costs assigned to this job?
(2) What is the predetermined manufacturing overhead rate?
(3) What are the total cost and the unit cost of the completed job?
(b) Prepare the entry to record the completion of the job.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing the Efffects of Transaction Using T-Accounts and Preparing an Unadjusted Trial Balance
Jessica Pothier opened FunFlatables on June 1, 2011. The company rents out moon walks and inflatable slides for parties and corporate events. The business also has obtained the use of an abandoned ice rink located in a local shopping mall, where its rental products are displayed andavailable for casual hourly rental by mall patrons. The following transactions occurred during thefirst month of operations.
a. Received $50,000 cash contributions from Jessica to establish the sole proprietorship.
b. Purchased inflatable rides and inflation equipment, paying $20,000 cash.
c. Received $5,000 cash from casual hourly rentals at the mall.
d. Rented rides and equipment to customers for $10,000. Received cash of $2,000; the rest is due from customers.
e. Received $2,500 from a large corporate customer as a deposit on a party booking for July 4.
f. Began to prepare for the July 4 party by purchasing various party supplies on account for $600.
g. Paid $12,000 in cash for renting the mall space in June, July, and August.
h. Received $1,000 from customers on accounts receivable.
i. Paid $4,000 in wages to employees for work done during the month.
j. Paid $1,000 for running a television ad this month.
k. Jessica Pothier withdrew $6,000 cash from the business.
Required:
1. Set up appropriate T-accounts for Cash; Accounts Receivable; Supplies; Prepaid Rent;Equipment; Accounts Payable; Unearned Rent Revenue; J. Pothier, Capital; J. Pothier,Drawing; Rent Revenue; Wages Expense; and Advertising Expense. All accounts begin with zero balances.
2. Record in the T-accounts the effects of each transaction for FunFlatables in June, referencing each transaction in the accounts with the transaction letter. Show the unadjusted ending balances in the T-accounts.
3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance for the end of June 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing transactions, posting to T-accounts, and preparing a trial balance
Doris Stewart started her practice as a design consultant on September 1, 2012. During the first month of operations, the business completed the following transactions:
Sep. 1 Received $42,000 cash and issued common stock.
4. Purchased supplies, $700, and furniture, $1,900, on account.
6. Performed services for a law firm and received $1,400 cash.
7. Paid $24,000 cash to acquire land for a future office site.
10. Performed service for a hotel and received its promise to pay the $1,000 within one week.
14. Paid for the furniture purchased September 4 on account.
15. Paid secretary’s bi-monthly salary, $490.
17. Received cash on account, $400.
20. Prepared a design for a school on account, $700.
28. Received $2,100 cash for consulting with Plummer & Gorden.
30. Paid secretary’s bi-monthly salary, $490.
30. Paid rent expense, $650.
30. Paid cash dividends of $3,000.
Requirements
1. Open the following T-accounts: Cash, Accounts receivable, Supplies, Furniture, Land, Accounts payable, Common stock, Dividends, Service revenue, Salary expense, and Rent expense.
2. Record each transaction in the journal, using the account titles given. Key each transaction by date. Explanations are not required.
3. Post the transactions to the T-accounts, using transaction dates as posting references in the ledger accounts. Label the balance of each account Bal, as shown in the chapter.
4. Prepare the trial balance of Doris Stewart, Designer, P.C., at September 30, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the accounting equation to analyze transactions
Caren Smith opened a medical practice. During July, the first month of operation, the business, titled Caren Smith, M.D., P.C. (Professional Corporation), experienced the following events:
July 6 Smith invested $55,000 in the business by opening a bank account in the name of C. Smith, M.D., P.C. The corporation issued common stock to Smith.
9 Paid $46,000 cash for land.
12 Purchased medical supplies for $1,800 on account.
15 Officially opened for business.
15-31 During the rest of the month, Smith treated patients and earned service revenue of $8,000, receiving cash.
29 Paid cash expenses: employees’ salaries, $1,600; office rent, $900; utilities, $100.
30 Returned supplies purchased on the 12th for the cost of those supplies, $700.
31 Paid $1,100 on account.
Requirement
1. Analyze the effects of these events on the accounting equation of the medical practice of Caren Smith, M.D., P.C. Use a format similar to that of Exhibit 1-6, with headings for Cash, Medical supplies, Land, Accounts payable, Common stock, and Retained earnings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aardee Industries manufactures pharmaceutical products in two departments: Mixing and Tablet-Making. Additional information on the two departments follows. Each tablet contains 0.5 gram of direct materials.
The Mixing Department makes 200,000 grams of direct materials mixture (enough to make 400,000 tablets) because the Tablet-Making Department has only enough capacity to process 400,000 tablets. All direct material costs are incurred in the Mixing Department. Aardee incurs $156,000 in direct material costs.
The Tablet-Making Department manufactures only 390,000 tablets from the 200,000 grams of mixture processed; 2.5% of the direct materials mixture is lost in the tablet-making process. Each tablet sells for $1. All costs other than direct material costs are fixed costs. The following requirements refer only to the preceding data. There is no connection between the requirements.
Required
1. An outside contractor makes the following offer: If Aardee will supply the contractor with 10,000 grams of mixture, the contractor will manufacture 19,500 tablets for Aardee (allowing for the normal 2.5% loss of the mixture during the tablet-making process) at $0.12 per tablet. Should Aardee accept the contractor’s offer? Show your calculations.
2. Another company offers to prepare 20,000 grams of mixture a month from direct materials Aardee supplies. The company will charge $0.07 per gram of mixture. Should Aardee accept the company’s offer? Show your calculations.
3. Aardee’s engineers have devised a method that would improve quality in the Tablet-Making Department. They estimate that the 10,000 tablets currently being lost would be saved. The modification would cost $7,000 a month. Should Aardee implement the new method? Show your calculations.
4. Suppose that Aardee also loses 10,000 grams of mixture in its Mixing Department. These losses can be reduced to zero if the company is willing to spend $9,000 per month in quality-improvement methods. Should Aardee adopt the quality-improvement method? Show your calculations.
5. What are the benefits of improving quality in the Mixing Department compared with improving quality in the Tablet-Making Department?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selecting an appropriate cost driver (What is the base?)
The Vest School of Vocational Technology has organized the school training programs into three departments. Each department provides training in a different area as follows: nursing assistant, dental hygiene, and office technology. The school’s owner, Wilma Vest, wants to know how much it cost to operate each of the three departments. To accumulate the total cost for each department, the accountant has identified several indirect cost that must be allocated to each. These costs are $10,080 of telephone expenses, $2,016 of supplies expense, $720,000 of office rent, $144,000 of janitorial services, and $150,000 of salary paid to the dean of students. To provide a reasonably accurate allocation of costs, the accountant has identified several possible cost drivers. These drivers and their association with each department follow.
|
Cost Driver
|
Dept. 1
|
Dept. 2
|
Dept. 3
|
|
Number of telephones
|
28
|
32
|
52
|
|
Number of faculty Members
|
20
|
16
|
12
|
|
Square footage of office space
|
28,000
|
16,8000
|
12,000
|
|
Number of secretaries
|
2
|
2
|
2
|
Requirements:
a. Identify the appropriate cost objectives
b. Identify the appropriate cost driver for each indirect cost and compute the allocation rate for assigning each indirect cost to the cost objectives.
c. Determine the amount of telephone expense that should be allocated to each of the three departments.
d. Determine the amount of supplies expense that should be allocated to Department 3.
e. Determine the amount of office rent that should be allocated to Department 2.
f. Determine the amount of janitorial services cost that should be allocated to Department 1.
g. Identify two cost drivers not listed here that could be used to allocate the cost of the dean’s salary to the three departments.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Statement of cash flows; direct method
Comparative balance sheets for 2011 and 2010 and a statement of income for 2011 are given below for Metagrobolize Industries. Additional information from the accounting records of Metagrobolize also is provided
Additional information from the accounting records:
a.During 2011, equipment with a cost of $300,000 (90% depreciated) was sold.
b.The statement of shareholders’ equity reveals reductions of $225,000 and $450,000 for stock dividends and cash dividends, respectively.
Required:
Prepare the statement of cash flows of Metagrobolize for the year ended December 31, 2011. Present cash flows from operating activities by the direct method. (You may omit the schedule to reconcile net income to cash flows from operating activities.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Statement of cash flows; direct method
The comparative balance sheets for 2011 and 2010 and the statement of income for 2011 are given below for Wright Company. Additional information from Wright’s accounting records is provided also.
Additional information from the accounting records:
· a.Land that originally cost $10,000 was sold for $7,000.
· b.The common stock of Microsoft Corporation was purchased for $25,000 as a short-term investment not classified as a cash equivalent.
· c.New equipment was purchased for $150,000 cash.
· d.A $30,000 note was paid at maturity on January 1.
· e.On January 1, 2011, $60,000 of bonds were sold at face value.
· f.Common stock ($50,000 par) was sold for $76,000.
· g.Net income was $80,000 and cash dividends of $35,000 were paid to shareholders.
Required:
Prepare the statement of cash flows of Wright Company for the year ended December 31, 2011. Present cash flows from operating activities by the direct method. (You may omit the schedule to reconcile net income to cash flows from operating activities.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determine equivalent units, unit cost, and assignment of cost
The blending Department of Ceja Company has the following cost and production data for the month of May.
|
Work in process May 1
|
|
|
Direct materials: 100% complete
|
100,000
|
|
Conversion costs: 20% complete
|
75,000
|
|
Cost of work in process, May 1
|
175,000
|
|
Costs incurred during production in May
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
800,000
|
|
Conversion costs
|
350,000
|
|
Cost incurred in May
|
1,150,000
|
Units transferred out totaled 8,000. Ending work in process was 2,000 units that are 100% complete as to materials and 25% complete as to conversion costs.
Instructions
a. Computer the equivalent units of production for (1) materials and (2) conversion cost for the month of May.
b. Compute the unit costs for the month.
c. Determine the cost to be assigned to the units transferred out and in ending work in process.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Impact on breakeven point if sale price, variable costs, and fixed costs change
Dependable Drivers Driving School charges $250 per student to prepare and administer written and driving tests. Variable costs of $100 per student include trainers’ wages, study materials, and gasoline. Annual fixed costs of $75,000 include the training facility and fleet of cars.
Requirements
1. For each of the following independent situations, calculate the contribution margin per unit and the breakeven point in units by first referring to the original data provided:
a. Breakeven point with no change in information.
b. Decrease sales price to $220 per student.
c. Decrease variable costs to $50 per student.
d. Decrease fixed costs to $60,000.
2. Compare the impact of changes in the sales price, variable costs, and fixed costs on the contribution margin per unit and the breakeven point in units.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing CVP relationships
Kincaid Company sells flags with team logos. Kincaid has fixed costs of $583,200 per year plus variable costs of $4.80 per flag. Each flag sells for $12.00.
Requirements
1. Use the income statement equation approach to compute the number of flags Kincaid must sell each year to break even.
2. Use the contribution margin ratio CVP formula to compute the dollar sales Kincaid needs to earn $33,000 in operating income for 2012. (Round the contribution margin to two decimal places.)
3. Prepare Kincaid’s contribution margin income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012, for sales of 72,000 flags. Cost of goods sold is 70% of variable costs. Operating costs make up the rest of variable costs and all of fixed costs. (Round your final answers to the nearest whole number.)
4. The company is considering an expansion that will increase fixed costs by 21% and variable costs by $0.60 per flag. Compute the new breakeven point in units and in dollars. Should Kincaid undertake the expansion? Give your reasoning. Round your final answers to the nearest whole number.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Each year, ACE Engines surveys 7,600 former and prospective customers regarding satisfaction and brand awareness. For the current year, the company is considering outsourcing the survey to RBG Associates, who have offered to conduct the survey and summarize results for $50,000. Robert Ace, the president of ACE Engines, believes that RBG will do a higher-quality job than his company has been doing, but is unwilling to spend more than $12,000 above current costs. The head of bookkeeping for ACE has prepared the following summary of costs related to the survey in the prior year.
|
Mailing
|
$27,000
|
|
Printing (done by Lester Print shop)
|
9,000
|
|
Salary of Pat Fisher, part-time employee who stuffed envelopes and summarized data when surveys were returned (130 x $16)
|
2,080
|
|
Share of electricity/phone/etc. based on square feet of space occupied by Pat Fisher vs. entire company
|
600
|
|
Total
|
$39,800
|
Prepare an incremental analysis in good form to determine the impact on profit of going outside versus conducting the survey as in the past. Will ACE accept the RBG offer? Why or why not?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available for Sappy’s Surgical Shears for the fiscal year ending December 31, 20XX.
|
Beginning balance in Finished Goods
|
$17,000
|
|
Ending balance in Finished Goods
|
15,200
|
|
Beginning balance in work in process
|
2,500
|
|
Ending balance in work in process
|
1,836
|
|
Selling expenses
|
123,000
|
|
General and administrative expenses
|
89,000
|
|
Direct material cost
|
54,500
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
66,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
21,400
|
|
Sales
|
385,000
|
Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match each of the following six terms with the phrase that most closely describes it. Each answer below may be used only once.
_____ 1. activity-based costing
_____ 2. cost of goods available for sale
_____ 3. period costs
_____ 4. process costing system
_____ 5. just-in-time system
_____ 6. work in process
(A) Costs assigned to the goods produced; also known as manufacturing costs
(B) Materials costs that are not traced directly to products produced
(C) System that seeks to minimize Raw Materials Inventory and Work in Process Inventory
(D) Cost of items that are completed and transferred from Work in Process Inventory to Finished Goods Inventory
(E) Costs that are identified with accounting periods rather than with goods produced
(F) Actual overhead is greater than overhead that has been applied to products
(G) Method of assigning overhead costs that uses multiple allocation bases
(H) System that uses job-order sheets to collect costs for each individual job
(I) Cost of all materials and parts that are directly traced to the items produced
(J) Beginning balance in the Finished Goods Inventory plus cost of goods manufactured
(K) Overhead applied to products is greater than the actual overhead costs incurred
(L) Used by companies that produce large quantities of identical items
(M) Cost of all manufacturing activities other than direct material and direct labor
(N) Inventory account that contains the cost of goods that are only partially completed
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(TCO B) Imperial Company’s income statement for the most recent year appears below.
|
Sales (45,000 units)
|
$1,350,000
|
|
Less: variable expenses
|
750,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
600,000
|
|
Less: fixed expenses
|
375,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
$225,000
|
Required:
a. Calculate the unit contribution margin.
b. Calculate the break-even point in dollars.
c. If the company desires a net operating income of $290,000, how many units must it sell?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(TCO 4) Legal Docs Inc is a legal services firm that files incorporation papers for small businesses. They charge $1,000 per application. This year’s income statement shows the following:
|
Sales
|
$1,295,000
|
|
Variable Expenses
|
$1,023,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$272,000
|
|
Fixed costs
|
$250,000
|
|
Profit
|
$22,000
|
Required:
(a) Compute the break-even point in units.
(b) Compute the contribution margin ratio.
(c) Compute the current margin of safety.
(d) How many applications must the company sell to make a profit of $350,000?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(TCO 6) Pacific Airlines has three service departments; ticketing, baggage handling, and aircraft maintenance. Costs of these departments are allocated to two revenue producing departments, domestic and international flights. Costs for the service departments are not separated into fixed and variable and the totals are as follows:
|
Ticketing
|
$4,000,000
|
|
Baggage handing
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Aircraft maintance
|
$6,000,000
|
|
Air miles are as follows:
|
|
|
Domistic
|
5,000,000
|
|
International
|
20,000,000
|
(a) Allocate the service department costs based on air miles.
(b) Evaluate Pacific Airlines use of air miles as a basis for allocation. Do you think the cause-and-effect relationship is strong?
(c) Suggest alternative methods to allocate the service department costs.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For nearly 20 years Custom Coatings has provided painting and galvanizing services for manufacturers in its region. Manufacturers of various metal products have relied on the quality and quick turnaround time provided by Custom Coatings and its 20 skilled employees. During the last year, as a result of a sharp upturn in the economy, the company’s sales have increased by 30% relative to the previous year. The company has not been able to increase its capacity fast enough, so Custom Coatings has had to turn work away because it cannot keep up with customer requests.
Top management is considering the purchase of a sophisticated robotic painting booth. The booth would represent a considerable move in the direction of automation versus manual labor. If Custom Coatings purchases the booth, it would most likely lay off 15 of its skilled painters. To analyze the decision, the company compiled production information from the most recent year and then prepared a parallel compilation assuming that the company would purchase the new equipment and lay off the workers. Those data are shown below. As you can see, the company projects that during the last year it would have been far more profitable if it had used the automated approach.
|
|
Current Approach
|
Automated Approach
|
|
Sales
|
2,000,000
|
2,000,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
1,200,000
|
400,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
800,000
|
1,600,000
|
|
Fixed costs
|
200,000
|
600,000
|
|
Net Income
|
600,000
|
1,000,000
|
Instructions
a. Compute and interpret the contribution margin ratio under each approach.
b. Compute the break-even point in sales dollars under each approach. Discuss the implications of your findings.
c. Using the current level of sales, compute the margin of safety ratio under each approach and interpret your findings.
d. Determine the degree of operating leverage for each approach at current sales levels. How much would the company’s net income decline under each approach with a 10% decline in sales?
e. At what level of sales would the company’s net income be the same under either approach?
f. Discuss the issues that the company must consider in making this decision.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Choosing an Activity-Based Costing System
Pickle Motorcycles, Inc. (PMI), manufactures three motorcycle models: a cruising bike (Route 66), a street bike (Main Street), and a starter model (Alley Cat). Because of the different materials used, production processes for each model differ significantly in terms of machine types and time requirements. Once parts are produced, however, assembly time per unit required for each type of bike is similar. For this reason, PMI allocates overhead on the basis of machine-hours. Last year the company shipped 1,000 Route 66s, 4,000 Main Streets, and 10,000 Alley Cats and had the following revenues and expenses:
PICKLE MOTORCYCLES, INC.
Income Statement
|
|
Route66
|
Main Street
|
Alley Cat
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
$7,600,000
|
$11,200,000
|
$9,500,000
|
$28,300,000
|
|
Direct costs
|
|
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
3,000,000
|
4,80,000
|
4,000,000
|
11,800,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
288,000
|
480,000
|
1,080,000
|
1,848,000
|
|
Variable overhead
|
|
|
|
|
|
Machine setup
|
468,000
|
|
Order processing
|
1,152,000
|
|
Warehousing costs
|
1,674,000
|
|
Energy to run machines
|
756,000
|
|
Shipping
|
648,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
9,954,000
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
|
|
Plant administration
|
1,76,000
|
|
Other fixed overhead
|
2,800,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
$5,394,000
|
PMI’s chief financial officer (CFO) hired a consultant to recommend cost allocation bases. The consultant recommended the following:
|
|
|
Activity Level
|
|
|
|
Activity
|
Cost Driver
|
Route66
|
Main Street
|
Alley Cat
|
|
Setting up machines
|
Number of production runs
|
22
|
34
|
44
|
|
Processing orders
|
Number of sales orders received
|
400
|
600
|
600
|
|
Warehousing
|
Number of units held in inventory
|
200
|
200
|
400
|
|
Using energy
|
Machine-house
|
10,000
|
16,000
|
24,000
|
|
Shipping
|
Number of units shipped
|
1,000
|
4,000
|
10,000
|
The consultant found no basis for allocating the plant administration and other fixed overhead costs and recommended that these not be applied to products.
Required
a. Using machine-hours to allocate production overhead, complete the income statement for Pickle Motorcycles. (See the “using energy” activity for machine-hours.) Do not attempt to allocate plant administration or other fixed overhead.
b. Complete the income statement using the bases recommended by the consultant.
c. How might activity-based costing result in better decisions by Pickle Motorcycles’s management?
d. After hearing the consultant’s recommendations, the CFO decides to adopt activity-based costing but expresses concern about not allocating some of the overhead to the products (plant administration and other fixed overhead). In the CFO’s view, “Products have to bear a fair share of all overhead or we won’t be covering all of our costs.” How would you respond to this comment?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Activity-Based Costing, Cost Flow Diagram, and Predetermined Overhead Rates
Huron Furniture is considering updating its cost system to an activity-based costing system and is interested in understanding the effects. The company’s cost accountant has identified three overhead cost pools along with appropriate cost drivers for each pool.
|
Cost Pools
|
Costs
|
Activity
|
Drivers
|
|
Utilities
|
450,000
|
60,000
|
Machine-hours
|
|
Schedulding and setup
|
450,000
|
600
|
Setup
|
|
Material handing
|
1,200,000
|
1,600,000
|
Pound of material
|
The company manufactures three models of tables (oval, round, and square). The plans for production for the next year and the budgeted direct costs and activity by product line are as follows:
|
|
Products
|
|
|
|
|
Oval
|
Round
|
Square
|
|
Total direct costs (material and labor)
|
$80,000
|
$80,000
|
$80,000
|
|
Total machine-hours
|
30,000
|
10,000
|
20,000
|
|
Total number of setup
|
80
|
300
|
200
|
|
Total pounds of material
|
500,000
|
300,000
|
800,000
|
|
Total direct labor-hours
|
3,200
|
1,800
|
5,000
|
|
Number of units produced
|
4,000
|
2,000
|
6,000
|
Required
a. The current cost accounting system charges overhead to products based on direct labor-hours. What unit product costs will be reported for the three products if the current cost system continues to be used?
b. A consulting firm has recommended using an activity-based costing system, with the activities based on the cost pools identified by the cost accountant. Prepare a cost flow diagram of the proposed ABC system.
c. What are the cost driver rates for the three cost pools identi? ed by the cost accountant?
d. What unit product costs will be reported for the three products if the ABC system suggested by the cost accountant’s classi? cation of cost pools is used?
e. If management should decide to implement an activity-based costing system, what benefits should it expect?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On October 1, 2011, Santana Rey launched a computer services company called Business Solutions, which provides consulting services, computer system installations, and custom program development. Rey adopts the calendar year for reporting purposes and expects to prepare the company’s first set of financial statements on December 31, 2011. The company’s initial chart of accounts follows.
|
|
Account No.
|
|
Account No.
|
|
Cash
|
101
|
S.Rey, Capital
|
301
|
|
Account Receivable
|
106
|
S.Rey, withdrawals
|
302
|
|
Computer Supplies
|
126
|
Computer Services Revenue
|
403
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
128
|
Wages Expense
|
623
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
131
|
Advertising Expense
|
655
|
|
Office Equipment
|
163
|
Mileage Expense
|
676
|
|
Computer Equpment
|
167
|
Miscellaneous Expenses
|
677
|
|
Account Payable
|
201
|
Rapairs Expense-Computer
|
684
|
Required
1. Prepare journal entries to record each of the following transactions for Business Solutions.
Oct. 1 S. Rey invested $45,000 cash, a $20,000 computer system, and $8,000 of office equipment in the company.
2 The company paid $3,300 cash for four months’ rent. (Hint: Debit Prepaid Rent for $3,300.)
3 The company purchased $1,420 of computer supplies on credit from Harris Office Products.
5 The company paid $2,220 cash for one year’s premium on a property and liability insurance policy. (Hint: Debit Prepaid Insurance for $2,220.)
6 The company billed Easy Leasing $4,800 for services performed in installing a new Web server.
8 The company paid $1,420 cash for the computer supplies purchased from Harris Office Products on October 3.
10 The company hired Lyn Addie as a part-time assistant for $125 per day, as needed.
12 The company billed Easy Leasing another $1,400 for services performed.
15 The company received $4,800 cash from Easy Leasing as partial payment on its account.
17 The company paid $805 cash to repair computer equipment that was damaged when moving it.
20 The company paid $1,728 cash for advertisements published in the local newspaper.
22 The company received $1,400 cash from Easy Leasing on its account.
28 The company billed IFM Company $5,208 for services performed.
31 The company paid $875 cash for Lyn Addie’s wages for seven days’ work.
31 S. Rey withdrew $3,600 cash from the company for personal use.
Nov. 1 The company reimbursed S. Rey in cash for business automobile mileage allowance (Rey logged 1,000 miles at $0.32 per mile).
2 The company received $4,633 cash from Liu Corporation for computer services performed.
5 The company purchased computer supplies for $1,125 cash from Harris Office Products.
8 The company billed Gomez Co. $5,668 for services performed.
13 The company received notification from Alex’s Engineering Co. that Business Solutions’ bid of $3,950 for an upcoming project is accepted.
18 The company received $2,208 cash from IFM Company as partial payment of the October 28 bill.
22 The company donated $250 cash to theUnited Wayin the company’s name.
24 The company completed work for Alex’s Engineering Co. and sent it a bill for $3,950.
25 The company sent another bill to IFM Company for the past-due amount of $3,000.
28 The company reimbursed S. Rey in cash for business automobile mileage (1,200 miles at $0.32 per mile).
30 The company paid $1,750 cash for Lyn Addie’s wages for 14 days’ work.
30 S. Rey withdrew $2,000 cash from the company for personal use.
2. Open ledger accounts (in balance column format) and post the journal entries from part 1 to them.
3. Prepare a trial balance as of the end of November.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Master Budget with Supporting Schedules
You have been hired as a new management trainees by Earrings Unlimited, a distributor of earrings to various retail outlets located in shopping malls across the country. In the past, the company has done very little in the way of budgeting and at certain times of the year has experience a shortage of cash.
Sine you are well trained in budgeting, you have decided to prepare comprehensive budgets for the upcoming second quarter in order to show management the benefits that can be gained from an integrated budgeting program. To this end, you have worked with accounting and other areas to gather the information assembled below.
The company sells many styles of earrings, but all are sold for the same price-$10.00 per pair. Actual sales of earrings for the last three months and budgeted sales for the next six month follow (in pairs of earrings):
January (actual) 20,000 Febuary (actual) 26,000
March (actual) 40,000 April (budget) 65,000
May (budget) 100,000 June (budget) 50,000
July (budget) 30,000 August (budget) 28,000
September (budget) 25,000
The concentration of sales before and during May is due to Mother’s Day. Sufficient inventory should be on hand at the end of each month to supply 40% of the earrings sold in the following month. Suppliers are paid $4.00 for a pair of earrings. One-half of a month’s purchases in paid for in the month of the purchase; the other half is paid for in the following month. All sales are on credit, with no discount, and payable within 15 days. The company has found, however, that only 20 percent of a month’s sales are collected in the month of sale. An additional 70 percent is collected in the following month, and the remaining 10 percent in the second month following sale. Bad debts have been negligible.
Monthly operation expenses for the company are given below:
Variable:
Sales Commission 4% of sales
Fixed:
Advertising 200,000
Rent 18,000
Salaries 106,000
Utilities 7,000
Insurance 3,000
Depreciation 14,000
Insurance is paid on an annual basis, in November of each year. The company plans to purchase 16,000 in new equipment during May and $40,000 in new equipment during June; both purchases will be for cash. The company declares dividends of $15,000 each quarter payable in the first month of the following quarter.
A listing of the company’s ledger accounts as of March 3 is given below:
Assets
Cash 74,000
Accounts receivalbe ($26,000 febuary sales;$320,00 March sale 346,000
Inventory 104,000
Prepaid Insurance 21,000
Property and equipment (net) 950,000
Total Assets 1,495,000
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
Accounts payable 100,000
Dividends payable 15,000
capital stock 800,000
retained earnings 580,000
Total liabilities and Stockholders Equity 1,495,000
The company maintains a minimum cash balance of 50,000. All borrowing is done at the beginning of a month, and repayments are made at the end of a month. The annual interest rate is 12 percent. Interest is computed and paid at the end of each quarter on all loans outstanding during the quarter.
Required:
Prepare a master budget for the three-month period ending June 30. Include the following detailed budgets;
1. a. A sales budget, by month and in total
b. A schedule of expected cash collections from sales, by month and in total
c. A merchandise purchaser budget in units and in dollars. Show the budget by month and in total.
d. A schedule of expected cash disbursements for merchandise purchases, by month and in total.
2. A cash budget. Show the budget by the month and in total. Determine any borrowing that would be needed to maintain the minimum cash balance of $50,000
3. A budgeted income statement for the three months period ending June 30. Use the contribution approach.
4. A budgeted balance sheet as of June 30.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Clark Paints: The production department has been investigating possible ways to trim total production costs. One possibility currently being examined is to make the paint cans instead of purchasing them. The equipment needed would cost $200,000, with a disposal value of $40,000, and it would be able to produce 5,500,000 cans over the life of the machinery. The production department estimates that approximately 1,100,000 cans would be needed for each of the next five years.
Required:
1. Based on the above information and using Excel, calculate the following items for this proposed equipment purchase:
· Annual cash flows over the expected life of the equipment o Payback period
- Annual rate of return
- Net present value
- Internal rate of return
2. Would you recommend the acceptance of this proposal? Why or why not?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(TCO D) The Oxford Company has budgeted sales revenues as follows.
|
|
Oct.
|
Nov.
|
Dec
|
|
Credit sales
|
120,000
|
96,000
|
72,000
|
|
Cash sales
|
72,000
|
204,000
|
156,000
|
|
Total sales
|
192,000
|
300,000
|
228,000
|
Past experience indicates that 60% of the credit sales will be collected in the month of sale and the remaining 40% will be collected in the following month.
Purchases of inventory are all on credit, with 60% paid in the month of purchase and 40% in the month following purchase. Budgeted inventory purchases are $260,000 in October, $180,000 in November, and $84,000 in December.
Other budgeted cash receipts include (a) the sale of plant assets for $49,400 in November and (b) the sale of new common stock for $67,400 in December.
Other budgeted cash disbursements include (a) operating expenses of $27,000 each month, (b) selling and administrative expenses of $50,000 each month, (c) dividends of $76,000 to be paid in November, and (d) purchase of equipment for $24,000 cash in December
The company has a cash balance of $40,000 at the beginning of December and wishes to maintain a minimum cash balance of $40,000 at the end of each month. An open line of credit is available at the bank and carries an annual interest rate of 12%. Assume that all borrowing is done on the first day of the month in which financing is needed and that all repayments are made on the last day of the month in which excess cash is available. Also assume that $14,000 of financing was obtained on November 1.
Requirements:
Use this information to prepare a schedule of expected cash payments for purchases of inventory for the months of November and December only
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected transactions for Loving Home, an interior decorator corporation, in its first month of business, are as follows.
1. Issued stock to investors for $18,319 in cash.
2. Purchased used car for $9,902 cash for use in business.
3. Purchased supplies on account for $367.
4. Billed customers $5,017 for services performed.
5. Paid $254 cash for advertising start of the business.
6. Received $1,280 cash from customers billed in transaction (4).
7. Paid creditor $380 cash on account.
8. Paid dividends of $488 cash to stockholders.
Instructions:
a. For each transaction indicate (a) the basic type of account debited and credited (asset, liability, stockholders’ equity); (b) the specific account debited and credited (Cash, Rent Expense, Service Revenue, etc.); (c) whether the specific account is increased or decreased; and (d) the normal balance of the specific account. Use the folllowing format, in which transaction1 is given as an example.
b. Journalize the transactions. Do not provide explanations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The following information was made available from the income statement and balance sheet of Lauren Company:
Complete the cash flow from operating activities section for Lauren Company using the direct method for the year ended December 31, 2010.
2. Given the following balance sheet, complete a horizontal analysis. Compute the percentage to the nearest tenth of a percent.
|
Jill’s Bikes
Comparative Balance Sheet
For Years Ended December 31, 2011 and 2010
|
|
(in thousands
|
2011
|
2010
|
Difference
|
Percentage
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current Assets
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash and Equivalents
|
$72
|
$94
|
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable, net
|
122
|
104
|
|
|
|
Inventory
|
288
|
232
|
|
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
482
|
430
|
|
|
|
Property, plant and Equipment
|
638
|
358
|
|
|
|
Total Assets
|
$1,120
|
$ 788
|
|
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
242
|
148
|
|
|
|
Accrued Liabilities
|
48
|
66
|
|
|
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
290
|
214
|
|
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
346
|
208
|
|
|
|
Total Liabilities
|
636
|
422
|
|
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
Common Stock
|
70
|
60
|
|
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
414
|
306
|
|
|
|
Total Stockholders’ Equity
|
484
|
366
|
|
|
|
Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
$1,120
|
$788
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the start of 2012, Santana Rey is considering adding a partner to her business. She envisions the new partner taking the lead in generating sales of both services and merchandise for Business Solutions. S. Rey’s equity in Business Solutions as of January 1, 2012, is reflected in the following capital balance.
S. Rey, Capital $80,360
Required
1. S. Rey is evaluating whether the prospective partner should be an equal partner with respect to capital investment and profit sharing (1:1) or whether the agreement should be 4:1 with Rey retaining four-fifths interest with rights to four-fifths of the net income or loss. What factors should she consider in deciding which partnership agreement to offer?
2. Prepare the January 1, 2012, journal entry(ies) necessary to admit a new partner to Business Solutions through the purchase of a partnership interest for each of the following two separate cases:
|
(a) 1:1
|
Sharing agreement
|
|
(b) 4:1
|
Sharing agreement
|
3. Prepare the January 1, 2012, journal entry(ies) required to admit a new partner if the new partner invests cash of $20,090.
4. After posting the entry in part 3, what would be the new partner’s equity percentage?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bishop Company completes these transactions and events during March of the current year (terms for all its credit sales are 2/10, n/30):
Required
1. Open the following general ledger accounts: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Inventory (March 1 beg. bal. is $300,000); Office Supplies; Store Supplies; Office Equipment; Accounts Payable; Long-Term Notes Payable; M. Bishop, Capital (March 1 beg. bal. is $300,000); Sales; Sales Discounts; Cost of Goods Sold; and Sales Salaries Expense. Open the following accounts receivable subsidiary ledger accounts: Taylor Few, Min Cho, and Lance Snow. Open the following accounts payable subsidiary ledger accounts: Stacy Company, Soy Industries, Tells Supply, and JW Company.
2. Enter these transactions in a sales journal like Exhibit 7.5, a purchases journal like Exhibit 7.9, a cash receipts journal like Exhibit 7.7, a cash disbursements journal like Exhibit 7.11, or a general journal. Number all journal pages as page 2.
3. Prepare a trial balance of the general ledger and prove the accuracy of the subsidiary ledgers by preparing schedules of both accounts receivable and accounts payable.
4. Prepare the sales journal, purchase journal, cash reciepts journal, cash disbursement journal, general journal, general ledger, accounts recievable ledger, accounts payable, trial blance, schedule of accounts recievable, schedule of accounts payable.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Inv. No. Check
Date Description Name or Date No. Terms Amount
Dec. 16 Merchandise sold (cost $4,600) Hanna Seppa 916 2/10, n/30 $7,700
17 Received credit memo on returned merch. Funk Company Dec. 15 1,040
17 Purchased office supplies KK’s Supply Company Dec. 16 n/10 EOM 615
18 Received credit memo on returned merch. KK’s Supply Company Dec. 17 40
20 Issued credit memo on returned merch. Bo Brown Dec. 15 500
21 Purchased store equipment KK’s Supply Company Dec. 21 n/10 EOM 6,700
22 Received payment less discount Hanna Seppa Dec. 12
23 Paid invoice less discount Crossland Company Dec. 15 623
24 Sold merchandise on credit (cost $600) Shilo Jones 917 1,200
24 Paid inv. less discount and return Funk Company Dec. 15 624
25 Received payment less discount and return Bo Brown Dec. 15
26 Purchased merchandise and invoice Crossland Company Dec. 25 2/10, n/60 8,100
29 Sold office supplies for cash at cost 50
30 Issued check to owner for personal use Ken Choi 625 3,500
31 Check issued for sales salaries Jamie Inman 626 2,020
31 Issued check for electric bill Access Electric Company 627 710
31 Cash sales for last half of month (cost $11,200) 29,600
Requirements:
Prepare Special Journals, Post to Ledgers, Accounts Receivable Ledger, Accounts Payable Ledger, Trial Balance
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, 2011, Kloppenberg Company had Accounts Receivable $139,000, Notes Receivable $25,000, and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $13,200. The note receivable is from Sara Rogers Company. It is a 4-month, 12% note dated December 31, 2010. Kloppenberg Company prepares financial statements annually. During the year the following selected transactions occurred.
Jan. 5 Sold $20,000 of merchandise to Dedonder Company, terms n/15.
Jan. 20 Accepted Dedonder Company’s $20,000, 3-month, 9% note for balance due.
Feb. 18 Sold $8,000 of merchandise to Ludwig Company and accepted Ludwig’s $8,000, 6-month, 9% note for the amount due.
Apr. 20 Collected Dedonder Company note in full.
Apr. 30 Received payment in full from Sara Rogers Company on the amount due.
May 25 Accepted Jenks Inc.’s $4,000, 3-month, 7% note in settlement of a past-due balance on account.
Aug. 18 Received payment in full from Ludwig Company on note due.
Aug. 25 The Jenks Inc. note was dishonored. Jenks Inc. is not bankrupt; future payment is anticipated.
Sept. 1 Sold $12,000 of merchandise to Lena Torme Company and accepted a $12,000, 6-month, 10% note for the amount due.
Instructions:
Journalize the transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(TCO 10) Gina’s Boutique makes custom jewelry. One item, the guru necklace, is a best seller and sales in units for the first quarter are as follows:
|
January
|
100,000
|
Units
|
|
February
|
150,000
|
Units
|
|
March
|
180,000
|
Units
|
Desired ending inventory is budgeted at 20% of next month sales.
Compute production for February
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(TCO A) Use the following partial financial statement information below to calculate the liquidity and profitability ratios. This information can be used to correctly solve each of the ratios below.
|
Average common shares outstanding
|
15,000
|
Current liabilities
|
$25,000
|
|
Capital expenditures
|
$10,000
|
Net income
|
$30,000
|
|
Cash provided by operations
|
$56,000
|
Net sales
|
$90,000
|
|
Common stock dividends paid
|
$30,000
|
Total liabilities
|
$50,000
|
|
Current assets
|
$35,000
|
Total assets
|
$62,500
|
Instructions:
Compute the following.
a) Current ratio
b) Working capital
c) Earnings per share
d) Debt-to-total-assets ratio
e) Free cash flow
To earn full credit, you must show the formula you are using, show your computations, and explain the meaning of each of your ratio results.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(TCOs B, E) The following items are taken from the financial statements of Calidor Company for 2010.
|
Accounts payable
|
$45,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
55,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
9,600
|
|
Bonds payable
|
38,000
|
|
Cash
|
74,000
|
|
Common stock
|
135,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
34,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
4,800
|
|
Dividends
|
7,000
|
|
Equipment
|
50,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
4,500
|
|
Patents
|
19,500
|
|
Retained earnings, January 1
|
40,000
|
|
Salaries expense
|
20,200
|
|
Sales revenue
|
75,500
|
|
Supplies
|
2,000
|
Instructions:
Prepare a multiple-level income statementt for Calidor Company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budgeting and Standard Costing – Quiz
1. (TCO 7) Elliot’s Escargots sells commercial and home snail extraction tools and serving pieces. Currently, the snail extraction line of products takes up approximately 50 percent of the company’s retail floor space. The CEO of Elliot’s wants to decide if the company should continue offering snail extraction tools or focus only on serving pieces. If the snail extraction tools are dropped, salaries and other direct fixed costs can be avoided and serving piece sales would increase by 13 percent. Allocated fixed costs are assigned based on relative sales.
| |
Snail Extraction
|
Serving
|
|
| |
Tools
|
Pieces
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
$1,200,000
|
$800,000
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Less cost of goods sold
|
700,000
|
500,000
|
1,200,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
500,000
|
300,000
|
800,000
|
|
Less direct fixed costs:
|
|
|
|
|
Salaries
|
175,000
|
175,000
|
350,000
|
|
Other
|
60,000
|
60,000
|
120,000
|
|
Less allocated fixed costs:
|
|
|
|
|
Rent
|
14,118
|
9,882
|
24,000
|
|
Insurance
|
3,529
|
2,471
|
6,000
|
|
Cleaning
|
4,117
|
2,883
|
7,000
|
|
Executive salary
|
76,470
|
53,530
|
130,000
|
|
Other
|
7,058
|
4,942
|
12,000
|
|
Total costs
|
340,292
|
308,708
|
649,000
|
|
Net income
|
$159,708
|
($ 8,708)
|
$151,000
|
Prepare an incremental analysis in good form to determine the incremental effect on profit of discontinuing the snail extraction tool line.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lorenz Company closes its books on July 31. On June 30 the Notes Receivable account balance is $23,800. Notes Receivable include the following.
|
Date
|
Maker
|
Face Value
|
Team
|
Maturity Date
|
Interest Rate
|
|
May 21
|
Alger Inc.
|
$6,000
|
60 days
|
July 20
|
8%
|
|
May 25
|
Girard Co.
|
$7,800
|
60 days
|
July 24
|
10%
|
|
June 30
|
LSU Corp.
|
$10,000
|
6 months
|
December 31
|
9%
|
During July the following transactions were completed.
July 5 Made sales of $5,100 on Lorenz credit cards.
July 14 Made sales of $600 on Visa credit cards. The credit card service charge is 3%.
July 20 Received payment in full from Agler Inc. on the amount due.
July 24 Received payment in full from Girard Co. on the amount due.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the July transactions and the July 31 adjusting entry for accrued interest receivable. (Interest is computed using 360 days.)
(b) Enter the balances at July 1 in the receivable accounts and post the entries to all of the receivable accounts. (Use T accounts.)
(c) Show the balance sheet presentation of the receivable accounts at July 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On June 1 Eckersley Service Co. was started with an initial investment in the company of $26,200 cash. Here are the assets and liabilities of the company at June 30, and the revenues and expenses for the month of June, its first month of operations:
|
Cash
|
4,600
|
Notes payable
|
12,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
4,000
|
Accounts payable
|
500
|
|
Revenue
|
7,000
|
Supplies expense
|
1,000
|
|
Supplies
|
2,400
|
Gas and oil expense
|
600
|
|
Advertising expense
|
400
|
Utilities expense
|
300
|
|
Equipment
|
29,000
|
Wage expense
|
1,400
|
In June, the company issued no additional stock, but paid dividends of $2,000.
Instructions
(a) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the month of June and a balance sheet at June 30, 2010.
(b) Briefly discuss whether the company’s first month of operations was a success.
(c) Discuss the company’s decision to distribute a dividend.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lancer Audio produces a high-end DVD player that sells for $1,300. Total operating expenses for July were as follows:
|
Units produced and sold
|
145
|
|
Component costs
|
68,000
|
|
Supplies
|
2,500
|
|
Assembly labor
|
24,650
|
|
Supervisor salary
|
5,600
|
|
Electricity
|
350
|
|
Telephone
|
280
|
|
Gas
|
300
|
|
Shipping
|
2,000
|
|
Advertising
|
2,600
|
|
Administrative costs
|
15,000
|
|
Total
|
$123,580
|
Required
a. Use account analysis to determine fixed cost per month and variable cost per DVD player.
b. Project total cost for August assuming production and sales of 165 units.
c. What is the contribution margin per DVD player?
d. Estimate total profit assuming production and sales of 165 units.
e. Lancer Audio is considering an order for 120 DVD players, to be produced in the next 10 months, from a customer in Canada. The selling price will be $950 per unit (well under the normal selling price). However, the Lancer Audio brand name will not be attached to the product. What will be the impact on company profit associated with this order?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost-Plus Pricing
Emerson Ventures is considering producing a new line of hang gliders. The company estimates that variable costs will be $400 per unit and fixed costs will be $400,000 per year.
Required
a. Emerson has a pricing policy that dictates that a product’s price must be equal to full cost plus 50 percent. To calculate full cost, Emerson must estimate the number of units it will produce and sell in a year. At the beginning of the year, Emerson estimates that it will sell 2,000 gliders and sets its price according to that sales and production volume. What is the price?
b. Right after the beginning of the year, the economy takes a dive and Emerson finds that demand for their gliders has fallen drastically. Emerson revises its sales and production estimate to just 1,600 gliders for the year. According to company policy, what price must now be set?
c. What is likely to happen to the number of gliders sold if Emerson follows company policy and raises the glider price to that calculated in part b?
d. Why is setting price by marking up cost inherently circular for a manufacturing firm?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining the Profit-Maximizing Price
RoverPlus, a pet product superstore, is considering pricing a new RoverPlus-labeled dog food. The company will buy the premium dog food from a company in Indiana that packs the product with a RoverPlus label. Rover pays $7 for a 50-pound bag delivered to its store.
The company also sells Royal Dog Food (under the Royal Dog Food label), which it purchases for $10 per 50-pound bag and sells for $17.99. The company currently sells 26,000 bags of Royal Dog Food per month, but that is expected to change when the RoverPlus brand is introduced.
The company will continue to price the Royal Dog Food brand at $17.99. The quantity of RoverPlus and the quantity of Royal Dog Food that will be sold at various prices for Royal are estimated as:
|
Price RoverPlus
|
Quantity RoverPlus
|
Quantity Royal
|
|
7.99
|
36,000
|
12,000
|
|
8.99
|
35,500
|
12,300
|
|
9.99
|
35,000
|
12,500
|
|
10.99
|
34,000
|
13,000
|
|
11.99
|
31,000
|
14,000
|
|
12.99
|
26,000
|
15,000
|
|
13.99
|
16,000
|
16,000
|
|
14.99
|
11,000
|
20,000
|
|
15.99
|
6,000
|
22,000
|
For example, if RoverPlus is priced at $7.99, the company will sell 36,000 bags of RoverPlus and 12,000 bags of Royal at $17.99. If the company prices RoverPlus at $15.99, it will sell 6,000 bags of RoverPlus and 22,000 bags of Royal at $17.99. This is 4,000 fewer bags of Royal than is currently being sold.
Required
a. Calculate the profit-maximizing price for the RoverPlus brand, taking into account the effect of the sales of RoverPlus on sales of the Royal Dog Food brand.
b. At the price calculated in part a, what is the incremental profit over the profit earned before the introduction of the RoverPlus-branded dog food?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost of Goods Manufactured, Cost of Goods Sold, and Income
The following information is available for Satterfield’s Custom Glass for the fiscal year ending December 31, 2011.
|
Beginning balance in Work in Process
|
200,000
|
|
Ending balance in Work in Process
|
300,000
|
|
Beginning balance in Finished Goods
|
500,000
|
|
Direct material cost
|
2,000,000
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
2,400,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
1,700,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
250,000
|
|
General and administrative expenses
|
450,000
|
|
Sales
|
8,00,000
|
Required
a. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured.
b. Prepare an income statement for fiscal 2011. Ignore income taxes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Finney Inc. has conducted an analysis of overhead costs related to one of its product lines using a traditional costing system (volume-based) and an activity-based costing system. Here are its results.
|
|
Traditional Costing
|
ABC
|
|
Sales revenue
|
600,000
|
600,000
|
|
Overhead costs:
|
|
|
|
Product Rx3
|
34,000
|
50,000
|
|
Product Y12
|
36,000
|
20,000
|
|
|
$70,000
|
$70,000
|
Explain how a difference in the overhead costs between the two systems may have occurred.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wilmington Inc. manufactures five models of kitchen appliances at its Mesa plant. The company is installing activity based costing and has identified the following activities performed at it Mesa plant.
1. Designing new models
2. Purchasing raw materials and parts
3. Storing and managing inventory
4. Receiving and inspecting raw materials and parts
5. Interviewing and hiring new personnel
6. Machine forming sheet steel into appliance parts
7. Manually assembling parts into appliances
8. Training all employees of the company
9. Insuring all tangible fixed assets
10. Supervising production
11. Maintaining and repairing machinery and equipment
12. Painting and packaging finished appliances
Having analyzed its Mesa pant operations for purposes of installing activity-based costing, Wilmington Inc. identified its activity cost centers. It now needs to identify relevant acidity cost drivers in order to assign overhead to Wilmington’s five products
Instructions:
Using the activities listed above, identify for each activity one or more cost drivers that might be used to assign overhead to Wilmington’s five products.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ortega has prepared the following list of statements about decision- making and incremental analysis.
1. The first step in management’s decision -making process is, ” Determine and evaluate possible courses of action”.
2. The final step in management’s decision-making process is to actually make the decision.
3. Accounting’s contribution to management’s decision-making process occurs primarily in evaluating possible courses of action and reviewing the results.
4. In making business decisions, management ordinarily considers only financial information because it is objectively determines.
5. Decisions involve in a choice among alternative courses of action.
6. The process used to identify the financial data that change under alternative courses of action is called incremental analysis.
7. Costs that are the same under all alternative courses of action sometimes affect the decision.
8. When using incremental analysis, some costs will always change under alternative courses of action, but revenues will not.
9. Variable cost will change under alternative course of action, but fixed cost will not.
Instructions
Identify each statement as True or False. If false indicate how to correct statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(TCO F) The Michigan Company manufactures a product that goes through three processing departments. Information relating to activity in the first department during June is given below:
|
|
Percent completed
|
|
|
|
|
Units
|
Materials
|
Conversion
|
|
Work in process, June 1
|
40,000
|
65%
|
45%
|
|
Work in process, June 30
|
35,000
|
75%
|
65%
|
The department started 175,000 units into production during the month and transferred 180,000 completed units to the next department.
REQUIRED:
Compute the equivalent units of production for the first department for June, assuming that the company uses the weighted-average method of accounting for units and costs.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Break-Even Analysis, Margin of Safety, Increase in Profit
Edison Entrepreneur Services, Inc., is a legal services firm that files the paperwork to incorporate a business. Edison charges $1,200 for the incorporation application package and plans to file 1,500 applications next year. The company’s projected income statement for the coming year is:
|
Sales
|
1,800,000
|
|
Less variable expenses
|
1,10,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
690,000
|
|
Less fixed expenses
|
300,000
|
|
Operating income
|
$390,000
|
Required
a. Compute the contribution margin per application and calculate the break-even point in number of applications. (Round to the nearest whole unit, since it is not possible to file a partial application.) Calculate the contribution margin ratio (round to 4 decimal places) and the break-even sales revenue (round to the nearest dollar).
b. What is the current margin of safety in terms of the number of units? What is the current margin of safety in terms of sales dollars?
c. If Edison wants to have operating income of $450,000 next year, how many applications must it process? (Round to the nearest whole unit.) What dollar level of sales is required to achieve operating income of $450,000? (Round to the nearest dollar.)
d. The office manager for Edison has proposed that Edison increase advertising (a fixed cost) for the upcoming year by $80,000; she feels that this increase in advertising will lead to an increase in sales of $324,000. Prepare a new projected income statement for this proposal. Should Edison increase its advertising to this new level?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Santana Rey, owner of Business Solutions, realizes that she needs to begin accounting for bad debts expense. Assume that Business Solutions has total revenues of $44,000 during the first three months of 2012, and that the Accounts Receivable balance on March 31, 2012, is $22,867.
Required
1. Prepare the adjusting entry needed for Business Solutions to recognize bad debts expense on March 31, 2012, under each of the following independent assumptions (assume a zero unadjusted balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at March 31).
a. Bad debts are estimated to be 1% of total revenues. (Round amounts to the dollar.)
b. Bad debts are estimated to be 2% of accounts receivable. (Round amounts to the dollar.)
2. Assume that Business Solutions’ Accounts Receivable balance at June 30, 2012, is $20,250 and that one account of $100 has been written off against the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts since March 31, 2012. IfS. Reyuses the method prescribed in Part 1b, what adjusting journal entry must be made to recognize bad debts expense on June 30, 2012?
3. Should S. Rey consider adopting the direct write-off method of accounting for bad debts expense rather than one of the allowance methods considered in part 1? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Santana Rey receives the March bank statement for Business Solutions on April 11, 2012. The March 31 bank statement shows an ending cash balance of $67,566. A comparison of the bank statement with the general ledger Cash account, No. 101, reveals the following.
a. S. Rey notices that the bank erroneously cleared a $500 check against her account in March that she did not issue. The check documentation included with the bank statement shows that this check was actually issued by a company named Business Systems.
b. On March 25, the bank issued a $50 debit memorandum for the safety deposit box that Business Solutions agreed to rent from the bank beginning March 25.
c. On March 26, the bank issued a $102 debit memorandum for printed checks that Business Solutions ordered from the bank.
d. On March 31, the bank issued a credit memorandum for $33 interest earned on Business Solutions’ checking account for the month of March.
e. S. Rey notices that the check she issued for $128 on March 31, 2012, has not yet cleared the bank.
f. S. Rey verifies that all deposits made in March do appear on the March bank statement.
g. The general ledger Cash account, No. 101, shows an ending cash balance per books of $68,057 as of March 31 (prior to any reconciliation).
Required
1. Prepare a bank reconciliation for Business Solutions for the month ended March 31, 2012.
2. Prepare any necessary adjusting entries. Use Miscellaneous Expenses, No. 677, for any bank charges. Use Interest Revenue, No. 404, for any interest earned on the checking account for the month of March.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Santana Rey of Business Solutions is evaluating her inventory to determine whether it must be adjusted based on lower of cost or market rules. Business Solutions has three different types of software in its inventory and the following information is available for each.
|
Items
|
Inventory Units
|
Cost per Unit
|
Market Price per Unit
|
|
Office productivity
|
3
|
76
|
74
|
|
Desktop publishing
|
2
|
103
|
100
|
|
Accouting
|
3
|
90
|
96
|
Required:
1. Compute the lower of cost or market for ending inventory assuming Rey applies the lower of cost or market rule to inventory as a whole. Must Rey adjust the reported inventory value? Explain.
2. Assume that Rey had instead applied the lower of cost or market rule to each product in inventory. Under this assumption, must Rey adjust the reported inventory value? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Santana Rey created Business Solutions on October 1, 2011. The company has been successful, and its list of customers has grown. To accommodate the growth, the accounting system is modified to set up separate accounts for each customer. The following chart of accounts includes the account number used for each account and any balance as of December 31, 2011. Santana Rey decided to add a fourth digit with a decimal point to the 106 account number that had been used for the single Accounts Receivable account. This change allows the company to continue using the existing chart of accounts.
In response to requests from customers, S. Rey will begin selling computer software. The company will extend credit terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, to all customers who purchase this merchandise.However, no cash discount is available on consulting fees. Additional accounts (Nos. 119, 413, 414, 415, and 502) are added to its general ledger to accommodate the company’s new merchandising activities.
Also, Business Solutions does not use reversing entries and, therefore, all revenue and expense accounts have zero beginning balances as of January 1, 2012. Its transactions for January through March follow:
Required
1. Prepare journal entries to record each of the January through March transactions.
2. Post the journal entries in part 1 to the accounts in the company’s general ledger. (Note: Begin with the ledger’s post -closing adjusted balances as of December 31, 2011.)
3. Prepare a partial work sheet consisting of the first six columns (similar to the one shown in Exhibit 5B.1) that includes the unadjusted trial balance, the March 31 adjustments (a) through (g), and the adjusted trial balance. Do not prepare closing entries and do not journalize the adjustments or post them to the ledger.
4. Prepare an income statement (from the adjusted trial balance in part 3) for the three months ended March31, 2012. Use a single-step format. List all expenses without differentiating between selling expenses andgeneral and administrative expenses.
5. Prepare a statement of owner’s equity (from the adjusted trial balance in part 3) for the three months ended March 31, 2012.
6. Prepare a classified balance sheet (from the adjusted trial balance) as of March 31, 2012
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
After Creative Design’s first month of operations your friend delivers to you a stack of invoices, check stubs, receipts and her first VISA-Business bill. You must decipher these in order to enter them into the accounts.
After sorting through the source documents you make a list of transactions for the first month, April:
1.Jessi invested her life savings in the company $10,000.
2.Jessi purchased from Best Buy a computer and printer/ fax/ copier and monitor and software for $3500. She got a 12 month no interest credit arrangement and will make monthly payments to Best Buy. You decide this will all be equipment.
3.Jessi set up a credit account with an office supply store for supplies, and purchased supplies including printer paper, CDs, and ink for the printer for $200. Jessi gave you the bill but she does not have to make a payment until month end.
4.Jessi purchased a comfortable desk chair from a department store for $250. You decide this will be equipment.
7.Jessi’s CPA gave her some tax advice so she decided to develop a logo and other advertising materials for her car and customers. She had them printed and had her car painted with the new logo. This cost Jessi $500. You decide this will be expensed.
8.Jessi negotiated a business transaction with a local Mexican Restaurant just opening. She will work on a logo, menu, and flyers. The restaurant owner paid $200 down to be used against the first month’s bill. Jessi will bill the customer monthly based on her hours worked on the account.
9.Jessi designed a flyer for a local bakery and was paid cash of $150.
12.Jessi designed a CD cover for a friend who is a drummer in a local band. She was paid $400 for her work.
14.Jessi designed some POS material for a local coop market. She billed them for $500 for her work.
22.Jessi set up accounts to purchase stock photos for artwork and subscriptions $200. This is a prepaid asset until Jessi uses the photos.
23.Jessi designed and set up a website, email account, etc for herself. She paid $240 to register everything and will expense $20 per month against this amount.
24.Jessi wrote a check to herself to cover her rent and car insurance. $1,200.
Enter the above transactions into the journal and post them to the T accounts. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jessi is anxious to find out if she has earned any profits the first month of her operations. You have to adjust the accoutns to bring them up to date before you can prepare the financial statements. Enter the following adjusting entries into a general journal. Post the adjustments to the T accounts and prepare an adjusted trial balance.
1. The depreciation on the equipment is $104.
2. The supplies on hand at the end of the month are $150.
3. The balance in the subscriptions web site is $175.
4. The monthly amount for the web site and email account must be expensed.
5. Jessi determined she performed $1,000 worth of work for the Mexican restaurant.
6. Jessi made her first monthly payment on the computer to Best Buy, $292.
7. Jessi made a payment for supplies to staples of $75.
8. Jessi received a check from the local coop market of $250.
9. Jessi worked on a business card and logo for a local quilting shop. She did not finished the work and there will be more work for this company so she billed them for 15 hours at $75 per hour.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budgeting and Standard Costing – Quiz
Leekee Shipyards has a new barnacle removing product for ocean going vessels. The company invests $1,200,000 in operating assets and plans to produce and sell 400,000 units per year. Leekee wants to make a return on investment of 20% each year. Leekee needs to know what price to charge for this product.
Use the absorption costing approach to determine the markup necessary to make the desired return on investment based on the following information:
|
|
Per unit
|
Total
|
|
Direct Materials
|
$2.00
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
$1.50
|
|
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead
|
$1.00
|
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead
|
|
$100,000
|
|
Variable Selling and Administriative Expenses
|
$0.10
|
|
|
Fixed Selling and Administrative Expenses
|
|
$100,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budgeting and Standard Costing – Quiz
(TCO 5) The following information relates to Vice Versa Ventures for calendar year 20XX, the company’s first year of operations:
|
Units produced
|
20,000
|
|
Units sold
|
17,000
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$35
|
|
Direct material per unit
|
$5
|
|
Direct labor per unit
|
$5
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead per unit
|
$2
|
|
Variable selling cost per unit
|
$3
|
|
Annual fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$160,000
|
|
Annual fixed selling and administrative expenses
|
$80,000
|
(a) Prepare an income statement using full costing.
(b) Prepare an income statement using variable costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budgeting and Standard Costing – Quiz Thurman Munster, the owner of Adams Family RVs, is considering the addition of a service center his lot. The building and equipment are estimated to cost $1,100,000 and both the building and equipment will be depreciated over 10 years using the straight-line method. The building and equipment have zero estimated residual value at the end of 10 years. Munster’s required rate of return for this project is 12 percent. Net income related to each year of the investment is as follows:
|
Revenue
|
450,000
|
|
Less: Materials cost
|
60,000
|
|
Labor
|
100,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
110,000
|
|
Other
|
10,000
|
|
|
280,000
|
|
Income before taxs
|
170,000
|
|
Taxes at 40%
|
68,000
|
|
Net Income
|
$102,000
|
(a) Determine the net present value of the investment in the service center. Should Munster invest in the service center?
(b) Calculate the internal rate of return of the investment to the nearest ½ percent.
(c) Calculate the payback period of the investment.
(d) Calculate the accounting rate of return.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budgeting and Standard Costing – Quiz
(TCO 7) Elliot’s Escargots sells commercial and home snail extraction tools and serving pieces. Currently, the snail extraction line of products takes up approximately 50 percent of the company’s retail floor space. The CEO of Elliot’s wants to decide if the company should continue offering snail extraction tools or focus only on serving pieces. If the snail extraction tools are dropped, salaries and other direct fixed costs can be avoided and serving piece sales would increase by 13 percent. Allocated fixed costs are assigned based on relative sales.
|
|
Snail Extraction
|
Serving
|
|
|
|
Tools
|
Pieces
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
$1,200,000
|
$800,000
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Less cost of goods sold
|
700,000
|
500,000
|
1,200,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
500,000
|
300,000
|
800,000
|
|
Less direct fixed costs:
|
|
|
|
|
Salaries
|
175,000
|
175,000
|
350,000
|
|
Other
|
60,000
|
60,000
|
120,000
|
|
Less allocated fixed costs:
|
|
|
|
|
Rent
|
14,118
|
9,882
|
24,000
|
|
Insurance
|
3,529
|
2,471
|
6,000
|
|
Cleaning
|
4,117
|
2,883
|
7,000
|
|
Executive salary
|
76,470
|
53,530
|
130,000
|
|
Other
|
7,058
|
4,942
|
12,000
|
|
Total costs
|
340,292
|
308,708
|
649,000
|
|
Net income
|
$159,708
|
($ 8,708)
|
$151,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Golf World sold merchandise to Mulligans for $10,000, offering terms of 1115, n130. Mulligans paid for the merchandise within the discount period. Both companies use perpetual inventory systems.
Instructions:
a. Prepare journal entries in the accounting records of Golf World to account for this sale and the subsequent collection. Assume the original cost of the merchandise to Golf World had been $6,500.
b. Prepare journal entries in the accounting records of Mulligans to account for the purchase and subsequent payment Mulligans records purchases of merchandise at net cost.
c. Assume that because of a change in personnel, Mulligans failed to pay for this merchandise within the discount period. Prepare the journal entry in the accounting records of Mulligans to record payment after the discount period.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
D. J. Fletcher, a trusted employee of Bluestem Products, found himself in personal financial difficulties and decided to “borrow” $3,000 from the company and to conceal his theft.
As a first step, Fletcher removed $3,000 in currency from the cash register. This amount represented the bulk of the cash received in over-the-counter sales during the three business days since the last bank deposit. Fletcher then removed a $3,000 check from the day’s incoming mail; this check had been mailed in by a customer, Michael Adams, in full payment of his account. Fletcher made no journal entry to record the $3,000 collection from Adams, but deposited the check in Bluestem Products’ bank account in place of the $3,000 over-the-counter cash receipts he had stolen.
In order to keep Adams from protesting when his month-end statement reached him, Fletcher made a journal entry debiting Sales Returns and Allowances and crediting Accounts Receivable-Michael Adams. Fletcher posted this entry to the two general ledger accounts affected and to Adams’s account in the subsidiary ledger for accounts receivable.
Instructions:
a. Did these actions by Fletcher cause the general ledger to be out of balance or the subsidiary ledger to disagree with the control account? Explain.
b. Assume that Bluestem Products prepares financial statements at the end of the month without discovering the theft. Would any items in the balance sheet or the income statement be in error? Explain.
c. Several weaknesses in internal control apparently exist in Bluestem Products. Indicate three specific changes needed to strengthen internal control over cash receipts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shown below is the information needed to prepare a bank reconciliation for Warren Electric December 31:
1. At December 31, cash per the bank statement was $15,200; cash per the company’s records was $17,500.
2. Two debit memoranda accompanied the bank statement: service charges for December of $25 and a $775 check drawn by Jane Jones marked “NSF.”
3. Cash receipts of $10,000 on December 31 were not deposited until January 4.
4. The following checks had been issued in December but were not included among the paid checks returned by the bank: no. 620 for $1,000, no. 630 for $3,000, and no. 641 for $4,500.
Instructions:
a. Prepare a bank reconciliation at December 31.
b. Prepare the necessary journal entry or entries to update the accounting records.
c. Assume that the company normally is not required to pay a bank service charge if it maintains a minimum average daily balance of $1,000 throughout the month. If the company’s average daily balance for December had been $8,000, why did it have to pay a $25 service charge?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
When Laura Rapp arrived at her store on the morning of January 29, she found empty shelves and display racks; thieves had broken in during the night and stolen the entire inventory. Rapp’s accounting records showed that she had inventory costing $50,000 on January l. From January 1 to January 29, she had made net sales of $70,000, and net purchases of $80,000. The gross profit during the past several years had consistently averaged 45 percent of net sales. Rapp wishes to file an insurance claim for the theft loss.
Instructions:
a. Using the gross profit method, estimate the cost of Rapp’s inventory at the time of the theft.
b. Does Rapp use the periodic inventory method or does she account for inventory using the perpetual method? Defend your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eastern Supply sells a variety of merchandise to retail stores on open account, but it insists that any customer who fails to pay an invoice when due must replace it with an interest-bearing note. The company adjusts and closes its accounts at December 31. Among the transactions relating to notes receivable were the following:
Sept. 1 Received from a customer (Party Plus) a nine-month, 10 percent note for $75,000 in settlement of an account receivable due today.
June 1 Collected in full the nine-month, 10 percent note receivable from Party Plus, including interest.
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries (in general journal form) to record:
(1) the receipt of the note on September 1
(2) the adjustment for interest on December 31
(3) collection of principal and interest on June 1.
(To better illustrate the allocation of interest revenue between accounting periods, we will assume Eastern Supply makes adjusting entries only at year-end.)
b. Assume that instead of paying the note on June 1, the customer (Party Plus) had defaulted. Give the journal entry by Eastern Supply to record the default. Assume that Party Plus had sufficient resources that the note eventually will be collected.
c. Explain why the company insist that any customer who fails to pay an invoice when due must replace it with an interest-bearing note.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lamprino Appliance uses a perpetual inventory system. The following are three recent merchandising transactions:
June 10 Purchased 10 televisions from Mitsu Industries on account. Invoice price, $300 per unit, for a total of $3,000. The terms of purchase were 2110, n/30.
June 15 Sold one of these televisions for $450 cash.
June 20 Paid the account payable to Mitsu Industries within the discount period.
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions assuming that Lamprino records purchases of merchandise at:
1. Net cost
2. Gross invoice price
b. Assume that Lamprino did not pay Mitsu Industries within the discount period but instead paid the full invoice price on July 10. Prepare journal entries to record this payment assuming that the original liability had been recorded at: 1. Net cost and 2. Gross invoice price
c. Assume that you are evaluating the efficiency of Lamprino’s bill-paying procedures. Which accounting method–net cost or gross invoice price–provides you with the most useful information? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(TCO 4) Copper Queen Hotel is interested in estimating fixed and variable costs so the hotel can make more accurate projections of costs, break-even and profits. The hotel is in a resort area and busy from November through March. In July and August, the hotel has only a 50 percent occupancy rate.
Classify each of the following costs as fixed, variable or mixed.
A. Depreciation of the building
B. Salaries of restaurant staff
C. Salaries of hotel manager, desk manager, accounting clerks
D. Soap, shampoo and other toiletries in the bathrooms
E. Laundry costs (cost of bed linens, table cloths, cleaning products, depreciation on cleaning equipment.
F. Food and beverage costs
G. Grounds Maintenance
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Speed World Cycles sells high-performance motorcycles and motocross racers. One of Speed World’s most popular models is the Kazomma 900 dirt bike. During the current year, Speed World purchased eight of these cycles at the following costs:
|
Purchase date
|
Units
|
Purchased
|
Unit cost
|
Total cost
|
|
July
|
1
|
2
|
4,950
|
9,900
|
|
July
|
22
|
3
|
5,000
|
15,000
|
|
Aug.
|
3
|
3
|
5,100
|
40,200
|
On July 28, Speed World sold four Kazomma 900 dirt bikes to the Vince Wilson racing team. The remaining four bikes remained in inventory at September 30, the end of Speed World’s fiscal year.
Assume that Speed World uses a perpetual inventory system.
a (1) Compute the cost of goods sold relating to the sale on July 28 and the ending inventory of Kazomma 900 dirt bikes at September 30, using average cost method. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
a (2) Compute the cost of goods sold relating to the sale on July 28 and the ending inventory of Kazomma 900 dirt bikes at September 30, using FIFO method. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
a (3) Compute the cost of goods sold relating to the sale on July 28 and the ending inventory of Kazomma 900 dirt bikes at September 30, using LIFO method. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
b(1) Which of the three cost flow assumptions will result in Speed World Cycles reporting the highest net income for the current year?
b(2) Which of the three cost flow assumptions will minimize the income taxes owed by Speed World Cycles for the year?
b(3) May Speed World Cycles use the cost flow assumption that results in the highest net income for the current year in its financial statements, but use the cost flow assumption that minimizes taxable income for the current year in its income tax return?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Neer Department Store uses the retail inventory method to estimate its monthly ending inventories.The following information is available for two of its departments at August 31, 2008.
|
|
Sporting Goods
|
Jewellery and Cosmetics
|
|
|
Cost
|
Retail
|
Cost
|
Retail
|
|
Net sales
|
|
1,078,300
|
|
1,156,300
|
|
Purchases
|
672,800
|
1,124,700
|
757,700
|
1,153,500
|
|
Purchase returns
|
(26,120)
|
(40,630)
|
(11,670)
|
(19,620)
|
|
Purchase discounts
|
(12,150)
|
–
|
(2,220)
|
–
|
|
Freight-in
|
10,000
|
–
|
15,580
|
–
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
45,120
|
72,830
|
37,550
|
61,310
|
At December 31, Neer Department Store takes a physical inventory at retail. The actual retail values of the inventories in each department are Sporting Goods $94,350, and Jewelry and Cosmetics $43,760.
a. Determine the estimated cost of the ending inventory for each department on August 31, 2008, using the retail inventory method. (Round cost-to-retail ratio to 2 decimal places , e.g. 10.50 in computations. Round final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)
b. Compute the ending inventory at cost for each department at December 31, assuming the cost-to-retail ratios are 60% for Sporting Goods and 63% for Jewelry and Cosmetics.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Els Company most recently reconciled it’s bank statement and book balances of cash on August 31 and it reported two checks outstanding, No. 5888 for $1,038.05 and No. 5893 for $484.25. the following information is available for it’s Septemenber 30, 2011, reconciliation.
From the September 30 bank statement:
|
Previous balance
|
16m,800.45
|
|
Total Checkes and Debits
|
9,620.05
|
|
Total Deposits and Credits
|
11,182.85
|
|
Current Balance
|
18,363.25
|
|
Checks and Debits
|
Daily Balance
|
|
Date
|
Check
|
Amount
|
Date
|
Amount
|
|
3-Sept.
|
5888
|
1,038.05
|
Aug-31
|
16,800.45
|
|
4-Sept.
|
5902
|
731.90
|
Sept.-3
|
15,030.50
|
|
7-Sept.
|
5901
|
1,824.25
|
Sept.-5
|
16,134.25
|
|
17-Sep
|
NSF
|
588.25
|
Sep-5
|
16,134.25
|
|
20-Sep
|
5905
|
937.00
|
Jan-1
|
14,310.00
|
|
22-Sep
|
5903
|
399.10
|
Jan-0
|
16,536.90
|
|
22-Sep
|
5904
|
2,080.00
|
Sep-17
|
16,948.65
|
|
28-Sep
|
5907
|
213.85
|
Sep-20
|
15,011.65
|
|
29-Sep
|
5909
|
1,807.65
|
Sep-21
|
19,104.65
|
|
|
|
|
22-Sep
|
1,625.55
|
|
|
|
|
25-Sep
|
18,977.25
|
|
|
|
|
Sep-28
|
18,763.40
|
|
|
|
|
Sep-29
|
16,955.75
|
|
|
|
|
Sep-20
|
18,363.25
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Laird Corporation incurred the following transactions.
1. Purchased raw materials on account $46,300.
2. Raw Materials of $36,000 were requisitioned to the factory. An analysis of the materials requisition slips indicated that $8,800 was classified as indirect materials.
3. Factory labor costs incurred were $53,900, of which $49,000 pertained to factory wages payable and $4,900 pertained to employer payroll taxes payable.
4. Time tickets indicated that $50,000 was direct labor and $3,900 was indirect labor.
5. Overhead costs incurred on account were $80,500.
6. Manufacturing overhead was applied at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost.
7. Goods costing $88,000 were completed and transferred to finished goods.
8. Finished goods costing $75,000 to manufacture were sold on account for $103,000.
Instructions:
Prepare entries for manufacturing costs. Journalize the following transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Olaf Distributing Company completed the following merchandising transactions in the month of April. At the beginning of April, the ledger of Olaf showed Cash of $9,000 and Common Stock of $9,000.
Apr. 2 Purchased merchandise on account from Dakota Supply Co. $6,900, terms 1/10, n/30.
4 Sold merchandise on account $5,500, FOB destination, terms 1/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $4,100.
5 Paid $240 freight on April 4 sale.
6 Received credit from Dakota Supply Co. for merchandise returned $500.
11 Paid Dakota Supply Co. in full, less discount.
13 Received collections in full, less discounts, from customers billed on April 4.
14 Purchased merchandise for cash $3,800.
16 Received refund from supplier for returned goods on cash purchase of April 14, $500.
18 Purchased merchandise from Skywalker Distributors $4,500, FOB shipping point, terms 2/10, n/30.
20 Paid freight on April 18 purchase $100.
23 Sold merchandise for cash $6,400. The merchandise sold had a cost of $5,120.
26 Purchased merchandise for cash $2,300.
27 Paid Skywalker Distributors in full, less discount.
29 Made refunds to cash customers for defective merchandise $90. The returned merchandise had a scrap value of $30.
30 Sold merchandise on account $3,700, terms n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $2,800.
Olaf Company’s chart of accounts includes the following: No. 101 Cash, No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 120 Merchandise Inventory, No. 201 Accounts Payable, No. 311 Common Stock, No. 401 Sales, No. 412 Sales Returns and Allowances, No. 414 Sales Discounts, No. 505 Cost of Goods Sold, and No. 644 Freight-out.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the transactions using a perpetual inventory system.
(b) Enter the beginning cash and common stock balances, and post the transactions. (Use J1 for the journal reference.)
(c) Prepare the income statement through gross profit for the month of April 2008. (c) Gross profit $3,465
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
GAAP Applications-Internal Control Assignment
Recall that in Units 2 and 3 you completed the accounting cycle for Dustin Larkin of Quixote Consulting. Quixote Consulting is a part-time consulting business that recently moved from Dustin’s home into rented quarters.
Assume that you are the internal auditor for the business and you have to evaluate the internal control procedures that have been implemented in the business.
There are three objectives of internal control: (1) assets are safeguarded and used for business purposes, (2) business information is accurate, and (3) employees comply with laws and regulations.
The five elements of internal control are (1) the control environment, (2) risk assessment, (3) control procedures, (4) monitoring, and (5) information and communication.
If you owned a business, you would expect your employees to:
1. Work to achieve the business goals and objectives you establish
2.Use business assets (such as machinery or automobiles) only for legitimate business purposes and avoid wasting business resources
3. Record accurate data regarding business transactions so you could accurately judge how well your business is doing
4. Refrain from stealing your cash, supplies, inventory, or property, plant, and equipment
In theory, you should be able to expect these things. In practice, however, you must establish an internal control framework to make sure your business objectives are achieved, assets are protected from theft and misuse, and financial data are recorded accurately.
The following procedures were recently installed by Quixote Consulting:
a. The bank reconciliation is prepared by the cashier, who works under the supervision of the treasurer.
b. All mail is opened by the mail clerk, who forwards all cash remittances to the cashier. The cashier prepares a listing of the cash receipts and forwards a copy of the list to the accounts receivable clerk for recording in the accounts.
c. At the end of the day, cash register clerks are required to use their own funds to make up any cash shortages in their registers.
d. At the end of each day, all cash receipts are placed in the bank’s night depository.
e. At the end of each day, an accounting clerk compares the duplicate copy of the daily cash deposit slip with the deposit receipt obtained from the bank.
f. The accounts payable clerk prepares a voucher for each disbursement. The voucher along with the supporting documentation is forwarded to the treasurer’s office for approval.
g. After necessary approvals have been obtained for the payment of a voucher, treasurer signs and mails the check. The treasurer then stamps the voucher and supporting documentation as paid and returns the voucher and
supporting documentation to the accounts payable clerk for filing.
h. Along with petty cash expense receipts for postage, office supplies, etc., several post-dated employee checks are in the petty cash fund.
Instructions
Indicate whether each of the procedures of internal control represents: (1) a strength or (2) a weakness. For each weakness, indicate why it exists and what procedures should be put into place to alleviate the risk. For each letter A through H you should have at least a one paragraph answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job 827 was recently completed. The following data have been recorded on its job cost sheet:
|
Direct materials
|
61,050
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
1,332 labor hours
|
|
Direct labor wage rate
|
1,332 labor hours
|
|
Machine Hours
|
1,480 machine hours
|
|
Number of units completed
|
3,700 units
|
The company applies manufacturing overhead on the basis of machine-hours. The predetermined overhead rate is $13 per machine-hour.
Compute the unit product cost that would appear on the job cost sheet for this job.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are a number of transactions. Determine whether each transaction affects:
Common stock
Dividends
Revenue
Expense
Does not affect stockholders’ equity
Provide titles for the revenues and expenses. (The first one is completed for you as an example.)
Transaction
(a) Costs incurred for advertising.
(b) Assets received for services performed.
(c) Costs incurred for insurance.
(d) Amounts paid to employees.
(e) Cash distributed to stockholders.
(f) Assets received in exchange for the use of the company’s building.
(g) Costs incurred for utilities used.
(h) Cash purchase of equipment.
(i) Issued common stock for cash.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This information relates to ABC Co. for the year 2010.
Retained earnings, January 1, 2010 $64,000
|
Advertising expense
|
1,800
|
|
Dividends paid during 2010
|
6,000
|
|
Rent expense
|
10,400
|
|
Service revenue
|
53,000
|
|
Utilities expense
|
2,400
|
|
Salaries expense
|
30,000
|
After analyzing the data, complete the following Income Statement and Retained Earnings Statement for the year ended December 31, 2010. (List expenses from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are five independent situations.
In each case, using the drop down list in the yellow-highlighted cells, select what form of organization the business is likely to take – sole proprietorship, partnership, or corporation.
1. Three physics professors at MIT have formed a business to improve the speed of information transfer over the Internet for stock exchange transactions. Each has contributed an equal amount of cash and knowledge to the venture. Although their approach looks promising, they are concerned about the legal liabilities that their business might confront.
2. Daniel Remington, a college student looking for summer employment, opened a bait shop in a small shed at a local marina.
3. Terry Hill and Bill Mayo each owned separate shoe manufacturing businesses. They have decided to combine their businesses. They expect that within the coming year they will need significant funds to expand their operations.
4. Alexis, Danny, and Robert recently graduated with marketing degrees. They have been friends since childhood. They have decided to start a consulting business focused on marketing sporting goods over the Internet.
Stan McGlone wants to rent CD players and CDs in airports across the country. His idea is that customers will be able to rent equipment and CDs at one airport, listen to the CDs on their flights, and return the equipment and CDs at their destination airport. Of course, this will require a substantial investment in equipment and CDs, as well as employees and locations in each airport. Stan has no savings or personal assets. He wants to maintain control over the business.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Condensed balance sheet and income statement data for Lark Corporation are presented here.
LARK CORPORATION
Balance Sheets
December 31
|
Assets
|
2010
|
2009
|
|
Cash
|
$25,000
|
$20,000
|
|
Receivables (net)
|
70,000
|
62,000
|
|
Other current assets
|
80,000
|
73,000
|
|
Long-term investments
|
75,000
|
60,000
|
|
Plant and equipment (net)
|
510,000
|
470,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$760,000
|
$685,000
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Current liabilities
|
$75,000
|
$70,000
|
|
Long-term debt
|
80,000
|
90,000
|
|
Common stock
|
330,000
|
300,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
275,000
|
225,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity
|
$760,000
|
$685,000
|
LARK CORPORATION
Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31
|
|
2010
|
2009
|
|
Sales
|
$750,000
|
$670,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
440,000
|
400,000
|
|
Operating expenses (including income taxes)
|
240,000
|
220,000
|
|
Net income
|
$70,000
|
$50,000
|
|
Additional information:
|
|
|
|
Cash from operating activities
|
$87,000
|
$60,000
|
|
Cash used for capital expenditures
|
$45,000
|
$38,000
|
|
Dividends paid
|
$20,000
|
$15,000
|
|
Average number of shares outstanding
|
33,000
|
30,000
|
Compute the following five values and ratios for 2009 and 2010. (Round all ratios to two decimal places, e.g. 17.54 or 6.25 : 1)
Put your answers in the yellow highlighted cells.
Earnings per share.
Working capital
Current ratio
Debt to total assets ratio
Free cash flow
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for a Job-Order Cost System
Bob and Beth Ford retired from the food services industry and began catering wedding receptions on a limited basis.
The major costs in setting up their business included: linens, $1,200; two complete silver services, $1,000; glass plates and cups, $1,400; and cake-decorating tools and accessories, $600. It is expected that all of these items will last 10 years with no salvage value. Bob and Beth do all their food preparation in their apartment and have found that, in an average month, their utility bill is $100 higher than when they did not cater. All baking and cooking supplies are treated as “direct materials,” and the only other cost incurred is liability insurance at $1,400 per year. All direct materials are purchased at a local grocery for cash, and Bob and Beth pay themselves an hourly wage of $30 per hour. During the month of June, Bob and Beth catered five weddings.
|
Materials
|
Labor
|
Hours
|
|
Redfern wedding
|
400
|
25
|
|
Miller wedding
|
800
|
40
|
|
Walker wedding
|
500
|
20
|
|
Desilva wedding
|
1,700
|
90
|
|
Estes wedding
|
600
|
30
|
The overhead allocation base is labor hours with an estimated 1,000 hours per year, and billings are at 120 percent of job cost. Overhead allocations and markups are rounded to the nearest dollar.
Required
a. Prepare job cost sheets for each of the five catering jobs.
b. Calculate income for the month of June.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording Inventory Costs
Vulcan Molding produces molded rubber components. At the start of the year, the company estimated that it would incur $3,400,000 of direct labor cost and $8,500,000 of manufacturing overhead. Overhead is allocated to production on the basis of direct labor cost. Actual materials used during the year were $5,500,000, actual direct labor cost was $3,500,000, and actual overhead was $9,000,000.
Required
a. Calculate the overhead rate for the current year.
b. Prepare the journal entry to record use of direct material.
c. Prepare the journal entry to record direct labor.
d. Prepare the journal entry to record manufacturing overhead applied to production.
e. Prepare the journal entry to close the balance in manufacturing overhead to cost of goods sold.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Service Company Use of Predetermined Overhead Rate
Southwest Community Hospital uses a job-order costing system to track charges for each patient. The following charges relate to Candice O’Dea, who had laparoscopic knee surgery:
|
Pharmacy
|
250
|
|
Sterile supply
|
1,000
|
|
Supplies, other
|
4,000
|
|
Operating room service (nursing staff)
|
4,000
|
|
Anesthesia
|
1,000
|
|
Anethesiologist
|
3,000
|
Southwest charges patients for the use of the operating room based on a predetermined overhead rate. The estimated overhead costs of the operating room are $5,000,000, and the activity base is available hours of 2,000.
Required
a. Calculate the predetermined overhead rate for the operating room, and determine the charge to Candice. Assume that her surgery took 3 hours in the operating room.
b. Calculate the total cost for the knee surgery.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budgets in Managerial Accounting
Matthew Gabon, the sales manager Office Furniture Solutions, prepared the following budget for 2011:
Sales Department
Budgeted Costs, 2011
(Assuming Sales of $10,000,000)
|
Salaries (fixed)
|
400,000
|
|
Commissions (variable)
|
150,000
|
|
Charge for Office Space (fixed)
|
3,000
|
|
Office supplied & Forms (variable)
|
2,000
|
|
Total
|
$360,000
|
After he submitted his budget, the president of Office Furniture Solutions reviewed it and recommended that advertising be increased to $100,000. Further she wanted Matthew to assume a sales level of $11,000,000. The level of sales is to be achieved without adding to the sales force.
Matthew’s sales group occupies approximately 250 square feet of office space out of total administrative office space of 20,000 square feet. The $3,000 space charge in Matthew’s budget is his share (allocated based on relative square feet) of the company’s total cost of rent, utilities, and janitorial costs for the administrative office building.
Required:
Provide a revised budget consistent with the president’s recommendation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparative financial statement data for Bedene Corporation and Groneman Corporation, two competitors, appear below. All balance sheet data are as of December 31, 2010.
| |
Bedene Corporation
|
Groneman Corporation
|
| |
2010
|
2010
|
|
Net sales
|
$1,900,000
|
$620,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,175,000
|
340,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
303,000
|
98,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
9,000
|
3,800
|
|
Income tax expense
|
85,000
|
36,000
|
|
Current assets
|
407,200
|
190,336
|
|
Plant assets (net)
|
532,000
|
139,728
|
|
Current liabilities
|
66,325
|
40,348
|
|
Long-term liabilities
|
108,500
|
29,620
|
|
Cash from operating activities
|
138,000
|
36,000
|
|
Capital expenditures
|
90,000
|
20,000
|
|
Dividends paid
|
36,000
|
15,000
|
|
Average number of shares outstanding
|
100,000
|
50,000
|
Instructions
(a) Comment on the relative profitability of the companies by computing the net income and earnings per share for each company for 2010.
(b) Comment on the relative liquidity of the companies by computing working capital and the current ratios for each company for 2010.
(c) Comment on the relative solvency of the companies by computing the debt to total assets ratio and the free cash flow for each company for 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reporting an Adjusted Income Statement
Dyer, Inc. completed its first year of operations on December 31, 2010. Because this is the end of he annual accounting period, the company bookkeeper prepared the following preliminary income statement.
|
Income Statement 2010
|
|
|
Rental Revenue
|
114,000
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
28,500
|
|
Maintenance Expense
|
12,000
|
|
Rent Expense
|
9,000
|
|
Utilities Expense
|
4,000
|
|
Gas and Oil Expense
|
3,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
1,000
|
|
Total Expenses
|
57,500
|
|
Income
|
$56,500
|
You are an independent CPA hired by the company to audit the firm’s accounting systems and financial statements. In your audit, you developed additional data as follows:
a. Wages for the last three days of December amounting to $310 were not recorded or paid.
b. The $400 telephone bill for December 2010 has not been recorded or paid.
c. Depreciation on rental autos, amounting to $23,000 for 2010, was not recorded.
d. Interest of $500 was not recorded on the note payable by Dyer, Inc.
e. The Rental Revenue account includes $4,000 of revenue to be earned in January 2011.
f. Maintenance supplies costing $600 were used during 2010, but this has not yet been recorded.
g. The income tax expense for 2010 is $7,000, but it won’t actually be paid until 2011.
Required:
1. What adjusting journal entry for each item (a) through (g) should be recorded at December 31, 2010? If none is required, explain why.
2. Prepare, in proper form, an adjusted income statement for 2010.
3. Did the adjustments have a significant overall effect on the company’s net income?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reorganization Entries and Balance Sheet
On September 30, 2008, SRP Company filed a petition for reorganization with a bankruptcy court. The plan was approved by the court and all parties of interest on January 2, 2009, when SRP Company’s balance sheet was as follows:
SRP Company Balance Sheet January 2, 2009
|
Cash
|
|
$32,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$71,450
|
|
|
Less: allowance for uncollectibles
|
16,750
|
|
|
Inventories
|
|
126,600
|
|
Plant & Equipment
|
322,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
180,700
|
141,300
|
|
Land
|
|
20,800
|
|
Patents
|
|
92,000
|
|
Total Assets
|
|
467,600
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable-unsecured
|
|
|
|
12% Notes payable-unsecured
|
|
57,000
|
|
Accrued Wages-with priority
|
|
11,900
|
|
Accured Interest payable
|
|
38,400
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
|
250,000
|
|
10% note payable-unsecured
|
|
54,400
|
|
9% mortgage note payable-secured by equipment
|
|
80,000
|
Stockholders’ Equity
Common stock $ .50 par value, 2,500,000
Shares Authorized, $480,000 shares issued and Outstanding 240,000
Retained Earnings (deficit) (156,800)
Total Equities 467,600
The terms of the organization plan are as follows:
1. Creditors represented by $69,000 of the unsecured accounts payable agree to accepts the accounts receivable of SRP Company in full settlements of their claims. The fair value of the receivables is $51,000.
2. Creditors represented by $54,000 of the unsecured accounts payable agree to accept a patent with a book value of $42,000 and a fair value of $50,000 in full settlement of their claims.
3. Creditors of the remaining unsecured accounts payable agree to accept $.60 on the dollar. Cash is paid to these creditors and to the creditors with priority.
4. The creditors holding the 12%, $57,000 note (on which there is $11,900) accrued interest ) agreed to extend the due date for two years from January 3,2009, and to reduce the interest rate to 6% on the current carrying value of the debt ($63,000), payable annually.
5. the holder of the 10%, $54,400 unsecured note (on which these is $11,900 accured interest ) agreed to cancel the accrued interest and $14,400 of the principal; interest on the new note at 10% is due annually, with the principal due on January 3,2012.
6. the holder of the 9%, $80,000 mortgage note (on which there is $20,500 accrued interest) agreed to accept 100,000 shares of the common stock in exchange for full satisfaction of the debt. The common stock had a fair value of $.59 per share.
7. the par value of the common stock is reduced to $.10 per share and any remaining accumulated deficit is eliminated.
Required:
A. Prepare a journal entries to give effect to the reorganization.
B. Prepare a post-reorganization balance sheet dated January 2, 2009
C. Prepare journal entries to accrue interest on December 31, 2009, and to record the payment of interest on January 2, 2010
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Interrelationships among Financial Statements
O’Shea Enterprises started the 2002 accounting period with $30,000 of assets (all cash), $18,000 of liabilities, and $4,000 of common stock. During the year, O’Shea earned cash revenues of $48,000, paid cash expenses of $32,000, and paid a cash dividend to stockholders of $2,000. O’Shea also acquired $10,000 of additional cash from the sale of common stock and paid $6,000 cash to reduce the liability owed to a bank.
Required
1. Prepare an income statement, statement of changes in stockholders’ equity, period-end balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for the 2002 accounting period. (Hint: Determine the amount of beginning retained earnings before considering the effects of the current period events. It also might help to record all events under an accounting equation before preparing the statements.)
2. Determine the percentage of total assets that were provided by creditors, investors, and earnings.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Trial Balance
|
Below is the adjusted trial balance for Computer Services as of December 31, 2011.
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Adjusted
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
| |
|
Cash
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8,405
|
|
|
| |
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
|
5,147
|
|
|
| |
|
Supplies
|
|
|
|
|
|
2,575
|
|
|
| |
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
|
|
|
|
1,580
|
|
|
| |
|
Equipment
|
|
|
|
|
|
6,000
|
|
|
| |
|
Accumulated Depreciation – Equip
|
|
|
600
|
|
| |
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
|
|
|
|
3,489
|
|
| |
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
|
|
|
|
1,155
|
|
| |
|
Unearned Rent Revenue
|
|
|
|
575
|
|
| |
|
Jack Smith, Capital
|
|
|
|
|
10,000
|
|
| |
|
Jack Smith, Drawing
|
|
|
|
4,500
|
|
|
| |
|
Service Revenue
|
|
|
|
|
|
33,017
|
|
| |
|
Rental Revenue
|
|
|
|
|
|
1,050
|
|
| |
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
|
600
|
|
|
| |
|
Insurance Expense
|
|
|
|
680
|
|
|
| |
|
Rent Expense
|
|
|
|
|
3,500
|
|
|
| |
|
Salaries Expense
|
|
|
|
|
12,854
|
|
|
| |
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
|
|
|
2,587
|
|
|
| |
|
Utilities Expense
|
|
|
|
|
1,458
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
Totals
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
49,886
|
49,886
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Instructions
A. Prepare the necessary closing entries as of December 31, 2011
B. Post the closing entries to the selected ledger accounts.
C. Prepare a Post Closing Trial Balance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Top Switch Inc. designs and manufactures switches used in telecommunications. Serious flooding throughout the state of Tennessee affected Top Switch’s facilities. Inventory was completely ruined, and the company’s computer system, including all accounting records, was destroyed. Before the unfortunate incident, recovery specialists cleaned the buildings. The company controller is very nervous and anxious to recover whatever records he can to support the insurance claim for the destroyed inventory.
After consulting with the cost accountant, they decide to retrieve the previous year’s annual report for the beginning inventory numbers. In addition, they also agreed that they need first quarter cost data. The cost accountant was working on the first quarter results before the storm hit, and to his surprise, the report was still in his desk drawer. After reviewing the data, the information shows the following information:
Material purchases were $ 325,000; Direct Labor was $ 220,000.
Further discussions between the controller and the cost accountant revealed that sales were $ 1,350,000 and the gross margin was 30% of sales.
The cost accountant also discovered, while sifting through the information, that cost of goods available for sale was $ 1,020,000 at cost.
While assessing the damage, the controller determined that the prime costs were $ 545,000 up to the time of the damage and that manufacturing overhead is 65% of conversion cost.
The cost accountant is not sure about all of this, but he decides to see what he can do with the information.
The beginning inventory numbers are as follows:
|
Raw Materials
|
41,000
|
|
Work in Process
|
56,000
|
|
Finished Goods
|
35,000
|
Required:
Determine the amount of cost in the Raw Materials, Work in Process, and Finished Goods Inventory as of the date of the storm. (Hint: You may wish to reconstruct the various schedules and statements that would have been affected by the company’s accounts during the period.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
General journal entries for factory overhead
CRS Products Inc. uses a job order cost system. Selected transactions dealing with factory items for the month follow:
a. Requisitioned indirect materials from storeroom, $3,200.
b. Purchased, on account, factory supplies for future needs, $4,400.
c. Purchased parts, on account, for repairing a machine, $1,400.
d. Requisitioned factory supplies from storeroom, $900.
e. Returned other defective factory supplies to vendors, $700.
f. Factory rent accrued for the month, $2,400.
g. Returned previously requisitioned factory supplies to store room, $350.
h. Depreciation of machinery and equipment, $2,800.
i. Payroll taxes liability for month, $3,200.
j. Heat, light and power charges payable for the month, $6,400.
k. Expired insurance on inventories, $1,350.
l. Factory overhead applied to production, $34,600.
m. Indirect labor for the month, $2,600.
n. Goods completed and transferred to finished goods: materials, $14,400; labor $40,400, factory overhead, $30,400.
Required:
Record the previous transactions. Assume that the records include a control account and a subsidiary ledger for factory overhead, to which the entries will be posted at some later date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining overhead rate, using direct labor cost, direct labor hour and machine hours methods
The following information, taken from the books of Theodore Co., represents the operations for January:
|
|
Bronzing
|
Costing
|
Finishing
|
|
Materials used
|
8,000
|
5,000
|
9,000
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
1,000
|
500
|
1,620
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
4,000
|
5,000
|
2,025
|
|
Factory overhead
|
20,000
|
10,000
|
16,200
|
The job cost system is used, and the February cost sheet for Job M45 shows the following:
|
|
Bronzing
|
Casting
|
Finishing
|
|
Materials
|
20
|
40
|
20
|
|
Direct labor
|
64
|
60
|
54
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
8
|
6
|
6
|
|
Machine hours
|
2
|
3
|
1
|
|
|
Bronzing
|
Casting
|
Finishing
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
15,000
|
9,800
|
20,000
|
|
Factory overhead
|
350,000
|
220,000
|
325,000
|
Required:
1. Using the January data, ascertain the factory overhead application rates to be used during February based on the following:
a. Direct labor cost
b. Direct labor hours
c. Factory overhead
2. Prepare a schedule showing the total production cost of Job M45 under each method of applying factory overhead.
3. Prepare the entries to record the following for February operations:
a. The liability for total factory overhead.
b. Distribution of factory overhead to the departments.
c. Application of factory overhead to the work in process, using direct labor hours. (Use the predetermined rate calculated in 1, and separate applied overhead accounts for each department).
d. Closing of the applied factory overhead accounts.
e. Recording under- and overapplied factory overhead and closing the actual factory overhead accounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classify each of the following items of factory overhead as either a fixed or a variable cost. (Include any costs that you consider to be semi-variable within the variable category. Remember that variable costs change in total volume of production changes.)
Fixed or Variable Cost?
a. Indirect labor
b. Indirect Materials
c. Insurance on building
d. Overtime Premium Pay
e. Depreciation on building (straight-line)
f. Polishing compounds
g. Depreciation on machinery (based on machine hours used)
h. Employer’s payroll taxes
i. Property taxes
j. Machine lubricants
k. Employees hospital insurance (paid by employer)
l. Labor for machine repairs
m. Vacation pay
n. Janitor’s wages
o. Rent
p. Small tools
q. Plant manager’s salary
r. Factory electricity
s. Product inspector’s wages
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budgeted factory overhead costs
Listed below are the budgeted factory overhead costs for 2011 for Valpo Manufacturing Inc. at a projected level of 2,000 units.
Expenses:
|
Indirect materials
|
10,000
|
|
Indirect labor
|
20,000
|
|
Power
|
15,000
|
|
Straight-line depreciation
|
30,000
|
|
Factory property tax
|
28,000
|
|
Factory insurance
|
22,000
|
|
Total
|
$125,000
|
Required:
Prepare flexible budgets for factory overhead at the 1,000, 2000, and 4,000 units level. (Hint: You must first decide which of the listed costs should be considered variable and which should be fixed).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Arnold Corporation has been authorized to issue 40,000 shares of $100 par value, 8%, noncumulative preferred stock and 2,000,000 shares of no-par common stock. The corporation assigned a $5 stated value to the common stock. At December 31, 2011, the ledger contained the following balances pertaining to stockholders’ equity. Preferred Stock $ 240,000 Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value—Preferred 56,000 Common Stock 2,000,000 Paid-in Capital in Excess of Stated Value—Common 5,700,000 Treasury Stock—Common (1,000 shares) 22,000 Paid-in Capital from Treasury Stock 3,000 Retained Earnings 560,000 The preferred stock was issued for land having a fair market value of $296,000.All common stock issued was for cash. In November, 1,500 shares of common stock were purchased for the treasury at a per share cost of $22. In December, 500 shares of treasury stock were sold for $28 per share. No dividends were declared in 2011.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the journal entries for the:
(1) Issuance of preferred stock for land.
(2) Issuance of common stock for cash.
(3) Purchase of common treasury stock for cash.
(4) Sale of treasury stock for cash.
(b) Prepare the stockholders’ equity section at December 31, 2011
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following expenditures relating to plant assets were made by Spaulding Company during the first 2 months of 2011.
1. Paid $5,000 of accrued taxes at time plant site was acquired.
2. Paid $200 insurance to cover possible accident loss on new factory machinery while the machinery was in transit.
3. Paid $850 sales taxes on new delivery truck.
4. Paid $17,500 for parking lots and driveways on new plant site.
5. Paid $250 to have company name and advertising slogan painted on new delivery truck.
6. Paid $8,000 for installation of new factory machinery.
7. Paid $900 for one-year accident insurance policy on new delivery truck.
8. Paid $75 motor vehicle license fee on the new truck.
Instructions
(a) Explain the application of the cost principle in determining the acquisition cost of plant assets.
(b) List the numbers of the foregoing transactions, and opposite each indicate the account title to which each expenditure should be debited.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Picture Pretty manufactures picture frames. Sales for August are expected to be 10,000 units of various sizes. Historically, the average frame requires four feet of framing, one square foot of glass, and two square feet of backing. Beginning inventory includes 1,500 feet of framing, 500 square feet of glass, and 500 square feet of backing. Prices are $0.30 per foot of framing, $6.00 per square foot of glass, and $2.25 per square foot of backing. Ending inventory should be 150% of beginning inventory. Purchases are paid for in the month acquired.
Question 1: Determine the quantity of framing, glass, and backing that is to be purchased during August.
Question 2: Determine the total costs of direct materials for August purchases.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Work in Process Inventory Accounts: Total Unit Cost
Scientists at Anschultz Laboratories, Inc., have just perfected Dentalite, a liquid substance that dissolves tooth decay. The substance, which is generated by a complex process involving five departments, is very expensive. Cost and equivalent unit data for the latest week are as follows (units are in ounces):
| |
Direct Materials
|
|
|
|
|
Dept.
|
Dollars
|
Equivalent Units
|
Dollars
|
Equivalent Unit
|
|
A
|
12,000
|
1,000
|
33,825
|
2,050
|
|
B
|
21,835
|
1,985
|
13,065
|
1,005
|
|
C
|
23,896
|
1,030
|
20,972
|
2,140
|
|
D
|
–
|
–
|
22,086
|
2,045
|
|
E
|
–
|
–
|
15,171
|
1,945
|
From these data, compute the unit cost for each department and the total unit cost of producing 1 ounce of Dentalite. If an amount box does not require an entry, leave it blank, or enter zero (“0”). Round your answers to two decimal places.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Process Costing: Average Costing Method
Many of the products made by Wireless Plastics Company are standard telephone replacement parts that require long production runs and are produced continuously. A unit for Wireless Plastics is a box of parts. During April, direct materials for 25,250 units were put into production. Total cost of direct materials used during April was $2,273,000. Direct labor costs totaled $1,135,000, and overhead was $2,043,000. The beginning work in process inventory contained 1,600 units, which were 100 percent complete for direct materials costs and 60 percent complete for conversion costs. Costs attached to the units in beginning inventory totaled $232,515, which included $143,500 of direct materials costs. At the end of the month, 1,250 units were in ending inventory; all direct materials had been added, and the units were 70 percent complete for conversion costs.
Required
1. Using the average costing method and assuming no loss due to spoilage, prepare a process cost report for April. If an amount box does not require an entry, enter “0”. Round your answers to the nearest dollar, except for per unit amounts. For per unit amounts, round to two decimal places. For the percentages, do not enter the percent sign. For example, 60% would be entered as 60.
2. From the information in the process cost report, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account. State where those dollars should be transferred.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(TCO 6) The building maintenance department for Jones Manufacturing Company budgets annual costs of $4,200,000 based on the expected operating level for the coming year. The costs are allocated to two production departments. The following data relate to the potential allocation bases:
|
|
|
|
|
Square footage
|
Production Detpt. 1
|
Production Dept. 2
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
15,000
|
45,000
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
If Jones assigns costs to departments based on square footage, how much total costs will be allocated to Production Department 1?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Anna Bellatorre, Inc. manufactures five models of kitchen appliances at its Mesa plant. The company is installing activity-based costing and has identified the following activities performed at its Mesa plant. Having analyzed its Mesa plant operations for purposes of installing activity-based costing, Anna Bellatorre, Inc. identified its activity cost centers. It now needs to identify relevant activity cost drivers in order to assign overhead costs to its products.
Instructions
Using the activities listed above, identify for each activity one or more cost drivers that might be used to assign overhead to Anna Bellatorre’s five products.
1. Designing new models.
2. Purchasing raw materials and parts.
3. Storing and managing inventory.
4. Receiving and inspecting raw materials and parts.
5. Interviewing and hiring new personnel.
6. Machine forming sheet steel into appliance parts.
7. Manually assembling parts into appliances.
8. Training all employees of the company.
9. Insuring all tangible fixed assets.
10. Supervising production.
11. Maintaining and repairing machinery and equipment.
12. Painting and packaging finished appliances.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Murtos Manufacturing Company uses a job order cost system in each of its three manufacturing departments. Manufacturing overhead is applied to jobs on the basis of direct labor cost in Department D, direct labor hours in Department E, and machine hours in Department K.
In establishing the predetermined overhead rates for 2011 the following estimates were made for the year.
|
Department
|
|
|
D
|
E
|
K
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
1,050,000
|
1,500,000
|
840,000
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
1,500,000
|
1,250,000
|
450,000
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
100,000
|
125,000
|
40,000
|
|
Machine hours
|
400,000
|
500,000
|
120,000
|
During January, the job cost sheets showed the following costs and production data.
|
Department
|
D
|
E
|
K
|
|
Direct materials used
|
140,000
|
126,000
|
78,000
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
120,000
|
110,000
|
37,500
|
|
Manufacturing overhead incurrect
|
89,000
|
124,000
|
74,000
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
8,000
|
11,000
|
3,500
|
|
Machine hours
|
34,000
|
45,000
|
10,400
|
Instructions
a. Compute the predetermined overhead rate for each department.
Department A overhead is applied on direct labor cost
Department B overhead is applied on direct labor hours
Department C overhead is applied on machine hours
b. Compute the total manufacturing costs assigned to jobs in January in each department.
c. Compute the under- or overapplied overhead for each department at January 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Qwik Repairs has over 200 auto-maintenance service outlets nationwide. It provides primarily two lines of service: oil changes and brake repair: oil change-related services represent 65% of its sales and provide a contribution margin ratio of 20%. Brake repair represents 35% of its sales and provides a 60% contribution margin ratio. The company’s fixed costs are $16,000,000 (that is $80,000 per service outlet).
Instruction:
(a) Calculate the dollar amount of each type of service that the company must provide in order to break even.
(b) The company has a desired net income of $60,000 per service outlet. What is the dollar amount of each type of service that must be provided by each service outlet to meet its target net income per outlet?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tolla Company is estimating the following sales for the first six months of next year:
|
January
|
350,000
|
|
February
|
300,000
|
|
March
|
320,000
|
|
April
|
140,000
|
|
May
|
450,000
|
|
June
|
47,000
|
Sales at Tolla are normally collected as 70 percent in the month of sale, 25 percent in the month following the sale, and the remaining 5 percent being uncollectible. Also, customers paying in the month of sale are given a 2 percent discount. Based on this information, how much cash should Tolla expect to collect during the month of April?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Trauscht Corporation has provided the following data from its activity-based costing system:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Total Cost
|
Total Activity
|
|
Assembly
|
704,880
|
44,000 machine-hours
|
|
Processing orders
|
91,428
|
1,900 orders
|
|
Inspection
|
117,546
|
1,950 inspection-hours
|
The company makes 360 units of product P23F a year, requiring a total of 725 machine-hours, 85 orders, and 45 inspection-hours per year. The product’s direct materials cost is $42.30 per unit and its direct labor cost is $14.55 per unit. The product sells for $132.10 per unit. According to the activity-based costing system, what is the product margin for product P23F?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The management of Sharrar Corporation would like to investigate the possibility of basing its predetermined overhead rate on activity at capacity rather than on the estimated amount of activity for the year. The company’s controller has provided an example to illustrate how this new system would work. In this example, the allocation base is machine-hours and the estimated amount of the allocation base for the upcoming year is 45,000 machine hours. In addition, capacity is 52,000 machine-hours and the actual activity for the year is 47,100 machine-hours. All of the manufacturing overhead is fixed and is $1,029,600 per year. For simplicity, it’s assumed that this is the estimated manufacturing overhead for the year as well as the manufacturing overhead capacity and the actual amount of manufacturing overhead for the year.
Required:
A. Determine the predetermined overhead rate if the predetermined overhead rate is based on the estimated amount of the allocation base.
B. Determine the underapplied or overapplied overhead for the year if the predetermined overhead rate is based on the estimated amount of the allocation base.
C. Determine the predetermined overhead rate if the predetermined overhead rate is based on the amount of the allocation base at capacity.
D. Determine the underapplied or overapplied overhead for the year if the predetermined overhead rate is based on the amount of the allocation base at capacity.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fryer Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 700 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:
|
|
Cost
|
Percent Complete
|
|
Material cost
|
12,600
|
75%
|
|
Conversion costs
|
8,900
|
60%
|
A total of 7,300 units were started and 6,200 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:
|
|
Cost
|
|
Material Costs
|
132,200
|
|
Conversion costs
|
177,500
|
The ending inventory was 80% complete with respect to materials and 45% complete with respect to conversion costs.
Required:
The total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processing department during the month is closest to what amount?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Porter Company has provided the following data for the second quarter of the most recent year:
|
Sales
|
300,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
55,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
72,500
|
|
Fixed selling expense
|
46,250
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
41,000
|
|
Variable administrative expense
|
48,000
|
|
Fixed administrative expense
|
44,500
|
|
Variable selling expense
|
49,750
|
Assume that direct labor is a variable cost and that there were no beginning or ending inventories. What is the total contribution margin of Porter Company for the second quarter?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Superior Industries’ sales budget shows quarterly sales for the next year as follows:
|
Quarter
|
Sales (units)
|
|
First
|
10,000
|
|
Second
|
8,000
|
|
Third
|
12,000
|
|
Fourth
|
14,000
|
Company policy is to have a finished goods inventory at the end of each quarter equal to 20% of the next quarter’s sales. How much should the budgeted production for the second quarter be?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for construction transactions
Quaint Construction, Inc., is a home builder in Arizona. Quaint uses a job order costing system in which each house is a job. Because it constructs house, the company uses an account titled Construction overhead. The company applies overhead based on estimated direct labor costs. For the year, it estimated construction overhead of $1,100,000 and total direct labor cost of $2,750,000. The following events occurred during August:
A. Purchased materials on account, $400,000.
B. Requisitioned direct materials and used direct labor in construction. Record the materials requisitioned.
|
|
Direct Materials
|
Direct Labor
|
|
House 402
|
54,000
|
42,000
|
|
House 403
|
68,000
|
35,000
|
|
House 404
|
63,000
|
57,000
|
|
House 405
|
85,000
|
53,000
|
C. The company incurred total wages of $200,000. Use the data from item b to assign the wages.
D. Depreciation of construction equipment, $6,200.
E. Other overhead costs incurred on houses 402 through 405:
|
Indirect labor
|
13,000
|
|
Equipment rentals paid in cash
|
37,000
|
|
Worker liability insurance expired
|
3,300
|
F. Allocated overhead to jobs.
G. Houses completed: 402,404
H. Houses sold: 404 for $250,000.
Requirements:
1. Calculate Quaint’s construction overhead application rate for the year.
2. Prepare journal entries to record the events in the general journal.
3. Open T- accounts for work in process inventory and Finished goods inventory . Post the appropriate entries to these accounts, identifying each entry by letter. Determine the ending account balances, assuming that the beginning balances were zero.
4. Add the costs of the unfinished houses, and show this total amount equals the ending balance in the work in process inventory account.
5. Add the cost of the completed house that has not yet been sold, and show that this equals the ending balance in Finished goods inventory.
6. Compute gross profit on the house that was sold. What costs must gross profit cover for Quaint Construction?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
While reviewing the March 31, 2012, balance sheet of Business Solutions, Santana Rey notes that the business has built a large cash balance of $68,057. Its most recent bank money market statement shows that the funds are earning an annualized return of 0.75%. S. Rey decides to make several investments with the desire to earn a higher return on the idle cash balance. Accordingly, in April 2012, Business Solutions makes the following investments in trading securities:
April 16 Purchases 400 shares of Johnson & Johnson stock at $50 per share plus $300 commission.
April 30 Purchases 200 shares of Starbucks Corporation at $22 per share plus $250 commission.
On June 30, 2012, the per share market price (fair value) of the Johnson & Johnson shares is $55 and the Starbucks shares is $19.
Required
1. Prepare journal entries to record the April purchases of trading securities by Business Solutions.
2. On June 30, 2012, prepare the adjusting entry to record any necessary fair value adjustment to its portfolio of trading securities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Craners Company budgets on an annual basis for its fiscal year. The following beginning and ending inventory levels (in units) are planned for the fiscal year of July 1, 20×2, through June 30, 20×3.
|
|
July 1, 20×2
|
30, 20×3
|
|
Raw material (note) June 30,
|
40,000
|
10,000
|
|
Work in process
|
8,000
|
8,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
30,000
|
5,000
|
(note) Three units of raw material are needed to produce each unit of finished product.
If 450,000 finished units were to be manufactured during the 20×2-20×3 fiscal year by Craners Company, the units of raw material needed to be purchased would be
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Information pertaining to John Corporation’s sales revenue is presented in the following table:
|
|
|
February
|
March
|
April
|
|
Cash
|
Sales
|
$160,000
|
$150,000
|
$120,000
|
|
Credit
|
Sales
|
300,000
|
400,000
|
280,000
|
|
Total
|
Sales
|
$460,000
|
$550,000
|
$400,000
|
Management estimates that 5% of credit sales are not collectible. Of the credit sales that are collectible, 60% are collected in the month of sale and the remainder in the month following the sale. Cost of purchases of inventory each month are 70% of the next month’s projected total sales. ll purchases of inventory are on account; 25% are paid in the month of purchase, and the remainder is paid in the month following the purchase.
John’s budgeted total cash receipts in April are
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dole Corp.’s accounts payable at December 31, 2012, totaled $650,000 before any necessary year-end adjustments relating to the following transactions:
– On December 27, 2012, Dole wrote and recorded checks to creditors totaling $350,000 causing an overdraft of $100,000 in Dole’s bank account at December 31, 2012. The checks were mailed out on January 10, 2013.
– On December 28, 2012, Dole purchased and received goods for $150,000, terms 2/10, n/30. Dole records purchases and accounts payable at net amounts. The invoice was recorded and paid January 3, 2013.
– Goods shipped f.o.b. destination on December 20, 2012 from a vendor to Dole were received January 2, 2013. The invoice cost was $65,000.
At December 31, 2012, what amount should Dole report as total accounts payable?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Current Liabilities)
Mary Smith is the controller of Arnold Corporation and is responsible for the preparation of the year-end financial statements. The following transactions occurred during the year.
a. On December 20, 2012, an employee filed a legal action againstArnoldfor $100,000 for wrongful dismissal. Management believes the action to be frivolous and without merit. The likelihood of payment to the employee is remote.
b. Bonuses to key employees based on net income for 2012 are estimated to be $150,000.
c. On December 1, 2012, the company borrowed $900,000 at 8% per year. Interest is paid quarterly.
d. Credit sales for the year amounted to $10,000,000.Arnold’s expense provision for doubtful accounts is estimated to be 2% of credit sales.
e. On December 15, 2012, the company declared a $2.00 per share dividend on the 40,000 shares of common stock outstanding, to be paid on January 5, 2013.
f. During the year, customer advances of $160,000 were received; $50,000 of this amount was earned by December 31, 2012.
For each item above, indicate the dollar amount to be reported as a current liability. If a liability is not reported, enter 0.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Current vs. Long-term Liabilities)
Pascal Corporation is preparing its December 31, 2012 balance sheet. The following items may be reported as either a current or long-term liability.
1. On December 15, 2012, Pascal declared a cash dividend of $2.00 per share to stockholders of record on December 31. The dividend is payable on January 15, 2013. Pascal has issued 1,000,000 shares of common stock, of which 50,000 shares are held in treasury.
2. At December 31, bonds payable of $100,000,000 are outstanding. The bonds pay 10% interest every September 30 and mature in installments of $25,000,000 every September 30, beginning September 30, 2013.
3. At December 31, 2011, customer advances were $12,000,000. During 2012, Pascal collected $30,000,000 of customer advances, and advances of $25,000,000 were earned.
For each item above indicate the dollar amounts to be reported as a current liability and as a long-term liability. (For item #2, list the bonds payable with the smallest amount first.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following accounts are maintained by the Riverside Manufacturing Company in its general ledger: Materials, Work in Process, Factory Overhead, and Accounts Payable. The materials account had a debit balance of $40,000 on November 1.
A summary of material transactions for November shows the following transactions:
(1) Materials acquired on account, $62,000
(2) Direct materials issued, $58,500
(3) Direct materials returned to storeroom, $1,200
(4) Indirect materials issued, $3,600
(5) Indirect materials returned to storeroom, $550
(6) Materials on hand were $200 less than the company’s ledger balance.
Requirements:
a. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions.
b. Post the journal entries to T-accounts.
c. Determine the balance of the materials account on November 30.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected work sheet data for Nicholson Company are presented below.
(a) Fill in the missing amounts. (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)
|
Account Titles
|
Trial Balance
|
Adjusted Trial Balance
|
| |
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
|
34,000
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
26,000
|
|
20,000
|
|
|
Supplies
|
7,000
|
|
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
12,000
|
|
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
|
|
5,000
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
88,000
|
|
97,000
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
|
10,000
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
|
5,000
|
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
|
|
49,000
|
|
(b) Prepare the adjusting entries that were made.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Oregon Lumber processes timber into four products. During January, the joint costs of processing were $280,000. There was no inventory at the beginning of the month. Production and sales value information for the month is as follows:
|
Product
|
Board feet
|
Sales Value at Split off Point
|
Ending Inventory
|
|
2 x 4’s
|
6,000,000
|
0.30 per board foot
|
500,000 bdft.
|
|
2 x 6’s
|
3,000,000
|
0.40 per board foot
|
250,000 bdft.
|
|
4 x 4’s
|
2,000,000
|
0.45 per board foot
|
100,000 bdft.
|
|
Slabs
|
1,000,000
|
0.10 per board foot
|
50,000 bdft.
|
Question: Determine the value of ending inventory if the sales value at splitoff method is used for product costing. Round to three decimal places when necessary.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Zenon Chemical, Inc. processes pine rosin into three products: turpentine, paint thinner, and spot remover. During May, the joint costs of processing were $240,000. Production and sales value information for the month is as follows:
|
Product
|
Units Produced
|
Sales Value at Splitoff Point
|
|
Turpentine
|
6,000 liters
|
60,000
|
|
Paint thinner
|
6,000 liters
|
50,000
|
|
Spot remover
|
3,000 liters
|
25,000
|
Question: Determine the amount of joint cost allocated to each product if the physical-measure method is used.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to Sampson Company. Assume that all balance sheet amounts represent both average and ending balance figures. Assume that all sales were on credit.
|
Assets
|
|
Cash and short-term investments
|
$ 45,000
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
35,000
|
|
Inventory
|
20,000
|
|
Property, plant and equipment
|
210,000
|
|
Total Assets
|
$310,000
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
$ 60,000
|
|
|
Long-term liabilities
|
90,000
|
|
|
Stockholders’ equity—common
|
160,000
|
|
|
Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
$310,000
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
|
Sales
|
$105,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
66,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
39,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
30,000
|
|
Net income
|
$9,000
|
|
Number of shares of common stock
|
6,000
|
|
Market price of common stock
|
$20
|
|
Dividends per share
|
.50
|
What is the receivables turnover for Sampson?
3.0 times
12.9 times
1.5 times
1.1 times
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following exhibit is for Kmart bonds.
|
Bonds
|
Close
|
Yield
|
Volume
|
Net Change
|
|
Kmart 8 3/8 17
|
100¼
|
8.4
|
35
|
+7/8
|
The contractual interest rate of the Kmart bonds is not determinable.
equal to the market interest rate.
greater than the market interest rate.
less than the market interest rate.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
JMB Photography reported net income of $100,000 for 2011. Included in the income statement were depreciation expense of $6,000, patent amortization expense of $2,000, and a gain on sale of equipment of $3,600. JMB’s comparative balance sheets show the following balances.
|
|
December 31, 2010
|
December 31, 2011
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
27,000
|
21,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
6,000
|
9,200
|
Calculate net cash provided by operating activities for JMB Photography. (List amounts from largest positive to smallest positive followed by most negative to least negative, with depreciation expense listed first, e.g. 15, 14, 10, -17, -5, -1. If amount decreases cash flow, use either a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -45 or parentheses e.g. (45).)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Distribution of service department costs to production departments
Cake Products Inc, is divided into five departments, mixing, blending, finishing, factory office and building maintenance. The first three departments are engaged in production work. Factory Office and Building Maintenance are service departments. During the month of June, the following factory overhead was incurred for the various departments:
|
Mixing
|
21,000
|
Factory
|
Office
|
9,000
|
|
Blending
|
18,000
|
Building
|
Maintenance
|
6,400
|
|
Finishing
|
25,000
|
|
|
|
The bases for distributing service department expenses to the other departments follow:
Building maintenance – on the basis of floor space occupied by the other departments as follows: mixing 10,000 sq ft, blending $4,500 sq ft, finishing 10,500 sq ft and factory office 7,000 sq ft.
Factory office – on the basis of number of employees as follows : mixing 30, blending 20 and finishing 50
Required:
Prepare schedules showing the distribution of the service departments expenses for the following:
1. The direct distribution method
2. The sequential distribution method in the order of number of other departments served.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Summary of Payroll Procedures
Soprano Construction Company uses the job order cost system. In recording payroll transactions, the following accounts are used:
|
Cash
|
Administrative Salaries
|
|
Wages Payable
|
Miscellaneous Administrative Expense
|
|
FICA Tax Payable
|
Sales Salaries
|
|
Federal Unemployment Tax Payable
|
Miscellaneous Selling Expense
|
|
State Unemployment Tax Payable
|
Factory Overhead
|
|
Employees Income Tax Payable
|
Work In Process
|
Payroll
Factory employees are paid weekly, while all other employees are paid semimonthly on the 15th and the last day of each month. All salaries and wages are subject to all taxes. Following is a narrative of transactions completed during the month of January:
Jan.7 Recorded total earnings of factory employees, amounting to $68,200, less deductions for employees’ income taxes and FICA taxes.
7th Issued check for payment of the payroll
14th Recorded total earnings of factory employees amounting to $66,300, less deductions for employees’ income taxes and FICA taxes.
14th Issued check for payment of the payroll
15th Recorded administrative salaries, $9,000, and sales Salaries, $17,000, less deductions for employees’ income taxes and FICA taxes.
15th Issued check for payment of the salaries.
21st Recorded total earnings of factory employees amounting to $72,500, less deductions for the employees’ income taxes and FICA taxes.
21st Issued check for payment of payroll.
28th Recorded total earnings of factory employees amounting to $74,200, less deductions for employees’ income taxes and FICA taxes.
28th Issued check for payment of payroll
31st Recorded administrative salaries, $9,000, and sales salaries, $17,000, less deductions for employees’ income taxes and FICA taxes.
31st Issued check for payment of the salaries
31st The following wages and salaries were earned or accrued during January:.
|
Direct Labor
|
302,500
|
|
Indirect Labor
|
22,500
|
|
Administrative Salaries
|
18,000
|
|
Sales Salaries
|
34,000
|
|
Total
|
377,000
|
Soprano Construction Company used the following form to compute the amount of payroll taxes incurred:
Items Taxable Earnings FICA Tax Federal Unemployment Tax State Unemployment
Tax Total Payroll Taxes
Factory wages
Administrative Wages
Sales salaries
Total
Required:
1. Complete the previous form to show the payroll taxes imposed on the employer for the month of January.
2. Prepare the journal entries to record the foregoing transactions, including the distribution of payroll costs and payroll taxes, assuming that the payroll taxes imposed on the employer for factory wages are to be charged to Factory Overhead, the taxes for Administrative salaries are to be charged to Miscellaneous Administrative expense, and the taxes for sales salaries are to be charged to Miscellaneous Selling Expense.
3. Assume that the factory employees worked on January 29, 30, and 31. What was the amount of accrued wages on January 31?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Spoiled goods and defective work
Francona Inc. manufactures electrical equipment from specifications received from customers. Job X10 was for 1,000 motors to be used in a specially designed electrical complex. The following costs were determined for each motor:
|
Materials
|
117
|
|
Labor
|
100
|
|
Total
|
300
|
At final inspection, Francona discovered that 33 motors did not meet the exacting specifications established by the customer. An examination indicated that 15 motors were beyond repair and should be sold as spoiled goods for $75 each. The remaining 18 motors, although defective, could be reconditioned as first-quality units by the addition of $1,650 for materials, $1,500 for labor, and $1,200 for factory overhead.
Required:
Prepare the journal entries to record the following:
1. The scrapping of the 15 units, with the income from spoiled goods treated as a reduction in the manufacturing cost of the specific job.
2. The correction of the 18 defective units, with the additional cost charged to the specific job.
3. The additional cost of replacing the 15 spoiled motors with new motors.
4. The sale of the spoiled motors for $75 each.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a performance report for the dining room of Rosita’s Mexican Restaurant for the month of February 2008, using the following data:
|
Budgeted Data:
|
|
|
| |
January
|
February
|
|
Dining room wages
|
4,300
|
4,150
|
|
Laundry and housekeeping
|
1,650
|
1,500
|
|
Utilities
|
2,200
|
2,050
|
|
Depreciation
|
1,500
|
1,500
|
|
Actual Data:
|
|
|
|
January February
|
|
|
|
Dining room wages
|
4,700
|
4,400
|
|
Laundry and housekeeping
|
1,600
|
1,400
|
|
Utilities
|
2,350
|
2,100
|
|
Depreciation
|
1,500
|
1,500
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Marconi Manufacturing produces two items in its Trumbull Plant: Tuff Stuff and Ruff Stuff. Since inception, Marconi has used only one manufacturing-overhead cost pool to accumulate costs.
Overhead has been allocated to products based on direct-abor hours. Until recently, Marconi was the sole producer of Ruff Suff and was able to dictate the selling price.
However, last year Marvella Proucts began marketing a comparable product at a price below the cost assigned by Marconi. Market share has declined rapidly, and Marconi must now decide whether to meet the competitive price or to disontinue the product line.
Recognizing that discountinuing the product line wold place an additonal burden on its remaining product, Tuff Stuff, management is using activity-based costing to determine if it would show a different cost structure for the two products.
The two major indirect costs for manufacturing the products are power usage and setup costs. Most of the power is used in fabricating, while most of the setup costs are requiredin assembly. The setup costs are predominately related to Tuff Stuff product line.
A decision was made to separate the Manufacturing Department costs into two activity cost pools as follows:
Fabricating: machines hours will be the cost driver.
Assembly: number of setups will be the cost driver.
The controlller has gathered the following information.
Manufacturing Department
Annual budget before separation of overhead
Product Line
|
Total
|
Tuff Stuff
|
Ruff Stuff
|
|
Number of units
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
2 hrs per unit
|
3 hours per unit
|
|
Total direct-labor cost
|
800,000
|
|
|
Direct material
|
5.00 per unit
|
3.00 per unit
|
|
Budgeted overhead:
|
|
|
Indirect labor
|
24,000
|
|
Fringe benefits
|
5,000
|
|
Indirect material
|
31,000
|
|
Power
|
180,000
|
|
Setup
|
75,000
|
|
Quality assurance
|
10,000
|
|
Other utilities
|
10,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
15,000
|
Manufacturing Department
Cost Structure after Separation of Overhead into Activity Cost Pools
|
|
Fabrication Assembly
|
Assembly
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
75%
|
25%
|
|
Direct material (no change)
|
100%
|
0%
|
|
Indirect labor
|
75%
|
25%
|
|
Fringe benefits
|
80%
|
20%
|
|
Indirect material
|
20,000
|
11,000
|
|
Power
|
160,000
|
20,000
|
|
Setup
|
5,000
|
70,000
|
|
Quality utilities
|
50%
|
50%
|
|
Depreciation
|
80%
|
80%
|
|
Cost driver
|
Product Line
|
|
|
Tuff Stuff
|
Ruff Stuff
|
|
|
Machine hrs per unit
|
4.00
|
6.00
|
|
Setups
|
1,000
|
272
|
1. Assigning overhead based on direct-labor hours, calculate the following:
a. Total budgeted cost of the Manufacturing Department.
b. Unit cost of Tuff Stuff and Ruff Stuff.
2. After separation of overhead into activity cost pools, compute the total budgeted cost of each department: fabricating and assembly.
3. Using activity-based costing, calculate the unit costs for each product. ( In computing the pool rates for th efabricating and assembly activity cost pools, round to the nearest cent. Then, in computing unit product cost, round to the nearest cent).
4. Discuss how a decision regarding theproduction and pricing of Ruff Stuff will be affected by the results of your calculations in the preceding requirements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In January 2012, the management of Sarah Company concludes that it has sufficient cash to purchase some short-term investments in debt and stock securities. During the year, the following transactions occurred.
Feb. 1 Purchased 1,200 shares of NJF common stock for $50,600 plus brokerage fees of $1,000.
Mar. 1 Purchased 500 shares of SEK common stock for $18,000 plus brokerage fees of $500.
Apr. 1 Purchased 70 $1,000, 8% CRT bonds for $70,000 plus $1,200 brokerage fees. Interest is payable semiannually on April 1 and October 1.
July 1 Received a cash dividend of $0.80 per share on the NJF common stock.
Aug. 1 Sold 200 shares of NJF common stock at $42 per share less brokerage fees of $350.
Sept. 1 Received $2 per share cash dividend on the SEK common stock.
Oct. 1 Received the semiannual interest on the CRT bonds.
Oct. 1 Sold the CRT bonds for $77,000 less $1,300 brokerage fees.
At December 31, the fair values of the NJF and SEK common stocks were $39 and $30 per share, respectively.
Instructions
1. Journalize the transactions and post to the accounts Debt Investments and Stock Investments. (Use the T account form.)
2. Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2012, to report the investments at fair value. All securities are considered to be trading securities.
3. Show the balance sheet presentation of investment securities at December 31, 2012.
4. Identify the income statement accounts and give the statement classification of each account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At Reyes Company, checks are not prenumbered because both the purchasing agent and the treasurer are authorized to issue checks. Each signer has access to unissued checks kept in an unlocked file cabinet. The purchasing agent pays all bills pertaining to goods purchased for resale. Prior to payment, the purchasing agent determines that the goods have been received and verifies the mathematical accuracy of the vendor’s invoice. After payment, the invoice is filed by vendor and the purchasing agent records the payment in the cash disbursements journal. The treasurer pays all other bills following approval by authorized employees. After payment, the treasurer stamps all bills “paid,” files them by payment date, and records the checks in the cash disbursements journal. Reyes Company maintains one checking account that is reconciled by the treasurer.
Instructions
1. List the weaknesses in internal control over cash disbursements.
2. Identify improvements for correcting these weaknesses.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining and interpreting flexible budget variances
Use the standard price and cost data supplied in Problem above. Assume that Todhunter actually produced and sold 31,000 books. The actual sales price and costs incurred follow.
|
Actual price and variable costs:
|
$35.00
|
|
Sales price
|
9.20
|
|
Materials
|
4.40
|
|
Labor
|
6.35
|
|
Overhead
|
7.00
|
|
General, seling, and administrative Cost:
|
|
|
Planned fixed
|
$120,000
|
|
General, selling, and administrative
|
60,000
|
Required
a. Determine the flexible budget variances.
b. Indicate whether each variance is favorable (F) or (U).
c. Identify the management position responsible for each variance. Explain what could have caused the variance
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Centech Computer Services (Flexible Budget Planning)
Sam Yu, the president of Centech Computer Services, needs your help. He wonders about the potential effects on the firm’s net income if he changes the service rate that the firm charges its customers. The following basic data pertain to fiscal year 2009.
Standard rate and variable costs:
|
Service rate per hour
|
$83.00
|
|
Labor
|
40.00
|
|
Ovhearhead
|
7.10
|
|
General, selling and administrative
|
4.40
|
|
Expected fixed costs:
|
|
|
Facility repair
|
$500,000.00
|
|
General, selling and administrative
|
130,00.00
|
Required:
a. Prepare the pro forma income statement that would appear in the master budget if the firm expects to provide 27,000 hours of services in 2009.
b. A marketing consultant suggests to Mr. Yu that the service rate may affect the number of service hours that the firm can achieve. According to the consultant’s analysis, if Centech charges customers $78 per hour, the firm can achieve 33,000 hours of services. Prepare a flexible budget using the consultant’s assumption.
c. The same consultant also suggests that if the firm raises its rate to $88 per hour, the number of service hours will decline to 22,000. Prepare a flexible budget using the new assumption.
d. Evaluate the three possible outcomes you determined in Requirements a, b, and c and recommend a pricing strategy.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a Cash Budget
McBride Medical Clinic has budgeted the following cash flows.
|
|
January
|
February
|
March
|
|
Cash receipts
|
101,000
|
108,000
|
125,000
|
|
Cash payments:
|
|
|
|
|
For inventory purchases
|
92,000
|
72,000
|
83,000
|
|
For S&A expreses
|
30,000
|
32,000
|
26,000
|
McBride Medical had a cash balance of $7,000 on January 1. The company desires to maintain a cash cushion of $5,000. Funds are assumed to be borrowed, in increments of $1,000 and repaid on the last day of each month; the interest rate is 1 percent per month. McBride pays its vendor on the last day of the month also. The company had a $30,000 beginning balance in its line of credit liability account.
Required:
Prepare a cash budget. (Round all computations to the nearest whole dollar).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash Distribution Plan
Adams, Peters, and Blake share profits and losses for their APB Partnership in a ratio of 2:3:5. When they decide to liquidate, the balance sheet is as follows:
|
Assets
|
Liabilities and Equities
|
|
Cash
|
40,000
|
Liabilites
|
50,000
|
|
Adams, Loan
|
10,000
|
Peters, Capital
|
75,000
|
|
Blake, Capital
|
70,000
|
|
|
|
Total Assets
|
250,000
|
Total Liabilities and Equities
|
250,000
|
Liquidation expenses are expected to be negligible. No interest accrues on loans with partners after termination of the business.
Required
Prepare a cash distribution plan for the APB Partnership.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Parent Company and Consolidated Balances
Exacto Company reported the following net income and dividends for the years indicated:
|
Year
|
Net Income
|
Dividends
|
|
20X5
|
35,000
|
12,000
|
|
20X6
|
45,000
|
20,000
|
|
20X7
|
30,000
|
14,000
|
True Corporation acquired 75 percent of Exacto’s common stock on January 1, 20X5. On that date, the fair value of Exacto’s net assets was equal to the book value. True uses the equity method in accounting for its ownership in Exacto and reported a balance of $259,800 in its investment account on December 31, 20X7.
Required
a. What amount did True pay when it purchased Exacto’s shares?
b. What was the fair value of Exacto’s net assets on January 1, 20X5?
c. What amount was assigned to the NCI shareholders on January 1, 20X5?
d. What amount will be assigned to the NCI shareholders in the consolidated balance sheet prepared at December 31, 20X7?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tylon’s Hardware uses a flexible budget to develop planning information for its warehouse operations. For 20X2, the company anticipated that it would have 96,000 sales units for 664 customer shipments. Average storage bin usage for various inventories was estimated to be 200 per day. The costs and cost drivers were determined to be as follows:
|
Item
|
Fixed Variable
|
Cost driver
|
|
Product handling
|
10,000
|
1.25 per 100 units
|
|
Storage
|
–
|
3.00 per storages bin
|
|
Utilities
|
1,000
|
1.50 per 100 units
|
|
Shipping clerks
|
1,000
|
1.00 per shipment
|
|
Supplies
|
–
|
0.50 per shipment
|
During the year, the warehouse processed 90,000 units for 600 customer shipments. The workers used 225 storage bins on average each day to sort, store, and process goods for shipment. The actual costs for 20X2 were:
|
Item
|
Actual costs
|
|
Product handing
|
10,900
|
|
Storage
|
465
|
|
Utilities
|
2,020
|
|
Shipping Clerks
|
1,400
|
|
Supplies
|
340
|
Question 1: Determine the 20X2 static budget variances
Question 2: Determine the 20X2 flexible budget variances.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Glide Tire Company’s budgeted unit sales for the year 2008 were:
|
Passenger car tires
|
120,000
|
|
Truck tires
|
25,000
|
The budgeted selling price for truck tires was $200 per tire and for passenger car tires was $65 per tire. He beginning finished goods inventories was expected to be 2,000 truck tires and 5,000 passenger tires, for a total cost of $326,478, with desired ending inventories at 2,500 and 6,000, respectively, with a total cost of $400,510. There was no anticipated beginning or ending work in process inventory for either type of tire.
The standard materials quantities for each type of fire were as follows:
|
|
Truck
|
Passenger
|
|
Car Rubber
|
30lbs
|
10lbs
|
|
Steel belts
|
4lbs
|
1.5lbs
|
The purchase prices of rubber and steel were $2 and $3 per pound, respectively. The desired ending inventories for rubber and steel were 75,000 and 7,500 pounds respectively. The estimated beginning inventories for rubber and steel were 60,000 and 6,000 pounds, respectively.
The direct labor hours required for each type of tire were as follows:
Molding Department Finishing Department
|
Truck Tire
|
0.25
|
0.15
|
|
Passenger car tire
|
0.10
|
0.05
|
The direct labor rate for each department is as follows:
|
Molding department
|
$15 per hour
|
|
Finishing department
|
$13 per hour
|
Budgeted factory overhead costs for 2008 were as follows:
|
Indirect materials
|
198,500
|
|
Indirect labor
|
213,200
|
|
Depreciation of building and equipment
|
157,500
|
|
Power and light
|
122,900
|
|
Total
|
962,100
|
Required:
Prepare each of the following budgets for Glide for the year ended 2008:
1. Sales budget
2. Production budget
3. Direct material budget
4. Direct labor budget
5. Factory overhead budget
6. Cost of goods sold budget
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Poole Corporation has collected the following information after its first year of sales. Net sales were $1,600,000 on 100,000 units; selling expenses $240,000 (40% variable and 60% fixed); direct materials $511,000; direct labor $285,000; administrative expenses $280,000 (20% variable and 80% fixed); manufacturing overhead $360,000 (70% variable and 30% fixed).
Top management has asked you to do a CVP analysis so that it can make plans for the coming year. It has projected that unit sales will increase by 10% next year.
Instructions:
a) Compute (1) the contribution margin for the current year and the projected year, and (2) the fixed costs for the current year. (Assume that fixed costs will remain the same in the projected year.)
b) Compute the break-even point in units and sales dollars for the current year.
c) The company has a target net income of $310,000. What is the required sales in dollars for the company to meet its target?
d) If the company meets its target net income number, by what percentage could its sales fall before it is operating at a loss? That is, what is its margin of safety ratio?
e) The company is considering a purchase of equipment that would reduce its direct labor costs by $104,000 and would change its manufacturing overhead costs to 30% variable and 70% fixed (assume total manufacturing overhead cost is $360,000, as above). It is also considering switching to a pure commission basis for its sales staff. This would change selling expenses to 90% variable and 10% fixed (assume total selling expense is $240,000, as above). Assuming that net sales remain at first-year levels, compute (1) the contribution margin and (2) the contribution margin ratio, and recompute (3) the break-even point in sales dollars
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Heath Limited is trying to determine the value of its ending inventory at February 29, 2008, the company’s year end. The accountant counted everything that was in the warehouse as of February 29, which resulted in an ending inventory valuation of $48,000. However, she didn’t know how to treat the following transactions so she didn’t record them.
a. On February 26, Heath shipped to a customer goods costing $800. The goods were shipped FOB shipping point, and the receiving report indicates that the customer received the goods on March 2.
b. On February 26, Seller Inc. shipped goods to Heath FOB destination. The invoice price was $350. The receiving report indicates that the goods were received by Heath on March 2.
c. Heath had $500 of inventory at a customer’s warehouse “on approval.” The customer was going to let Heath know whether it wanted the merchandise by the end of the week, March 4.
d. Heath also had $400 of inventory on consignment at a Jasper craft shop.
e. On February 26, Heath ordered goods costing $750. The goods were shipped FOB shipping point on February 27. Heath received the goods on March 1.
f. On February 29, Heath packaged goods and had them ready for shipping to a customer FOB destination. The invoice price was $350; the cost of the items was $250. The receiving report indicates that the goods were received by the customer on March 2.
g. Heath had damaged goods set aside in the warehouse because they are no longer saleable. These goods originally cost $400 and, originally, Heath expected to sell these items for $600.
Instructions
For each of the above transactions, specify whether the item in question should be included in ending inventory, and if so, at what amount. (If the item should not be included in ending inventory, put 0 for the amount.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Disney Amusement Park, Inc. has a fiscal year ending on September 30. Selected data from the September 30 worksheet are presented below.
Instructions:
(a) Prepare a complete worksheet using trial balance.?(Adjustments Dr. & Cr; Adjusted Trial Balance Dr. & Cr; Income Statement Dr. & Cr; Balance Sheet Dr. & Cr)
(b) Prepare a classified balance sheet. (Note: $10,000 of the mortgage note payable is due for payment in the next fiscal year.) (List assets in order of liquidity and liabilities from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2, with notes first.)
(c) Journalize the adjusting entries using the worksheet as a basis.
(d) Journalize the closing entries using the worksheet as a basis.
(e) Prepare a post-closing trial balance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Analysis of Percentage-of-Completion Financial Statements)
In 2007, Beth Botsford Construction Corp. began construction work under a 3-year contract. The contract price was $1,000,000. Beth Botsford uses the percentage-of-completion method for inancial accounting purposes. The income to be recognized each year is based on the proportion of ost incurred to total estimated costs for completing the contract. The financial statement presentations relating to this contract at December 31, 2007, follow.
Balance Sheet
|
Accounts receivable-construction contract billings
|
21,500
|
|
Construction in progress
|
65,000
|
|
Less: contract billings
|
61,500
|
|
Cost of uncompleted contract in excess of billings
|
3,500
|
|
Income statement
|
|
|
Income (before tax) on the contract recognized in 2007
|
18,200
|
Instructions
(a) How much cash was collected in 2007 on this contract?
(b) What was the initial estimated total income before tax on this contract?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of Percentage-of-Completion Financial Statements
In 2007, Landers Construction Corp. began construction work under a 5-year contract. The contract price was $25,000,000. Landers uses the percentage-of-completion method for financial accounting purposes. The income to be recognized each year is based on the proportion of cost incurred to total estimated costs for completing the contract. The financial statement presentations relating to this contract at December 31, 2007, follow.
Balance Sheet
|
Accounts receivable-construction contract billings
|
150,500
|
|
Construction in progress
|
650,000
|
|
Less: Contract billings
|
260,000
|
|
Cost of uncompleted contract in excess of billings
|
|
|
Income statement
|
|
|
Income (before tax) on the contract recognized in 2007
|
130,000
|
Instructions
(a) How much cash was collected in 2007 on this contract?
(b) What was the initial estimated total income before tax on this contract?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, 2009, the Sato Company adopted the dollars value LIFO method of inventory costing the company ending inventory records appears as follows:
|
Year
|
Current
|
Index cost
|
|
|
2009
|
40,000
|
100
|
|
|
2010
|
56,100
|
120
|
|
|
2011
|
58,500
|
130
|
|
|
2012
|
70,000
|
140
|
|
Required:
Compute the ending inventory for the years 2009, 2010, 2011, and 2012 using the dollar value LIFO methods
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eugene Products Co. produces a latex paint and uses the process cost system. Materials, labor, and overhead are added evenly throughout the process. The following information was obtained from the company’s accounts at the end of February.
Production Costs
Costs Incurred during month:
|
Materials
|
30,000
|
|
Labor
|
20,000
|
|
Factory overhead
|
40,000
|
|
|
90,000
|
|
Production Report
|
Units
|
|
Finished and transferred to stockroom during month
|
56,000
|
|
Work in process, end of period, one-fourth completed
|
16,000
|
Required:
Prepare a cost of production summary for February. (round unit costs to the three decimal places.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost of production summary, two departments; beginning inventory.
Harmon Corporation uses a process cost system. The records for the month of May show the following information:
|
Production Report
|
Cutting
|
Grinding
|
|
Units in process, May 1
|
5,000
|
10,000
|
|
Started during the month
|
20,000
|
–
|
|
Received from prior department
|
–
|
15,000
|
|
Finished and transferred
|
15,000
|
10,000
|
|
Finished and on hand
|
5,000
|
–
|
|
Units in process, May 31
|
5,000
|
15,000
|
|
Stage of completion
|
1/5
|
1/3
|
|
Production Costs
|
|
|
|
Work in process, May 1:
|
|
|
|
Costs in Cutting
|
|
50,000
|
|
Materials
|
5,000
|
|
|
Labor
|
6,450
|
|
|
Factory overhead
|
3,550
|
|
|
Costs in Grinding
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
|
5,000
|
|
Labor
|
|
5,500
|
|
Factory overhead
|
|
3,500
|
|
Costs incurred during the month
|
|
|
Materials
|
37,000
|
40,000
|
|
Labor
|
45,000
|
44,000
|
|
Factory overhead
|
50,000
|
37,000
|
|
Total
|
147,000
|
185,000
|
Required:
Prepare a cost of production summary for each department.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost of production summary, three departments, change in unit cost from prior department, departmental cost work sheet, journal entries, manufacturing statement
Taguchi manufacturing Co. uses the process cost system. The following information for the month of December was obtained from the company’s books and from the production reports submitted by the department heads:
|
Production Report
|
Mixing
|
Blending
|
Bottling
|
|
Units in Process, beginning of period
|
2500
|
1500
|
3000
|
|
Started in process during month
|
12500
|
–
|
–
|
|
Received from prior department
|
–
|
13000
|
10000
|
|
Finished and transferred
|
13000
|
10000
|
11000
|
|
Finished and on hand
|
–
|
500
|
–
|
|
Units in Process, end of period
|
2000
|
4000
|
2000
|
|
Stage of completion
|
1/4
|
4/5
|
½
|
Production Costs
Works in process, beginning of period
Works in process, beginning of period
|
Cost in Mixing
|
|
3075
|
6150
|
|
Materials
|
1470
|
|
|
|
Labor
|
650
|
|
|
|
Factory Overhead
|
565
|
|
|
|
Cost in Blending
|
|
|
3660
|
|
Materials
|
|
240
|
|
|
Labor
|
|
905
|
|
|
Factory Oberhead
|
|
750
|
|
|
Cost in Bottling
|
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
|
|
900
|
|
Labor
|
|
|
3100
|
|
Factory Overhead
|
|
|
3080
|
|
Costs incurred during the month
|
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
15000
|
2500
|
1500
|
|
Labor
|
4750
|
8000
|
6500
|
|
Factory Overhead
|
5240
|
6100
|
7000
|
|
Total
|
27675
|
21570
|
31890
|
Required:
1. Prepare cost of production summaries for the Mixing, Blending, and Bottling departments
2. Prepare a departmental cost work sheet
3. Draft the journal entries required to record the month’s operations
4. Prepare a statement of cost of goods manufactures for December.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Discuss the differentiation between product versus general, selling, and administrative cost by setting up financial statements from the transactions.
The following transactions pertain to 2012, the first year of operations of Hall Company. All inventory was started and completed during 2012. Assume all transactions are cash transactions.
1. Acquired $4,000 cash by issuing common stock
2. Paid $720 for materials used to produce inventory.
3. Paid $1,800 to production workers
4. Paid $540 rental fee for production equipment
5. Paid $180 administrative employees.
6. Paid $144 rental fee for administrative office equipment
7. Produced 300 units of inventory of which 200 were sold at 12 each.
Required
Prepare an income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Post audit evaluation
Ernest Jones is reviewing his company’s investments in a cement plant. The company paid $15,000,000 five years ago to acquire the plant. Now top management is considering an opportunity to sell it. The president wants to know whether the plant has met original expectations before he decides its fate. The company’s discounts rate for present value computations is 8 percent. Expected and actual cash flow as follows:
|
|
Year 1
|
Year 2
|
|
Expected
|
3,30,000
|
4,920,000
|
|
Actual
|
2,700,000
|
3,060,000
|
Required:
A. Compute the net present value of the expected cash flows as of the beginning of the investment
B. Compute the net present value of the actual cash flows as of the beginning of the investment
C. What do you conclude from this post audit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Return on Investment
Soto Corporation ‘s balance sheet indicates that the company has $300,000 invested in operating assets. During 20111, Soto earned operating income of $45,000 on $600,000 of sales.
Required:
A.Compute Soto’s profit margin for 2011
B.Compute Soto’s turnover for 2011
C.Compute Soto’s return on investment for 2011
D.Recompute Soto’s ROI under each of the following independent assumptions.
(1) Sales increase from $600,000 to $750,000, thereby resulting in an increase in operating income from $45,000 to $60,000.
(2) Sales remain constant, but reduces expenses resulting in an increase in operating income from $45,000 to $48,000.
(3) Soto is able to reduce its invested capital from $300,000 to $240,000 without affecting operating income.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Product versus general, selling, and administrative costs
The following transactions pertain to 2009, the first year operations of Lepper Company. All inventory was started and completed during 2009. Assume that all transactions are cash transactions.
1. Acquired $2,360 cash by issuing common stock.
2. Paid $720 for materials used to produce inventory.
3. Paid $1,800 to production workers.
4. Paid $540 rental fee for production equipment.
5. Paid $180 to administrative employees.
6. Paid $144 rental fee for administrative office equipment.
7. Produced 300 units of inventory of which 200 units were sold at a price of $12 each
Required
Prepare an income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mazzel Company began operations on January 1, 2008, by issuing common stock for $33,000 cash. During 2008, Mazzel received $39,000 cash from revenue and incurred costs that required $66,000 of cash payments.
Required:
Prepare an income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for Mazzel for 2008, under each of the following independent scenarios.
a. Mazzel is a promoter of rock concerts. The $66,000 was paid to provide a rock concert that produced the revenue.
b. Mazzel is in the car rental business. The $66,000 was paid to purchase automobiles. The automobiles were purchased on January 1, 2008, had four-year useful lives and no expected salvage value. Mazzel uses straight-line depreciation. The revenue was generated by leasing the automobiles.
c. Mazzel is a manufacturing company. The $66,000 was paid to purchase the following items.
d. Refer to Requirement C. Could Mazzel determine the actual cost of making the 500th units of product? How likely is it that the actual costs of the 500th unit of product was exactly the same cost as the cost of producing the 501st units of product? Explain why management would be more interested in average cost than in actual cost.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost allocation in a manufacturing company
Spring Manufacturing Company makes tents that it sells directly to camping enthusiasts through a mail-order marketing program. The company pays a quality control expert $108,000 per year to inspect completed tents before they are shipped to customers. Assume that the company completed 1,600 tents in January and 1,200 tents in February. For the entire year, the company expects to produce 15,000 tents.
Required:
a. Explain how changes in the cost driver (number of tents inspected) affect the total amount of fixed inspection cost.
b. Explain how changes in the cost driver(number of tent inspected) affect the amount of fixed inspection cost per unit.
c. If the cost objective is to determine the cost per tent, is the expert’s salary a direct or an indirect cost?
d. How much of the expert’s salary should be allocated to tents produced in January and February
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing pro forma income statements with different assumptions
Top executive officers of Leach Company, a merchandising firm, are preparing the next year’s budget. The controller has provided everyone with the current year’s projected income statement.
|
|
Current Year
|
|
Sales revenue
|
2,600,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,690,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
910,000
|
|
Selling and admin expenses
|
325,000
|
|
Net income
|
$585,000
|
Cost of goods sold is usually 65 percent of sales revenue, and selling and administrative expenses, are usually 10 percent of sales plus a fixed cost of $65,000. The president has announced that the company’s goal is to increase net income by 15 percent.
Required:
The following items are independent of each other.
a. What percentage increase in sales would enable the company to reach its goal? Support your answer with a pro forma income statement.
b. The market may become stagnant next year, and the company does not expect an increase in sales revenue. The production manager believes that an improved production procedure can cut costs of goods sold by 2 percent. What else can the company do to reach its goal? Prepare a pro forma income statement illustrating your proposal.
c. The company decides to escalate its advertising campaign to boost consumer recognition, which will increase selling and administrative expenses to $405,000. With the increased advertising, the company expects sales revenue to increase by 15 percent. Assume that cost of goods sold remains a constant proportion of sales. Can the company reach its goal?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using Present Value Techniques to Evaluate Alternative Investment Opportunities
ADK Delivery is a small company that transports business packages between San Francisco and Los Angeles. It operates a fleet of small vans that moves packages to and from a central depot within each city and uses a common carrier to deliver the packages between the depots in the two cities. ADK recently acquired approximately 3 million of cash capital from its owners and its president , Frank Hobb is trying to identify the most profitable way to invest these funds. Travis Lard, the company’s operations manager, believes that the money should be used to expand the fleet of city vans at a cost of 540,000. He argues that more vans would enable the company to expand its services into new markets, thereby increasing the revenue base. More specifically, he expects cash inflows to increase by 210,000 per year. The additional vans are expected to have an average useful life of four years and a combined salvage value of 75000. Operating the vans will require additional working capital of 30,000, which will be recovered at the end of the fourth year.
In contrast, Katy Osmond, the company’s chief accountant, believes that the funds should be used to purchase large trucks to deliver the packages between the depots in the two cities. The conversion process would produce continuing improvement in operating savings with reductions in cash outflows as the following:
Year 1: 120,000; year 2: 240,000: year 3: 300,000: year 4: 330,000
The large trucks are expected to cost 600,000 and to have a four year useful life and a 60,000 salvage value. In addition to the purchase price of the trucks, up front training costs are expected to amount to 12000. ADK delivery’s management has established a 16 percent desired rate of return.
Required:
a.) Determine the net present value of the two investment alternatives.
b.) Calculate the present value index for each alternative.
c.) Indicate which investment alternative you would recommend. Explain your choice.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the payback period and unadjusted rate of return to evaluate alternative investment opportunities
Quentin Giordano owns a small retail ice cream parlor. He is considering expanding the business and has identified two attractive alternatives.
One involves purchasing a machine that would enable Mr. Giordano to offer frozen yogurt to customers. The maching would cost $4,050 and has an expected usfeul life of three years with no salvage value. Additional annual cash revenues and cash operating expenses associated with selling yogurt are expected to be $2,970 and $450, respectively.
Alternatively, Mr Giordano could purchase for $5,040 the equipment necessary to serve cappuccino. That equipment has an expected useful life of four years and no salvage value. Additional annual cash revenues and cash operating expenses associated with selling cappuccino are expected to be $4,140 and $1,215, respectively. Income before taxes earned by the ice cream parlor is taxed at an effective rate of 20 percent.
Required:
a. Determine the payback period and unadjusted rate of return (use average investment) for each alternative.
b. Indicate which investment alternative you would recommend. Explain your choice.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining sales and variable cost volume variances
Holligan Publications established the following standard price and costs for a hardcover picture book that the company produces.
|
Standard price and variable costs:
|
|
|
Sales price
|
$37.00
|
|
Materials
|
$8.70
|
|
Labor
|
$4.30
|
|
Overhead
|
$6.10
|
|
General, selling and administrative
|
$6.50
|
|
Planned fixed costs:
|
|
|
Manufacturing
|
128,000
|
|
General, selling and administrative
|
49,000
|
Holligan planned to make and sell 30,000 copies of the book.
Required:
a. Prepare the pro forma income statement that would appear in the master budget.
b. Prepare the flexible budget income statements, assuming volumes of 29,000 and 31,000 units.
c. Determine the sales and variable cost volume variances, assuming volume is actually 31,000 units.
d. Indicate whether the variances are favorable (F) or unfavorable (U).
e. Comment on how Holligan could use the variances to evaluate performance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pedro Morales and Associates, a C.P.A. firm, uses job order costing to capture the costs of its audit jobs. There were no audit jobs in process at the beginning of November. Listed below are data concerning the three audit jobs conducted during November.
|
|
Gonzalez
|
Navarro
|
Rojas
|
|
Direct materials
|
600
|
400
|
200
|
|
Auditor labor costs
|
5,400
|
6,600
|
3,375
|
|
Auditor hours
|
72
|
88
|
45
|
Overhead costs are applied to jobs on the basis of auditor hours, and the predetermined overhead rate is $55 per auditor hour.
The Gonzalez job is the only incomplete job at the end of November. Actual overhead for the month was $12,000.
Instructions:
a. Determine the cost of each job.
b. Indicate the balance of the Work in Process account at the end of November.
c. Calculate the ending balance of the Manufacturing Overhead account for November.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Equity method
Northwest Paperboard Company , a paper and allied products manufacturer, was seeking to gain a foothold in Canada. Toward that end, the company bought 40% of the outstanding common shares of Vancouver Timber and Milling, Inc., on January 2, 2011, for $400 million. At the date of purchase, the book value of Vancouver’s net assets was $775 million. The book values and fair values for all balance sheet items were the same except for inventory and plant facilities. The fair value exceeded book value by $5 million for the inventory and by $20 million for the plant facilities. The estimated useful life of the plant facilities is 16 years. All inventory acquired was sold during 2011.Vancouver reported net income of $140 million for the year ended December 31, 2011. Vancouver paid a cash dividend of $30 million.
Required:
1. Prepare all appropriate journal entries related to the investment during 2011.
2. What amount should Northwest report as its income from its investment in Vancouver for the year ended December 31, 2011?
3. What amount should Northwest report in its balance sheet as its investment in Vancouver?
4.What should Northwest report in its statement of cash flows regarding its investment in Vancouver?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Garza Company expects to have a cash balance of $46,000 on January 1, 2010. Relevant monthly budget data for the first 2 months of 2010 are as follows. Collections from customers: January $85,000, February $150,000. Payments for direct materials: January $50,000, February $70,000.
Direct labor: January $30,000, February $45,000. Wages are paid in the month they are incurred. Manufacturing overhead: January $21,000, February $25,000. These costs include depreciation of $1,000 per month. All other overhead costs are paid as incurred. Selling and administrative expenses: January $15,000, February $20,000. These costs are exclusive of depreciation. They are paid as incurred. Sales of marketable securities in January are expected to realize $10,000 in cash. Garza Company has a line of credit at a local bank that enables it to borrow up to $25,000. The company wants to maintain a minimum monthly cash balance of $20,000.
Instructions
Complete the cash budget for January and February. (List amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2. If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Digital Tunes Inc. is in the business of developing, promoting, and selling musical talent on compact disc (CD). The company signed a new group, called Smashing Britney, on January 1, 2010. For the first six months of 2010, the company spent $4,000,000 on a media campaign for Smashing Britney and $1,200,000 in legal costs. The CD production began on February 1, 2010.
Digital Tunes uses a job order cost system to accumulate costs associated with a CD title. The unit direct materials cost for the CD is:
Blank CD $1.80
Jewel Case $0.60
Song lyric insert $0.60
The production process is straightforward. First, the blank CDs are brought to a production area where the digital soundtrack is copied onto the CD. The copying machine requires one hour per 2,400 CDs. After the CDs are copied, they are brought to an assembly area where an employee packs the CD with a jewel case and song lyric insert. The direct labor cost is $0.25 per unit. The CDs are sold to record stores. Each record store is given promotional materials, such as posters and aisle displays. Promotional materials cost $40 per record store. In addition, shipping costs average $0.25 per CD.
Total completed production was 1,000,000 units during the year. Other information is as follows:
Number of customers (record stores) 42,500
Number of CDs sold 850,000
Wholesaler price (to record store) per CD $16
Factory overhead cost is applied to jobs at the rate of $1,200 per copy machine hour. There were an additional 25,000 copied CDs, packages, and inserts waiting to be assembled on December 31, 2010.
Instructions:
1. Prepare an annual income statement for the Smashing Britney CD, including supporting calculations. Enter all amounts as positive numbers.
2. Determine the balances in the work in process and finished goods inventory for the Smashing Britney CD on December 31, 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An analysis of the accounts of Chamberlin Manufacturing reveals the following manufacturing cost data for the month ended June 30, 2008.
|
Inventories
|
Beginning
|
Ending
|
|
Raw materials
|
9,000
|
13,100
|
|
Work in process
|
5,000
|
7,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
9,000
|
6,000
|
Costs incurred: Raw materials purchases $54,000, direct labor $57,000, manufacturing overhead $19,900.
The specific overhead costs were: indirect labor $5,500, factory insurance $4,000, machinery depreciation $4,000, machinery repairs $1,800, factory utilities $3,100, miscellaneous factory costs $1,500. Assume that all raw materials used were direct materials.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the cost of goods manufactured schedule for the month ended June 30, 2008.
(b) Show the presentation of the ending inventories on the June 30, 2008, balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bjerg Company specializes in manufacturing a unique model of bicycle helmet. The model is well accepted by consumers, and the company has enough orders to keep the factory production at 10,000 helmets per month (80% of its full capacity). Bjerg’s monthly manufacturing cost and other expense data are as follows.
|
Rent on factory equipment
|
7,000
|
|
Insurance on factory building
|
1,500
|
|
Raw materials (plastics, polystyrene, etc.)
|
75,000
|
|
Utility costs for factory
|
900
|
|
Supplies for general office
|
300
|
|
Wages for assembly line workers
|
43,000
|
|
Depreciation on office equipment
|
800
|
|
Miscellaneous materials (glue, thread, etc.)
|
1,100
|
|
Factory manager’s salary
|
5,700
|
|
Property taxes on factory building
|
400
|
|
Advertising for helmets
|
14,000
|
|
Sales commissions
|
7,000
|
|
Depreciation on factory building
|
1,500
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare an answer sheet with the following column headings. Enter each cost item on your answer sheet, placing the dollar amount under the appropriate headings. Total the dollar amounts in each of the columns.
(b) Compute the cost to produce one helmet
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Utech Company bottles and distributes Livit, a diet soft drink. The beverage is sold for 50 cents per 16-ounce bottle to retailers, who charge customers 75 cents per bottle. For the year 2010, management estimates the following revenues and costs.
|
Net sales
|
1,800,000
|
Selling expenses-variable
|
70,000
|
|
Direct materials
|
430,000
|
Selling expenses-fixed
|
65,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
352,000
|
Administrative expenses-variable
|
20,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead-variable
|
316,000
|
Administrative expenses-fixed
|
60,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead-fixed
|
283,000
|
|
|
Instructions:
a) Prepare a CVP income statement for 2008 based on management’s estimates.
b) Compute the break-even point in (1) units and (2) dollars.
c) Compute the contribution margin ratio and the margin of safety ratio.
d) Determine the sales dollars required to earn net income of $238,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The bookkeeper for Biggio Corporation made these errors in journalizing and posting.
1. A credit posting of $400 to Accounts Receivable was omitted.
2. A debit posting of $750 for Prepaid Insurance was debited to Insurance Expense.
3. A collection on account of $100 was journalized and posted as a debit to Cash $100 and a credit to Accounts Payable $100.
4. A credit posting of $300 to Property Taxes Payable was made twice.
5. A cash purchase of supplies for $250 was journalized and posted as a debit to Supplies $25 and a credit to Cash $25.
6. A debit of $395 to Advertising Expense was posted as $359.
For each error, indicate (a) whether the trial balance will balance; if the trial balance will not balance, indicate (b) the amount of the difference, and (c) the trial balance column that will have the larger total. Consider each error separately. Use the following form, in which error 1 is given as an example.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On April1 Flint Hills Travel Agency Inc. was established. These transactions were completed during the month.
Analyze transactions and compute net income.
1. Stockholders invested $25,000 cash in the company in exchange for common stock.
2. Paid $900 cash for April office rent.
3. Purchased office equipment for $2,800 cash.
4. Purchased $200 of advertising in the Chicago Tribune, on account.
5. Paid $500 cash for office supplies.
6. Earned $10,000 for services provided: Cash of $1,000 is received from customers, and the balance of $9,000 is billed to customers on account.
7. Paid $400 cash dividends.
8. Paid Chicago Tribune amount due in transaction (4).
9. Paid employees’ salaries $1,200.
10. Received $9,000 in cash from customers billed previously in transaction (6).
Instructions:
(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions using these column headings: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Office Equipment, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, and Retained Earnings (with separate columns for Revenues, Expenses, and Dividends). Include margin explanations for any changes in Retained Earnings.
(b) From an analysis of the Retained Earnings columns, compute the net income or net loss for April.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following control procedures are used in Falk Company for over-the-counter cash receipts.
1. Cashiers are experienced; thus, they are not bonded.
2. All over-the-counter receipts are registered by three clerks who share a cash register with a single cash drawer.
3. To minimize the risk of robbery, cash in excess of $100 is stored in an unlocked attaché case in the stock room until it is deposited in the bank.
4. At the end of each day the total receipts are counted by the cashier on duty and reconciled to the cash register total.
5. The company accountant makes the bank deposit and then records the day’s receipts.
Instructions
a. For each procedure, explain the weakness in internal control and identify the control principle that is violated.
b. For each weakness, suggest a change in the procedure that will result in good internal control.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On July 31, 2010, Fenton Company had a cash balance per books of $6,140. The statement from Jackson State Bank on that date showed a balance of $7,695.80. A comparison of the bank statement with the cash account revealed the following facts.
1. The bank service charge for July was $25.
2. The bank collected a note receivable of $1,500 for Fenton Company on July 15, plus $30 of interest. The bank made a $10 charge for the collection. Fenton has not accrued any interest on the note.
3. The July 31 receipts of $1,193.30 were not included in the bank deposits for July. These receipts were deposited by the company in a night deposit vault on July 31.
4. Company check No. 2480 issued to H. Coby, a creditor, for $384 that cleared the bank in July was incorrectly entered in the cash payments journal on July 10 for $348.
5. Checks outstanding on July 31 totaled $1,980.10.
6. On July 31 the bank statement showed an NSF charge of $690 for a check received by the company from P. Figura, a customer, on account.
Instructions
a. Prepare the bank reconciliation as of July 31.
b. Prepare the necessary adjusting entries at July 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On June 1 Eckersley Service Co. was started with an initial investment in the company of $26,200 cash. Here are the assets and liabilities of the company at June 30, and the revenues and expenses for the month of June, its first month of operations:
|
Cash
|
4,660
|
Notes payable
|
12,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
4,000
|
Accounts payable
|
500
|
|
Revenue
|
7,000
|
Supplies expense
|
1,000
|
|
Supplies
|
2,400
|
Gas and oil expense
|
600
|
|
Advertising expense
|
400
|
Utilities expense
|
300
|
|
Equipment
|
29,000
|
Wage expense
|
1,400
|
In June, the company issued no additional stock, but paid dividends of $2,000.
Instructions
(a) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the month of June and a balance sheet at June 30, 2010.
(b) Briefly discuss whether the company’s first month of operations was a success.
(c) Discuss the company’s decision to distribute a dividend.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determine the price of a $1 million bond issue under each of the following independent assumptions:
|
|
Maturity
|
Interest Paid
|
Stated Rate
|
Effective (Market) Rate
|
|
1
|
10 years
|
annually
|
10%
|
12%
|
|
2
|
10 years
|
semianually
|
10%
|
12%
|
|
3
|
10 years
|
semianually
|
12%
|
10%
|
|
4
|
20 years
|
semianually
|
12%
|
10%
|
|
5
|
20 years
|
semianually
|
12%
|
12%
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Decker Company has five products in its inventory. Information about the December 31, 2011, inventory follows.
|
Product
|
Quantity
|
Unit Cost
|
Unit Replacement Cost
|
Unit Selling price
|
|
A
|
1,000
|
10
|
12
|
16
|
|
B
|
800
|
15
|
11
|
18
|
|
c
|
600
|
3
|
2
|
8
|
|
D
|
200
|
7
|
4
|
6
|
|
E
|
600
|
14
|
12
|
13
|
The selling cost for each product consists of a 15 percent sales commission. The normal profit percentage for each product is 40 percent of the selling price.
Required:
1. Determine the balance sheet inventory carrying value at December 31, 2011, assuming the LCM rule is applied to individual products.
2. Determine the balance sheet inventory carrying value at December 31, 2011, assuming the LCM rule is applied to the entire inventory. Also, assuming that Decker recognizes an inventory write-down as a separate income statement item, determine the amount of the loss.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job Order Costing: T Account Analysis
Par Carts, Inc., produces special-order golf carts, so Par Carts uses a job order costing system. Overhead is applied at the rate of 90 percent of direct labor cost. The following is a list of transactions for January:
Jan 1. Purchased direct materials on account, $215,400.
Jan 2. Purchased indirect materials on account, $49,500.
Jan 4. Requested direct materials costing $193,200 (all used on Job X) and indirect materials costing $38,100 for production.
Jan 10. Paid the following overhead costs: utilities $4,400; manufacturing rent $3,800; and maintenance charges, $3,900.
Jan 15. Recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees: direct labor, $120,000 (all for Job X); indirect labor $60,620.
Jan 15. Applied overhead to production.
Jan 19. Purchased indirect materials costing $27,550 and direct materials costing $190,450 on account.
Jan 21. Requested direct materials costing $214,750 (Job X $178,170; Job Y $18,170 and Job Z $18,410) and indirect materials costing $31,400 for production.
Jan 31. Recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees: direct labor $132,000 (Job X $118,500; Job Y $7,000; Job Z $6,500); indirect labor $62,240. Jan 31. Applied overhead to production.
Jan 31. Completed and transferred Job X (375 carts) and Job Y (10 carts) to finished goods inventory; total costs was $855,900.
Jan 31. Shipped Job X to the customer, total production cost was $824,520 and sales price was $996,800.
Jan 31. Recorded these overhead costs (adjusting entries); prepaid insurance expired $3,700; property taxes (payable at year end) $3,400 and depreciation-machinery $15,500.
Required:
1. Record the entries for all transactions in January using T accounts below. Enter the transactions in chronological order. Assume no beginning inventory balances. Use job order cost cards for Job X, Job Y, and Job Z to determine the following costs. If required, round the total costs to the nearest dollar. When computing the product unit cost for Job X and Job Y, round to two decimal places. Also assume that when the payroll was recorded, entries were made to the Payroll Payable account.
2. Compute the amount of underapplied or overapplied overhead as of January 31 and transfer it to the Cost of Goods Sold account. (Use rounded amounts in your computation.)
3. Why should the Overhead account’s underapplied or overapplied overhead be transferred to the Cost of Goods Sold account?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At December 31, 2011, Ethan Company reports the following results for it’s calendar year.
|
Cash Sales
|
1,803,750
|
|
Credit Sales
|
3,534,000
|
In addition, its unadjusted trial balance includes the following items.
|
Accounts receivable (debit)
|
1,070,100
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts (debit)
|
15,750
|
Requirements:
1. Prepare the adjusting entry for this company to recognize bad debts under each of the following independent assumptions
a. Bad debts are estimated to be 2% of credit sales
b. Bad debts are estimated to be 1% of total sales
c. An aging analysis estimates that 5% of year end accounts receivable are uncollectible.
2. Show how accounts receivable and the allowance for doubtful accounts appear on its’ December 31, 2011, balance sheet given the facts in part 1a
3. Show how accounts receivable and the allowance for doubtful accounts appear on its December 31, 2011, balance sheet given the facts in part 1c
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Atlas Co. allows select customers to make purchases on credit. It’s other customers can use either of two credit cards: Zisa or Access. Zisa deducts a 3% service charge for sales on its credit card and credits the bank account of Atlas immediately when credit card receipts are deposited. Atlas deposits the Zisa credit card receipts each business day. When customers use Access credit cards. Atlas accumulates the receipts for several days before submitting them to Access for payment. Access deducts a 2% service charge and usually pays within one week of being billed. Atlas completes the following transactions in June. (the terms of all credit sales are 2/15, n/30, and all sales are recorded at the gross price.)
June 4. Sold $750 of merchandise (that had cost $500) on credit to Anne Cianci.
June 5 Sold $5,900 of merchandise (that had cost $3,200) to customers who used their Zisa cards.
June 6 Sold $4,800 of merchandise (that had cost $2,800) to customers who used their Access cards.
June 8 Sold $3,200 of merchandise (that had cost $1,900) to customers who used their Access cards.
June 10 Submitted Access card receipts accumulated since June 6 to credit card company for payment.
June 13 Wrote off the account of Nakia Well against the allowance for Doubtful Accounts. The $329 balance in Well’s account stemmed from a credit sale in October of last year.
June 17 Received the amount due from Access.
June 18 Received Cianci’s check in full payment for the purchase of June 4.
Required:
Prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions and events. (the company uses the perpetual inventory system. round amounts to the nearest dollar).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Walters Audio Visual, Inc., offers a stock option plan to its regional managers. On January 1, 2011, options were granted for 40 million $1 par common shares. The exercise price is the market price on the grant date, $8 per share. Options cannot be exercised prior to January 1, 2013, and expire December 31, 2017. The fair value of the options, estimated by an appropriate option pricing model, is $2 per option. Because the plan does not qualify as an incentive plan, Walters will receive a tax deduction upon exercise of the options equal to the excess of the market price at exercise over the exercise price. The income tax rate is 40%.
Required:
1. Determine the total compensation cost pertaining to the stock option plan.
2. Prepare the appropriate journal entries to record compensation expense and its tax effect on December 31, 2011.
3. Prepare the appropriate journal entries to record compensation expense and its tax effect on December 31, 2012.
4. Record the exercise of the options and their tax effect if all of the options are exercised on March 20, 2016, when the market price is $12 per share.
5. Assume the option plan qualifies as an incentive plan. Prepare the appropriate journal entries to record compensation expense and its tax effect on December 31, 2011.
6. Assuming the option plan qualifies as an incentive plan, record the exercise of the options and their tax effect if all of the options are exercised on March 20, 2016, when the market price is $11 per share.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Panada Manufacturing (PM) is a division of Worldwide Communications, Inc. PM produces pagers and other personal communication devices. These devices are sold to other Worldwide divisions, as well as to other communication companies. PM was recently approached by the manager of the Personal Communications Division regarding a request to make a special pager designed to receive signals from anywhere in the world. The Personal Communications Division has requested that PM produce 10,000 units of this special pager. The following facts are available regarding the Panda Manufacturing Division:
Selling price of standard pager 95
Variable cost of standard pager 50
Additional variable cost of special pager 35
Instructions
For each of the following independent situations, calculate the minimum transfer price, and discuss whether the internal transfer should take place or whether the Personal Communications Division should purchase the pager externally. Show your work.
(a) The Personal Communications Division has offered to pay the PM Division $105 per pager. The PM Division has no available capacity. The PM Division would have to forego sales of 10,000 pagers to existing customers in order to meet the request of the Personal Communications Division.
(b) The Personal Communications Division has offered to pay the PM Division $160 per pager. The PM Division has no available capacity. The PM Division would have to forego sales of 14,000 pagers to existing customers in order to meet the request of the Personal Communications Division.
(c) The Personal Communications Division has offered to pay the PM Division $105 per pager. The PM Division has available capacity.